aass TG4-/0 ? Book ■ T76^ \%ajS' A GRA3I31AR OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE, PRACTICAL EXERCISES. Eiit iFCrst Jlart CoDtainiag' a List of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in "writing and books : A Treatise on Pronunciation and Alterations in Orthography, founded upon the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid T Com- parative Rules of the Spanish and English Languages ; A general Scheme of the Terminations of Regular Verbs ; An alphabetical List of the IrregulcLT Verbs, conjugated in their order ■<, A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish ; Lists of the Names of difierent Goun^es, principal Cities and Christian Names. Eixt Srcontr Jtert Containing a Collection of Exercises interlined ; a Vocabulary •, Familial Phrases and Dialogues 5 and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. TOSSE. Second American from the latest Paris Editio::^. REVISED, IMPROVED, AND ADAPTED TO THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. BY F. SALES, Instructer of French and Spanish at Harcard University Camibridgt. PEU DE PRECEPTES, EX BEAVCOUP DE PRATIQUE. FIRST PART. boston; muinroe and francis, 128 washington-street, CORKER OF WATER-STREET. 1825. DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : District ClerFs Office. BE it remembered, that on the twenty-seventh day of January, A. D. 1825, and in the forty-ninth year of the Independence of the United States of America, MUNROE AND FRANCIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the words following, to Tvit : " A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE, with Practical EXERCISES. The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in writing 5 A Treatise on pronunciation and alterations in Orthography founded upon the latest rules established by the Academy of Madrid •, Comparative rules of the Spanish and English Languages ; A general scheme of the terminations of R*^gular Verbs j An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conjugated in their order 5 A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish 5 Lists of the names of differ- ent Countries, principal Cities, and Christian Names. The Second Part containing a Collection of Exercises interlined ; A Vocabulary ', Familiar Phrases and Dia- logues ', and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri- can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, improved, and adapted to the English Language, by F. SALES, Instructer of French and Spanish at Harvard University, Cambridge." in conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein men- tioned:" and also to an act, entitled, "An act supplementary to an act, entitled an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned j and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etching, historical and other prints." JOHN W. DAVIS, CkrJc of the District of MasmchusttU' TO THE LOVERS OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA^ TKIS SECOND EDITION, greatly improved and enlarged^ OF Soss^'is Grammar, IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, BY THEIR OBEDIENT SERVANT, THE EDITOR. HOTXdS. Grateful for the approbation that our labours have met with in the rapid diffusion of a large edition of this Grammar, and encouraged b3Mhe favourable judgment passed on the theoretical and practical method observed in this /elementary work, by the most distinguished philologists and eminent scholars in our country ; we now present to the American nation a second edition carefully revised, considerably alter- ed, and improved throughout ; particularly in the arrange- ment of the Conjugation of the irregularVerbs ; in giving the English signification of the Table ot* Prepositions published by the Royal Academy ; in prefixing an Article to every word in the Vocabulary to denote its gender ; and in assim- ilating as far as possible the English phraseology to the Spanish, in the Familiar Phrases and Dialogues. We have enlarged this new edition by the addition of in- teresting Extracts from some of the best Spanish Writers ; with specimens of critical, familiar, and commercial Letters ; Mercantile Documents ; a Treatise on Spanish Versification, translated from the latest Paris edition of Josse's Grammar, and a copious Table of Contents ; the whole corrected in conformity to the most recent decisions on orthography of the Spanish Academy. Our earnest purpose having been to render this publication extensively useful and acceptable to all classes and ages of learners, the public may rest assured that no pains have been spared to attain so desirable an object. Boston. May, 1825, ADVERTISEMENT V TO THE FIRST EDITION. From the first appearance in this metropolis of Jossers Grammar, a desire has been entertained of adapting it to the English language ; but the little encouragement hitherto promised, in the United States, to an undertaking of this kind, has delayed its execution. This system however has been used, and recommended to such learners of the Spanish Language as were well acquaint- ed with the French, and we have always had the satisfaction to find them well pleased with it, commonly expressing their regret, that it had not yet been adapted to the English lan- guage. The recognition of the North and South American Sov- ereignties by our Government, has determined us to make the attempt. This glorious act on the part of our nation opens such a boundless field for scientific, political and com- mercial advantages to the rising generation, that we could not deny ourselves the gratification of aiding the generous pur- pose by presenting a key^ which will, it is hoped, open an easy way to the attainment of knowledge, honours, and wealth. The English and Spanish Grammars, which we have hitherto used, are so irregular and incorrect, that it has re- quired the utmost patience and perseverance of both teach- er and pupil to wade through them. To this should be add- ed the enormous price at which they are imported and sold, tending to prevent many a studious youth from acquiring a language, not only noble and beautiful, but spoken in so many regions of the earth, that the benign rays of the star of day are perennially smiling upon and fertilizing some one of them. This work of adaptation and improvement has been com- menced and firrshpd, at different intervals, in the course of the last seas nr regular occupations would peimit. We bave cb - to perform our task faithfully ; should b ADVERTISEMENT. our labour meet with approbation, we shall be rewarded ; should a contrary fate await it, we shall console ourselves with the reflection that our motive was good. In the mean time, it is requested that all defects which shall be discovered be made known, and any improvements suggested which may occur ; so that this grammar in future editions may be ren- dered as perfect as possible. We have thought proper, i'n order to render this work complete, and save an additional expense, to insert the Vo- cabulary and Dialogues of Fernandez at the end of the sec- ond part, altering the orthography according to the latest rules of the Spanish Academy, The object of collections of this kind is to teach the most usual words and phrases in familiar conversations ; a sure method, after passing carefully through the Grammar and Exercises, of learning to speak a foreign language with propriety. TRANSLATION OF THE PREFACE TO THE PARIS EDTTIO.X OF 1318. The Spanish GrammarSj heretofore published for die French people^ do not seem to have attained the end intended by their authors. Several of these productions have become in some manner obsolete, since the Royal Academy has given clear and precise rules for the Castillian Language, which are at present generally adopted. The more modern grammars, on the contrary, seem to be nothing more than the transla- tion of the Grammar of the Spanish Academy. In compos- ing them it has been too much forgotten that they are inten- ded for the use of Frenchmen. A grammar published in London in 1799 by Josse, Mas- ter of Languages, reprinted in the same city in lS04and 1810, is distant alike from both these extremes, and has ap- peared to us to unite method with clearness in the exposition of the principles and rules compared w^ith the French lan- guage. The author has enriched his work with a selection of mterhned Exercises accompanied with notes and references to the principal rules, which may enable beginners, from the outset, to join practice to the study of precepts ; a method of rendering the student familiar with the construction and difii- cukies of a foreign language whose utility has been fully demonstrated. This advantage alone mu>t ensure to the Grammar of Josse a preference over those which have pre- ceded it. Such is the Grammar now offered to the public. By ex- tending the knowledge of it in France, we deserve the grati- tude of the lovers of the Spanish Language, the copiousness, elegance and grandeur of which are too generally acknowl- edged, to make it necessary for us to demonstrate its superior^ ity over the greater part of European Languages. 8 ABBREVIATIONS. We observe however that, while we have conformed to the plan of the author, and have adopted his work, we have made numerous corrections, suppressed useless repetitions, and made important additions on the subject of Participles, Prepositions, the Accent, &c. A few rules which had been omitted have been supplied, others have been mod- ified, and several parts have been elucidated. Finally, the style has been carefully revised, and often rendered more concise. ^ G. HAMONIERE. COMMON SPANISH ABBREVIATIONS. A. C. A no Cristiano, in the year of Christ. A. a.s Arroba, or arrobas, twenty-Jive pounds. As. Anos years. A. A. Autores, authors. A. V. E. A' V.ra Es.^ia, to Y. E. Adm.o^ Administrador, administrator. Ag.to Agosto, August. Am. Amigo, friend. An.to Antonio, Jinthony, Ang.o Angosto, narrow. App.coApp. ^a Apostolico, ca, apostolical. Art. Articulo article. Arzbpo. Arzobispo, archbishop. At.o Atento, respectful. B. Beato, blessed. b. (in quoting) Vuelta, turn over. Bj Bachiller, bachelor. B.L.M. Beso 6 besa las manos, I kiss or he kisses the hands, [fo^l* B. L. P. Beso 6 besa los pies. I kiss or he kisses the g mo p e Beatisimo Padre, ntost blessed father. C. A. R. Cat.« Ap CO Rom.o Cath. A post. Rom. C. M. B. Cuyas manos beso, whose hands 1 kiss. ABBREVIATIONS. \ C. p. B. Ciiyos pies beso, lohosefeet I kiss. Cam.a Camara, ch^nnher. Cap. Capitulo, chapter. Cap-" Capitan, captain. Capp." Capellan, chaplain. Col. Columna, column. Comis. Comisario, commissary. Comp.» Compania, company. Cons.o Consejoj council. Conv.te Conveniente, convenient. Corr.t^ Corriente^ current. O Cuando, when. C.t« C.ta Cuanto, ta. how much. D. or D n or D aDon, Dona, mister^ mistress. D. D. Doctores^ doctors. D.^ or D.or Doctor^ doctor. D.« Dios, God, D> dha. Dicho, dicha. saidy ditto. Dro. DerechOj right or didy. DicJ^ lO.re Diciembre, December, Dom.o Domingo, Sunday, Ecc.« Ecc.a E'clesiastico, ecclesiastic* Enm.imar is the art of speaking and writing correctly. Speaking correctly is to speak according to established rules, as regards both the pronunciation of letters, syllables and words, and the arrangement and combination of these words among themselves. Writing correctly is to write in conformity to the rule? and usage adopted by the best writers. We shall first consider words as sounds, show the letters' that form them, and succinctly give the rules most proper to fix their pronunciation. Considering them afterwards as signs of our thoughts, we shall examine their nature, and their accidental variations, the order they observe between themselves, and the rules of their union. Most grammarians treat separately upon the rules of syntax. It has appeared to us more methodical, precise and simple, to place these rules in the chapters relating to each kind of \^ ords. From this it follovvs, however, that the examples we give for the understanding of the rules sometimes precede the knowledge, which they suppose of certain parts of speech. But those examples are always accompanied by the translation ; which greatly diminishes a slight inconvenience, which a second reading of the grammar will remove, and which is abundantly compensa- ted by the advantage of avoiding frequent repetitions and references, a multiplicity of which fatigues and discourages beginners. 14 PRONUNCIATION. CHAPTER I. Of words considered as sounds. Words, considered as sounds, are formed of letters and syllables. The only syllables that require explanation are gue^ gui ; qne^ q.n ; we shall speak of them at the letter w, in which all the difficulty lies. The Spanish language reckons twenty-eight letters. The following is the order and particular denomination of these letters : Alphabet a? b, c, ch, d, e, • fi, Denomination ah, bay, thay,* chay, day, a, a-fay, Alphabet g,-^ h? h h"^ k, 1, Denomination hay,t at-chay, e, h6tah,f kah, a-lay. Alphabet n m, n, n.f O, Denomination a-lee-ay , a-may, a-uay, a-nee-ay, «j Alphabet P? q, r, s, t, U? Denomination pay, koo, air-ray, a-say, lay, oo. Alphabet V, ,x, y,^ z,* Denomination vay. a-kiss, e-gree-a-gah, thay •tah. The letters are all of the feminine gender. The Spani sh language has six vowels, which are «, e, 2, 0, M, ?/. They are called vowels, because they have perfect sound of themselves, without being joined to other letters. The other letters are consonants ^ they are thus called, because they cannot form a perfect sound without the as- sistance of vowels. * Pronounced as tha in the English word thane, f g and j are guttuial, and their pronunciation can be learned only from a master ; the English combination under them conveys the nearest sound possible. + II and n are pronounced as the liquid I and gw in French ; as, in treille, vine-arbour ; rtgner, to reign ; avellanayfilhert ) guadaiiap sithe. The two last are Spanish examples. PRONUNCIATION. 15 OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. A. — This letter is pronounced as ah in English. Ex. Amur, to love ; alba, dawn. E. — This letter is pronounced as a in the alphabet in English. Ex. Eclipse, eclipse. Exceptions. Before r, in the same syllable, e is pro- nounced as in the English w^ords, care, snare, Ex. ver, to see ; verdadero, true. On the contrary, in verisimiJy probable, it is close, because e, in this last word, forms a part of the first syllable, and r begins the second. I. — This vowel is pronounced as e m English, except when it is marked w^ith the acute accent, when it is long, and pronounced like ee in English, as in the words, toda- via, yet ; origen, origin ; silaba, syllable. O. — The o is generally pronounced as in English ; it is, however, necessary to observe, that it is sometimes open, sometimes close, and sometimes long. It is open, 1st, in words of one syllable, when it is not immediately followed by another vowel. Ex. Lo, the, it ; no, no, not ; vos, you. 2d. At the end of words w^hen it is accented ; for example, iu the third person of the singular of the preterite definite of regular and several irregular verbs. Ex. Am6, he loved ; te?ni6, he feared ; sh'bio, he w^ent up. And this must necessarily be distinguished by the pronunciation and the accent in the first conjugation, so as not to con^ found the first person of the present of the indicative with the third of the preterite definite. It is long, whenever it is immediately followed by another vowel, as in voi/, I go ; hoy, to-day ; dov, I give. In other cases it is close. U. — U is pronounced oo. We except from this rule the syllables que, qui, gue, giii, in which the u is not sounded. Sometimes in the diphthong, gue, gni, the u preserves its sound of 00^ as in arguir, to argue ; agiiero, omen. Not to leave any doubt in this respect, the Spanish Academy writes the u wdth two dots w^henever it must be pronoun- ced 00, so that it is very easy for any stranger to see, at the first glance, the difference of the pronunciation between giierra, war ; and vtrg uenza, shame ; seguir, to follow ; 3nd argifir^ to ars^ue. 16 PRONUNCIATION. Y. — This letter is sometimes a vowel and sometimes a consonant. It is a vowel when it is preceded by another vowelj making with it a diphthong, as in the words lei/^ law ; Rey^ King. It is also a vowel, when it is a conjunc- tive particle. Ex. Pan y agua^ bread and water. In al- most every other case it is a consonant, as in saya^ petti- coat ; yerro^ error, &c. The y is no longer joined to con- sonants to begin a syllable and not yzquierch. we must write izquierdoy left- OF DIPHTHONGS. A diphthong is the union of two vowels /expressing a double sound, and pronounced by a single emission of the voice ; these are sixteen in number : aiy or ay ddhais^ you gave ; hayy there is, there are au pausa^ pause ; caustty cause. ei, or ey veis, you see ; ley, law. ea linea,^ line ; B67*eas, Boreas. CO inrgineo , virginal ; cutdneoy cutaneous. en dcnda, debt ; deiido, kinsman. ia gracia. grace ; Jidda, towards. ie cielo^ heaven ; cieno, mud. io precioj price ; necio, fool. ill ciudadj city ; viudoy widower. 06 heroe^ hero ; aloe, aloes. oiy or oy soiSy you are ; voy, I go. ua fragua, forge ; agua, water. lie dneno, master ; sueno, dream. ui. or 1(7/ riddO) noise ; muy, very. 7 »/ ZIO arduo, arduous. mutiio, mutual. N. B. When in these combinations the i and u are ac- cented, as in brio, efectiia, each vowel forms a distinct syllable. The TRIPHTHONGS are four ; lai preciais, ieis vacieis, uai sontigiiais, net, uey ave^ngueis, you value. you may empty. you bless. you may search ; huey, o\. PRONUNCIATION. . ^^ OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. B. — B, in the beginning of a word, is always pronounced as in English. (See Obs. page 20.) C. — C has the sound of t/i in English, as in the word thane y before e and i ; and the sound of k^ before a, o^n. Formerly the c with the cedilla was used, as in qapato^ shoe ; qutano^ such a one ; but it is no longer used ; and the z has been substituted in its place : thus we now write, zapato^ zutano, Ch. — These two letters are pronounced as in English in the word cheek ; as, chico^ small ; chocolate^ chocolate. In words derived from the ancient languages, it sounds like k ; as, Charibdis, Melchisedech. (See Obs. page 20.) D. — D is pronounced, in the beginning of a word, as in English ; but when the d is between two vowels, it is as soft as the th in the words though^ the .; Ex. Dadoy a dye ; dedo^ finger. F. — F is pronounced as in English. G. — G is pronounced as in English before a, o, w. It is guttural before e, i. Ex. muger, woman ; elegir^ to elect. Before n it has the Latin pronunciation. Ex. digno^ worthy. H. — The H is but lightly aspirated before we. Ex. hiievo^ egg ; hueso, bone. The Academy suppresses it after the f, and uses/ instead of ph. Ex. Filosofiay teairo^ philoso- phy, theatre ; Filadelfia, Philadelphia. The letter h has been retained in many words, though not pronounced ; and in several it has taken the place of the letter/, formerly used. Ex. fjo, son ; facer, to do ; fermosura, beauty, are now wrHten, hijo, hacer, hermosiira, J.— J is pronounced guttural before all the vowels. It is found before e audi only in tlie words Jesus, Jerusalem, Jeremias, and in the diminutives and derivatives of the nouns that terminate in ja or jo ; rs, paja, pqjita ; viejo. vtejectto ; straw, little straw ; old man, little old nian^ ^ ' 2** 18 PRONUNCIATION. K. — The K is admitted only in foreign words, and is pro- nounced as in English. L. — This letter is pronounced as in English. LL. — When II occurs in a word, it is liquid, and pro- nounced as in the words seraglio and William^ in English. Ex. LlagGy wound ; llenoy full ; cahallo^ horse ; llegar^ to arrive. M. — M and IV are pronounced as in English. N. — N having this mark (>^) which the Spaniards call n with tilde^ has the same sound as n in onion, minion, &c. Ex. Senor, Sir ; ninezy childhood ; ensenar, to teach. P and Q — are pronounced as in English. / R. — R presei-ves in Spanish its natural pronunciation. Ex. razon, reason ; rico, rich : and when it is double, both letters must be distinctly heard. Ex. carro, cart ; carrera, career ; zurra, flogging. S. — S is always pronounced hard, like ss, even between two vowels. Ex. sahio, wise ; sebo^ tallow ; famoso, fa- mous ; esposo, husband ; sosiego, tranquillity. T. — T never loses the sound it has in the alphabet, and is always hard. V. — The Spaniards often confound the sound of this let- ter with that of b ; but the Academy disapproves of it, and recommends that it should be pronounced as the Eng- lish. Ex. Falentia, valour ; velo, veil ; vil, vile. X. — X is pronounced like s when followed by a conso- nant, and it is not sounded when followed by c. Ex. Ex- trangero, excepto, &c. It is pronounced like ks when it is found between two vowels ; as, examinar, existir, sexo. In a few words ending in x, it is somewhat guttural. Ex. Relox,^ watch ; box, box-tree ^ carcax, quiver. (See Obs. page 20.) The x is not now used as a guttural letter ; the j is used in its place before the vowels a, o, u, and the g before e and i. Now written rdoj, &c. PRONUNCIATION. 19 Z. — The Tj is only used now before a, o, ii^ and is pro- nounced like the c before e and ?*. Ex. zaj^ato^ shoe ; zorra^ fox ; zmwzo, juice. Observations. 1st. The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronun- ciation, has suppressed double consonants, when one alone is pronounced. In the Spanish books, printed within a fe\\^ years, the double letters ss^ff^ bby &c. are no longer found, and ccy nn, rr, only when both consonants are sounded ; as in the words accesso, ennoblecer^ barro. Double I is to be considered only as the sign of the liquid letter /, and not as a double consonant. 2d. But as Spanish books less modern have not follow- ed fixed rules, as respects not only doubling the consonants, but also the orthography, when the pronunciation does not indicate it in an evident manner, we inform beginners, 1st. that they ought to have recourse to the latest Dictionaries, because their authors have generally adopted the orthogra- phy of the Spanish Academy ; 2d. that, in consulting these Dictionaries, the scholar should remember, that, if he does not find the word at the first search, it is because its or- thography has varied, and because the Spanish writers have often confounded, and do sometimes still confound the let- ters b and v ; s and c ; c and cA, and sometimes q ; c and q in the syllables qua, que qui ; c and z ; f and /«, in the beginning of a word ; j and g, in the syllables je and ji. Some writers use the j entirely for the guttural sound, and never the ^ nor x ; but we follaw the decisions of the Academy and not the w^hims of every schemer. X, having had till lately the guttural sound, was confounded with g^ before e, z, and with the 7, which is always guttural before all vowels. Instead of looking in the Dictionary for alve- irioj ferido, lexosj quando, zelo, cliimia, &c. he should K>k for albedrio^ herido^ lejos, cuando^ celo, g^uimia^ &c. 20 PRONUNCIATION. SYIiliABICAL TABLE. Orthographical alterations made hy the Royal Acad- emy of Madrid, and now generally adopted by Spanish writers. ba,* be, bi, bo, bu. raa, rae. mi, mo mu, ca, CO, cu, na, ne. ni. no. nu, ce, ci, na, ne, m, no. nu. chat,che,chi cho ,chu, pa, pe, Pi> po. pu, da, de, di, do. du. qiia,f quo fa, fe, fi, fo, fu, que ,qui J ga, gOj S", qiie ,qui ge, gi, ra,§ re. ri, ro. ru. gue,gui > rra, rre. rri. rro, rrii, gue,gui > sa, se. si. so. su. ha, he, hi. ho, hu, ta, te. ti, to. til, ja? je, ji, jo? J"; va, ve, vi, vo. VII, ka, ke, ki, ko, ku, xa,||xe, xi, xo. xu, la. le, li. lo, lu, xa, xe. xi, x6, xu, Ila, He, Hi, Ho, Uu, ya» ye, y'h yo, y«? za, ze. zi, zo, zu, cua, cue, cui, ja» g-e, gi, JO, ju, xa, xe, xi, xo, xu, za, ce, ci, zo^ zu. IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. * B is always hard at the beginning- of a word, whatever letter may follow it. Ex. barato, cheap ; hendito, blessed ; bravo, brave ; bianco, white. In the middle of a word, between twot vowels, b is softened into nearly a v ', Ex beber, to drink ; siibir, to go up. Bla, ble, he. are always pronounced hard, as in English, whatever place they occupy in a word. Ex. Hablar, to speak ; establecer, to estab- lish. Bra, bre, he. preceded by a consoriant, are pronounced hard ; as, hombre, man ; alambre, wire : but if preceded by a vowel, the b is generally softened into almost a v. Ex. Obrar, to act ; abrirj to open ; pobre, poor. t Chd, chi, h6. with a circumflex, as is stated in page 17, has heretofore been used with the sound of kah, kai, in words derived from the ancient languages ; but now we use in the place of it, ca, que, qui, co, cu ; as, Quimiaj chemistry ; querubin, cherubim ; Caribdis, Charibdis. i Q is changed into c, in all words where it is followed by ua, uo, vCy ui, and we write cuando, when ; cuota, quota ; cuestion, ques- tion. § R, in the beginning and middle of words, is pronounced as in EngHsh ; as, rio, river ; erario, treasury ; but rr, in Spanish, is pro- nounced a little stronger than the r in English at the beginning of a word ; as, perro, dog ; Pizarro. II Xa, he. used to be guttural, and pronounced like the 7, when the vowel, following the x, had not the circumflex accent over it The Spanish Academy, in the last edition of their Dictionary, printed in PRONUNCIATION. 21 OF THE ACCENT. There is bui one long syllable in each Spanish word. It is generally indicated by the acute accent placed upon the vowel. But this accent is suppressed, when the long sylla- ble may be otherwise known ; except in certain cases, where use requires it should be preserved. The following are the principal rules established by the Spanish Academy, for the use or suppression of the accent upon the vov>^el of the long syllable. 1st. The monosyllable must not be accented, because it is long from its nature. Exceptions. We accent, 1st. the conjunctions ^, and 6y iij or ; and the preposition a, to. 2d. The monosyllable tlj he, him ; mi^ me, pronouns personal ; sf, yes, one self, affirmative particle or pronoun ; de and si, ( from the verbs dar and ser^ to give and to be) to distinguish these mono- syllables from eZ, the, article ; mij my, pronoun possessive ; fif, if, conditional particle ; Je, of, preposition ; and se, himself, &;c. pronoun. 2d. The accent is suppressed in words of many sylla- bles terminated by only one vowel, because their penultima is long from its nature. Exceptions, 1st. In verbs, in the first and third person of the singular of the perfect and future of the indicative, the last syllable is long, and receives the accent. Ex. am^^ I loved ; am6^ he loved ; amari^ I shall love ; conocij I knew ; conocerd^ he shall know, &:c. The accent remains, 1817, and in their last improved Book on Orthography of 1815, have used, instead of the g-uttural x, the letter /, before the vowels a, o, u ; and the letter g, before e and i ; but some writers use^ for re before h11 the vowels. Ex. jahon, soap ; ge/e, chief ; Megico, Mexico ; jugo, juice. The x is preserved only in those wordsjin which it is pro- nounced as A"*. Ex. Exagerar^ pronounced eksagerar, to exaggerate. The x has also been changed into an s in all the instances in which it is followed by another consonant. Ex. EslrangerO) stranger ; escepto, except ; escitar, to excite. The object of the Academy, in all the foregoing alterations, has been to simplify the orthography, and make it conform to the pronunciation as nearly as possible ; therefore we have adopted these improvements in the orthography and pronunciation throughout this Grammar and Book of Exercise?, 22 PRONUNCIATION. even when we add a pronoun to some one of those words. Ex. cogite, I caught thee ; halUUj I found him ; come- rdnl), they will eat it. 2d. It is the same with the last syllable of the words alldy there 5 caf^, coffee ; dej6y he left ; Peruy Bercebu. 3d. In Spanish words of more than two syllables, the two last are often short. We call words of this kind, esdrujulosy dactyles. Some of them, as, cdmara., chamber ; espiritu^ spirit ; santisimo^ most holy ; take the accent upon the antepenultima^ which is accented in the same manner in those verbs which are made esdrujulos by the annexed pronoun ; as, iniramej look at me ; dyemCj hear me ; which, without the adjunction of the pronoun, would be written without an accent, miraj look ; oye^ hear. Others, compounded of a verb followed by two pronouns, and many adverbs, terminated in mente^ have the accent upon the syllable preceding the antepenultima. Ex. bus-^ camelo^ seek it for me ; dijosenosj people told us ; fdrilrnente^ easily. Finally, certain adverbs in mnite, deri- ved from esdrujtdos words, receive the accent upon the fifth syllable, reckoning from the last. Ex. bdrbaramente, barbarously ; intrtpidamente^ intrepidly 5 words derived from bdrbaroy intrtpido. Sd. The accent is suppressed upon the pemdtima, in words of two syllables, terminated with tw^o vowels ; as, nao, ship ; se«, let him be ; lea, let him read ; wfo, mine ; and in the words terminated in ia, ^e, io^ w«, we, z/o, which, considering the two vowels as diphthongs, are classed with dissyllables : for instance, India, Julio, July ; agua, water ; mutuo, mutual ; This article has no plural. Ace. lo, - the. Abl. de lo. from the. 3 We have said in the definition of the article, that it must only be placed before nouns substantive, or before any other 'part of speech that does their office ; from which must be con- cluded, that there are parts of speech that, without being sub- stantives are sometimes employed as such. Really in these phrases el leer megusta, reading pleases me ; preferirlo iitil a lo agradablcj to prefer the useful to the agreeable ; ignorar el * Del Jind al are abbreviations of dt el and a el, which custom has introduced^ and which the Academy has approved, in order to distinguish, by this contraction, the genitive, ablative, and dative of el, article, from the same cases of el, pronoun. Thus del, al, signify of or from the, to the ; and de el, a e/, signify of or from him, to him. ARTICLES. 27 porquCj to be ignorant of the why ; leer is a verb, util and agradahle are adjectives, and porque is an adverb ; but those words do the office of substantives, and it is for this reason that they take the article. OF THE USE OF THE ARTICLES. Rule I. — The article never admits of any elision in Span- ish ; but there are a few feminine nouns that, beginning with an «, take the masculine article eL instead of the femi- nine la. in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two ah. Therefore we say el agua^ water ; el ola. the wing ; el alma, the soul ; elama^ the mistress ; el ave^ the bird ; el dguila.xhe eagle ; el amOj the master ; la agua^ la ala^ &c., would be too harsh. But it is necessary to observe. 1st. that this change of article is admitted only in the singular, because the clash- ing of the two vowels does not take place in the plural ; 2d. if these nouns are accompanied by an adjective, tkis adjective must be put in the feminine : we then say, el agua es fria ; el ala derecha ; the water is cold : tlie right wing ; and not el agua frio : el ala derecho : 3d. the nouns above mentioned are nearly all which usage has per- mitted to deviate from the general rule. Rule II. — The ai'ticle is placed in Spanish before nouns taken in a universal sense^ even before proper names of regions, countries, rivers, winds and mountains. Ex. la Francia, de la Fraficia, a la Francia^ France, of France, to France ; la Castilla. de la Castilla, a la Castilla, Castillo, of Castillo, to Castillo ; el Ehro, el Tajo, &c. ; because the common norms regiouj provincial rio^ &c. are understood. Exceptions. — 1st. Those countries are excepted which take their names from theu' capital cities. Ex. JS^dpoles y Corfu son unos paises muy favorecidos de la naturaleza, Naples and Corfu ai-e countries very much favored by na- ture ; the names of countries which are under the regimen of the preposition en ; as, esid en Espaha^ he is in Spain ; vive en Francia, he lives in France ; 3d. those that are united by the preposition de to a noun that precedes ; as, el reyno de Inglaterra, the kingdom of England ; las ciu- dades de Francia y de Alernania, the cities of France and Germany ; and, lastly, the article is omitted before the names of countries, from which we speak of returning. Ex. ^o AKTICLES. vjielvo de Frusia^ I return from Prussia ; llega de Polo^ nia^ he arrives from Poland. Remark 1st. Though the name of a country be under the regimen of the preposition en or de^ it must be preceded by the article when it is personified, or when it is taken in a definite sense. Ex. La urhanidad de la Francia, el interes de la Inglaterra, the politeness of France, the interest of England, &c. 2d. The article is always placed before the names of certain distant countries ; as, He go del Japon, de la Ckina^ del Peru, I arrive from Japan, from China, from Peru. We say : Ir a Indias, or a las Indias ; venir de In- dias, or de las Indias, to go to the Indies, to come from the Indies. ' Rule III. — When the names of kingdoms and provinces are preceded in English by a verb expressing the idea of coming, returning, going, coming back, sending and sending hack^ the preposition a is used in Spanish, corresponding to the English to, Ex. Ir a Francia, to go to France \ volcert a Inglaterra^ I shall return to England, &c. ; on the contrary, a/, zw, in the^ &c. are translated in Spanish, by en^ &c. when the preceding verb does not express any motion. Ex. Estd en Pans^ he is at Paris ; nacid en Roma^ he was born in Rome ; estar^ en casa, I shall be in the house, or at home. We however say, — to be at the door, estar a la fueria ; to wait for at the door, esperar a la puerta, &c. Rule IV. — The nouns Sefior, Senora, Senores, Senoras^ Senorito, Senoritos, Senorila, Seroritas, Mister or Sir, Mistress or Madam, Gentlemen or Sirs, Masters, young Gentlemen, Ladies, Miss, Misses, always take the article, except, 1st. whqn they are preceded by one of the pronouns possessive mi^ tit, my, thy, &c. and when they are in the vocative. We must then say : El senor del Campo, la senora Sanclio, la sefiorita Villegas, mi sevora Sane ho, el senorito Quiroga ; mi senoriia Villegas ; como estd vm, senor don Francisco, or senora dona Francisca ? Mister del Campo, Mistress Sancho, Master Quiroga, Miss Villegas, my lady Sancho, my young lady Villegas ; how do you do, Sir Francis, or Lady Frances ? N. B. 1st. When we speak of, or to a person in high sta- tion, or to whom w^e owe respect, we use in Spanish these words : senor don, senora or sefiorita dona, which must al- ways be placed before christian names. Ex. El senor don. OP THE ARTICLE. 29 Pedro B., My Lord Peter B. ; la senora dona Maria A,, My La- dy Mary A. — It is necessary to remember that the word Don is never employed before a surname or family name. We shall then say : El sefior de Matallanas ; la sefiora de Villa Torre ; and not, el sefior don de Matallanas ; la senora dona de Villa Torre, N. B. 2d. Mi senora, mi senorita, are expressions which indicate more deference than la senora^ la senorita. Rule V. — When one of the words, sir or mister, mistress^ or madam, my lord, my lady, sefior^ senora^ are accompa- nied with a title, the article is placed before that word, and not before the title. The marshal, el sefior mariscal ; the duchess, la sefiora duquesa ; the bishop, el sefior obispo. But if we use mi sefior, mi sefiora^ the article is placed as in English. My lord the bishop, mi sefior el obispo. mi sefiora la duquesa. Rule VI. — The neuter article is placed only before adjectives used as substantives, and taken in an absolute indeterminate case : as, se debe preferir lo util a lo agrada^ bley we ought to prefer the useful to the agreeable. CHAPTER IV. OF NOUNS. Nouns are either substantive or adjective. The nouB substantive expresses the name of a person or thing ; the noun adjective expresses its quality. Ex. Un liombre docto, a learned man ; una hermosa muger, a handsome woman ; liombre and muger, man and woman, are substantives ; doc- to and hermosa J learned and handsome, are adjectives. OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. The substantive is either common, proper, or collective. The substantive common is that which may be applied to several persons or several things ; as, general, general ; ciudad, city ; reino, kingdom. One may say, un general Ingles, mi general Frances, an English general, a French general ; la oiudad de Londres^ la ciudad df. Paris > the city of 3* 30 NOUNS. London^ the city of Paris ; el reino de Francia, el reino de In- giaterra.the kingdom of France, the kingdom of Englandj&c. The substantive proper expresses a separate idea, a single person or thing ; as, Nero^ Farisy Londres ; Nero, Paris, London. The substantive collective is that which, though in the singular, presents to the mind several persons or things, ei- ther as making one whole, or as making part of a whole* The first is called collective general ; as, eg^rciio, rebano, floresta^ army, flock, forest. The second is called collective jjartitive ; as, tropa, irtfinidad^ troop, infinity, &c. Rule VII. — The noun substantive collective partitive imy govern the verb that follows it in the plural ; but the noun substantive collective general never governs it in that num- ber. We may then say, entraron en Londres una tropa^ una infinidad de ladrones ; but we cannot say : el egercito perecieroup el rebafio perecieron, GENDERS. The gender originally denoted only the distinction of the sexes as male or female. The masculine designates man or the male. The feminine denotes woman or the female. Afterwards, by extension, we have attributed the masculine or feminine gender to other nouns, though they had no relation to either sex : the neuter has since been added to them in several languages. There are three genders in the Spanish language : the masculine^ feminine^ and neuter This last has only a rela- tion to vague and indeterminate things : it is applicable only to adjectives, and has no plural. Ex. Lo hueno, lo malo, lo justo, esto, aquelloy &c. ; the good, the bad, the just, thisy that, &c. OF NUMBERS. Numbers serve to designate one or many objects. There are two numbers, the singular and plural. The singular designates only one person or thing, as homhre^ man ; muoer^ woman ; libro^ book, plmna, pen. The plural de- signates many persons or things ; as, los hombreSp men : mugeresp women ; librosy books ; plum as ^ pens. NOUNS. 31 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. The plural of nouns substantive and adjective is formed in Spanish in two different manners^ according to the termi- nation of the singular. The nouns are terminated either with a sliort vowelj that is, not accented ; or with a long vowel^ that is^ accented ; or lastly, with a consonant. Rule VIII. When the noun is terminated with a short vowel, the plural is formed by adding an s to the singular, Ex. Carta ^ letter ; cartas^ letters ; llave^ key ; Haves ^ keys ; bueno, huena^ good ; huenos, huenas^ good ; &c. When the noun terminates with a long vowel or with a consonant, the plural is formed by adding es to the singular. Ex. Aleli^ gilly-flower ; alelies, gilly-fiowers ; verdad, truth ; verdades^ truths ; razon^ reason ; razones^ reasons ; hdhil^ able ; hdbileSj able ; feliz^ happy ; felices, happy. Maravedi forms its plural in three ways. We say marave- dis, maravedi es, aod maravedises. N. B. The nouns, both substantive and adjective, which terminate with a z in the singular, change z into c to form^ their plural, with the addition of the letters es : Ex. Luz^ light, iuces ; feliz, happy, felices, &c. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Substantives masculine of a person, beginning with a consonant. Singular. N. el padre, ------ the father. G. del padre, of the father. jD. al padre, ------ to the father. A. al padre,* ------ the father. V. padre, ------ o father. Ah. del padre, ------ J^rom the father. * Though the observation we are about to make belongs to the rules relative to the regimen of verbs, we have thought fit to give it here, in order to make known the reason of the difference that ex- ists between the accusative of the nouns of persons and that of the nouns of things. Whenever a rational being or personified thing is the object of this action of the active verb, the verb governs the noun in the accusative with the preposition a ; and, as we have already said in speaking of the article, al is a contraction of the preposition a and of the article eh When on the contrary the object of the actiop of 32 NOUNS* N. G. D. A. V. Ab. los padres, de los padres, 4 los padres, 4 los padres, padres, de los padres, Plural Substantive feminine sonant : K G. D. A. V. Ab. N. G. D. A. r, Ab. la muger, de la muger, a la muger, 4 la muger, muger, de la muger. ----- the fathers. - - - ' - of the fathers^ ' ' ' ' - to the fathers. ----- . al ama, A al ama, V ama, Ab. del ama. N. las amas. G. de las amas, D. 4 las amas, A. 4 las amas. V. amas, Ab. de las amas. Plural, the mistress. of the mistress. to the mistre^^s. the mistress. mistress. from the mistress. the mistresses. of the mistresses. to the jnistresses. the mistresses. o mistresses. from the mistresses. the active verb is a nonn that expresses an inanimate thin^, the verb governs it in the accusative without any preposition. See rule 56 which refers to this observation. >iOCNS. 33 Substantive masculine of a thing : N. G. D. A. V. Ah. N. G. D. A. r. Ab. Singular. K el libro, G, del libro, D, al libro, A, el libro,* ■ V. libro, Ab. del libro. N. los • libros. G. de los libros. D. a los libros, A. los libros. V. libros, Ah. de los libros, Plural the book. of the book. to the book. the book. book. from the hook. the books. of the books. to the books. the hooks. hook^. from the books. Substantive feminine of a thing : Singular, la casa, de la casa, 4 la casa, la casa, casa, de la casa. Plural las casas de las casas k las casas, las casas casas, de las casas, the house. of the house. to the house the house. house* from the house. the houses. of the houses. to the houses the houses houses. ----- from the houses. N. B. Neuter nouns never relate to persons, but only to indeterminate things ; as, lo bueno, lo mcdo. lo ail, Tliey have neither vocative case, nor plural number, and are de- clined with the neuter article. DECLENSION OF A NEUTER NOUN. N. lo util, - - - ^ G. de lo util, - - - - the usefuL of the useful. See the preceding ngte, page 31. 34 NOUNS. D. a lo util, to the useful A. lo utilj t^e useful Ab, de lo util, from the useful Remark, The neuter article is not placed indifferently before all adjectives employed as substantives, but only (as we have said in rule vi before those that are taken in a sense absolutely indeterminate. In this phrase : el homhre sahio prefiere siempre lo util a lo agradable, the wise man prefers always the useful to the agreeable ; the neuter article is necessary before htil and agraclable, because those nouns do not express any determinate object. But in the follow^- ing phrases : el malo sera castigado, the wicked shall be punished ; el azul de este pano es muy subido, the blue of this cloth is very lively, — one cannot make use of the neuter article, because the nouns substantive that are implied are sufficiently determinate ; in truth, it is evident that homhre is understood before malo^ and color before azul^ and in these cases the article takes the gender of the substantive to which it relates. OF PROPER NOUNS. The proper names of men and women, of cities, towns, villa.^es, months, &c. do not take any article, and are de- clined by aid of the prepositions de and a, De serves for the genitive and ablative, and a for the dative and accusa- tive before proper names of men and women, and for the dative oniy betore nouns of things. DECLENSION OF SOME PROPER NAMES. iV. Pedro, Peter, N, Ana, Ann, G, de Pedro, of Peter, G, de Ana, of Ann, D. a Pedro, to Peter, D. 4 Ana, to Ann, A, ci Pedro,* Peter, A, a Ana,* Ann, Ab, de Pedro, from Peter, Ab, de Ana, from Ann, IV. , Antonio, Antony, N. Londres, London, G, de Antonio, of Antony, G, de Londres, of London, D. a Antonio, to Antony, D, a Londres, to London, A, a Antonio,* Antony, A, Londres, London, Ab, de AnXomo from Antony, Ab,de Londres fromLondon, See note page 31. NOUXS. 35 OF NOUNS TAKEN IN A PARTITIVE SENSE. Nouns taken in a partitive sense, often expressed in En- glish by some, any, are always without an article in Spanish. Rule IX. Whenever the noun, taken in a partitive sense, expresses an object va^ely and in an indeterminate sense, it does not take in Spanish a preposition nor an article. Ex, Dame pan, give me bread ; como came, I eat meat ; com- prart manzanas, I shall purchase apples ; Beho vino, I drink w^ine. Rule X. When on the contrary the noun is taken in a determinate sense, it must be preceded by the genitive of the masculine, or feminine ai'ticle, singular or plural, ac- cording to the gender and number to which it belongs, or simply, by the preposition de, if it does not admit the article. Ex. Dame del pan que has comprado, give me of the bread that tliou hast purchased ; dame de tu pan, give me of thy bread. In the second example, we use only the preposition de, because the possessive pronoun tu, does not take the ar- ticle. Rule XI. If the noun taken in a detenninate sense is in the plural, and it should be wished to express only the idea of some, a few, this should then be expressed by unos, unas, or algunos, algunas ; according to the gender of the noun substantive. Ex. Comert unas 6 algunas ciruelas, I shall eat plums, that is, some plums ; he comprado algunos lihros, I have bought a few books, &c. But if the quantity, instead of being limited by the sense of some, is absolutely undeter- mined, then some is not expressed. Ex. Tiene may huenos lihros, he has very good books. Tenemos amigos, we have friends. DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE ILUy UUa ; <2, OR aU IN ENGLISH. Singular masculine, K ^ A. un amigo, - - - - a friend. G. |- M, de un amigo, • • ^ . of ox from a friend. D. a un amigo, - - - . to a friend. Plural. N. Sf A. amigos, - - - - friends, G. l" Ah. de amigos, - - - - of ov from friends. D. a amigos, - - - - ^ to friends. 36 NOUNS. Singular feminine. K Sf A. una monja, a nun. O. ^•56. de una monja, of a nun. D. 4 una monja, to a nun. Plural. N.^J. monjas, - nuns. G. Sf Ab. de monjas, of nuns. D. ^ monjas, -- to nuns. General ohsertations upon the genders* The proper and appellative names of men, and male ani- mals, as also the nouns that express arts, sciences, dignities, professions, trades, &;c. fit for men, are of the masculine gender ; as, homhre^ man ; caballo^ horse ; patriarca^ patriarch ; poeta^ poet, &c. Names of females, and of professions, trades, &c. fit for females, are of the feminine gender. Ex. muger^ woman ; cahra^ goat ; costurera^ seamstress ; ahadesa^ abbess, &c. The names of kingdoms, cities, towns, and villages, gen- erally take, says the Madrid Academy, the gender of the. appellative nouns, expressed or understood, to which they refer. For instance, Toledo and Madrid are of the femi- nine gender, because the feminine appellative nouns, ciudad and villa^ city and town, are understood, the first before Toledo^ and the second before Madrid. Fuencarrml is mas- culine, because the masculine word lugar^ village, is under- stood. The names Cuba and Morea are of the feminme gender, because the appellative, isla^ islacd. Is understood before the first, and the word peninsula ^ peninsula, before the last. However, the Academy adds, some of the names above mentioned, when they are not joined to the common noun belonging to them, follow the rule of their termina- tion. Thus Espana, SueciOy and almost all the names of countries ending in a, are feminine ; Ferrol and Viso are masculine, theugh the appellattive noun of the two first be reino^ kingdom ; that of Ferrol^ ciudad^ city ; and that of Viso J villa J town. The same is true in regard to others j which practice will make known. NOUxVS. 37 OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS CONSIDERED WITH REGARD TO THEIR TERMINATIONS. All nouns ending in «, are feminine, except alhacea, execu- tor; anagrama^ anagram ; antipodal antipodes ; axioma^ axiom; clima, climate ; msma, chrism ; dia, day ; dilenia, dilemma ; di- ploma, diploma ; dogma, dogma ; drama, drama ; epigrama^ epigram ; Etna, Etna ; fa, fa, (note of music ;) idioma, idiom ; lema, lemma ; mandy manna ; mapa, map ; poema, poem ; problema, problem ; sintema^ symptom ; sistema^ system ; sofisma^ sophism ; tapahoca, slap given on the mouth ; tema, theme ; teorema^ theorem ; and some others. All those that terminate in o, are masculine, except mano, hand ; and nao, vessel. Those that terminate in cion or Hon, are of the feminine gender, as, cuestiorij question ; meditacion. meditation ; accion^ action ; objecion, objection, &c. These words are the same in both languages, except that in Spanish the t of the termi- nation tion^ of the English word, is changed into a c, when it has the sound of sL The nouns that in Spanish terminate in tad or dad^ termi- nations that correspond to that of the Latin in tas, and to that of the English in ty, are of the feminine gender ; as^ humanidadj humanity; puridad ^ purity \ adversidad^ adversity. As to the nouns that have other terminations, they are sub- ject to so many exceptions, that it is impossible to establish in regard to them satisfactory rules. SUBSTANTIVES THAT ARE OF BOTH GENDERS, according to the decision of the Academy, cocJcet J passport. anathema. - art. Albala, Anatema, Arte, Azucar, Canal, Cisma, Cutis, Dote, dotes, Emblema, - Hermafrodita, Mar, sugar, canal, schism, skill . dowry ^ endowments, emblem, hermaphrodite, sea. 38 NOUNS. Margeiij • margin^ bank, Nema, seal Neumaj^ ----- significant gesture. orden, order, Puente, ------- bridge. Reurna, ------ ^ rheum, Tribu, ------- tribe, N. B. Tribu, tribe, though of both genders, generally takes the masculine. OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. Formation of the feminine of nouns adjective. In the Spanish language, as in almost all others, the adjec- tive agrees in gender and number with the substantive to which it relates. It is then necessary to know the manner in which the feminine is formed from the masculine. Of the formation of the plural, we have given the rules, when speaking of the numbers. Nouns adjective, the termination of which is in o, form their feminine by changing o into a ; as bueno, buenn, good ; alto, alta, high, &c. Those that terminate in the masculine, with any other let- ter, have generally but one termination for both genders. We say then, un hombre alegre, a merry man ; and una mu- ger ale g re, a merry woman ; un hombre feliz, a happy man ; una muger feliz, a happy woman, &c. The following nouns, terminating in the singular, with a consonant, are excepted from the above rule, the feminine being formed by adding an a to the masculine. Harugan-a, lazy ; mamanton-a, a sucking child ; haron-a, sluggish ; hampon-a, vain ; as also national adjectives, as ; Frances-a, French ; Ingles-a, English ; Aragones-a, Aragonese ; An- daluz-a, Andalusian, &c. (See at the end of the Grammar the table of names of countries.) Among the adjectives of this last class, some are found that terminate in «, and do not undergo any change in the feminine ; as, Persa, Persian ; Moscovita, Muscovite, &c. COLLOCATION ANB AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE. 1st. The adjective is generally placed in Spanish a/ter the substantive. NOUNS. o\) 2d. The adjective must always agree in gender and num- ber with the substantive that it qualifies. 3d. When an adjective relates to two singular substantives, it must be put in the plural. 4th. When an adjective serves to qualify in the same phrase several substantives of different genders, it is put in tjie plural and in the masculine. OF NOUNS DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE. The Spanish language abounds, like the Italian language^ in diminutives and augmentatives. Rule XII. There are two kinds of diminutive nouns : 1st. those that express tenderness, or the gentleness of any object whatever, that is small ; and their termination is in ito or ico for the masculine, ita or ica for the feminine, which are added to the nouns, whether adjective, or substan- tive, without altering any thing in them, when they terminate with a consonant, but suppressing the last letter, if it be a vowel. Ex. Pdjaroy bird ; pajarito, small or pretty little bird ; casa, house ; casita^ small, or pretty little house ; senor^ sir ; senoritOj young gentleman, or master. From this rule should be excepted hueno, buena^ the dimuiiitive of which is bonito^ boniia^ and which most often has only the meaning of pretty, 2d. Those which denote contempt or pity, or which lessen the object without adding to it the idea of pretty, are gene- rally terminated in ziielo^ illo or a7/o, for the masculine, zuela^ ilia or cilia for the feminine, according to the forego- ing rule respecting diminutives. Ex. Perro^ dog ; perilloy ugly little dog ; muger^ woman ; inugercilla, mugerzuela, ugly little woman ; ho?nbre, hombrecilh, Jiornbrezuelo, ugly little man. There are some other dimunitives terminating in ete, in, ejo^ but they are very little used. Rule XIIL The augmentative nouns add to the positive^ the signification of the v/ords big or large, and are formed hy adding 0/2, azo^ onazo, or ote for the masculine, and ow«, aza, or onaza, for the feminine, following the same rule as the dimunitives in regard to the termination. Ex. Hombre^ man ; hombron, hombrazo, uombronazo, big or large man ; muger, woman ; miigerona, mugeraza, inugeronaza, big or large woman ; perro, dog: perron, perrazoy perronazOy big 40 NOUNS. or Idxge dog ; grunde^ large ; grandon^ grandote, grandazo, grandonazo, very big or large and without proportion. DEGREES OF COMPARISON TN THE ADJECTIVES. The adjectives may qualify the objects either absolutely, that is J without any relation to other objects, or relatively, that is, with relation to other objects Hence arise three de- grees of qualification, to wit : the positive, the comparative, and the superlative. The positive is the adjective expressed without there be- ing a comparison ; as, bueiio good ; malo, bad. The comparative serves to establish between the objects that are compared a relation of superiority, inferiority , or equality. Hence three kinds of comparatives. The adjective is in the superlative when it expresses the quality either in a very high or in the highest degree ; which forms two kinds of superlatives, the one absolute, and the other relative, OF THE comparatives; As a comparison may be made, not only by means of ad- jectives, but also by the aid of substantives, verbs, and ad* verbs, we shall consider the comparatives in these four different cases. The Spanish language participates in this part of the Grammar, with the latin tongue, and difficulties would doubtless be found in it, should we content ourselves with merely treating of comparatives in relation to adjectives. OF COMPARATIVES CONSIDERED IN RELATION TO ADJECTIVES. Rule XIV. 1st. The comparative of superiority is al- ways expressed by mas, more ; and the que following, by than, Ex. He is more learned than you, ^l es mas sabio que vm, 2d. The comparative oi inferiority is formed by menos, less, followed by que, than, or by no-tan, not so, and the as following is rendered by como, Ex. He is less learned than his brother, or he is not so learned as his brother ; ^l es menos docto que su hermano, or ^l no es tan docto como su hermano. 3d. The comparative of equality is formed by tan-como, as-as ; or no-menos que, not less-than. Ex. You are as pru- dent as your sisters, vm. es tan prudente como sus hermanas, or, you are not less prudent than, &c. vm, no es menos pru- dente que, ^c. NOUNS, ^^ N. B. The following nouns are comparatives from theii* nature : mayor, larger, greater ; menor, lesser, snialler ; mejor, better; peor, worse; ^i^perzor, superior ; inferior, inferior. We also say el mayor, el manor, el mejor, &c. the largest, the greatest ; the least, the smallest ; the best ; but then these adjectives are superlatives. COMPARATIVE OF SUPERIORITY. Of the comparative in relation to substantives^ verbs and adverbs. Rule XV. This comparative before the substantive, the adverb, and after the verb, is rendered by mas-qite more- than, and admits no preposition after it. Ex. He has more prudence than you, tiene mas prudencia que I'W. ; She has more science than money, tiene mas ciencia que dinero ; we have more enemies than, &c. tenemos mas enemigos que, §-c. I esteem thee more than Mary, te estimo mas que a Maria; we act more prudently than they, obramos mas pru- deniemente que ellos, N. B. The foregoing rule perfectly agrees with the En- glish construction. More than, less than, followed by a noun of number, one, two, three, &c. are translated by mas de, and menos de. Ex. She has more than ten guineas, tiene mas de diez guineas. She has more than seven broth- ers, tiene mas de siete liermanos. We have less than a thousand dollars, Tenemos menos de rail pesos. Less than 20 years, menos de 20 anos. Comparative of Inferiority, , Rule X\T. 1st. This comparative, considered in relation to substantives, may be expressed by less or feicer-than, or by so much or so many-as, preceded by the negative not, LesS'than is rendered by menos que. Ex. Less prudence than, menos prudencia que ; fewer friends than, rutnos ami- gos que, (^'c. Not so much or so many -as, is expressed by no-tanto,'a,'OS,-as,'Como, according to the gender and num- ber of the noun to which, so much, so many relate. Ex. I have not so much money as you, no iengo tanto dinero como vm, ; Peter has not so much ambition as John, Pedro no tiene tanta amhicion como Juan ; Francis has net so •42 NOUN^. many books as his brother, Francisco no tiene tantos lihros como su he7'mano. 2d. In relation to verbs ; less-than is expressed by menos- que ; not-so-much is expressed by no-tanto ; and as^ by cu- anto or como. Ex. I do not love him so much as I esteem him, no le quiero tanto cuanto or como le estimo ; you study less than we, vm. estudia menos que nosoiros. Sd, In relation to adverbs ; less-than is rendered by menos-que, and not-so or not-so-as by no-tan-como, Ex» They act less prudently than you, obran menos prudente- mente que vm,, or no obran tan prudentemente como vm. N. B. Before participles passive so much-as ; ,as ntnch-as, are rendered by tan-como, Ex. He is not so much esteemed as he, no es tan estimado como eL — I am as much loved as she is, soij tarn amado como ella. Comparative of equality. Rule XVII. 1st. The comparative of equality, consid- ered in relation to nouns substantive, is expressed by as mucli-as, as many-aSy or by not less-than. As much, as many, is translated by tanto fta-tos-t as , according to the gen- der and number of the substantive, and the following as by como, Ex. She has as much meekness as her sister, tiene tanta dulzura como su hermana ; he acts with as miich rig- our as justice, obra con tanto rigor como justicicu Not less- Ihan is rendered by no-menos-que, Ex. I am not less hun- gry than you, no tengo menos hambre que vm. ; we have not fewer protectors than friends, no tenemos menos protectores que amigos. 2d. In regard to verbs ; as much as is expressed by tanto cuanto or como, Ex. I punish him as much as he deserves, le castigo tanto cuanto or como merece. Not-less than is always translated by no-7nenos que, Ex. You do not eat less than his brother, vm,no come menos que su hermano, 3d. In relation to adverbs : as-as is rendered by tan-co7no, Ex. He sings as well as you, canta tan bien como vm, Not-lesS'than is translated by no-meiios-que, Ex. I do not write less correctly than he, no escribo menos correciamente que 61. Of superlatives. There are two kinds of supeiiativesj the one absolute and the other relative. Rule XVIII. The first expresses a quality in the su- preme degree, but without comparison; and then the adjec- tive is preceded by tnuy^ very ; and if the adjective can form its superlative of itself, then, without having recourse to WW?/, we add to the positive isimo or isima^ isimos or isimaSj according to the gender and number of the substan- tive to which it refers, cutting off the final letter of the ad- jective, if it ends with a vowel. Ex. Paris is a very beauti- ful city. Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa or hermosisima. The superlative absolute of the adverbs is likewise form- ed by muy ^or by changing einente or amente into isimamente, Ex. PrudenUementej prudently, priident-isimamente ; can- dida-mente^ candidly, candid-isimamentc, N. B. 1st. It is proper to observe that there are adjec- tives and adverbs which do not admit the last form of the superlative ; consequently when a doubt occurs whether ft may be used with any adjective or adverb, the surest wav will be to make use of muy with the positive. N. B. 2d. From the general rule of absolute superlatives - must be excepted a few adjectives that cannot be subjected to it, as ; bueno, good ; honisimoj very good ; fuerie^ strong ; fortisimo^ very strong. All those that terminate in ble change that syllable into hiiisimo^ for the superlative. Ex. Ama-ble^ amiable, ama bilisimo ; afable^ afa-bilisimo. The following nouns are superlatives in their nature ; 6ptimOj pesimo, r,iaximOj minimoj infimOj supremo^ very good, very bad, very great^ very small, very low, supreme. Rule XIX. The superlative relative expresses a quality in the highest degree, by comparison with other objects, and it is formed in English by one of these articles or pro- nouns, tlie^ of ov from the ^ to the ; mv, thy^ his, her, its, our, your, their, followed by most, least, best, icorst ; and in Spanish by one of these ; eZ, la^ los, las, del, de la^ de los or de las, al, a la, a los or a las ; mi, tu, su, nuestro, vuestro, fol- lowed by mas, memos, mejor, menor, peor ; and tliese articles and pronouns must agree in gender and number with the noun to which they relate. Ex. The most pure and con- stant pleasures, los mas puros y constanies placeres. 44 NOtJNS. The adverb forms its superlative relative by lo mas, the most ; lo menosy the least ; both which must always precede it. Lo is here a neuter article. Observations upon the Comparatives and Superlatives, Rule XX. The comparatives govern the verb that fol- lows the que, than. Ex. He is more learned than he appears, il es mas docto que parece, or de lo que parece. Rule XXL When the substantive, to which the adjec- tive in the superlative relative, refers, is preceded by tha definite article and is immediately followed by the adjective, then the article is not repeated before inas nor the adjectivq. Ex. He was prepared to deal the most terrible marks of his resentment, quedo en disposicion de usar de las demonstra- ciones mas terribles de su resentimiento (Feijoo.) But if the substantive is not immediately followed by mas, most, then the article must be repeated. Ex. El hombre que veo es el mas docto, Sfc, Rule XXH. The superlative relative governs the verb that follows the que in the indicative. Ex. The most pow- erful prince that has been, el principe mas poderoso que ha habido. If however, the verb, in English, is in the potential, we put it indifferently in the second or third conditionals. Ex. The best that I could find, el mejor que hallase or hallara. And if it is in the future, we put it in the future conjunc- tive, or in the present of the subjunctive. Ex. The least that I can or shall be able, lo menos que pueda or pudiere. Rule XXHI. Most and least joined to a verb are ren- dered by mas and inenos, Ex. He is the man that I most love, el es el hombre que mas quiero. This is the woman that I least esteem, esta es la muger que menos estimo. Rule XXIV. 1st. The more-the more, (that is, the more repeated in different members of a sentence, the second be- ing as a consequence of the first,) are expressed by cuanto mas-tanto mas. The more virtuous man is, the more happy he is, cuanto ma^ virtuoso es el hombre, tanto masfeliz es. 2d. The Itss-the less; the more-the less ; the less-the more are expressed by cuanto menos-tanto menos ; cuanto mas- tanto menos ; cuanto menos-tanto ^mas. NOUNS. 45 3d. So much the more than, so much the less than, are trans- lated by tanto mas que, tanto menos que. OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES OF NUMBER. Adjectives of number are words that serve for enumera- tion. We call them adjectives because their office is to mod- ify, Hnd because every noun that modifies is an adjective. They are distinguished into two kinds^ the cardinals and or- dinals. The cardinals serve to designate absolutely and simply the various numbers ; the ordinals mark the order of persons ©r things in relation to the numbers. The cardinal numbers are ; uno, una, - dos, tres, cuatro, cinco, seis, siete, echo, nueve, diez, once, doce, trece, catorce, quince, diez y seis, diez y siete, diez y ocho, diez y nueve, veinte, veinte y uno, veinte y dos, veinte y tres, veinte y cuatro, - veinte y cinco, - veinte y seis, veinte y siete, - veinte y ocho^ - one, two, three, four, five, six, seven^ eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, twenty-two, twenty-three, twenty- four, twenty five, twenty-six, twenty-seven, twenty-eight, 46 NOUNS. veinte y nuevej treinta, cuareiita cincuenta, sesenta, setenta^ ochenta, noventa, cientOj doscientos-as,* - trescientos-aSj cuatrocientos-as; quinientos-as^ seiscientos-as^ setecientos-as, - ochocientos-as, - novecientos-as, - milj - - - dos mil, mil y ciento, mil y doscientos-as, - cien mil, - - - doscientos-as mil, millon, - - - twenty-ninG, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, a x}Y one hundred, two hundred, three hundred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred, seven hundred, eight hundred, nine hundred a or one thousand, two thousand, eleven hundred, twelve hundred, a or one hundred thousand two hundred thousand, million. N. B. This last number is not an adjective, it belongs %o the class of substantives. primero-a, r segundo-a, tercero-a, cuarto-a, quinto-a, sesto-a, septimo-a, octavo-a, nono-a, decimo-a, undecimo-a, duodecimo-a first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, * The masculine termination os is changed into as for the feminine, t Primero, m, primera, f. &.c. NOUNS. 4V (i^cinio tercio, decima tercia, decimo cuarto, decima cuarta, decimo quinto, decima quinta, decimo sesto, decima sesta, decimo septimo, decima septima, decimo octavo, decima octava, decimo nono, decima nona, vigesimo-a, - - - vigesimo primo-a-a, vigesimo segimdo-a-a, - vigesimo tercio-a-a, trigesimo-a, - - - cuadragesimo-a, quincuagesimo-a, sexagesimo-a, - . - septuagesimo-a, - - - octogesimo-a, - - - nonagesimo-a, nonagesimo primo, &c.-a-a, - centesimo-a, - - . - ducentesimo-a, - - - trecentesimo-a, cuadragentesimo-a, quingentesimo-aj sexentesimo-a, septengentesimo-a, octogentesimo-a, nonagentesimo-a, milesimo-a, - - - antepenultimo-a, penultimo-a, - . - ultimo-a, postrero-a, thirteenth, fomteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth, nineteenth, twentieth, twenty-first, twenty-second, twenty-third, thirtieth, fortieth, fiftieth, sixtieth, seventieth, eightieth, ninetieth, ninety-first, a or one hundredth, two hundredth, three hundredth, four hundredth, five hundredth, six hundredth, seven hundredth, eight hundredth, nine hundredth, a or one thousandth, antepenultima, penultima, last. Besides these two kinds of numbers, there are yet three others that belong to the class of substantives ; these are the collective^ distributive and proportional. The collective numbers serve to denote determinate quan- tities, as ; a dozen, una docena ; half a dozen^ una media docenta; a hundred of, una centena ; a thousandth, un mil- iar ; a milliov, un millon or cuento. The distributive serve to denote the different parts of a whole ; as, the half, la mitad ; the thirds el tercio ; a fourth, una cuarta, &c. 48 NOUN&. The proportional are those that serve to denote the pro- gressive increase of the number of things ; as, the double^ el duplo ; the quadruple, el cuadruplo ; the hundredfold^ el cen- tuple, &c. N. B. All the cardinal numbers are indeclinable, except Mnoy one, and the compounds of ciento ; for, we say uno^ unay doscientosy doscientaSy Szc* The ordinals form their fem- inine by changing o into a. ADJECTIVES WHICH, JOINED TO A SUBSTANTIVE, LOSR ONE OR MORE LETTERS. Rule XXV. 1st. wwo, one; primer o, first '^ iercero, third ; postrero^ last ; alguno^ some ; ningunoy none ; buenoy good, and maloy bad, wicked, when they are followed by a sub- stantive, lose the last vowel, but only in the masculine. Ex. Un hombre, one man ; el primer hombrey the first man, &c. However, tercero does not always lose it ; for, we say ; el tercer dia or el tercero dia ; and both manners of speaking are admitted by the Academy. 2d. CientOy hundred, loses the last syllable before a sub- stantive. Ex. Cien hombres, a hundred men ; cien mugeres^ a hundred women. 3d. Grande y great, large, loses the last syllable before a substantive which begins with a consonant, whenever it sig- nifies great in vieril, in qualities ; but if it only has the sig- nification of largt in extent ^ in dimensions^ or if the substan- tive that follows it begins with a vowel or h, it loses none of its letters. We therefore say, una gran muger, a great wo- man ; un gran caballo, a noble horse, if to these words,- great, noble, we attach the idea of great in merit, in qualities ; but we must say, una grande casa, a large house ; un gran- de amigo, a great friend ; un grande almirante, a great ad- miral ; un grande odio, a gi-eat hatred. 4th. Santoy saint, loses also the last syllable before a proper name. Ex. San Pedro, San Francisco, &c. We ex- cept however from this rule Santo Domingo, Santo Tomas, Santo Toribio, and Santo Tome. N. B. 1st. It is not necessary, in order that this suppres- sion of letters should take place, that the adjective be imme- diately followed by the substantive ; for, if we must say un hombre, un libroj we must also say, un hdbil hombre , un NOUN'S. 49 huen libro, although in these examples un be separated from its substantive by an adjective. If the substantive is not expressed, the adjective that re- lates to itj does not then lose any letter. Ex. uno 6 dos hombres, one or two men ; uno de esos senores, one of those gentlemen. In the first example, the substantive hombre is understood after uno^ and in the second the word senor ; thus we cannot say un 6 dos hombres, un de esos senores. N. B. 2d. Whenever the word ciento takes after it anoth- er number, it preserves all its letters : we must then say, ciento y dos, ciento y cincOy ciento y nueve hombresy and not cien y dos, cien y cinco, den y nueve hombres, N. B. 3d. In speaking of sovereigns we generally make use of ordinal numbers £ls in English, but the article the is not expressed in Spanish. Ex. Henry the Fourth, Enrique Cuarto ; Ferdinand the Seventh, Fernando Septimo, &c. N. B. 4th. When in English the cardinal numbers are followed by o^clock, hora, and one w^ishes to tell or ask the hour of the day, then the cardinal number must be preceded by the article la before una^ hora is understood, and las be- fore the other numbers, horas being implied, and the expres- sion o'clock, is suppressed ; and if the verb to strike, expres- sed in English, is translated into Spanish, it is rendered by dar, Ex. What o'clock is it ? que hora es ? one o'clock, la una; three o'clock, las tres ; four o'clock, las cuatro ; it has struck fi\e o'clock, las cinco dadas ; it has just struck six o'clock, Im seis acaban de dar ; seven o'clock is about striking, las siete estdn para dar. Twelve o'clock at noon, is translated by las dace, or las dace del dia, and midnight by las doce de la noche, or media noche. In the following examples and others like them, afternoon is transited by de la tarde and in the evening by de la noche. Ex. At fi^ ^^o ' clock in the afternoon, a ^as cinco de la tarde; at eight o'|8^^at ten o'clock in the evening, a las ocho, a las diez de la noche ; at six o'clock in the morning, a la seis de la manana ; at four o'clock in the morning, a las cuatro de la manana, N. B. 5th. The verb it is, taken Impersonally in English in some of the preceding examples and the like, is not im- personal in Spanish ; it agrees on the contrary in number 5 50 PRONOUNS. with the noun hour understood, and the pronoun it^ is never expressed. Ex. It is one o'clock, es la una ; it is two o'clock, son las dos; it is half after three, son las ires y mediae It wants a quarter of four, son las cuatro menos un cuarto. N. B. 6th. In speaking of the days of the month, if we express the word dia^ day, it must be preceded by the arti- cle, and followed by the ordinal or cardinal number, but most commonly by the cardinal. Ex. The twelfth of Janu- ary, el dia doce de Enero. If we suppress the word dia, then we make use of the cardinal number, preceded by the prep- osition a. Ex. The twelfth of January, a doce de Enero, We .also say elprimero, el segundo, <^c. cle Enero^ and then the word dia is understood. This is the way in which letters are dated. Madrid, y Febreto 20 de 1822, Cambridge, 20 de Julio de 1822, Boston^ a l."" de T-bre 1824. CHAPTER V. OF PRONOUNS. Pronouns hold the place of nouns, recall the idea of them, and prevent their repetition, which would render the speech languid. They are divided into personal, possessive, demon- strativey relative, interrogative ^ and indejiniie. OF pronouns personal. Pronouns personal denote persons, or hold the place of persons or personified things. Such, for the first person of the singular, are yo, me, mz, I, me ; and, for that of the plu- ral, 710?, nosotros, nosotras^ we, us. For the second person — Sing. tUy te, ti, thou, thee ; — Plur. vos, vosotros, vosotras, as, ye or you. For the third person. — Sing. masc. ^/, he, him or it. — Masc. plur. ellos, they, them. — Fern. sing. e//a, she or it ; fem. plur. ellas, they or them. — Sing. masc. and fern, le^ to him, to her, him. (Le is of both genders when it is in the dative, and of the masculine only, when in the accusative.) Sing. fem. la, her ; plur. masc. and fem. /es, to them ; plur. masc. las, them ; plur. fem. /as, them. PRONOUNS. 5i There is another pronoun of the tMrd person, which is si^ oneself, se, himself, herself, itself; it is of the three genders. In English oTzese// cannot relate but to the singular; si in Spanish may be employed with both numbers without vary- ing its termination. It is called reflective, because it denotes the relation of a person or thing to him, to her, or itself. Among personal pronouns some are used only of persons, and others are used alik.e of persons and things. Those of the first person are only applied to persons or personified things ; those of the third are indifferently used of persons and things. Pronouns may be nominatives^ and of the direct or indirect regiriien. They are nominatives when they are the subjects of the proposition. In this phrase ; yo hablo^ I speak ; i/o, I, is a pronoun nominative, because it is the subject of the propo- sition. A pronoun is a direct regimen when it is the object of the action expressed by the verb ; and it is an indirect regimen when it is the end of the action expressed by the verb. In these phrases ; Dios le castigard, God will punish him ; mi padre te dard su opinion^ my father will give thee his opin- ion ; le is the direct regimen, because it is the object of the punishment expressed by the verb castigard ; and te put for a ti is the indirect regimen, because, instead of being the object of the action expressed by the verb dard, it is the end of it ; the object is the thing given, that is, his opinion^ and the end is the person to whom the opinion is to be given, that is, to thee. Declension of personal pronouns* PRONOUN OF THE FIRST PERSON. Singular of both genders, Pron, as regimen,* K yo, ^ - - I. G. de mi, - - of me, D. a mi, - - to me, me, - - tome A, 4 mi, - - me, me, - - mt, Ab, de mi, - 'from me. * We give to these pronouns the denomination oi pronouns used as aregimenj (objective pronouns,) because it appears to be more intel- ligible and conformable to true principles. 52 PRONOUNS. Plural masculine. Pron. as Regimen. ^' Ros,^ nosotrosj - we. Cr» de nosotros, - of us. D. 4 nosotros, - to us. nos, - - (o us. ^» 4 nosotrosj - us. nos, - - us. Ab. de nosotros, from us. Plural feminine. N. nosotras, - we. G. de nosotras, - of us. D. ^ nosotras, - to us. nos, - . ^o us. A. 4 nosotras, - us. nos, - - us. Ab. de nosotrasj - from us. SECOND PERSON. Singular of both genders. N. tu,t - - thou. G. deti, - - of thee. £). ^ ti, - - to thee. te, - - to thee. A. 4 tl, - - thee. te, - - thte. Ah. deti, - -from thee. Plural masculine. N. voSjf vosotros, ye or you. G. de vosotrosj - of you. D. 4 vosotros, - to you. os, - - PRONOUNS. 59 Those that relate to several persons, are ; el nuestro^ masc. la nuestra^ fern. sing, los nuestroSy masc. las nuestrasy fem. plural, ours ; el vuestro, masc. la vuestra, fern. sing, los vuestros, masc. las vuestras^iem. plural, yoiu's ; elsuyo^ masc. la sui/a, fem. his, hers, theirs ; los suyos^ masc. las suyasy fem. his, hers, theirs. N. B. These ' pronouns are always preceded by the noun to which they relate, and with which they agree in gen- der and number ; this noun is that which represents the ob- ject possessed, and not the possessor.* The following declension will serve as a rule for those pronouns that are dechned with the article. DECLENSION OF THE PRONOUN, MIO. Singular masculine and feminine. G. D. A. Ah la mia, de la mia, 4 la mia, la mia or a la mia, de la mia, el mio, del mio, al mio, el or al mio, del mio. Plural masculine and feminine. los mios, las mias, de los mios, de las mias, a los mios, a las mias, los mios, or 2b los mios, las mias, or a las mias, de los mios, de las mias. The following pronouns are to be declined manner. Singular masculine and feminine. la tuva. K G. D. J. Ab El tuyo, el suyo, el nuestro, el ^-uestro, el suyo. la Suva, la nuestra, la vuestra la Suva, mine. of mine, to mine. mine. f rom mine. mine, of mine, to mine. mine. from mine. in the same - thine, his, hers. - ours. - yours, theirs. * This rule requires a particular attention because the English most always cause these pronouns to agree with the possessor and not with the object possessed. Ex. Is that your sister's book 9 .Yo, it is mine ; here is hers', hers, pronoun, refers to sister and not to book ; in Span- ish, on the contrary, we must say : es este el libre de su hermana de vmS — jYo, es el mio ; he aqui el sitnjo ; suyo is in the masculine be- cause it refers to libro and not to hermana. 00 PRONOUNS. Plural masculine and feminine. Los tuyos, los suyos, los nuestros, los vuestros, los suyos, i 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 las tuyas, las suyas, las nuestras, - las vuestras, - las suyas, thine. hisyhers. ours, yours theirs. Rule XXXI. These last pronouns, mo, tuyo, Sfc. some- times accompany a substantive, principally in exclamations, or when they are used in addressing a person, but then the substantive precedes the pronoun, and does not take an arti- cle. Ex. Father ! padre mio ! mother ! madre mia ! come, friend, &c. ven^ amigo mio^ Sfc, Rule XXXIL When the verb to be is taken in the sense of to belong^ we use in Spanish as in English the pos- sessive pronoun, mio, mine, tuyoy thine, &c. without the ar- ticle, but this pronoun in Spanish agrees in gender and num- ber with the thing possessed of which we speak. Ex. This book is mine,, este libro es mio ; this house is thine, his, theirs, ours, &c. esta casa es iuya^ suya, nuestra, ^c. N. B. 1st. When the verb to be, taken in the sense of to belong, is followed or preceded by another pro- noun or by a noun, this noun or pronoun must be put in the genitive. Ex. This book is Mr.B's, este libro es del senor B ; this horse is my brother's, este caballo, es de mi hermano ; whose house is this, de quien es esta casa ? (see the pronoun cuyo, Rule XXXIV.) N.B. 2d. This same observation must be regarded for the possessive pronoun yours, after the verb to be, when instead of vuestro, we should wish to employ vm. and vms, (vuestra MERCED and vuestra s MERCEDES,) your favour and your favours. Thus, in this phrase ; this book is yours ; if I ex- press yours by de vm,, I must say, este libra es de i;?w., sing. de usiedes, plural. Rule XXXIII. To translate of mine, of thine, of his, &c. the Spaniards use commonly the possessive pronouns mio, iuyo, sttyo, <^c. placed as in English, but without the preposi- tion of, Ex. A brother of his, un hermano suyo ; a friend of mine, un amigo mio. PRONOUNS. 61 OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. Pronouns demonstrative indicate, and place, as it were, under the eye, the person or the thing of which they hold the place. They are divided into three kinds. The following pronoun designates the object that is near the person that speaks. Singular masculine and feminine, Este, esta, - - - - this. Plural masculine and feminine. EstoSj estas, - - - - these. Neuter. Esto, - - - this, this thing, any thing. If the object is more distant from the person that speaks, than from the one to whom the speech is addressed^* we make use of the following pronoun ; Singular masculine and feminine. Ese, esa, - - ^- - that. Plural masculine and feminine. Esos, esas, - - - . those. Neuter. Eso, - - that^ that things any thing. The pronouns that follow, express a distant object, both from the person who speaks, and from him to whom the speech is addressed. Singular masculine and feminine. Aquel, el, aquella, la, - he that, she that. Plural masculine and feminine. Aquellos, los, aquellas, las, - they, those. Neuter. Aquello, ello, lo, - - that, it There are also three other pronouns which are com- pounded of the preceding and of the adjective otro, otra, other. Viz. 62 PRONOUNS. •Masculine and Feminine, Singular and Plural, Estotro, estotra^ estotros, estotras, Esotro, esotra, esotros, esotras, Aquel otro, aquel- aquellos otros, a- ' la otra^ quellas otras^ Neuter, Estotro, esotroj aquello otro. this other y these others, that other ^ those others, that other, those others, this and that other. He vchoj she wko^ they who, or that^ are translated by 61 que or quien, la que, los or las que^ or by aquel que,^ aquella que, aquellos or aquellas que. What or that which are translated by lo que^, aquello que. OP PRONOUNS RELATIVE. Pronouns relative are those that relate to a noun or pro- noun which precedes. Some take the article, others do not. The following do not take the article. Singular masculine and feminine. que^ quien/* - - - - toho^ that, which. de quien, ' ' ' " f^f whom, whose, 8fc. a quien, ------ ^o ivhom, a quien or que, whom. de quien, - from whom. Plural masculine and feminine. N. G. D. A. Ah. N, G. D, A, Ah, que, quienes,? de quienes, ^ quienes, a quienes, de quienes, Lo que, de que, ^ que. JSTeuter, who, that, which. of whom, whose, Sfc, to whom. whom, - from whom. that which, what. of what, to what* * Quitn and quienes are applied only to persons and personified things ; que both to persons and things. t We also use quien in the plural number, says the Grammar of the Academy, and it gives the following examples. Los primer os con QUIEN topamos eran los gimnosojistas, the first whom we met were the gymnosophists. jlqueUos siete sabios a qcien tanto venerd la Grecia, those seven sages so much venerated by the Greeks, PRONOUNS. 63 N. B. Whose is translated by the pronoun cuyo, cuya^ cuyos, cuyas, following the gender and number of the thing possessed, by which this pronoun cuyo must be immediately followed, if it is relative, but from which it is commonly separated by the verb, wdien it is interrogative. It always agrees with the object possessed, and never with the pos- sessor. CUYO, CUYA, CUYOS, CUYAS. Rule XXXIV. The pronoun cuyo is relative and inter- rogative, and is used for whose, of which ; but care should be taken to observe, as has been already said, that it agrees with the thing possessed, and not with the possessor, and is applicable in Spanish to persons as well as to things. Ex. Whose book is this? cuyo es este libro ? Whose pens are those, cuyas son esas plumas ? She is a lady whose qualities are known, es una senora cuyas prendas son conosidas, Lon- don the streets of which are so wide, Londres cuyas calks son tan anchas. Rule XXXV. When the pronoun tha% preceded by a noun or pronoun to which it relates, may be rendered by of whom, in whom, by whoniy for whom, &c. it must be ex- pressed by de quien, a quien, en quien, por quien Szc. Ex, It is of oneself that one ought to be afraid, de si mismo es de quien se ha de tener miedo, that is, of whom &c. It is to God that we must have recourse, es a Dios a quien es precise de acudiry that is, to whom, &c. ANOTHER PRONOUN RELATIVE. This pronoun is declined with the article. Singular masculine and feminine. N. el cual. la cual. wMgIi G. del cual. de la cual. ofivhich D, al cual. a la cual, to which J, el cual, al cual. la cual, a la cual, which Ah, del cual. de la cual. 'fromwhich. Plural ma sculine and feminine. N. los cuales. las cuales. which. G. de los cuales. de las cuales. - of which. D. a los cuales. a las cuales, - to which. A. los cuales, a los cuales, las cuales, a las cuales which. Ah, de los cuales, - de las cuales. from which. 04 PRONOUNS. OF PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVE. Pronouns interrogative are those wliich serve to interro- gate ; they are declined without the article. Singular masculine and feminine. N. quien. - - - - - - tvho. G. de quien, - - - - - of who?n. D. 4 quien^ - - to ichom,^ A, quien, a quien, - - - - whom. Ab. de quien, - - - - - - fro7n whom. Plural masculine and feminine. / quienes, &€. &c. - . loho. - Neuter, N. que. . - ' what. G. de que^ - - of what. D. a que. - - to what. A, que. - - - - ichat. Ab, de que, - , - from what. Which is translated by cual, cuaJes^ of both genders. Ex. You have read these books ; which of the two do you pre- fer ? Vm. ha leido eslos libros ; cual de los dos prefer e ? What is rendered by que of both genders and numbers. Ex. What book do you read, que libro lees? What o'clock is it ? que hora es? What fruits will you buy ? que f rut as comprard vm, ? OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. These pronouns are thus called, because they expre'ss aa object vague and indeterminate. All those that are placed in this class are not always pronouns, strictly so called, but become adjectives when they are joined with nouns, and present some particulars which it is essential to make familiar. * See Rule XXXfV for the pronoun cinjOy-a.-QSj-as.. PRONOUNS. 65 Xobody, - - ^ - - None, - - - - - No, not any, (followed by a noun,) Not one. nadie^ ninguno. ninguno, ninguna. ninguno^ ninguna, ni uno, ni unui Neither, Both, Each, every, Each one, Every body One another, Of others, — — y — — ^. ni uno ni otro^ ni nna ni otra ; plural, ni itnos ni otros^ ni iinas ni otras^ amhos-as ; nno y otro^iina y otra : plu- ral, unos y otros, nnas y otras, cada, cada uno, cada una, todos. uno otro. una otra; plural, unos otros, Unas otras. de otro, de ofros. To others, a otro^ a otros ; and if of others is govern- ed by a substantive, it is then translated by ageno. agena, agenos, agenasy according to the gender and number of the noun to which it relates ; as, the property of oth- ers, el bien ageno, ^'c, alguien, alguno. alguno-a^ os-as. Some one, somebody. Some, (relating to a noun,) Some, r always] oin- > ed to a noun H ' unos, unas, algunos, algunas. Many, several, - mitchos, muclias. varios, varias, Hhosoever, whatsoever, cualquiera/ip\ma.\,cualesquiera," ' "' VVhoever, whosoever, . - qui en qui era, \vu^^^^^^ ■ - - - siempre que, VV hatever, - . aialquiera-que ; por mas que, cualqiiiera cosa que ; por mas que, ^ However, howsoever, Even, yet. > ^ Such a one. People say. People assure, fulano, aiiu, ; zutano, a, se dice, se asegura. OBSERVATIONS UPON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Rule XXXVI. Jny one and any body in interrogative pnrases, or m phrases implying doubt, must be expressed Itfv^e^ofn. ^^'T^^^^^^^^ ^^^" '^^'^ who know the motives of my conduct is there any one who ha^ blamed it ^ 00 VEIlBS. de todos lo's que conocen las motivos de mi^ acetones^ hay acaso itnoy 6 J alguno que las haya condenado 1 I doubt that any one has blamed it^ dudo que alguno las haya condenado, I doubt that an?/ one be as wise ashe^c/wc?o que alguno sea tan sabio como ^ly ^c. This office suits him better than ani/ one dse ; este empleo le conviene mejor que a cualquier otro. Rule XXXVII. Nobody ^ no person whatever is transla- ted by ningunOy nadie ; and nothing whatever is translated by nada. Ex. Nobody whatever has spoken ill of you to me^ NADIE me ha hahlado mat de vm. Whatever genius one may have, one cannot^ without application^ excel in any thing whatever, yor mas ingenio que uno tenga eu nada putde sobresalir sin aplicacion. Rule XXXVIII. In Spanish the following pronouns nobody J noiie^ not one^ neiiher^ nothing ; nadie ^ ninguno^ ni uno, ni uno ni otro, nada, require that the verb be preceded by the negative no^ when they are placed after it; but this negative is suppressed when they precede it. Ex. He can- not excel in anj^ things en nada puede sobresalir^ or no puede aobresalir en nada; the first construction is the most elegant, N. B. The adverb jamas^ never^, follows the same rule. CHAPTER VI. OP VERBS. The verb is that part of speech which is essentially the bond of our thoughts, the soul of all our reasonings, and the only one that has the property of pointing out the relation that they have with the present, past and future. Its office is to express actions, passions and situations. There are six kinds of verbs, to wit ; the active, passive, neuter, reflective, reciprocal and impersonal. The active verb is that of which the regimen is direct, or after which one may put alguno, alguna cosa, some one, some thing. Amar, to love, is an active verb, because we may say, amar a alguno, to love some one, amar la virtud, to love virtue, and because in these two phrases the regimen is direct, buscavy to seek, is also an active verb, because we \EKBS. 6T may say, huscar a alguno, buscar alguiia cosa, to seek some- body, to look for something. The passive verb is that which is formed from the active^ takes the direct regimen to form its subject, and always is followed by one of these prepositions, roR or de ; as, el honi- bre virtuoso es amadu de todos^ the virtuous man is loved by every body. The neuter verb is that after which we cannot put some one, nor some thing, alguno, alguna cosa, Exisih\ dormir, to exist, to sleep, are neuter verbs, because we cannot say : dormir a alguno, dorniir alguna casa, to sleep some one, to sleep something. The reflective verb is that of which the subject and the regimen are the same person, or, that which is conjugated with two pronouns of the same person, expressed or under- stood ; Arrepentirse, to repent, is a reflective verb, because in order to conjug^ate it, we must make use of two pronouns, and say ; yo me arrtpiento, tit te arrepientes, el se arrepi^ elite, &c. or, me arrepiento, te arrepientes, se arrepiente, Sfc. (and then yo, tu, el are understood,) I repent, thou repentest, he repents, &;c. The reciprocal verb * is that which expresses the action of several subjects that act one upon the other. £x. Los verdaderos amigos deben amarse y servirse unos a otros, true friends must love and serve one another. The impersonal verb is that which is used, in all its tenses only in the third person of the singular. Tronar, to thun- der, is an impersonal verb, because it has in each tense only the third person. We say ; Truena,tronaba, trono, tronard, &c. it thunders, it did thunder, it thundered, it will thunder ; but we cannot say ; I thunder, thou thunderest, we thunder, unless it be in a figurative sense. Verbs may be regular, irregular, or defective. The regular verbs, in the Spanish language, are those of which the radical letters are always the same, and of v/hich ^ In order that the verb should clearly express i ciprocity, it i§ often necessary to add to it the following words, uno a otro, mutua' riierde, a porfia, one another, mutually, in emulation of one another. In thi- pVira>e, Cicero y Anionio no dejaban de alabarse uno a otro^ Cicero and Anthony did not cease to praise one another ; if we should not pji ; ,. a otro there would be an equivocation which would leave a doubt of the reciprocity of the action. 08 VERBS. the terminations are, in all the tenses, conformable to those of the verb that serves as a model for them. We call those irregular, which vary in the radical letters, or which do not agree, in all the tenses, with the termina- tions of the verb, that serves as a model. N. B. We understand by radical Utters those which precede the termination of the infinitive. We reckon only three conjugations in Spanish, the first has the infinitive ter- minated in ar, as amarj to love ; the second has it in er, as temerj to fear ; the third has it in ir, as subir, to go up. In these verbs all the letters that precede ir^ er, and 2r, that is, «/«, tern^ and suh^ are radical, and those that follow them in all the tenses, as well as in all the persons, form the termina- tions. Lastly, we call those verbs defective, that Want certain tenses or certain persons, w^hich use does not admit. There are besides auxiliary/ verbs, so called, because they serve to conjugate the others. The Spanish language reck- ons three, to wit ; kaber and teller^ to have ; and ser^ to be. OF CONJUGATION. To conjugate a verb, is to collect or recite all its termina- tions, as ; amOj araas^ a?na, &c. I love, thou lovest, he loves, &c. ; amaba, amabasy amabaj &c. I did love, thou didst love, he did love, &c. These different terminations form modes, tenses, numbers and persons, OF MODES. Modes are difterent manners of using the verb. There are five, infinitive ^ indicative ^ conditional ^ imperative and subjunctive. The infinitive expresses indefinitely, and in a general manner the action or state that the verb designates. The infinitive is consequently neither susceptible of number or person ; as, amar^ temer^ snbir^ to love, to fear, to go up. The indicative points out and indicates in a direct and absolute manner w^hat we aifirm of a person or thing ; as, amo y temo at Dios que me crid^ y cuya justicia recompensard a los buenos^ y castigard a los malos ; 1 love and fear the God w4io created me, and whose justice will reward the good, and punish the wicked. The conditional is the manner of expressing the afiirma- tion depending upon a condition, as ; yo leerla^ si tuviera VERBS. ^-^ libros, I should read if I had books ; yo hubiera escno una carta antes de comer, si nohubiese tenido a visila dd senor Conde de Floridablanca, I should have wntten aletter before dinner, if I had not had a visit from Count de blorMlanca. The imperative expresses the action of commanding, pray- ing or exhorting. This mode has but one tense^tliat desig- nais the preset in relation to the action of commandmg, and the fature in relation to the thing commanded , as, lieste libro, give me this book. Venid manana, c.me to- morrow. Hdgame vm. el favor de. ..dome the favour of. . . This tense ha°s no first person in the singular, because we do not command ourselves ; but it has in the plural, because then it is rather others than ourselves that we address. The subjunctive is a mode which, in order to make sense, requires to be preceded by another verb, expressed or un- derstood, on which it depends. It depends upon i^ becau e it makes sense with and would "ot^^f^ff^.^^V. he These words; quisiera que vimese, I should wish that he came, make 'sense; but these, gue r.mese, that he came, alone and separate, would not make any. OF TENSES. We shall follow, in the division of tenses, the method re- ceived by the most esteemed and approved grammarians; and in order to obviate the very serious difficulties which the three futures and the three conditionals of the bpanisli verbs present, we have thought it best to aeviate from the plan followed by the Academy of Madrid. This plan may be excellent for the Spaniards who jom, to the study ot grammar, a constant practice ; but it is too obscure tor tor- eigners, as it deviates too much from the usage of other lan- guages, and contains rules which are not sufficiently particu- lar. Therefore, instead of comprising the two futures con- junctive, the second and third conditional in the subjunctive, we shall place the two futures in the indicative, we shall piake a mode of the conditional that will have three termi- nations, and the subjunctive will have the tenses that it com- tnonlv has in other languages. This order aas appeared to us the most proper to render obvious the relations that exist between the Spanish and English languages. (V VERBS. OF THE TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. The tenses of the infinitive are the present, the preterite* the gerund and the participle. The present of the infinitive always designates the present time relative to the preceding verb ; as, le veo correrj I see him run ; le oi cantar, I heard him sing ; le vere bailar. I shall see him dance. The preterite on the contrary denotes the past time rela- tive to the preceding 'V6rb ; as, creia haberle visto, I thought I had seen him. The gerund designates 1st. the state of the ^subject, the reason or foundation of the action, as in these phrases : canta durmiendo, he sings in his sleep ; el emperador de Ale- mania, temiendo que la pa? no durase mucho tiempo, licenciS muy pocas tropas, the emperor of Germany, fearing that the peace would not last long, disbanded only a few troops. In the first example, durmiendo, expresses the state of the sub- ject ; and in the second, temiendo, expresses the reason or grounds of the action of the emperor. 2d. It denotes a manner or a mean of attaining an end, and then it is almost always preceded by the preposition en, in. Ex. No espere el homhre ser jamas feliz en dejandose ar- rastrar de sus pasiones, no lo puede ser sino en domindndolas. Let man never expect to be happy in giving himself up to his passions, he can only be so by subduing them. 3d. It serves to express a condition. Ex. Siendo esto asi, volvert d Francia, this being so, I shall return to France. 4th. It is frequently used v/ith the verb estar, to be, to show in a more positive manner that an action is, was, has been or will be done at the very time of which we speak. Ex. Esfd escribiendo, he is writing ; estaba escribiendo, he v/as writing ; estard escribiendo, he will be writing. The participle is thus called, because it participates in the nature of the verb and that of the adjective. It is of the na- ture of the verb, because it has its signification and regimen. It is of the nature of an adjective, because it expresses a quality. The participles are divided into present and past ; into the present ; ^s,amante, obedienie, oyente, into jrst ; RS,am-,a'o^ obedeciao, oido. The participles of the present have the ter- VERBS. 71 mlnation in ante, as cnnaiUe, for the first conjugation. Those of the second and third have it in ente, as obedient^-, oyente, 1 he participles present are in use only in part of the verbs ; the greater part beinq; rather verbal adjectives than participles, because they have not a regimen as their verbs. Ex. Oijevte, hearing ; leijentt, reading; are verbal adjectives, because we cannot say, oyente el sermon, leijente libros, usage not permitting us to give a regimen to these participles. The participles past of regular verbs have their termina- tions in ado, for the first conjugation ; and in ido, for the second and third. Those that do not follow this rule are irregular, and are found in their place in the alphabetical list which is subjoined. There are some verbs that have two participles past, the one regular and the other irregular. The first is always emplo\'ed with the auxiliary verb haher, to have ; the second is never joined to it, but follows the rule of adjectives, ex- cept i'lgerto, grafted ; preso, caught ; prescrito, prescribed ; provisto. provided ; and 7-0^0, broken ; which are used with the auxiliary haber just as well as the regular participle. VERBS THAT HAVE TWO PARTICIPLES. Part, regular. Part, irregular Ahitar^ to surfeit, ahitado, ahito. Bendeclr, to bless, bendecido. bendito. Compeler, to compel, compelido. compulse. Concluir, to conclude, concluido. concluso. Confundir, to confound, confundido, confuse. Convencer, to convince, convencido, convicte. Convertir, to convert. convertido, converse. Despertar, to awake, despertado, despierte. Elegir, to choose, to elect , elegido, electo. Enjugar, to wipe. enjugado, enjuto. Escluir, to exclude, escluido. escluso. Espeler, to expel. espelido, espulse. Espresar, to express, espresado, espreso. Estinguir, to extinguish. estinguido, estinto. Fijar, to fix, fijado. fijo. Hartar, to satiate. hartado, harte. Incluir, to include, incluido, incluse. Incurrir, to incur, incurrido. in curse. Insertar, to insert, insertadoj inserto. 72 VERBS. Invertirj fo transpose, invertidoj ivnerso. Ingerir, . to ingraft, ingeridoj ingerto. Juntar, to join, to Clause, juntado, junto. Maldecir^ maldecidoj maldito. Manifestao:, to manifest, manifestadoj manifiesto Marchitar^ to wither, marchitado^ march ito. Omitir, to omit, omitido. omiso. Oprimir^ to oppress, oprimido. opreso. Perfecionarj to perfect, perfecionadoj perfecto. Prender, to seize, to arrest, prendidoj preso. Prescribir, to prescribe, prescribidoj prescrito. Proveer, to provide, proveidoj ' provisto. Recluir, to confine. recluido, recluso. Romper^ to break. rompido. roto. Soltarj to loosen or release, soltado, suelto. Suprimirj to suppress. suprimidoj supreso. There are other participles, the termination of which is passive, and the signification active ; such as the following. Acostumbrado, Agradecido, Atrevido, Bien cenado, Bien comido, Bien hablado, Callado, Cansado, Comedido, Deseperado, Disimulado, Entendido, Esforzadoj, Fingido, Leido, Medido; Miradoj Moderadoj Negado, Ocasionadoj Osado, Parado accustomed. gratefid. bold. who has supped well. who has dined well who speaks well. discreet, tiresome, prudent. in despair. dissembling, hypocritical, intelligent. brave, intrepid. deceitful, artful. who has read much, well informed. cautious, circumspect, prudent, regardful. moderate. destitute of intelligence. quarrelsome. daring, undaunted. sloic, heavy. VERBS. 75 Pai'ecido, - resembling. Partido, - liberal^ who shares what he has. Pausado, - deliberate. Porfiado, - obstinate , stubborn. Preciado, - vain , presumptuous. Precavido, - cautious. Presumido, - presumptuous. Recatado, - considerate^ discreet. Sabido, - learned. Sacudido, - rough^ untractable. Sentido, - sensitive^ susceptible. Sufrido, - enduring^ patient. Trascendido;> - penetrating^ keen minded. Valido, - confident, favourite. All the participles have also a passive signification, and it is the sense of the phrase that determines which of the two significations we must adopt. We see, for example, that in these expressions, honihre leido^ a well read man ; muger leida ; libro leido, a book that has been read; cartaleida : the participles lei do ^ lei da ^ have an active signification, when they refer to hombre and to muger ; and passive, when they refer to libro and to carta. Thus, if I say ; Pedro es un hombre cansado and Pedro estd cansado de trabajar, we see by the different use of the two verbs, es, estd (See upon these two verbs the Rule XLIX,) that the first of these phrases signifies, Peter is a tiresome man, and the second, Peter is tired of working:. OP THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. The Spaniards reckon eight tenses in the indicative, which are the presenty the imperfect, the preterite definite, the preterite indefinite, the pretente antenor, the pluperfect, the future absolute, and the future anterior. We shall place in continuation of these two futures the future conjunctive simple, and the future conjunctive compound (though it seems they should belong to the subjunctive or conjunctive mode.) so as the better to compare them together : and exhibit the difference between them. This method will give ten tenses to the indicaiive. 74 VERBS. The present denotes that a thing is, or is done at the mo- ment we speak ; as, soy, I am ; amo, I love ; subo, I go up. The imperfect denotes the past with relation to the pres- entj and makes known that a thing was present in a past time ; as, yo escribia, or estaba escribiendo cuando mi herma" no llegd^ I did write, or I was writing when my brother arrived. The imperfect serves also to denote habitual actions, or actions often repeated in a past time; as yo iba a la comedia tl ano pasado dos veces cada semanay I went (used to go) last year to the play twice a week. It serves also to express the qualities, either gpod, or bad, of men who are no more ; as, ^eron era un tirano^ Nero was a tyrant ; Enrique cuarto era un rey ben^Jico^ Henry the fourth was a beneficent king. The preterite may designate, either in a precise or only in a vague and indeterminate manner, that a thing has been done. Thence arise two preterites ; the preterite definite and the preterite indefinite. The preterite definite denotes a thing done at a time of which nothing more remains ; as, esciibi ayer^ I wrote yesterday ; comi el lunes iiltimo en casa dtl senor Pitty I dined on Monday last at the house of Mr. Pitt. The preterite indefinite denotes a thhig done at a time designated in an indeterminate manner, or at a time past but of which something yet remains ; as, la muerte de tu herma- no me ha afiigido mucho^ the death of thy brother has afflicted me much ; he recibido esta semana muchisimas visitas, I have received this week a great many visits. These two preterites cannot be indifferently used one for the other, it is essential to perceive clearly the difference that exists between them. In order that we may use the preterite definite, it is at least necessary that the time elapsed of which we speak should be a lohole day ; as, fui ayer d la comedia^ I v/ent yesterday to the play ; vi at rey la semana pasada, I saw the king last week. We cannot therefore say, €stndi6 esta manana ; escribi hoy, esta semana, este mes, este anoy (Sfc. ; I studied this morning, I wrote to day, this week, this month, this year, &c. because the morning, the day, the week, the month, the year, are not entirely elapsed. On the contrary, in order that we may use the preterite indefinite^ there must yet remain some part of the time past of which VERBS. 75 we speak ; as, he visto esta manana al 'primer pinior del rey de Espana, I have seen this morning the jfirst painter of the king of Spain ; hemos visto grandes eventos en este siglo^ we have seen great events in this century. There is still another preterite which is called preterite anterior^ because it expresses a thing past before another in a time past ; as, despues que huhe visto al reij^ sail de Madrid^ after I had seen the king, I went out of Madrid.— This pre- terite is only used after the adverbs of time, despues que, luego que^ asi que^ cuando, after, as soon as, so soon as, when. The pluperfect is compounded of two past tenses. It de- notes a thing not only as past in itself, but also as past in re- gard to another thing which is also past ; as, yo hahia ya ce- nado cuando entrOy I already had supped when he came in. N. B. The futures, as well as the conditionals, present- ing to strangers considerable difficulty, we request them to pay to the following rules a particular attention. OF THE FUTURES. There are in the Spanish language four futures ; the fu- ture simple or absolute ; the future compound or anterior ; the future conjunctive simple, and the future conjunctive compound. The future absolute denotes that a thing will be, or will be done at a time which is yet to come ; as, sf, arnar^ siem- pre al Dios que me crio, yes, I shall always love the God who created me. N. B. This future has often the signification of the impe' rative, in the second person ; as, amards a Bios de todo tu corazon^ thou shalt love God with all thy heart ; no robards, thou shalt not steal. The future anterior denotes the future with relation to the past, making known that, at the time a thing will happen, another shall be past; as, habri acabado mi carta cuando tal 6 talcosa suceda^ I shall have finished my letter when such or such a thing happens. These two futures differ in this, that in the future absolute the time may or may not be determined ; as, ir6^ 6 irt manor na a Bristol, I shall go, or I shall go to-morrow to Bristol. On the contrary, in the future anterior, the period is neces- VERBS. sarily determined ; as, hahr^ comido cuando vmMegiiey I shall have dined when you arrive. The future conjunctive^ which is so called, because it is always joined either to a conjunction or an adverb, or to a pronoun that governs it, serves to denote a future action al- ways expressed in English by the present of the indicative when the verb is preceded by the conjunction sz, if; some- times by the present of the subjunctive when the verb is pie« ceded by a conjunction that governs it in this mode, and of- ten by the future absolute or anterior. Rules for using the future conjunctivae. Rule XXXIX. AVe use the future conjunctive when the verb is governed by the conjunction S2, if ; and when the phrase expresses a future action ; as, 720 te digo que vivas, ill que mueras ; vive, si pudieres, y muere, si no pudieres rnasy I do not tell thee to live or to die ; live, if thou canst ; die, if thou canst not do better. Rule XL. We make use of the future conjunctive whenever the verb is preceded by one of the pronouns el que, los que J la que, las que^ lo que ; ^l-que, la-que^ los-que^ 6;c, or by the adjective cuanto, a, os, as, used in the sense of iodo lo que, toda la que, todos los que, todas las que ; de quien (a pronoun relative) when it is used in the sense of one of the above pronouns ^l que, los que, 6^c, and finally, when the verb is governed by the adverb cuando, if these pronouns, and this adjective and adverb are themselves preceded by another verb expressing an action, which the remainder of the phrase causes to depend on choice or chance ; as, elige, pues, de estos dos partidos il que mas te agradare, choose then of these two measures that which will please thee most. — Tenemos ya dtterniinado hacer en ohsequio suyo todo Lo auE alcanzaren nutstras fuerzas, we have resolved to do in his behalf all that shall be in our power. — Solo po- drdn ser delincuentes, los que de vosotros nos juzgaren delincuentes, those only can be guilty, who, among you, shall judge us guilty, iliaw^/a, lo que g ust ares. ..r^enueva, a nues- tro buen ami^o mifino afecto, y a cuantos se acordaken- de mi, dirds de mi parte todo lo que quisieres, command what you please — renew to our good friend my sincere at- tachment, and say from me all that you plq^iSQ to all those VERBS. 77 who shall remember me. (Padre de isla.) VmAeerd este libroy cuando quisiere^ you will read this book when you please. The compound tense of the future conjunctive follows the same rules. N. B. 1st. The present of the subjunctive may be used in almost every one of the above mentioned cases, instead of the future conjunctive. 2d. After the conjunction si, if, the verb expressing a fu- ture action is most frequently put in the future conjunctive. OF THE CONDITIONAL. This mode has in the Spanish language three simple and three compound tenses, the terminations of which are in rfa, ra and se. We shall call the three first conditionals present^ and the three others conditionals past. The conditional present denotes that a thing would be, or would be done in the present time under certain conditions ; as, yo leeria, si tuviera or tuviese libros, I would read if I had books. The conditional past denotes that a thing would have been in a time past under certain conditions ; as, hubiera ido aijer a la comedian si hubiese estado bueno. I should have gone yesterday to the play, if I had been well. Rules for the use of the conditional tetises. Rule XLI. The first conditional, the termination of which is ria, may be used v/henever the verb is not governed by any conj;inction ; which is the case with one of the mem- bers in all conditional propositions ; as, leeria todo el dia, si mi existencia no dependiera or dependiese de mi trabajo, I should read the whole day, if my support did not depend upon my labour. Elnumero de lospohres noseria tan gran de^ si fuera or fuese menor tl de los avaros, the number of poor would not be so great, if that of misers were less considera- ble. RriLE XLII. The second conditional, the termination of which is ra, and the third which is terminated in se^ are used wmm 78 VERBS. whenever the verb is governed by a conditional conjunction ; aSj siy if; shio, unless; aunque^ though ; bitn que, although ; dado quey granting that, &c. or by an interjection expressing a desire : Ex. Aunque hubiera or hubiese J3a2, though peace should take place. ; Ojald puera or fuese cierto ! Would to God it were certain ! If there be in the second member of these sentences, another conditional, we should make use of the first; as, Si hubiera, or hubiese 6z^ewa/^, seria mayor la solidez de los contratos. If there should be good faith, the solidity of contracts would be greater. Rule XLIII. The second conditional is used with ele- gance after the interrogative pronouns, when we use it with an exclamation, or to express surprise. Ex. Quien lo creye- RA? quien lo imaginara? who would believe it? who would imagine it? ^Sin el auxilio de laescritura^drgano de todas las ciencias, que hubiera en el mundo sino ignorancia ? with- out the aid of writing, the organ of all the sciences, what would there be in the world, but ignorance ? Rule XLIV. We use the second or third conditional after cuando, though, and after the pronouns ^l que, los que^ la que^ Sfc, and after cuanto, a, os, a.s, (mentioned in Rule XL. when speaking of the future conjunctive,) when they them- selves are preceded by a verb expressing an action, which the remainder of the phrase causes to depend on choice or chance ; as, le dige que iomase, en mi huerta todo lo que, or cuanto quisiera, I told him to take in my garden all that or whatever he should wish. Prometid darme el dint- TO QUE T/o NECESiTARA or NECESiTASE, he promised to give me the money that I might want. Rule XLV. When a conditional phrase does not begin with a conjunction ; such as, sz, aunque , luego que, &c., we may make use of the first and second conditional, and say ; forluna seria or fuera que Uoviese ; hueno seria or puera que lo mandasen. (Grammar of the Academy.) But in such a case if there should be another conditional in the second member of the phrase, this last must take the third termina- tion, as in the preceding examples. It is even necessary to observe that in general, when a phrase begins with the sec- ond conditional and the first cannot be applied to the second VERBS. 79 member,* we must have recourse to the third, and not re- peat the second ; if, on the contrary, it begins with the third, we must, instead of repeating it in the second member, make use of the second ; as, obligado me viera yo sin duda a enmudecer, 6 me coxtentara con ser el debil eco de sus elevadas cldusulas, si los nuevos progresos de la Academia no ABRiESEN nuevo campo de asuntos al ingenio, no ofreciesen a la elocuencia nuevas mieses, S^'c. I should, without doubt, find myself obliged to keep silence, or content myself with being the feeble echo of his eloquent speeches, if the new progress of the Academy did not open to genius new sub- jects, and offer to eloquence new harvests, &c. N. B. 1st. Whenever the conditional is expressed by means of the conjunction sf, the verb that it governs is in English in the imperfect of the subjunctive, and this imper- fect is always tianslated in Spanish by one of the two con- ditionals, according to the rules stated above, when the con- junction expresses a future condition ; if on the contrary it expresses one already past, the verb is put in Spanish in the same tense as in English. Ex. Si yo fuera rico, socorreria a los pobres^ if I were rich I would assist the poor ; si 61 era * Though Rule XLV. be extracted and faithfully translated from the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, we think it might lead to er- ror, if we should not give it a little more clearness. We therefore observe, 1st. that a conditional phrase mustcontain two propositions; the one principal, and the other subordinate. We call a principal proposition that after which we place the conjunction, and a subor- dinate proposition that which is placed after the conjunction. Each of those propositions may contain several members. In this phrase ; seria recompensado, n fuera diligentey he would be rewarded, if he were diligent ; he would be rewarded \s the principal proposi- tion. In the following, seria recompensado y todos le estimariart, si estudiara con mas atencion y fuera mas amante de la verdad, he would be rewarded and every body would esteem him, if he should study with more attention and were more fond of truth ; each of these prop- ositions contains two members. 2d. that the Academy, in speaking of the second member, understands the whole subordinate proposition; for, if it contains several members, the same conditional must be used in each one of them ; it is the same with the principal proposi- tion, as is seen in the example stated in Rule XLV. obligado me viera, ^^c, the first proposition of which terminates with these words, a sus elevadas clausulas^ and the second begins &t si los nuevos progresos. In the two members of the principal proposition, the verbs are in the second conditional, and in the subordinate proposition they are in the third. 80 VEPvBS. pohre el ano pasado^ no era culpa mia^ if he was poor last year, it was not my fault. N. B. 2d. It must be seen by the preceding rules and ex- ample s^that the second conditional is frequently used to hold the place of the first and third ; for we may say indifferently^ eltiernpo pudiera or podria ser mejor ; hice que viniera or viNiESE. But it is not the same with the first and third ; they are so opposed that one cannot be used for the other. Therefore, to translate this phrase ; I should wish to go to Seville, we may say; yo querria or quisiera ir d Sevilla, but not yo quisiese ir a Se villa. The conditionals past follow the same rules a^ the condi- tionals present, and though the verb governed by the con- junction si should in English be in the pluperfect of the in- dicative, it must in Spanish be put in the second or third conditionals past. Ex. Si lo hubiera or hubiese sabido^ if I had known it, or had I known it. USE OF THE imperative. Rule XL VI. The use of this mode in Spanish is not entirely the same as in English. In the latter language, it serves not only to command, pray, and exhort, but also to forbid ; the Spaniards, on the contrary, express the prohibi- tion by means of the present of the subjunctive, and some- times by the future. Ex. No hahlesy do not speak; no me respondas, do not answer me ; 7io mates ; no maiards ; do not kill, thou shalt not kill. N. B. The^rs^ person plural of the imperative is always like the j^rs^ of the plural of the subjunctive present. USE OF THE subjunctive. This mode has four tenses, the present, the imperfect, the preterite and the pluperfect ; it expresses, as the indicative, the present^ past, and future. Rules for using the tenses of the subjunctive. As it is impossible to establish well defined rules to make known in a sure manner the use of the tenses of the subjunc- tive, we cannot pretend to determine every case in which we must make use of them ; but we will endeavour to es- VERBS. 81 tablish rulesj which will obviate the greatest part of the diffi- culties. Rule XLVII. The verb that follows the conjunction que^ that ; must be put in the indicative, when the verb preceding it expresses affirmation in a direct, positive and independent manner ; but it must be put in the subjunctive when the preceding verb expresses doubt, surprise, fear, admiration, uncertainty, desire, hope, will, permission, prohibition and command. Thus we say ; se que Esxa malo, I know that he is sick ; los ateistas dicen que no hay Dios^ the atheists say that there is no God ; because the verb se and dicen express a direct and positive affirmation. But we must say ; no creo or dudo que este malo, I do not believe or I doubt that he is sick. Los ateistas quieren que no haya Dios^ the atheists wish that there may not be a God. Deseo que venga^ I do- sire that he may come. Jle admiro que no haya llegadoy I am surprised that he is not arrived ; because in these phra- ses the verbs preceding the conjunction express a doubt, desire or surprise. N. B. After Ojald^ God grant, an adverb always expres- sing a desire, the verb is put in the subjunctive. Rule XL VIII. The relatives que^ quien^ cuyo, a^-oSj-as^ govern the subjunctive, when the phrase is interrogative or negative, or when it expresses a doubt, desire or condition. Ex. No conozco una sola muger, cuya alma sea mas sensible que la de la senora N., I do not know a woman whose soul is more sensible than that of Madam N. Remark. See, 1st. the N. B. in continuation of the rules relative to the use of the tenses of the future conjunctive and the rules that relate to it, (page 77th ;) the rules relative to the use of the tenses of the conditional ; and 3d. under the head of conjunctions, those that govern the subjunctive. OP THE PERSONS AND NUMBERS OF VERBS. Yerbs have three persons. The pronouns personal are their characteristics. The first person is that which speaks ; as, yo amo^ nosotros or nosotras amamos, I love, we love. The second person is that to whom we speak ; as, tu amas^ vosotros or vosoti^as amaisy thou lovest, you love. The third person is that of whom we speak ; as, e^ or ella ama, ellos or ellas aman^ he or she loves, they love. In ancient authors, the termination of the second person S2 VERBS. of the plural is in des^ instead of is. Thus, they said and wrote amades, amaredes, S^c. instead of amais, amariis, Sfc. The verbs have both numbers ; the singular is used when the verb has only a single person or thing for its nominative; as, j/o, tijy 6ly ella ; and the plural, when it has many ; as. nosotros or nosotras, vosotros or vosoiras, ellos or ellas. N. B. It is not the same with the Spanish language as with the English and French^ in which the verb must always be preceded by the pronoun that governs it. In Spanish, as in Latin, the terminations generally distinguish the persons, consequently the pronouns are generally suppressed. We use them with advantage to add energy to the expression, as in these examples; tii lo has hecho—'I It is thou who hast done it ! yo lo mando, it is I who order it ; tu jies t yo iioTGj thou laughest and I weep ; tu no quieres hacerlo ; pues lo hart j/o, thou wilt not do it ; well, I shall do it. CONJUGATIONS. The Spanish language, as we have already said, has but three conjugations, which are known by the termination of the infinitive. The first has the infinitive terminated in ar ; as, am-ar, to love ; the second in er ; as, tem-er, to fear ; the third in ir ; as, sub-ir, to go up. It has besides three auxiliary verbs, which are so called because they serve to conjugate the other verbs in their compound tenses. These auxiliary verbs are haber and tenei\ to have ; and ser, to be. In conjugating the latter, we add to it estar, an irregular verb, translated by the same English verb, to 6e, being of such great use, that it is proper to study it, as soon as the auxiliary verbs are learnt. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Haber, to have.^ INFINITIVE. Present. - Haber, - - to have. Preterite, - Haber habido, - to have had. Gerund. - Habiendo, - - . having. Participle, - Habido, - - had, * This verb was used formerly as active, to express possession ; and in this last acceptation it had the following imperative ; habe tu. (now out of use) hay a e/, hdyamos nosotros^ habed vosotros, hay an ellos. Now the verb haber is seldom used but as an auxiliary or as au im- personal. See its conjugation for this last acceptation. VERBS. S3 INDICATIVE. Present. Yo he, - . I have, Tu has, - . thou hast. El ha, . . he has. Nosotros heiiios,orhabemos. - we have. Vosotros habeis,* - . . you have. Ellos han, - - they have. Imperfect, Yo habia,+ - . . I had. Tu habias, - . „ thou hadst. El habia, . . he had. Nosoti'os habiamos, - - we had. Vosotros habiais, - _ . you had. Ellos habian, - - they had. Preterite definite. Yo hube, . _ I had. Tu hubiste, - . _ thou hadst. El hubo. - . he had. Nosotros hubimos, - . we had. Vosotros hubisteis, _ .. you had. Ellos hubieron, - - they had. Preterite indefinite. Yo he habido. . . I have had. Tu has habido, . - thou hast had. El ha habido, . - he has had. Nosotros hemos habido, - . ice have had. Vosotros habeis habido, - . you have had. Ellos han habido, - - - they have had. Preterite anterior. Yo hube habido, _ _ I had had. Tu hubiste habido, - - thou hadst had. * See page 81, what we hare said on the termination of the second person plural in ancient authors. t The observation in regard to ia, (page 23,) will do for natives who are habitually speaking their language ; but to save to the teach- er and learner a gread deal of trouble, we shall use the acute accent upon the i throughout the conjugations, whea ia do not form a diph- ^honof. M Vf:RBS. El hubo habido, - - - - Nosotros hubimos habido, Vosotros hubisteis habido, EUos hubieron habido, - - Pluperfect. Yo habia habido, - - . Tu habias habido, - - - El habia habido, - - . . Nosotros habiamos habido, Vosotros habiais habido, Ellos habian habido, - - _ Future absolute, Yo habre, - - - - - Tu habras, - - - - - El habr4, - - - - - Nosotros habremos, - - - Vosotros habreis, - - - Ellos habran, - - - - Future anterior, Yo habre habido, - - - - Tu habras habido, - - - El habra habido, - - - Nosotros habremos habido, Vosotros habreis habido, Ellos habr^n habido, - - - he had had, we had had, you had had. they had had. 1 had had. thou hadst had. he had had, we had had. you had had. they had had. I shall have, thou wilt have, he will have, we shall have, you will have, they will have. 1 shall have had. thou wilt have had. he will have had, we shall have had. you will have had. they will have had. Si or cuando, Yo hubiere, Tu hubieres. El hubiere, - Nosotros hubieremos, Vosotros hubiereis, Ellos hubieren, Future conjunctive simple. If or whetiy I have or shall have, thou wilt have, he ivill have, vm shall have, you will have, they will have. Future conjunctive compound. Si or cuando, .... If or 7/)hen^ Yo hubiere habido, - - . / j^^ve had. Tu hubieres habido, - - . thou wilt have had. El hubiere habido, - - - he 7mll have had. VERBS. 85 Nosotros hubi6remos habido, - Vosotros hubiereis habido, Ellos hubieren habido, - we slmll have had. you will have had. they will have had. CONDITIONALS. First conditional -present. I should have. thou iDouldst have, he would have, we would have, you would have, they ivould have. Yo habria, Tu habrias, - El habria, Nosotros habriamos, Vosotros habriais, Ellos habrian, Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuando, - - - ^ or though^ Yo hubiera or hubiese, - - J had or should have. Tu hubieras or hubieses, - thou wouldst have. El hubiera or hubiese, - - he woidd have. Nosotros hubieramoSjOr hubiesemos, we had or should have. Vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, you had or would have. Ellos hubieran or hiibiesen, - they would have. First conditional past. Yo habria habido, Tu habrias habido. El habria habido, Nosotros habriamos habido, V^osotros habriais habido, Ellos habrian habido, I shorild have had. thou wouldst have had. he would have had. we should have had. you would have had, they would have had. Second and third conditionals past. Si, or cuando, - Yo hubiera, or hubiese, ] Tu hubieras, or hubieses, Ei hubiera, or hubiese, Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemos, - ^"^ -< Vosotros hubierais, or ^ hubieseis, Ellos hubieran, or hubi- esen, '8. If or though^ ^ I had o r should have 1 thou jvouldst have he would have we had or should have you would have they ivouM have r m S6 VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Yo haya, Tu hayas. El haya, Nosotros hiyamos, Vosotros h^yaisj Ellos hayan, Yo hubiese^ Tu hubieses, El hubiese, Nosotros hubiesemos, Vosotros hubieseis, Ellos hubiesen, - I may liaise, thou mayst have, he may have, we may have, you may have, they may have. Imperfect. Preterite. I might have, thou might est ^ have > he might have, loe might have, you might have, they might have. Yo haya habido, Tu hayas habido, El haya habido, Nosotros hayamos habido, Vosotros hayais habido, Ellos hayan habido, Pluperfect. Yo hubiese habido, Tu hubieses habido. El hubiese habido, Nosotros hubiesemos habido, Vosotros hubieseis habido, ■ Ellos hubiesen habido, I may have had. thou mayst have had. he may have had. we may have had. you may have had. they may have had, I might have had. thou might est have had. he might have had. we might have had. you might hove had. they might have had. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Teneu, to have^ to hold 9 to possess.-'^' Present. Preterite, Gerund. Participle. INFINITIVE. Tener, Haber tenido, Tenieiido, - Tenido, - to have J to possess. " to have had. - having. - had. * This verb is auxiliary and active. As auxiliary it is seldom used. As aclive it denotes possession, and must always be used to VERBS. sr Yo teiigo, Tu tienesj El tiene, Nosotros tenemos, Vosotros teneisj Ellos tienen, Yo tenia, Tu teniasj El teniaj Nosotros teniamos, Vosotros tenlaiSj Ellos tenian, Yo tuve, - Tu tuviste. El tuvo, Nosotros tuvimos, Vosotros tuvisteis, Ellos tuvierorij - Yo he tenidoj * Tu has tenido, - El ha tenido, Nosotros hemos tenido, Vosotros habeis tenido, Ellos han tenido. Imperfect, INDICATIVE. Pi^esent. - - J have, or j^ossess. thou hast, he has. we have, you have, they have. I had. or did possess. thou hadst. he had. loe had. you had. they had. Preterite definite. I had, or possessed, thou hadst. - - - Ae had. - ' ' toe had. - - - you had. they had. Preterite indefinite. 1 have hadjOT possessed thou hast had. - - Ae has had. we have had. you have had. they have had. Preterite anterior. Yo hube tenido, Tu hubiste tenido, El hubo teiiido, I had had,or possessed, thou hadst had. he had had. translate the verb to have when this verb is not auxiliary. We say, he leido el libro ; I have read the book : but we must say, tengo un librOy I have a book ; because in the first example the verb io have is auxiliary to the verb to ready and in the second it is active and ^enot^s possession 88* VERBS. Nosotros hubimos tenidoj - - ive Jiad had, Vosotros hubisteis tenido, - - i/ou had had, Ellos hubieron teiiido, - - thci/ had had. Pluperfect, Yo habia tenido^ - - - 1 had had^or possessed, Tu habias tenido, - - - thou hadst had. El habia tenido, - - - /^e had had, Nosotros habiamos tcnidoj - - ive had had, Vosotros habiais tenido, - - you had had, Ellos habiaii tenido^ - - - they had had. Future absolute, Yo tendre, ^ - - - I shall have ^or possess, Tu tenbras, - - - - thou loilt have. El tendra, -^ - - - Ae will have, Nosotros tendremos^ - - ^^Je shall have, Vosotros tendreis; - - you will have, Ellos tendran, - - - they will have. Future anterior, Yo habre tenidoj - - - J shall have hady or possessed, Tii habras tenido, . - - thou loilt have had. El habra tenido, - - - he will have had, Nosotros habremos tenido, - we shall have had, Vosotros habreis tenido, - - you will have had. Ellos habrdn tenido, - - they will have had. Future conjunctive simple, Sij or cuandoj - - - X^? or if^hen, Yo tiiviere, - - - - I have, or possess, Tu tuvieres^ - - - - thou shalt have. El tuviere, - « . . fie shall have, Nosotros tuvieremosj - - lue shall have. Vosotros tuviereis^ - - you will have, Ellos tuviereiij ... they will have. Future conjunctive compound. Si, or en and o, - - -(/? or when^ Yo hubiere tenido, - - J Itave had, Tu hubieres tenidoj - - thou wilt have had. El hubiere tenidoj - - - Ae will have had. Nosotros hubieremos tenido, - toe shall have had. Vosotros hubiereis tenido, - you will have had. Ellos bubieren tenidoj - they will have had* VEKBS* 89 Yo tendria, Tu tendrlas. El tendria, Nosotros tendriamoSj Vosotros tendriaisj Ellos tendrian, CONDITIONALS. First condilional present. I should hCiV^j or posscf>.s. - - - thou lOQuldst have. he woidd hr,ve, we should have. you would^ave. they loould have. Second and third conditionals present. If, or though J I should have, thou shouldst have, he should have. Sij or cuando, Yo tuviera, or tuviese, Tu tuvieras, or tuvieses, El tuviera, or tuviese, Nosotros tuvieramos, or tuvi- esemos, - - - Vosotros tuvieraiSjOr tuvieseisj Ellos tuvieraiij or tiiviesen we should have, you should have, they should have. First conditional past. - - I should have had. thou wouldst have had. he would have had. we should have had. you icould have had. they would have had. Second and third condiiioncds past. Yo habria tenido, Tu habrias tenido. El liabria tenido, Nosotros habriamos tenidoj Vosotros h?.briais tenido, Ellos habrian tenido. Si, or cuando, - Yo bubiera, or hubiese, ^ Ta hubierascor hubieses, El habiera, or hubiese, Nosotros hubieramosj or hubiesemos, - )> Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis, Ellos hubieraii. or bubi- esen, If, or though, ^ I had, or should have thou icouldst have he tcould have <( ice should have you would have [they icould have ") f^^ . ^ 90 VERBS. Ten tu,^ Tenga el, Tengamos nosotroSj Tened vosotrosj* Teiigan ellos^, Yo teDga, Tu tengasj El tenga, Nosotros tengamos, Vosotros tengais, Ellos tengan, Yo tuviese, Tu tuvieses, El tiiviese, Nosotros tuviesemos, Vosotros tuvieseis, Eilos tuviesen, IMPERATIVE. Present or future, have thoUy or possess, let him have, let us have, have you J or ye. let them have. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, Imperfect 1 may have, or possess, thou mayst have, he may have, we may have, you may have, they may have. I might have, or possess, thou 7nightest have, he might have, we might have, you might have, they might have. Preterite. Yo haya tenido, - - I may f^ci^e had. Tu hayas tenido, - - thou mayst have had. El haya tenido, - - he may have had. Nosotros hayamos tenido, - u-e may have had, Vosotros hayais tenido, - you may have had. Ellos hayan tenido, Yo hubiese tenido, Tu hubieses tenido, El hubiese tenido, they may have had. Pluperfect. I might have had, thou mightest have had, he might have had. ^ In all the verbs, the 2d person, singular and plural, of the imper- ative, takes the termination of the 2d person, sin^. and plur. of the present subjunctive, when used with a negation. Ex. Have ihou not. no tengas. Have ye notj no tengais. VERBS. 91 Nosotros hubiesemos tenido, Vosotros hubieseis tenidoj Ellos hubiesen tenido. we might have had. you might have had. they might have had. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Ser', and Estar, meaiwisr also to be. INFINITIVE. Present, Ser, estar, to be. Preterite, Haber sido, haber estado, to have been. Gerund, Siendoj estando, being. Participle. Sido, '^ estado, been. INDICATIVE. Present. Yo soy, or estoy, - I am. Tu eres, estas. - thou art. El es, esta. - he is. Nosotros somos, estamos, - we are. Vosotros sois, estais, - you are. Ellos son. estan, - they are. Imperfect. Yo era, or estaba, - I urns. Tu eras, estabas, -. thou wast. El era, estaba, - he was. Nosotros eramos. estabamos. - we tcere. Vosotros erais, estabais, -. you were. Ellos eran, estabaD, - they were. Preterite defivnite. Yo fui, or estuve, _ I was. Tu fuiste, estuviste, » » thou wast. El fue, estuvo, « _ he was. Nosotros fuimos, estuvimos. « we were. Vosotros fuisteis. estuvisteis, . . you were, they were. Ellos fueron, estuvieron. - Preterite indefinite. Yo he sido, or estado. - • I have been. Tu has sido. estado. « « thou hast been El ha sido. estado, - - he has been. 92 VERBS. Nosotros hemos sido, estado. ive have been. Vosotros habeis sido, estado. you have been. Ellos han sido, estado. they have been. Preterite anterior. Yo hube sido, or estado, I had been. Tu hubiste sido, estado. thou hadst been. El hubo sido, estado. he had been. Nosotros hubimos sido , estado. we had been. Vosotros hubisteis sido , estado. you had been. Ellos hubieron sido, estado, they had been. Pluperfect, / Yo habia sido, or estado, I had been. Tu habias sido, estado. thou hadst been El habia sido. estado, he had. been. Nosotros habiamos sido,estado. we had been. Vosotros habiais sido, estado. you had been. Ellos habian sido, estado. Future absolute. they had been. Yo serCj or estare. I shall be. Tu ser^s. estaras. thou wilt be. El sera. estara. he 2vill be. Nosotros seremos. estaremos, - we shall be. Vosotros sereis, estareis. you will be. Ellos seran. estaran. Future anterior. they will be. Yo habre sido, or estado, Tu habras sido, estado. El habra sido, estado, Nosotros habremos sido,estado, Vosotros habreis sido, estado, Ellos habran sido, estado, Future conjunctive Si, or cuando, Yo fuere, or I shall ahve been, thou ivilt have been he will have been, we shall have been, you will have been, they will have been.. simple. estuviere, estuvieres, estuviere, Tu fueres, El fuere, Nostros fueremoSjestuvieremos, Vosotros fuereis, estuviereis, Ellos fueren, estuvieren, If^ or lolien^ I be J or shall be. thou unit be. he ivill be. ice shall be. you zmll be. they will be. VERBS. 93 Future conjunctive Si, or ciiando, Yo hubiere sido, or estado, Tu hubieres sido, estado, El hubiere sido, estado, Nosotros hubieremos sido.estado, Vosotros liubiereis sido, estado, EUos hubieren sido, estado, compound. If, or loJien^ I have been, thou wilt have been, he icill hace been, ice shall have been, you icill have beta, they icill have been. CONDITIONALS. First conditional present, Yo seria, or estaria, - I should be. Tu serias, estarias, - thou tcouldsi be. El seria, estarla, - he would be, Nosotros seriamosj estariamos, - we should be. Vosotros seriais, estariais, you icould be, Ellos serian, estarian, they icould be. Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuando, Yo fuera or fuese^ Tu fueras or fueses. El fuera or fuese, Nosotros fueramos or fu- esemos, Vosotros fuerais or fueseis, Ellos fueran or fuesen. 1 estuviera or estiiviese, estuvieras or estuvieses, estu\^era or estuviese, estuvieramos or estuviese- J> l:;^ mos, estuvierais or estuvieseis, estuvieran or estuviesen, 3 ^r- © Yo habrla side, or First conditional past. estado Tu iiabrias sido, estado. El habrla sido, estado, Nosotros liabriamos sido, estado, Vosotros habriais sido, estado, Ellos habrian sido, estado. Second and third conditionals past Si, or cuando, Yo hubiera, or hubiese sido, or I should have been, thou icouldst have been, he icould have been, ice should have been, you icould have been, they would have beeiu Tu hubieras, or hubieses sido^ El hubiera. or hubiese sido, Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemossido, Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis sido, Ellos hubierau. or hubiesen sido, estado, estado, estado, estado, estado, estado. •5 2 > S -=* . 2 *^ «^ 1 5*>, *3 w 94 VERBS. or Se tu. Sea elj* Seamos nosotroSj Sfed vosotroSj Sean eilosj* IMPERATIVE. Present or future. esta tU; este el,* estemos nosotros, estad vosotroSj esten ellos,* he thou, let him he, let us he. he you. let them 6e. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. or este, estes. Yo sea, Tu seas, El sea, este, Nosotros seamos, estemos, Vosotros seals, esteis, Ellos sean, esten, Yo fuese, or Tu fueses. El fuese, Nosotros fuesemos, Vosotros fueseis, Ellos fuesen, Imperfect. estuviese, estuvieses, estuviese, estuviesemos, estuvieseis, estuviesen, - I may he^ - thou mayst be. - he may be. - we may he. - you may be, - they may he. - I might he. - thou mightest be. - he might be. - we might be. - you might be. - they might be. or Yo haya sido. Tu hayas sido. El haya sido, Nosotros hayamos sido, Vosotros hiyais sido, Ellos bayan sido, Preterite. estad o, J may have been^ estado, thou mayst have been. estado, he may have been. estado, ice may have been. estado, you may have been. estado, they may have been. Yo hubiese sido, Tu bubieses sido, estado, El bubiese sido, estado, Nosotros bubiesemos sido, estado, Vosotros bubieseis sido, estado, Ellos hubiesen sido. Pluperfect. or estado, I might have been. thou mightest have been, he might have been, we might have been, you might have been, they might have been. estado. * Sea vm., be you, sing. — Sean vms., be you, plural. — and so on me the third person in polite style in all the tenses of all the verbs» VERBS. 95 Exiles on the verbs Ser and Estar. Rule XLIX. The verb to be cannot be translated ia Spanish indifferently by ser or by esta7\ Ser^ joined to an adjective, gives it sometimes an entirely different meaning from that which estar would give it. It is consequently necessary to understand well the use of these two verbs. We observe then, that w^e must use the verb ser whenever we speak of qualities essential to the subject ; of qualities relating to the mind or to the heart ; whenever we speakbf an art, a dignity, an employment, a trade, &:c. or of the di- mensions of an object ; and finally for the conjugation of the passive verbs. Ex. Soy hombre^ I am a man ; somos mortales, we are mortal ; son buenas gentes, they are good people ; son instruidos^ they are learned ; sois prudenteSy you are prudent ; eran caritativos^ they w^ere charitable ; ser alto, ckico, gordo, Jlaco, to he tall, shorty fat, lean ; ser rey, primer ministro^ general, juez, sastre, zapatero, &;c. to be a king, prime minister, a general, a judge, a tailor, a shoe-maker, &c. ; ser amado, aborrecido, &c. to be loved, hated, &c. We make use, on the contrary, of estar whenever we speak of the state of health, of being in any place, of an emotion or of a sudden and transient sensation. Ex. Estar bueno 6 malo, to be well or ill ; estar en casa^ en el jar din, en el campo, to be at home, in the garden, in the country ; estar enfadado, to be offended. Nevertheless, in the following examples and other similar ones, we can make use of ser or of estar indifferently ; ser or estar del mismo parecer, to be of the same opinion ; ser corregidor or estar de corregidor en Madrid, to be corregi- dor at Madrid. We must however observe in the second example, if we make use of estar, this verb must be follow- ed by tho particle de, for, estar corregidor, alcalde, would not be Spanish. N. B. Ser bueno^ ser vialo, signifies to be good, to be bad ; estar bueno, estar malo, signifies to be well or ill ; estar iiiejor, to be better, to be better in health ; estar peor^ to be more sick, to be worse. Rule L. — The verb estar is often used as iti English to be, before another verb to signify in a more positive man- ner that an action is doing, has been done, or will be done, ai the very moment in which we speak or of which we 96 VERBS. speak ; and then the verb which follows is put in the ger- und. Ex. Estd escrihiendoj he writes, that is, he is writing ; estabti escribiendo^ he wrote, that is, he was writing ^ entonces estardn ' escrihiendo^ they will write then, that is, they will then be w^riting. A GENERAL SCHEME OF THE TERxMINATIONS OP REGULAR VERBS IN THEIR SIMPLE TENSES. The figures 1^ 2, 3, signify the first ^ second^ and third conjugations. All the regular verbs of each conjugation, are easily con- jugated by changing the terminations ar^ er, ir^ of the infin- itive into those expressed as follows. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. 1. ar, er, Gei-und. Participle. If there is an active Part. ando, ado, ante, iendo, ido, iente or yente.* 2. 3. 3. 1. 2. y«? Singular, tu. 1 . aba, 2.' ia, are. 2. ere, ire, as, es, aste, iste, aras, eras, iras, INDICATIVE. Present, el a. Plural. nosotros, vosotros. amos, emos. iraos, abas, aba. ias, ia. lamos, Preterite definite. amos, imos. o. io. Future absolute, ara. aremos, era. eremos, ira. iremos, ais, eis, ,, is, Imperfect, abamos, ^bais lais, asteis, Isteis, are is, ereis, ireis. ellos. an. en. en. aban. ian. aron. ieron, aran. eran. iran. * See 5th and 6th observations preceding the Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs. 1. 2.; ai-e. lere, \ERBS. Future conjunctive simple. ares, ieres, are. iere. aremos^ lerenios. ^reis, iereis, 9? aren. ieren. S. 1. 3. < ■ lese, CONDITIONALS. First conditional present. 1. aria, arias. aria. ariamos, ariais, 2. eria, erias, eria. eriamos, eriais. 3. iria, iras, iria. irlamos, iriais, Second and third contitionah pi ^esent. 1. ara. aras, ara. ^ramos, drais. 2. 3. > iera, ieras, iera. ieramos, ierais, 1. ase. ases, ase. ^semos, aseis, ase, ■ lese, leses, e. a. lese. lesemos, leseis, IMPERATIVE MOOD. eraos, amos, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Pre.se «^ ad, Sed, Singular. tu, es. ariaD. erian. ii'ian. arau. ieran. asen. iesen, en. an. an. el. e. Plural nosotros, vosotros, ellos. emos. ases, leses, Imperfect, ase. asemos, eis. ais, aseis. lese. lesemos, leseis, en. an. a^en. iesen. PARADIGMS OF THE THREE €()>' JUGATIOXS, First conjugation in ar, INFINITIVE. Fresent, Ani-ar, - - - to Jove, Preterite, Haber amado, » - to hare lojccL 9 98 VERBS. Gei^und. Amando, - loving. Participle. Amado, INDICATIVE. Present. loved. Yo amoj . . - I love, or do love Tu amas, . thou lovest. El ama. - . - he loves. Nosotros araamos, - - . - ice love. Vosotros amais, ... you love. Ellos aman, - Imperfect. they love* Yo amaba, - . I did, love. Tu amabas, . . - thou didst love. El amaba, - . . - he did love. Nosotros amibamos, ... we did love. Vosotros am^bais, . . - you did love. Ellos amaban;, - they did love. Preteinte definite. Yo ame. ... I loved. Tii amaste, - ... thou lovedst. El amo. - he loved. Nosotros amamos^ - 7ve loved. Vosotros amasteisj . . - you loved. Ellos amaron, . they loved. Preterite indefinite. Yo he amado, ... 1 have loved. Tu has amado^ ... thou hast loved. El ha amado. ... he has loved. Nosotros hemos amado, . we have loved. Vosotros habeis amado, . you have loved. Ellos hail amado, - they have loved. Preterite anterior. Yo hube ainado, - ... I had loved. Tu hubiste amado, ... tliou hadst loved. El hubo amadoj ... he had loved. Nosotros hubimos am ado, we had loved. Vosotros hnbisteis amado. you had loved. Ellos hubieron amado. - they had loved. VERBS. Plyperfect. Yo habia amado, - - I had loved. Tu hablas amado, - - thou hadst lovexL El habia amado, - - - he had loved. Nosotros habiamos amado, - ive had loved. Vosotros habiais amado, - you had loved. EUos habian amado^ - - tfieij had loved. Future absolute. Yoamare, .... I shall love. Tu amarasj . - - - thou wilt love. El amaraj . . . - /^e icill love. Nosotros amaremos, - - we shall love. Vosotros amareis, - - - you will love. Eilos amaran, ... they icill love. Future anterior. Yo habre amado, ... J shall have loved. Tu habras amadoj - - thou wilt have loved. El habra amado, - - - /ie will have loved. Nosotros habremos amado, - we shall have loved. Vosotros babreis amado^ - you will have loved. £llos habr^n amado, - - they will have loved. Future conjunctive simple. Si, or cuandoj If, or tohen, Yo amare, - - - - J love, or shall lov^. Tu amares, - - - - thou loilt love. El am are, - - - - Ae mill love. Nosotros ainaremos, - - we shall love. Vosotros amareis, .... you will love. Ellos amareu, . - ^ they will love^ Future conjunctive compound. Si, or cuando, If. or when, Yo hubiere amado, - - 7 have loved. Tu hubieres amado, - - thou wilt have loved. El hubiere amado, - - he will have loved. Nosotros hubieremos amado, - we shall have loved. Vosotros hubiereis amado, - you will have loved. EJlos hubieren amado, - they icill have loved. 99 100 VERBS. CONDITIONALS. First conditional present, Yoamaria, - - - - I should love, Tu amarias, - - - - thou icouldst love. El amaria, - - - - Ae icoidd love, Nosotros amariamoSj ^ - we should love, Vosotros amarlais, - - you would love. EUos amarianj - - - they would love. Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuando, If, or though, Yo amara or aniase, I should love. Tu amaras amases, - thou wouldst love. El amara amase. he would love. Nosotros amaramos atiiasemos,, we should love. Vosotros amarais amaseis, - you would love. Elios araaran amasen, - they would love. First conditional past. Yo habria amado, i should have loved. Tu habrias aniado, thou wouldst have loved. El habria amado, he would have loved. Nosotros habriamos amado, we should have loved. Vosotros habriais amado, you would have loved. EUos habrian amado, - they would have loved* Second and third conditionals past. Sij or cuando, 1 C'^S Yo hubiera, or hiibiese Tu hubieras, hubieses o ^.-^^ El hiibiera, hubiese r ^ < $ ^ S Nosotros hubieramosj hubiesemos S 2 ^ Vosotros hubieraisj hubieseis fe^*^^ Ellos hubieran, hubiesen \ ISJI IMPERATIVE. Present or future. Amatu,* - . - . loi^e thou. Ame el, - - - - let him love. * Verbs in the. imperative require the pronouns governed after them, when used affirmatively and before them, as usual, when used negatively ; Ex. Love me, amame ; do not love me, no me ames ; llerev^e us, recibid nos ; do not receive us, no nos recibais. VERBS* Wl Amemos nosotros, Amad vosotroSj Amen elloS;, Yo arae, Tu ames, El ame, Nosotros amemos, Vosotros ameis, Ellos amen, Yo amase, Tu amases, El amase, Nosotros am^semos, Vosotros am^seis, Ellos amasen. let us love, love ye. let them love. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Imperfect. Preterite. Yo haya amado, Tu hay as amado. El haya amado, Nosotros hayamos amado, Vosotros hayais amado^ Ellos hayan amado, Pluperfect. Yo hublese *amado, ^ Tu hubieses amado, t El hubiese amado, Nosotros hubiesemos amado, • Vosotros hubieseis amado, Ellos hubiesen amado, - I 771 ay love, thou mayst love. he may love, we may love, you may love, they may love. I might love, thou mightesi love, he might love, we might love, you might love, they might love. I may have loved, thou mayst have loved, he may have loved, we may have loved, you may have loved, they may have loved. I might have loved, thou mightest have loved, he might have loved, we might have loved, you might have loved, they might have loved. Second conjugation in jeb. INFINITIVE. Present, Tem-er, - to fear. Preterite. Haber temido, - to have feared. Gerund. Temiendo, fearing. Participle. Temido, feared. 9* 102 VERBS. INDIC4TIVE. Present. Yo temo, Tu temes, El teme^ Nosotros tememosj Vosotros temeis, - EUos temen, - Yo temiaj Tu temiasj - El temia^ Nosotros temiamos, Vosotros temiaisj - EUos temian, Yo temi, Tu temiste, - El temio, Nosotros temimos, Vosotros temisteis, Ellos temieron^ Imperfect, Preterite definite. Preterite indefinite. Yo he temido, Tu has temido, El ha temido, Nosotros hemostemido, - A^osotros habeis temido, - EUos han temido, - Preterite anterior. Yo hube temido, - Tu hubiste temido, El hubo temido, - Nosotros hubimos temido, Vosotros hubisteis temido, EUos hubieron temido, - I fear, thou fearest, he fears, ice fear, you fear, they fear. I did fear, thou didst fear, he did fear, we did fear, you did fear, they did fear. I feared, thou fear edst. he feared, we feared, you feared, they feared. 1 have feared, thou hast feared. he has feared, we have feared, you have feared, they have feared. I had feared, thou hadst feared, he had feared, we had feared, you had feared, they had feared* V£JIBS. 103 Pluperfect, Yo habia temido, - - - i had feared, Tu habias temido^ - - thou hadst feared. El habia temido, - - - Ae had feared, Nosotros habiamos temidoj - ice had feared, Vosotros habiais temidoj - you had feared, Ellos habian temidoj - - they had feared. Future absolute, Yo temere, - - - - I shall fear, Tu temeras, - - - - thou iciltfear. El temera, - - - - 7^e icillfear. Nosotros temeremoSj - - we shall fear, Vosotros temereisj - - - you will fear, Ellos teraeran, - - - they will fear. Future anterior, Yo habre temido, - - - i shall have feared, Tu habras temido^ - - thou icilt have feared. El habra temido, - - - he will have feared. Nosotros habremos temidoj - ive shall have feared. Vosotros habreis temido, - you icill have feared Ellos habran temido, - - they will have feared. Future conjunctive simple. Si, or cuandoj ... If or when^ Yo temiere, - - - - I shall fear, Tu temieres, - - - thou wilt fear ^ El temiere, - - - - he will fear, Nosotros temieremoSj - - we shall fear, Vosotros temiereis, - - you will fear. Ellos teuiieren, - - - they will fear. Future conjunctive compound. Si, or cuando. - - - ^? or when^ Yo hubiere temido^ - - I have feared, Tu hubieres temido. - - thou wilt have feared. El hubiere temido, - - he ivill have feared, Nosotros hubieremos temido. - we shall have feared, \ osotros hubiereis temido, - you will have feared. Ellos hubieren temido, - - they will have feared. 104 VERBS. CONDITIONALS. Yo temeria, Tu temerias, El temeria, Nosotros temeriamos, Vosotros temeriais, EUos temerian, First conditional present, I should fear. thou woifldst fear» he would fear, we should fear, you would fear, tliey would fear. Second and third conditionals present, ' Si, or cuando, - Jf, or though^ Yo temiera or temiese, - If earned, Tu temieras or temieses, - thou shouldst fear. El temiera or temiese, - he should fear, Nosotros temieramos o?'temiesemos,?^e should fear, Vosotros temierais or temieseiS; you should fear, EUos temieran or temiesen, they should fear. First conditional past. Yo habria temido, Tu habrias temido, El habria temido, Nosotros habrlamos temido, Vosotros habriais temido, Ellos habrian temido. I should have feared, thou wouldst have feared, he loould have feared, we should have feared, you would have feared, they iDould have feared. Second and third conditionals past, Yo hubiera, or hubiese Tu hubieras, or hubieses El hubiera, or hubiese Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemos Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis Ellos hubieran, or hubiesen ^ f s ] [ -^1 c ^ IMPERATIVE. Teme tu, Teraa el, Temamos nosotros, Temed vosotros, Teman ellos, Trestnt or future, fear thou, let him fear, let us fear, fear ye, let them fear. VERBS. 105 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, Yo tema^ Tu temaSj El tenia, Nosotros temamos, Vosotros temais^ Ellos teman. Yo temiesej Tu temieses, El temiese, Nosotros temiesemos, Vosotros temieseis, Ellos temiesen. J may fear, thou may st fear, he may fear, we may fear, you may fear, they may fear. Imperfect. I might fear, thou might est fear, he might fear, we might fear, you might fear, they might fear. Preterite. Yo haya temido, - Tu hayas temido. El haya temido, - Nosotros hayamos temido, Vosotros h4yais temido, Ellos hayan temido, I may have feared, thou mayst have feared, he may have feared, ^ we may have feared, you may have feared, they may have feared. Pluperfect. Yo hubiese temido, Tu hubieses temido. El hubiese temido, Nosotros hubiesemos temido, Vosotros hubieseis temido, Ellos hubiesen temido. J might have feared, thou mightest have feared, he might have feared, we might have feared, you might have feared, they might have feared. Third conjugation in ir. INFINITIVE. Present. Freterite. Gerund. Participle. Sufr-ir, Haber sufrido, Sufriendoj Sufrido, to suffer. to have suffered. suffering. suffered. 106 VERBS. INDICATIVE* Present. Yosufro, - - - - - I suffer. Tu sufres, thou sufferest. El sufre, he suffers. Nosotros sufrimos, - - - we suffer. Vosotros sufris, - - - - you suffer. Ellos sufren, - - - - they suffer. Im-perfect. ^ Yo sufria, - ... J did suffer. Tu sufrias, - - - - thou didst suffer. El sufria, - - - . he did suffer. Nosotros sufriamos, - - - ?^Je did suffer. Vosotros sufriais, - - - you did suffer. Ellos sufrian, ... - they did suffer. Preterite definite. Yo sufri, - - - - - I suffered. Tu sufriste, - - - - thou sufferedst. El sufrio, ----- A^ suffered. Nosotros sufriraos, - - - tre suffered. Vosotros sufristeis, . - - you suffered. Ellos sufrieron, - • - - they suffered. Preterite indefinite. Yo he sufrido, - - . - J have suffered. Tu has sufrido^ - - - - thou hast suffered. El ha sufrido, - • ^ - he has suffered. Nosotros hemos sufrido, - ^ we have suffered. Vosotros habeis sufrido, - - you have suffered. Ellos han sufrido, - - - - they have suffered. Preterite anterior. Yo hube sufrido, - - - J had suffered, Tu hubiste sufrido, . - - thou hadst suffered. El hubo sufrido, - - - Ae had suffered. Nosotros hubimos sufrido, - - ive had suffered. Vosotros hubisteis sufrido, - - you had suffered. Ellos hubierou sufrido^ - - they had suffered^- VERBS. 107 Pluperfect, Yo habia sufrido, Tu habias sufrido, El habia sufridoj Nosotroshabiamos sufrido, Vosotros habiais sufrido^ EUos habian sufrido. I had suffered, thou hadst suffered, he had suffered, we had suffered, you had suffered, they had suffered. Future absolute. Yo sufrire, Tu sufrirds. El sufrira, - Nosotros sufriremoSj Vosotros sufrireisj Ell OS sufrirdn^ I shall suffer, thou wilt suffer, he will suffer, we shall suffer, you will suffer, they will suffer. Future anterior. Yo habre sufrido, Tu habras sufrido, El habra sufrido^ Nosotros habremos sufridoj Vosotros habreis sufrido, Ellos habrdn sufrido, - I shall have suffered, thou wilt have suffei^ed. he loill have suffered, we shall have suffered, you will have suffered, they icill have suffered. Future conjunctive simple. Si, or cuando, If^ or when^ Yo sufriere, - - - J suffer. Til sufrieres, . - - thou wilt suffer. El sufriere^ - - - he will suffer, J>fosotros sufrieremos, - - we shall suffer, Vosotros sufriereis, - - you will suffer, Ellos sufrieren, - - - they will suffer. Future conjunctive compound. Si, or cuando, Yo hubiere sufrido, Tu hubieres sufrido. El hubiere sufrido, Nosotros hubieremos sufrido, - Vosotros hubiereis sufrido, - Ellos hubieren sufrido, - If^ or 7vhen^ I shall have suffered, thou wilt have suffered, he will have suffered, we shall have suffered, you will have suffered. they will have suffered. 108 VERBS. CONDITIONALS. First conditional present* Yo sufrifla^ Tu sufririas, El sufriria, Nosotros sufririamos, Vosotros sufririais, EUos sufririan, I should suffer, thou wouldst suffer, he would suffer, we should suffer, you would suffer, they would suffer. Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuando, - - - If , or though^ Yo sufriera or sufriese, - - J suffered, Tu sufrieras or sufrieses, - thou shouldst suffer. El sufriera or sufriese, - he should suffer, Nosotros sufrieramos or sufriesemos, we should suffer, Vosotros sufrierais or sufrieseis, you should suffer, Ellos sufrieran or sufriesen, they should suffer. First conditional past. Yo habria sufrido, Tu habrias sufrido. El habria sufrido, Nosotros habriamos sufrido, - Vosotros habriais sufrido, Ellos habrian sufrido, - I should have suffered, thou wouldst have suffered, he would have siffered, we should have suffered, you would have suffered, they would have suffered. Second and third conditionals past. Si, or cuando. Yo hubiera, or hubiese Tu hubieras, or hubieses El hubiera, or hubiese Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemos Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis Ellos hubieran, or hubi^sen o '13 •^ i^ S» o '^'^ IMPERATIVE. Sufre tii, Sufra el, Suframos nosotros, Sufrid vosotros, - Sufrsui ellos, Present or future, suffer thou, lei him suffer, let us suffer, suffer you, let them suffer. VERBS. 109 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Yo sufra, Tu sufras, - El sufra, Nosotros suframos, Yosotros sufraisj - Ellos sufran, Yo sufriese, Tu sufrieses. El sufriese, Nosotros sufriesemos, Vosotros sufrieseis, Ellos sufrieseiij I may suffer. thou rnayst suffer, he may suffer, ice may suffer, you may suffer, they may suffer. Imperfect. I might suffer, thou mightesf suffer, he raight suffer, we might suffer, you might suffer, they might suffer. Preterite. Yo haya sufrido, Tu hayas sufrido. El haya sufrido, Nosotros hayamos sufrido, Vosotros hayais sufrido, Ellos hay an sufrido, I may have suffered, thou mayst have suffered, he may have suffered. ice may have suffered, you may have suffered, they may have suffered. Pluperfect. Yo hubiese sufrido, Tu hubieses sufrido. El hubiese sufrido, Nosotros hubiesemos sufrido, - Vosotros hubieseis sufrido, Ellos hubiesen sufrido, - J might have suffered, thou mightest have suffered he might have suffered, we might have suffered, you might have suffered. they wight have suffered. PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. Observation. The passive verbs are conjugated always and in all their tenses, with the auxiliary ser. to be ; and with the participle past of the active verb, which takes the gender and number of the subject. 10 110 VERBS. INFINITIVE. Present, Ser amad-o or a^ os or as, - - to be loved. Preterite. Haber sido amad-o or a, os or as, - to have been loved. Participle present, Siendo amad-o or a, os or as, - - being loved. Participle past. ' Habiendo sido amad-o or a, os or as. having been loved. INDICATIVE. Present. Yo soy, tu eres, el or ella es I amy thou art, he or she is amado or amada, loved. Nosotr-os or as somos, voso- We are, you are, they are tros or as sois, ellos or el- loved. las son amad-os or as. * Imperfect. Yo era, tu eras, el or ella era I was, thou wast, he or she amado or amada, was loved. Nosotr-os or as eramos, voso- We were, you were, they tr-os or as erais, ellos or el- las eran amados or amadas. Preterite definite. Yo fui, tu fuiste, el or ella fue I was, thou wast, he or she amado or amada. tvas loved. Nosotr-os or as fuimos, voso- We were, you were, they tr-os o?'as fuisteis, ellos or el- were loved. las fueron amados or amadas. Preterite indefinite. Yo he, tu has, el or ella ha I have, thou hast, he or she sido amado or amada, has been loved. Nosotr-os or as hemos, voso- We have, you have, they tr-os or as habeis, ellos or el- have been loved. las han sido amados or ama- das. VERBS. Ill Preiemte anterior. Yo hube, tu hubiste, el or ella I had, thou hadst, he or she hubo sido amado or amada, had been loved. Nosotr-os or as hubimos, voso- Tf^e had, you had, they tr-os or as hubisteis, ellos or Jiad been loved. ellas hubieron sido amados or amadas. Pluperfect, Yo habia, tu habias, el or ella I had, thou hadst, he or habia sido amad-o or a, she had been loved, Nosotr-osorashabiamos, voso- TFe had, you had, they tros or as habiais^ ellos or had been loved, ellas habian sido amados or amadas. Future absolute. Yo sere, tu serds, el or ella I shall be, thou wilt be, he sera amad-o or a, or she will be loved. Nosotros seremos, vosotros se- We shall be, you will be^ reis, ellos or ellas seran they mil be loved. cimad-os or as. Future anterior, Yo habre, tu habr^s, el or ella I shall have, thou wilt have, habr4 sido amad-o or a, he or she mil have been loved. Nosotr-os or as habremos, vo- TFe shall have, you will sotr-os or as habreis, ellos or have, they will have been ellas habr4n sido amad-os loved. or as. Future conjunctive simple. Si, or cuando, 7 ^ ^ ^ Yo fuere, tu fueres, el or ella j g" ^"^ fuere amad-o or a, I "f "S -^ Nosotr-os or as fueremos,voso- ( ^ ^ ?^ tr-os or as fuereis, ellos or ^ M"^ ellas fuerea amad-os or as. 3 J^ I s^ '^ 112 VERB&. Future conjunctive compound. Sij or cuandoj "y Yo hubiere, tu hubieres, el or j ella hubiere sido amad-o or a, | Nosotr-os or as hubieremos^ V vosotr-os 07' as hubiereis^ el- ilos or ellas hubieren sido amados or as. C ?. «- f rv ^ C r^ CONDITIONALS. First conditional present. Yo seria, tu serias^ el or ella seria amad-o or a^ Nosotr-os or as serlamos, voso- tr-os or as serlaisj ellos or ellas serian amad-os or as. IsJiouldbe, thou wouldst he. he or she would he loved. We should 6e, yoit would he, they would he loved. Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuando^ Yo fueraorfuesej tu fueras or fueses, el or ella fuera or , fuese amad-o or a, Nosotr-os or as fueramos or fuesemos, vosotr-os or as fu- erais or fueseis, ellos or ellas fueran or fueseii amad-os or as. ? 3 Is 1^^ First conditional past. Yo habria, tu habrias, el or ella habrla sido amad~o or a, Nosotr-os or as babriamos, vosotr-os or as habriais, el- los or ellas habrian sido amad-os or as. I should have^ thou ivouldsf have, he or she would have heen loved. We should have, you ivould have J they would have been loved* VERBS. 11^ Second and third conditionals pcist. S!j or cuando, '] Yo hubiera or hubiese, tu hu- bieras or hubieses, el or ella hubiera or hubiese sido amad-o or a, Nosotr-os or as hubieramos or hubiesemos, vosotr-os or as hubierais or hubieseis, ellos or ellas hubieran or hubie- «;) sen sido amad-os or as. ^ Ji^r^ ^o. IMPERATIVE. Se amad-o or a, Be thou loved. Sea amad-o or a, Let him beloved. Seamos amad-os or as, Let us be loved, Sed amad-os or as, Be ye loved, Sean amad-os or as. Let them be loved, SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Yo sea, tu seas, 61 or ella sea I may be, thou mayst be, amad-o or a, he or she may be loved. Nosotr-os or as seamos, voso- We may be, you may be, tr-os or as seais, ellos or el- they may be loved, las sean amad-os or as. Imperfect. Yo fuese, tu fueses, el or ella I mightbe,thoumightestbe, fuese amad-o or a, he or she might be loved. Nosotr-os or as fuesemos, vo- Jf^e might be, you might sotr-os or as fueseis, ellos or be, they might be loved. ellas fuesen amad-os or as. Preterite, Yo haya, tu hayas, el or ella I may have, thou mayst haya sido amad-o or a, have, he or she may have been loved, Nosotros or as hiyamos, voso- IVe may have^ ' you may tr-os or as hayais, ellos or el- have, they may have las hayan sido amad-os or as. been loved. 10* 114 VERBS* Pluperfect, Yo hubiese, tu hubieses, el or I might have, thou mightesi ella hubiese sido amad«o have^ he or '^he might or a^ have been loved, Nosotr-os or as hubiesemoSj We might have^ you might vosotr-os or as hubieseis, have, they might have ellos or ellas hubiesen sido been loved. amad-os or as. PARADIGM OP NEUTER VERBS. Observation. These verbs take in Spanish as an auxiliary in their compound tenses, the verb haber, to have, and the participle is indeclinable. In their simple tenses they are conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to which thej belong. INFINITIVE. Present. Llegar,* To arrive. Preterite. Haber lle^do, To have arrived. Gerund. Llegando^ Arriving. Participle. Llegado. Arrived. INDICATIVE. I Present. t Lleg-o, as, a, amos, ais, an. I arrive, ^c. Imperfect. Lleg-aba, abas, aba, dbamos, I did arrive^ shall arrive, S^c. dreis, aren. 3 Future conjunctive compound. Si, or cuando, Ify or when, I have or shall JHubiere, hubieres, hubiere, have arrived, Sfc. if or hubieremos, hubiereis, hu- when we have or shall bieren llegado. have arrived^ Sfc. CONDITIONALS. First conditional present, Lleg-aria, arias, aria, ariamos, J should arrive, ^c ariais, arlan. 116 VERBS. Second and third conditionals present. Si, or cuandoj If, or though, 1 arrived or Lleg-ara or ase, aras or ases, should arrive, c^c. ara, or ase, Lleg-aramos or asemos, 4rais If, or though, loe arrived or should arrive, ^c. First conditional past. Habria, habriaSj habria, ha- briaraosj habriais, habrian llegado. I should have, thou wouldst have, he or/ she would have, we should have, you would have, they would have arrived. Second and third conditionals past. Si, or cuando, If, or though, I had, or Hubiera or hubiese, hubieras or hubiesesj hubiera or hu- biese, Hubieramos or hubiesemos, hubierais or hubieseis, hu- bieran or hubiesen llegado. should have arrived. If, or though, we had or should have arrived. Llega tu, Llegu e el, Lleguemos, Llegad vosotros, Lleguen ellos. IMPERATIVE. Present or future. arrive thou, let him arrive, let us arrive, arrive ye. let them arrive* SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Lleg-ue, ues, ne, uemos, I may arrive^ 8fc. ueis, uen. Imperfect, Lleg-ase, asesj ase, dsemos, I might arrive^ SfC. dseis, asen. VERBS. 117 Preterite, Haya,hayas, haya,liayamoSj I may have arrived, 8fc, we hayais, hayan, llegado. mai/ have arrived, 6f c. Pluperfect. Hiibiese, hubieses, hubiese, I might have arrived, S^'c, ice hubiesemosj hubieseis^hu- might have arrived, Sfc, biesen llegado. PARADIGM OF REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. Observation, Reflective and reciprocal verbs have no conjugation peculiar to them. In the simple tenses they are conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to which they belong ; and in the compound tenses, like the verb llegar^ to arrive ; that is to say, they take haber and not ser as an auxiliary and the participle is indeclinable. Nevertheless, as the double pronoun, which is found in all the tenses and in each person, might present some difficulties, we shall con- jugate some tenses of the verb congratularse^ to congratu- late oneself, which will suffice both for reflective and recip- rocal verbs ; observing however, that the reciprocal verbs can be such only in the three persons plural, be- cause reciprocity cannot exist but between two persons at least. In these plurals, yo me congratulo^ tii te cons^ratulas^ el se congratula^ I congratulate myself, thou congratulatest thyself, he congratulates himself, the verb is reflective ; and in nosott*os nos congratulamos, vosotros os congratidais, ellos se congratulaUj the verb can be either reflective or recipro- cal : it is reciprocal if these words laios a otros^ each other, mutuamente, mutually, can be joined to the verb : it is reflec- tive if these words are neither expressed nor understood. INFINITIVE. Present, Congratularse,* to congratulate oneself. Preterite, Haberse congratulado, to have congratulated oneself. * Ail verbs require the objective pronouns to be placed after them in the present y and after the auxiliary in the preterite of the Infiniiive' mode whether used affirmatively or negatively. 118 VERBS. Gerund. Congratulandose^ congratulating oneself. Compound Gerund. Habiendose congratulado, having congratulated oneself* Participle. Congratulado. congratulated. Yo me congratulo;, Tu te congratulas. El se congratula, Nosotros nos congratulamos, Vosotros OS congratulais, EUos se congratulan. INDICATIVE. Present. ^ I congratulate myself, thou congratulate st thyself, he congratulates himself, we congratulate ourselves. you congrattdate yourselves^ they congratulate themselves. The other simple tenses follow the same order. Preterite indefinite. I have congratulated myself. thou hast congratulated thy* self. he has congratulated himself. we have congratulated our- selves. you have congratulated your- selves. they have congratulated them- selves. All the compound tenses follow the same order. Yo me he congratulado, Tu te has congratulado, El se ha congratulado, Nosotros nos hemos congra- tulado, Vosotros OS habeis congra- tulado, Ellos se han conofratulado. IMPERATIVE. Congratulate, Congratulese, *Congratulemonos, *Congratulaos, ConG^ratulense. congratulate thyself, let him congratulate himself, let us congratulate ourselves, congratulate yourselves, let them congratulate them- selves. * The s of the first person plural and the d of the second are al- ways suppressed in the imperative in reflected and reciprocal verbs. VERBS. 119 PARADIGM OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. Present. Preterite, Gerund. Participle. Present, Imperfect, Pret. def, Pret. indef. Pluperfect, Future, Future ant. INFINITIVE. Granizar, Haber granizado, Granizando, Granizado. to hail, to have hailed, hailing. hailed. INDICATIVE. Graniza, Granizaba, Granizo, Ha granizado, Habia granizado, Granizara, or Granizare, Habra granizado, it hails, it did hail, it hailed, it has hailed, it had hailed, it will hail, it will have hailed. CONDITIONALS. Present, Past. Present, Imperfect. Preterite, Pluperfect, Granizaria or granizara, it would hail, Habria granizado, it would have hailed. SUBJUNCTIVE. Que Granice, Granizase, Haya granizado, Hubiese granizado, that it may hail, that it might hail, that it may have hailed, that it might have hailed. Conjugation of the impersonal verb ser menester, to be requisite or necessary. INFINITIVE. Present. Gerund, Participle. Present, Imp rfect, Pret, def. Future, Ser menester, Siendo menester, Sido menester, to he necessary, being necessary, been necessary. INDICATIVE. Es menester. Era menester, Fue menester. Sera or fuere menester, it is necessary, it was necessary, it was necessary, it will be necessary.. 120 VERBS. CONDITIONAL. Seria or fuera menesterj it would be necessary. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Sea menester, it may be necessary. . Imperfect. Fuese menester, it might be necessary. Conjugation of the imjjersoiial verb habei?. INDICATIVE. Present. Hay,* there is, there are, Imperfect. Habla, thtre was, there were* Pret. def. Hubo, there was, there were. Future. Habra or hubiere, there shall or will be. CONDITIONAL Habria or hubiera, there should be. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Haya, there may be. Imperfect. Hubiese, there might be. N. B. This impersonal is used thus, that it to say in the third person singular, even with a substantive in the plural ; as, haij un honibre, there is a man ; hubo mwg-eres, there were women. The compound tenses are formed by adding the participle habido, to the simple tenses. Ex. Ha habido, there has or there have been, &c. XIST OF SOME IMPERSONAL VERBS. Infinitive. 3d per s. of the pres. of the ind. Amanecer, to begin to be day- Amanece, it begins to be day- light, light. Anochecer, to begin to grow Anochece, it begins to grow dark^ . dark. Escarchar, to freeze, to glaze, Escarcha, it freezes, it glazes. speaking of dew or rain that glazes what it falls upon by freezing. ^ Hay loses the letter y when this word is placed at the end of a phrase. Ex. For hay un arlo, we say, un am ha^ it is one year ago. VERBS. 121 Granizar, to hail^ Granizaj it hails, Helar, to freeze, Hiela, it freezes, Llover, to rain, Llueve, it rains, Lloviznar, to drizzle, Llovizna, it drizzles, Nevar, to snow, Nieva, it snows, Relampaguearj to liglden, Relampaguea, it lightens, Tronar, to thunder, Truena, it thunders, Obserimtion, Amanecer and anochecer have sometimes the three persons; then they signify to arrive, to be, to find oneself at the dawn of day or at the fall of night in such a condition. Ex. Mi padre amanecid en Pains : amanecid el campo lleno de rocio : are as if I said, mi padre llegd d Paris cuando amanecid : el campo estfjtba lleno de rocio cuan- do amanecid, my father arrived at Paris when the day dawn- ed : the fields were covered with dew at the dawn of day. Mi amigo amanecid pobre, 6 yo anocheci rico, that is to say, mi amigo se halld pobre cuando amanecid, my friend was poor when the smi rose, and 1 w^as rich when the sun set. List and covjiigations of the irregular verbs ^ arranged in alphabetical order* IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. N. B. 1st. The verbs marked thust are little used. 2d. The third conditional not differing at all in its ter- minations from the imperfect of the subjunctive, we have thought it useless to conjugate it in the conditional, and we have contented ourselves with giving it in the subjunctive. 3d. AVe place in the subjunctive mode the future con- junctive simple for the sake of distinctness. 4th. There are some verbs which undergo slight ahera- tions, either in their radical lettters, or in their terminations ; but they are not on that account irregular ; they only under- go these changes to preserve in the other tenses the pronun- ciation analagous to that which they have in the present of the infinitive. Of this number are, 1st. the verbs ending in car, which change the c into qu when it must be followed by an e : as buscar, to seek, busqui, I sought ; busque, bits- ques, busque, ^c, that I may seek, that thou mayst seek, that he may seek, &;c. 2d. Those ending in gar which take 11 122 VBKB&* an u after the g before e, as llegar^ to arrive ; Hegue, I arriv- ed: pagar, to pay, pagu^^ I paid, &;c. 3d. Several ending in cer and cir which change the c into z before a and o, as veneer^ to conquer, venzo ; resarcir, to repair, resarzoj I re- pair. 4th. For the same reason delinquir^ to do wrong, changes qu into c before a and o. Ex. DelincOy delinca^ de- lincamos ; and escogevy to choose, changes the g into j be- fore a and o. Ex. Escojo^ escoja. 5th. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer^ to beHeve ; /eer, to read ; poseer^ to possess ; proveer^ to provide, in those terminations which contain an z, change it into y whenever it is to be joined with another vowel, as creij creyd ; lei^ leytron ; poseiypose- yei^e ; provei^ proveytremos^ &c. 6th. We must make the same change in the verbs ending in w^>, when the u and the i make a part of two different syllables. Thus, huir^ to fly, makes in the third person of the preterite definite, huy6 ; arguir makes arguyO ; constituir makes canstituydy &c. N. B. The tenses and persons which are irregular are laid down in italics y and o?ily the Jirsi person of the tenses which are regular or run on uniformly irregular throughout the tense, is expressed. Inf. Pres. Gerund. Participle. Aborrecer, Aborreciendo, Aborrecido, to hate to abhor. hating. hated. Ind. Pres. Aborrezco, aborreces, aborrece. Imperfect. Pret. def Future. Conditional. Imperative. Sub. pres. Imperfect. Future. ) I hatCyOv aborrecemos, aborreceis,aborrecen, ^ abhor. Aborrecia, &c. I did abhor. Aborreci, &c. J hated. Aborrecere, &c. J shall or will hate.^ Aborreceria or aborreciera, &c. ? I should or ^ loould hate. Aborrece, aborezca^ hate thou^ aborrezcamoSy aborreced, aborrezcan. &:c. Que aborrezcayoborezcas^aborrezcay^ that I hate [ aborrezcamoSy aborrescais, aborrez- \ or may can^j hate. Que aborreciese, Szc. that I hated or might hate. Si aborreciere, &c. If I hcde or shall hate. VEKBS. 123 N. B. The irregularity of this verb, of all like it in ecer, and of those ending in ocer and acer, consists in taking a t before c in the first person singular of the present indica- live, in all those of the present subjunctive, in the first of the plural, and in the third of the singular and plural of the im- perative. The verb hacer is the only exception to this rule ; but it has other irregularities, and is found conjugated in its alphabetical order. Abrir, to open, is irregular only in tlie participle abierto. to absolve, absolving, absolved. Infinitive. Absolver, Gerund. Absolviendo, Participle, Absuelto^ Ind,pres, Absuelvo, absuelves^ absuelve, ') I absolve, or absolvemos, absolveis, absuelven^ ^ do absolve, Absolvia, &c. I did absolve, Absolvi, &c. I absolved, Absolvere, &c. I shall or ici 11 absolve, Absolveria or absolviera, &cc, I sliouhl or ivould absolve. Absuelve, absudva^ > absolve thou. absolvamos,absolved,a6swe/t'a/?, \ See, Que absuelva^absuelvas^ absuelva^ ^ that I ab- absolvamos, absolvais, aS^z^eZra;?, > solve oxmaij J absolve. Que absolviese, See that J absolved or might absolve, Cuando absolviere, &:c. when I absolve or shall absolve, Abstraer, to abstract, to make an abstraction. See traer. Acaecerj to happen, (impersonal.) See aborrecer. Imperfect, Fret, def. Future, Condition, Imperative, SubJ.pres, Imperfect. Future, Infinitive. Acertar, to succeed, to hit the marh. Gerund. Acertando, succeeding. Participle. Acertado, succeeded. Indie, pres, Acierto, aciertas, acierta, ') I succeed, or Acertamos, acertais, aciertan, ^ hit the mark, Acertaba, &c. J did succeed, Acerte, &c. J succeeded. Imperfect Fret. def. Future. Acertare, &c. I shall or will succeed. 124 Condit. Imperative. Sub» pres* Imperfect, Future. VERBS. Acertaria or acertara, &;c Acierta^ acierte, acerternos. acertad, acierten^ Que acierte, aciertes^ acierte, acerternos, acerteis, acierten. Que acertase, &c Si acertare, &c. I should or would succeed* ^ succeed thou, &c. that I succeed^ or may succeed. that I S2icceededy or might succeed. if I succeed^ or shall succeed. Inf. pres. Acordar, to agree , to iresolve. Gerund. Acordando, agreeing. Participle. Acordado, agreed. Indie. pres. Acuerdo^ acuerdaSy acuerda^ ? I agreCj or Acordarnos, acordais, acuerdan^ 5 ^^ resolve. Imperfect. Acordaba, &c. I did agree. Pret. def Acorde, 8zc. I agreed. Future. A cord are, &c. 1 shall or will agree. Condit. Acordaria, acordara, I should or icould agree. Imperat. Acuerda^acuerde^ > agi^ee thou^ acordemoSj acordad, acuerde?!, 5 <^c. Sub. pres. Que acuerde, acuerdes^acuerde^ ') that I agree j^ acordemos, acordeis, acuerden^ ^ or may agree. Imperfect. Que acordase^&c. that I agreed or might agree. Future. Cuando acordare, &c. when I agi^ee, or shall agree, Acordarse, to remember. See acordar. Acordar a uno, to make one remember. See acordar* Acostarse, to go to bed. See acordar. Acrecentar, to increase. See acertar. Adherir, Adhiriendoy Adherido. to adhere. adhering. Infpres. Gerund, Participle. Adherido. adhered. Indie, pres. Adhiero, adhiereSj adhiere, '^ I adhere ^ or do adherimos, adheris, adhieren^ Adheria, &c. Adheri, adheriste, adhiriS, adherimos, adheristeis, adhirieron, ^ ed, Adherire, &c. J[" shall or 7vill adhere. Imperfect. Fret. def. adhere. I did adhere, adher- Future. .A' VERBS. l^J Condition, Adheriria, or adhiriera, &c. / should or icould adhere. Imperative, Adhiere, adhiera^ ') adhere ihoi/, adhiramos, adheridj adhieran^ 5 ^^• Subj.pres, Que adhiera,adhieras^ adhiera, ^ that I adhere^ adhiramos, adhirais^ adhieran, \ or may adhere. Imperfect, Que adhiriesCy &c. that I adhered, or might adhere. Future, Si adhijnere, &c. if I adhere, or shall adhere, Adolecer, to fall or to be sick. See aborrecer. Adormecer, to lull asleep. Idem. Advertir. to take heed. See adherir. tAgorar, to augur, to conjecture. See acordar. Agradecer, to take a thing kindly, to acknowledge a henefit. See aborrecer. 5 Alentar, to encourage. See acertar. \ Alentarse, to take courage. Idem. Almorzar, to breakfast. See acordar. Amanecer. (verb imp.) to begin to be daylight. See aborrecer. tAmentar, to shoot an arroic. See acertar. Amolar, to sharpen. See acordar. tAmortecersej to faint ^ to lose courage. See aborrecer. Lifn, pres. Gerund, Participle, In die, pres. A n d o, Imoerf, Fret,^def Future. Condition, Imperative. Sub. pres. Imperf Future, Andar, to icalk, to go. Andando, walking. Andadoj walked, &c. J walk, or do walk, Andaba. &:c. I did walk. Anduve, anduviste^ anduvo, ^ J walk- anduvijuos^anduvisteis, anduvieron, ^ ^^' Andai'e, &;c. I shall or will icalk. Andaria or anduviera, &c. I should or would walk. Anda.ande.andemos. &;c. icalk thou, &c. Que ande, Sec. that I walk or 7nay walk. Que anduviese&Q, that I walked ox might walk, Cuando anduviere^ &c. ichen I walk, or shall walk. Anochecer, to begin to ^roic dark. See aborrecer. 126 VERBS. Anteponer, to prefer. See poner. Antever^ to foresee. See ver. Apacentar, to lead sheep to gi^ass. See acertar. Aparecerj to appear. /See aborrecer. Apercibir^ to prepare, to get ready. See pedir. Apetecer, to icish, to long for. See aborrecer* Apostar, to lay a wager. See acordar. Aporcar, to cover loith earth, (celery, 8{c.) See acordar . Aportar, to make a harbor. Idem. Aprobar, to approve. Idem. tArbolecer^ to become a tree. See aborrecer. ^ Arrendar, to let to a tenant ; — to tie (a horse) by the reins. See acertar. ArrepentirsCj to repent. See adherir. Asentar, to sit down, to place, to resolve, to register. See acertar. Asentir, to consent. See adherir. Aserrar, to saw. See acertar. Asestar, to aim or point at. Idem. Asir, to seize, to take root, (speaking of plants, orfigura* tively speaking of persons,) has no irres^ularity but in the following tenses, which are very little used. Indicat. pres. Asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen. Imperat. Ase, asga, asgamos, asid, asgan. Subj. pres. Asga, asgas, as- ga, asgamos, asgais, asgan. Asolar, to pull down, to destroy. See acordar. Asoldar, tofmmish one icith money. Idem. Asonar, to assemble by the sound of bells, to tune. Idem. Atenderj to apply oneself ^ to consider ; to regard. See entender. tAtener, to keep pace with another — to keep one^s word. See tener. Atentar, to attempt. ...to form an enterprise against the laws in a capital concern. See acertar. tAterecerse, to get benumbed, to stiffen with cold. See aborrecer. Aterrar, to throw down on the ground. See acertar. Atestar, tofll up. Idem. Atormecerse, to get benumbed. See aborrecer. Atraer, to attract, to draio over to oneself See traer. Atravesar^ to pierce, or bore. See acertar. "^Atronar, to thunder, (impersonal) See acordar. VERBS. UP Avenirj to happen, to come unexpectedly, to reconcile a difference. See venir. ' Avenirse, to agree, to be suitable, agreeable. Aventar, to fan, to winnow. See acertar. Aventarse, to be frightened, (speaking ofajloch) Idem. Avergonzar, to make one ashamed. See acordar. Avergonzarse, to be ashamed. Idem. B. Inf, pres, Bendecir, to bless. Gerund, Bendiciendo, blessing. Participle, Bendito, blessed. Indie, pres, Bendigo, bendices^ bendice, ben- decimos, bendeciSj bendicen. Imperfect. Bendeciaj &;c. Fret, def, Bendige, bendigiste, bendijo, bendi- ' gimos, bendigisteis, bendigeron, ^ Future, Bendecircj (fee. I shall or tcill bless. Condition, Bendeciriaj or bendigera, ^c, ^ I should or ^ would bless. Imperative. Bendice, bendiga, ^ bless thouy bendigamos, bendecidj bendlgan, ^ ^c. Sub, pres. Que bendiga, &c. that I bless or may bless. Imperfect, Que bendigese, &c. that Iblessed, or might bless. Future, Si bendigere, &c. if 1 bless, or shall bless. ^ I bless, or ^ do bless. I did bless. I blessed. C. Inf, pres, Caber^ to contain, to be contained, Gerund, Cabiendo^ being contained. Participle, Cabido, been contained, Ind, pres. Quepo, cabes, Szc. I am contained. Imperfect. Cabia, &:c. I was contained. Fret, def, Cupe, cupiste, cupo, 8fc, I was contained. Future, Cabrt, &c. J shall or will be contained. Conditional. Cabria or cupiera, &;c. J should or wouM be contained. Imperative. Cahe, quepa, ~) be thou con* quepamos, cabed, quepan, ^ tained, Sfc, Sub, pres. Que quepa, ^c, that I be or may be contained. Imperfect. Que cupiese, ^c, that I was, or might be contained. 128 VERBS. Future. Cuando cupiere^ &c. ivhen 1 be^ or shall be contained. Inf, pres. Caer, to falL Gerund, Cayendo^ falling. Participle, Caido, fallen, Ind.pres, Caigo, caes, &c. I fall or do fall. Imperfect, Caiaj&c. I did fall, Pret,perf Cai,caiste,cay6,caimos, caisteisjcayeroiij I fell. Future, Caere, &c. I shall or will fall. Condition, Caerla or cayera, I should or toould falh Imperative, Cae, caiga, \f<^ll thou^ caigamos, caed, caigan, ^ &c. Que caiga, &:c. that I fall, or may fall. Que cayese, &c. that I fell, or might fall. Sub, pres. Imperfect, Future* Si cayere. &c. If I fall or shall fall. Calentar, to warm, to heat. See acertar. Canecer, to groio grayhaired. See aborrecer. Carecer, ^o want, to be in icant. Idem. Cegar, to blind, to become blind. See acertar. C Cenir, to girdle, to surround. See .... pedir. < Cenirse, to girdle oneself ; to limit oneself; to restrict ^ oneself Idem. Cerner, to sift, to pass flour through a sieve — to blossom. (speaking of vines, of grain, 8^c.) See entendcr. Cerrar, to shut, to lock up. See acertar. Cimentar, to cement, to lay the foundation. Idem. to cook, to bake. cooking, cooked. 1 bake or do bake. Inf pres. Cocer, Gerund. Cociendo, Participle, Cocido, Ind.pres. Cuezo, cueces, cuece, coce- mos, coceis. cuecen, Imperfect. Cociaj &c. I did cook. Pret.perf Coci, &c, I baked. Future. Cocere, &;c. I shall or will cook. Condition, Coceria or cociera, &c. I should or would bake. Imperative. Cuece cueza, S i,^j^^ ^hou, ^c. cozamos, cored, caezan, I ' ^ Subj.pres, Que cueza, cuezas, cueza, co- S that I bake, or zamoS;> cozaisj cuezan, ^ may bake. VERBS. - 129. Imperfect, Que cociese, &c. that I baked or might ^ake. Future. Cuando cocierej &c. when Ibake, or shall bake. X. B. This verb has the same irregularities as Absolver ; but we have conjugated it on account of the z which it takes instead of the c before a and o. and that we may refer to it for the conjugation of similar verbs. Colar, to strain^ to jilt er a liquor. See acordcu:. Colegir, to collect, to conclude^ to deduce. See pedir. N. B. It changes g into j before a and o. Collar, to hang, to suspend. See acordar. tComedir, ^0 re/ec^; to think, to premeditate, S^e pedir. Comedirse, to become polite ; to be ruled by reason. Idem. Comenzar, to begin. See acertar. Compadecerse, to have pity. See aborrecer. Componer, to compose. See poner. Comparecer, to appear. Idem. Corapetir, to enter into or to be in competition. See pedir. Complacer, to please one. See aborrecer. Comprobar, to prove, to confirm. See acordar. Concebir, to conceive. See pedir. Concertar, to concert. See acertar. Concordar, to adjust, to conciliate, to be conformable^ like. See acordar. Condescenderj to condescend. See entender, Condoler, to sympathize. See absolver. Inf. pres. Conducir, to conduct, to lead. Gerund. Conduciendo, conducting. Participle, Conducido^ conducted. Ind. pres. Conduzco, conduces, &c. I conduct. Imperfect, Conducia/&:c. I did conduct. Pret, def, Conduge,condugiste, condujo,condu' ) Iconduc- gimos, condugisteis, condugeron, \ ted. Future, Conducire, &c. I shall or will conduct. Condition, Conduciria or condugera, Scc. ^ I should or icould \ conduct. Imperative, Qo\\d\\cQ,conduzca, ~) conduct conduzcamos, conducidj conduzcan, S thou.^c. 130 VERBS. Sub.pres, Que C07iduzca, &c. Imperfect, Que condugese, &c. Future. Si condugere. &c. ^/m^ I conducij or 7?2«y conduct. \ that I conducted^ or ' might conduct. If I conduct or sJiall conduct. Conferir,, to confer. See adherir. Confesar, to confess ; to 01071. See acertar. ConnQover, to excite^ to disturb. See enten(|er. Conocer, to know. See aborrecer. Gonseguir, to obtain. See pedir. Cons.^ntir, to consent. See adherir. Consolar, to console. See acordar. Consonar, to agree ; to be in tune. Idem. Constrenir, to constrain. See pedir. Contar, to count. See acordar. Contener, to contain. See tener. Contender, to contest ; to dispute. See entender. Contradecir, to contradict. See decir. — N. B. They diffei^ only in the second pe^^son singular of the imperative which is CoNTRADicE, and not Contradi. Contrahacer, to counterfeit. See hacer. Contraer, to contract. See traer. Contravenir, to act contrary. See venir. Controvertir, to dispute on a doubtful subject. See adherir. Convalecer, to be convalescent. See aborrecer. Convenir, to agree. See venir. Convertir, to convert. See adherir. Corregir, to connect. See pedir. Costar, to cost. See acordar. Crecer, to grow. See aborrecer. Cubrir, to cover ^ — is irregular only in the participle past cubierto. D. Inf. pres. Bar, Gerund. Dando, Participle. Dado, to give, giving, given. Ind. pres. Doy^ das, &c. Imperfect. Daba, &c. I give I did give VERBS. •• 131 Fret. def. Dij diste, di6^ dimos, disteiSj dieron, I gave, Futiire. Dare, &c. I shaU or icUl give. Condition, Daria or diera, I should or would give, Im erative. Da, de. demos, dad, den, give thou, ^'c. Sue. pres. Que de, Sec, that I give or may give, ImperfecL Que ditse. &c. that I gave, or might give. Future. Cuando diere^ &c. when I give, or shall give. Decaer, to decay. See caer. Decentai', to cut, to take away a part of a ichole. See acertar. Inf, pres. Decir. to tell, to say. Gerund. Diciendo, saying. Participle. Dicho, said. Ind.pres, Di go, dices, dice, ? r o^w ^., ^^ . , ^ T . 1^7- > i sa}/ or do sau. decimos, decis, dicen, 3 ^ Imperfect, Decia, ^-c. I did tell. Pret. def. Dis[e, digiste, dijo, digimos, dig is- } j .7 teis, dijeron^ 5 Future. Dire, dirds, Szc, I shall or will tell. Condition, Diria or digera, &zc, I should or would say. Imperative, Di, diga, digamos, decid. digan, tell thou, <^'c. Sub. pres. Que diga, ^'c, that I say or may say. Imperfect, Que digese, (S*c. that I told, or might telL Future, Si digere, k'c, if I tell, or shall say. Deducir, to deduct. See conducir. Defender, to defend. See enteuder. Deferir, to defer, to delay. See adherir. Degollar, to decapitate. See acordar. Demoler, to demolish. See absolver. Demonstrar, to demonstrate. See acordar. Denegar, to deny ; to refuse. See acertar. Denostar, to use any one ill by word or deed. See acordar Deponer, to depose, to resign. See poner. Derrengar, to break the back. See acertar. Derretir, to melt. See pedir. Desabastecer, (una plaza,) to strip a place of provisions. See aborrecer. Desacertar, to err, to mistake. See acertar. Desacordar, to disagree. See acordar. Desadormecer, to awake. See aborrecer. Desalentar, to discourage. See acertar. 132 VER^s; Desaparecer, to disappear. See aborrecen Desapretar, to loosen ; to unbind. See acertar. Desaprobar, to disapprove. See acordar. Desasosegar;, to disturb. See acertar. Desatender, to be inattentive. See entender. Desatentar, to trouble^ to act giddily. See acertai'. tDesatravesar, to disentangle. Idem. Desavenir, not to agree^ to be of a contrary opinion. See venir. Descaecer, to decay, to lose one^s strength, ^ee aborrecer. Descender, to descend. See entender. Descenir, to ungirdle. See pedir. '/"Decimentar, to undermine the foundation. See acertar. Descolgar, to takedown^ to slacken. See acordar. D^scoUar, to suipass in height, to be taller. Idem. Descomedirse, to grow impolite^ to take too much liberty. See pedir. Descomponer, to disorder, to discompose. See poner. Desconsentir, to refuse one^s consent. See adherir. Desconcertar, to confound^ to derange. See acertar. Desconocerj to disown. See aborrecer. Desconsolar, to affiict, to grieve. See acordar. Descontar, to discount. Idem. Descubrir, to discover — is irregular only in the participle past, descubierto. Desdecir, to give the lie. See decir, except for the second person singular of the imperative which is desdtce and not desdi. Desempedrar, to unpave. See acertar. Desencerrar, to set at liberty. Idem. Desengrosar, to diminish, lessen. See acordar. Desentender, to pretend ignorance. See entender. Desenterrar, to unbury. See acertar. Desentorpecer, to awaken, to quicken. See aborrecer. Desenvolver, to unwrap, to develope. See absolver. Deservir, to clear the table, to oblige, to hurt. See pedir. Desfallecer, to faint away. See aborrecer. Desflaquecer, to iveakeii, to languish. Idem. Desflocar, to ravel, (cloth.) See acordar. Desfogarse, to vent one^s passion. Idem. Desguarnecer, to unfurnish. See aborrecer. Peshacer, to undo. See hacer VERBS. 133 Deshelar, to (have. See acertar. Desherrar, to unfetter^ to unshoe (a horse.) Idem. Desleir, to dilute, to temper. See pedir. Deslucir, to tarnish, to destroy the lustre. Gerund. Deslu- ciendo. Part, Deslucido. Indicat. pres. Desluzco, deslu- ces, &c. Imperat. Desluce, desluzca. desluzcamos, deslu- cid, desluzcan, SuhJ. pres. desluzca, 4*c. N. B. All the other tenses are regular and are conjug-:- ted like mifrir. Desmembrar. to dismember. See acertar. Desmentin to contradict. See adherii'. Desobedecer, to disobey. See aborrecer, Desollar, to skin. See acordar. Desovar, to spawn (speaking of fishes.) Idem. Despedh'j to send away. See pedir. Despedirse, to take leave of. Idem. Despedrar, to take away tiu stones. See acertar. Despernar, to cut off the legs. Idem. Despertai', to awake. Idem. Despiacer, to displease. See aborrecer. DesplegaTj to display : to unplait. See acertar. Despoblar. to unpeople. See acordar. Desteiiir, to discolour. See pedir. Desterrar, to exile, to banisJi. See acertar. Destorcer, to untwist, to straighten. See cocer. Destrocar, to exchange back again. See acordar. Desvanecerse, to faint away. See aborrecer. Desvergonzarse, to lose all shame ; tc want respect. Sec acordar. Detener, to stop. See tener. i'Detraer, to remove, to detract. See ti'aer. Devolver. to return : to send back. See absolver. Dezmar, to decimate or tithe. See acertar. Diferir, to differ. See adherir. Digerir; to digest. Idem. Disolver; to dissolve. See absolver. Disponer. to dispo§e. See poner. Distraer. to distract. See traer Divertk. to divert. See adherir. 12 134 VERBS. C Doler, to feel 'pain. See absolver. < Dolerse, to he sorry ; to repent; — to feel for others* pain ; ^ — to compassionate. See absolver. Infpres. Dormir, to sleep. Gerund. Durmiendo^ sleeping. Participle. Dor raid o, slept. Ind, pres. Duermo, duermes, duenne, ) I sleep, or do dormimos, dormis, duermen. ^ , sleep. Imperfect. Dormla, <^c. I did sleep. Pret, def Dormi, dormiste, durmid, ? f / / dormimos, dormisteis, duivnieron. ^ ' Future. Dormire, &c. I shall or will sleep. Condition. Dormiria ox durmieraykc. I should or would sleep. Imperative. Duerme, duerma. } . .7 ^ ^ , 1 -J T > sleep thou. Sec. durmamos, dormid, duerman, S Sub. pres. Que duerma, duermas, duerma, ^ that I sleep or durmamos, durmais, duerman, ^ may sleep. Imperfect. Que durmiese, &c. that I slept, or might sleep. Future. CuaDdo durmiere, &c. when I sleep or shall sleep. E. Elegir, to choose, to elect. See pedir. N. B. This verb changes G into J before A and O to preserve the guttural pronunciation of the infinitive. Embravecerse, to become furious. See aborrecer. Embrutecerse, to become brutish. iSee aborrecer. Ernpedrarj to pave. See aceri^r. •> Empezar, to begin. Idem. Empluvr.ecer, to begin to have feathers. See 'dhorrecer. Empobrecer, to grow poor. Idem. Eaiporcar, to dirt. See a cord a r. Encabellecer, to begin to have hair. See aborrecer. Encallecer, to form a callus. Idem. Encalvecer, to become bald. Idem. Encanecer, to be greijhaired by old age. Idem. Encarecer, to raise the price, to exaggerate. Idem. Encender, to light afire. See aceriar. Encensar, to perfume with incense. See acertar. ▼ ERBS. 135 Encerrar, to shut in. Idem. Encouiendar, to recommend. Idem. Encrudecerse, to become cruel. See aborrecer. Encrueitfcer, to irritate, to rtndtr cruel See aborrecer. Encontrar, to meet^ to find. See acordar, Et^.cordar, to put strings and cords {to an instrument.) Idem. Eacubenar, to cover with a blanket. See aceriar. Endentecer, to breed teeth. See aborrecer. Eiidurecer, to grow hard. Idem. Enflaquecer, to gi^ow lean. Idem. E.'ifurecerse, to become furious. Idem, Erii^randecer, to s^roic, to enlarge. Idem. Engreirse, to adorn one's self. See pedir. En^rosar, to groic big. See acordar. Ea'oquecer, to become mad. See aborrecer. Eolucir, to whiten, to do over with plaster. See deslucir. Enmendar, to coiTCct, See acertar. Eomocecer, to grow young again. See aborrecer. Enmobecerse, to grow mouldy. Idem. Enmudecer, tc grow dumb, to be silent. Idem. Eiinegrecer, to o;row black, to blacken. Idem. Ennoblecer, to ennoble. Idem. tEonudecer, to set or to kmit, [speakijig of grain, ^'c.) Idem. Eorarecer, to rarefy, to become thin. Idem. Enriquecer, to enrich. See aborrecer. Eorodar, to break upon the wheel. See acordar. Eosan^reotar, to make bloody, *S*ee acertar. Ensoberbecerse, to s!;rcw proud, »S'ee aborrecer. Entailecer, to shoot or bud. Idem. Inf.pres. Entender, to understajid. Gerund. Entendiendo, understanding. Participle. Eotendido, understood. Ind, pres. Entiendo, entiendes, eniiende, S^u7iderstand,0T enleDdemos^enteDQcis, e7ii"/e?icfe?7, ( do ujiderstcmd. Imperfect. Entendia, &c. I did understand, Frtt. def Eateodi, &c. I understood. Future. Eatendere, <5|'c. I shall or will understand. r^o j'/'nv, Entenderia or entendiese, &:<:, ^ I should or would understand. 136 VERBS. Imperative, Sub. pres. Imperfect, Future, Entiende, entienda, entendamos, entended, eniiendan^ Que entienda, entiendas, entienda, C entendamos, entendais, €ntie7idan,< Que entendiese, &c. Si entendiere, &c. ^ understand ^ thoUy Sfc, that I under- stand or may (^ understand, that I understood or might understand. If I understand or shall understand. Enternecer, to soften, to touch, to move^ to pity. See aborrecer Enterrar, to bury. See acerlar. Entomecer orentuniecer, to swell; tostupify. See aborrecer. Entontecerse, to become didl, foolish, Idenj. Entorpecerse, to become heavy, lazy. Idem. Entrelucir^ to glimmer. See deslucir. Entreoir, to hear imperfectly. See oir, Entretener, to entertain. See tener. Entristeeer, to vex, to make sad. See aborrecer. Entullecer, to lose the use of one's limbs. Idem. Entumecerse, to swell ; to grow angry {speaking of the sea,) Idem. Envegecer, to grow old. Idem, Enverdecer, to paint in green. Idem. Envestir, to invest. See pedir. Envolver, to wrap up. See absolver. Equivaler, to be of equal value. See valer* Inf. Pres, Gerund, Participle. Ind.pres. Yergo, Erguir, Irguiendo, Erguido, to erect, to raise, erecting, erected. 2/^^^^^ Imperfect, Pret. clef Future, Condition, gues, yergue, erguimos, erguis, yerguen^ erect y or do erect, 1 did erect. I erected. Erguia, &c. Ergui, erguiste, irguio, erguimos, erguisteis, irguieron^ Ergui re, &c. I shall or will erect. Erguiria or irguiera^ &c. I should or would erect. VERBS. 137 Imperative. Yergue, yerga, ^ ^^^^^ ^j^ n irgamos, erguid, yergan, ^ Sub. pres. Que yerga.yergas, yerga, ) that I erect, or may irgamosy irgais, yergan, ^ erect. Imperfect, Que irguiese, &c. that I erected or might erect. Future, Cuando irguire, &c. when I erect or shall erect. Inf. pres, Errar, to err, Ind.pres, Yerro, y err as, yerra, ^ j ^^,^ ^^ ^^ ^^.^^^ erramos, errais, yerren, 5 Imperative. Yerra, yerre, ? ^^^, ^j ^^_ erremos, errad, yerren, ^ Sub, pres. Que yerre, yerres, yerre, ^ that I err or erremos, erreis, yerren, 3 '^^^h' ^^^^' N. B. All the other tenses are rej^ular. +Escalentar, to warm. See acertar. Escarmentar, to correct oneself. Idem. Escaruecer, to mock one. See aborrecer. iEsclarecer, to clear up ; to light. Idem. Escocer, to smart, to itch painfully. See cocer. Escribir, to write. (It has no irregularity but in the participle past, escnto.) E^^lorzar, to animate, to encourage. See acordar. Estat3lecer, to establish. »S'ee aborrecer. Estiegar, to scour, rub. See acertar. Estremecerse, to tremble, to be frightened See aborrecer. Esirefiir, to tie, to bind, to press close, to squeeze. See pedir. Espedir, to dispatch. Idem. Esponer, to expose. See poner. Extender, to spread. See entender. Estraer, to export, to extract. See traer. F. Fallecer, to die. See aborrecer. Favorecer, to fa\:our. Ideir). J'enecer, to finish, to die, to settle (an account.) Idem 12* 138 VERBS. Fortaiecer, to fortify. See aborrecer. Forzar, to force. See acordar. Fregar, to wash, to clean, to furbish (plate,) Freir, to fry. Part, Frito. The rest like pedir. G. Gemir, to groan. See pedir. Gobernar, io govern. See acertar. Guariiecer, to furnish. See aborrecer. H. ilsiher,( impersonal) Indie, pres. Hay fl«c? Ha, there is, there are. The rest like the auxiliary verb haber, loith this difference, that the former has only the third person singular (See the impersonal verbs,) N. B. The adverb there is never expressed in this imper- sonal verb in Spanish. Inf, pres. Hacer, to do, to make. Gerund. Haciendo, making. Participle, Hecho, done. Ind. pres. Hago, haces, &c. I do or make, imperfect, Hacia, &c. I did do or make. Pret. def. Hice, hiciste. hizo, 7 t tj i ^ 7- • L- / . • L- • M did or made, lucimos, nicisteis, hxcieron, ^ Future, Hart, hards, hard, P I shall or will hartmos, hartis, hardn^ ^ do or make. Condition. Haria or hiciera, &c. I should or would do, Imperaiive. Haz, has:a, 1 j 4i o ^ 7 i_ J / ? do thou, Sec hagamos, haced, hagan, ^ Sub. pres. Que haga, hagas, haga, ^ that I do or hagamos, hagais, hagan, ^ may do. Imperfect. Que hiciese, that I made or might make. Future. Si hiciere, &c. If I do or shall do. Heder, to stink. See en tender. Helar, to freeze (impersonal.) See acertar. Hender, to cleave^ or split. See entender. Herir, to wound. See adherir. Herraf, to shoe or to bind about with iron work. See acertar. VERBS. 129 Hervir to boil. See adherir. Holgar, to repose^ to do nothing. See acordar. Hollar, to trample under feet ; to tread. Idem. Humedecer, to moisten. See aborrecer. T. Impedir, to prevent. See pedir. Imponer, to impose. See poner. Indisponer, to indispose^ to vex^ — to render incapable^ 8{c. See poner. Inducir, to induce. See conducir. Inferh-j to infer. See adherir. Intervenirj to intervene. See venir. Introducirj to introduce. See conducir. Invernar, to tvinter. See acertar. Invertir, to transpose, to overturn^ to subvert the order^ ^c See adherir. Investir, to invest. See pedir. Ingerir or engerir, to graft a tree. Part, ingerto or engerto. See adherir. Inf. pres. Ir, to go. Gerund. Yendo, going. Participle. Ido, gone. Ind.pres. Voy^vas, va, vamos, vais, van, I go or do go. Imperfect. Iba, S{c. I did go. Pret. def Fui,fuiste,futfuimos,fuisteis, frier on, Iioent. Future. Ire, Sic. I shall or will go. Condition. Iria orfuera, &c. I should or would go. Imperative. Vt, vaya, > ^^^ „ ^ vamos, id^ vayan. 5 Sub. pres. Que vaya, vayas, vaya, 1 that I go or vdyamos, vdyais, vayan, ^ may go. Imperfect. Que fuese, fueses, fuese, / that I went or fuisemos, fuiseis, fuesen^ \ might go. Future. Cuando fuere, ^c. when 1 go or shall go. N. B. All the compound tenses of this verb are corrugated with the verb haber and not ser. We translate theyi I have or am gone, I had or was gone, &c. by he ido, habia ido, and not by Soy ido, era ido. 140 VER&S. Inf,pres» Jugar, to play. Ind.pres. Juego, juegasjuega, ^ j .^^ jugamosj jugais, juegan^ ^ r J' Imperative. Juega, Juegue, 1 j tj^ ^^. juguemoSj jugad, juegnen^ S Sub, pres. Que JNegue, juegues^ juegue^ ^ that I play or juguemoSj jugueis, jueguen^ 5 may play , N. B. All the other tenses are regular. / L. Lucir, to shine. See deslucir. LL. Llover, to rain (impersonal,) Part. Llovido, rained. See absolver. M. tMagrecer, to grow lean, JVlaldecirj to cw^se, Ser bendech'. Manifestar, to manifest. See acertar. Mantener, to maintain. See tener. Medh'j to measure. See pedir. Mentar, to mention^ to name. See acertar. Mentir, to lie. See adherir. \ Mereccr, to merit. See aborrecer. Mereiidar, to eat a collation between dinner Mnd supper. See acertar. Mohecerse^ to make mouldy. See aborrecer. Moler, to grind, Par^t. molido. See absolver. Morder, to bite. See absolver. Morir, to die. Part. Muerto. See dormir. Mo'strar/ to shoio, S^e acordar. Mover, to move^ to touchy to effect. See absolver. Nacer, to be b:jrn. See aborrecer. Negarj to deny ; to refuse. See acertar. Negrecer^ to blacken, to bec^nne black. See aborrecer. Nevar; to snow, {impers,) See acertar. VERBS. o. 141 Obedecer, to ohei/. See aborrecer. Oscurecer, to ohscurey darken. Idem. Obtener, to obtain. See tener. Ofrecer^ to offer. See aborrecer. Inf. pres. Gerund. Participle. Oir, Oyendo, Oido, to hear, hearing, heard. ind. pres. Imperfect. Pret. def. Future. Condition. Imperative. Sub . pres. Imperfect. Future. Oigo, oyes, oye, Oimos, oisj oyen, Oia, &c. Oi, oiste, oyo, oimos, olsteis, oyeron, Oire, &c. Oiria or oyera, &c. Oye, Oiga, oigamoSy oid, oigan, Que oiga^ &c. Que oyese, &c Si oyerej&c. > I hear or do hear. I did hear* > I heard. I shall or will hear. I shoidd or would hear. < hear thouy 8fc. that I hear or may hear, that I heard or might hear. if I hear or shall hear. to smell or scent. smelling. smelt. ' I smell or do smell. Inf. pres. Oler, Gerund. Oliendo, Participle. Olido, Ind. pres. HuelOy hueles^ huele, olemosj oleis, huelen^ ^ Imperative. Huele. huela. 7 77 -.t c olamos, oled, huelan, I ""'" *^"' ^''- Sub. pres. Que huela^ huelas^ huela^ ") that I smell or olamoSj olais, huelan, ^ may smelL N. B. All the other tenses are regular. Oponer, to oppose. See poner. P. Pacer, to feed, to graze. See aborrecer. Padecer, to suffer, to endure. Idem. S Parecer, to appear. Idem. I Parecerse, to resemble* Idem, 142 VERBS. Inf, pres. Gerund. Participle, Pedir, Pidiendoj Pedido, to ask, to beg, asking, asked. ■ , Ind. pres. Pido, pides, pide, ^ pedimos, pedis, piden, Imperfect. Pedia, &c. Pret. def. Pedi, pediste, pidio, pedimos. pedisteis, pidieron, Future. Pedire, &c. Condition. Pediria or pidiera, 8fc. Imperative. Pide, pida, pidamos, pedid, pidan^ Sub. pres. Que pida, ^c. Imperfect. Que pidiese^ &c. Future. Cuando pidiere, &c > I ask or do ask. I did ask. > I asked. I shall or will ask. I should 6r would ask. ^ ask thou, 8fc» that I ask or may ask. that I asked or might ask. when I ask or shall ask. Pensar, to think. See acertar. Perder, to lose. See entender. Perecer, to perish. See aborrecer. Perniquebrar, to break the legs. See acertar. Perseguirj to persecute, to pursue. See pedir. Pertenecer, to belong. See aborrecer. Pervertir, to pervtrt. See adherir. Inf. pres. Placer, Ind. pres. Imperfect. Pret. def. Sub. pres. Imperfect. Future. Me place, Placia, Plugo, Que plegue, to please. it pleases me. it did please. it phased. that it may please. N. sons. Quepluguiese or pluguiera, that it might please. S'l pluguiere. if it shall please. B. Placer is only used in the above tenses and per- Plegue d Dios ! May it please God ! Plegar, to plait or fold. See acertar. Poblar, to people. See acordar. VERB3. 143 Inf, pres, Poder, to be able, can, may, Geimnd, Fudiendo, being able. Participle* Podido, been able, Ind.pres. Puedo, puedes^ puede, 5 ^ ^^ ^^^^ or podemos, podeis, puederiy \ I can. Imperfect, Podia, &;c. / was able or could. Pret, def, Pude^ pudiste, pudo, ^ I was able or pudifnos, pudisteisy pudieron, ( could. Future. PodrS, &c. 1 shall or will be able. Condition. Podria, or pudiera^Szc, I should ov would be able. Imperative, (wanting.) Sub. pres. Que pueda, puedas, pueda, ^ that I can or podamos, podais, puedan, ( may be able. Imperfect. Que pudiese, &c. that I could or might be able. Future. Cua.ndopudiere, &c. when I can or shall be able. Inf. pres. Podrir, to rot. Gerund. Pudriendoy rotting. Participle. Podrido, rotten, Ind.pres. Pudro. pudres. pudre. ? r - j A ' A i J > 1 rot or do rot. podrimos, podris, pudren, 5 Imperfect. Podria, &;c. 1 did rot. Pret. def. Podri, podriste, pudrid^ ^ T - ff fJ podrimos, podristeis, pudrieron, ^ ^ Future. ^ Podrire, &c. I shall or will rot. Condition. Podriria or pudrier a ^ &c. I should or would rot. Imperative. Pudre, pudra, > ^^^ ^^^^ pudramos, podrid, pudran, ^ ' ^ ' Sub. pres. Que piidra^ &c. that I rot or may rot. Imperfect. Que pudriese^ &c. that I rotted or might rot. Future. Si pudricre, &c. if I rot or shall rot. N. B. Most tenses and persons of the above verb can only* be used figuratively. Inf, pres. Poner, to put ^ to place. Gerund. Poniendo, putting. Participle. Puesto, put or placed. Jnd. pres. Pongo, pones, Szc. I put or do put. Imperfect. Ponia, &:c. I did put. 144 VERBS. Fret. def. Fuse, pusiste, puso, ) ^ pusimos^ pusisteiSy pusierorij 5 r^^^^^» Future, Fondr^y &c. J shall or z^^zV/ put. Condition. Fondria^ or pusiera, ^c. IsJiouldor loould put. Imperative. Fan, ponga, ^ ^ poJigamos^poned^pongan^ ^^ ? 'J*^- iSw^. |)re5. Que ponga^ &c. ^Aa^ J^w^ or may put. Imperfect. Que pusiese^ &c. that T put or might put. Future. Cuando pusiere^ Szc. when I put or shall put. Predecir, to predict. See decir. ^ Preferir, to prefer. See adherir. Proponer, to propose. See poner. Prescribir, to prescribe, has no irregularity hut in the par- ticiple past^ prescrito. Presentir, to foresee^ to have a forecast. See adherir, Presuponer, to presuppose. See poner. Prevalecer, to prevail. See aborrecer. Prevenir, to anticipate, to prepare. See venir. Prever, to foresee. See ver. Producir, to produce. See conducir. Proferir, to utter. See adherir. Promover, to promote, to elevate {to a dignity.^ See absolver. Proponer, to propose. See poner. Proscribir, to banish^ is irregular only in the participle past yVROSCKlTO. Proseguir, to pursue, to continue. See pedir. Probar^ to prove ; to experience ; to tastcp to try. See acordar. Provenir, to proceed, to issue. See venir. Proveer; to provide. *S^ee N. B. 5th. page 121. Q. Quebrar, to hrealc, to dash in pieces ; to fail, to he a bank- rupt. See acertar. Inf pres. Querer, to will, to wish^ to love. Gerund. Queriendo, willing. Farticiple. Querido, willed. Ind. pres Quiero, quieres, quiere, ^ I will or wish or queremosj quereis;, quieren, ^ do love. VEUBS. 145 Imperfect. Queriaj &c. I did wish. Pret, def. Quise^ quisiste^ quiso, ^ I willed ov wish- quisimosy quisisteis^ quisieron^ 3 ed^ or loved. Future. Querre, &c. I shall or will wish. Conditio?!. Querria or quisieray &c. I should ox would icish. Imperative. Quiere, quiera, I j^ve thou, 8rc. queramos, quered quieran^ 5 Suh. pres. Que quiera^ quierasy quiera^ 5 that I love or queraraosj querais quierariy ^ may love. Imperfect. Que quisiese^ &c. that I wished or might wish. Future. Si quisiere^ Sic. if I wish or shall loish. R. Rebolcar or re vol car to tumble, to welter. See acordar. Recaer, to fall again. See caer. Recocer, to bake again. See cocer. Recomendarj to recommend. See acertar. Reconocer, to acknowledge. See aborrecer. Reconvalecer, to recover from an illness. Idem. Recordar, to remember, to call to mind. See acordar. Recordarse, to remember. Idem. Recostarse, to lie or lean on one side. Idem. Recrecer, to groio again. See aborrecer. Reducir, to reduce. See conducir. Referir, to refer. See adherir. Reflorecer, to blossom again. See aborrecer. Reforzar, to strengthen, to i^einforce. See acordar. Regar, to water. See acertar. Regir, to govern. See pedir. Regoldar, to belch. See acordar. Rehacer, to do again. See hacer. Inf pres. Reir, to laugh. Gerund. Riendoy lau/^hing. Participle. Reido, laughed. Ind.pres. Rio, ries, rie. ? t » i 7 « , reimos, rels, rien, ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ do laugh. Imperfect. Reia, } See absolver. ^ VolversCj to become, to change oneself'., to turn about, AGREEMENT OF VERBS WITH THEIR SUBJECT. We call that the subject of which we affirm some thing, and that the attribute which is affirmed of it When we say ; elrcy es benefice, the king is beneficent ; the word rei/ is the subject of which we affirm the quality ofbenefico, which is the attribute. Rule LI. The subject is always either a noun or prououn. When it is a pronoun, it is almost alwa\^s suppressed in Span- ish, both when the phrase is affirmative and negative, as we 'lave already stated in the N. B. upon the persons and num- bers of verbs, page 82. If I have to translate in Spanish the 152 VERBS. words I love, thou lovest, they love, I suppress the pronouns, and say, amo, amas, aman ; the termination of each of these persons sufficiently indicates the pronoun that belongs to it, and which is implied. Exception. We often express the pronoun to give more energy to the phrase. We must also express it whenever its suppression would leave an ambiguity in speech. Ex. Yo lo digo, tu lo has hecho, I say it, thou hast done it . . . Pedro me quiere t yo le ahorrezco, &c. Peter loves me, and [ hate him, &c. ^ Rule LII. The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is commonly placed before the verb. Ex. Tu padre llora y til ries, thy father weepest and thou laughest. 1st Exception. In interrogative and imperative phrases, the subject is always placed after the verb. Ex. ^ Que pre- tenden pues (os nvevos reformadorcs con su sonada igual- dad ? What then do the new reformers pretend with their chimerical equality ? Hahlen las niciones donde se vieron tales tra&tornos ; hable la misma Fi^anria.,, JLet the nations where were seen such overturnings, let France herself speak. 2d Exception. The subject is also placed after the verb, in the incidental phrase denoting that we quote the words of some one. Ex. SI teneis, decia Luis XI dsu hijo, si tenets la desdicha de llegar a ser rey, acordaos de que os debeis todo entero a lafelicidad de vucstros conciudadanos ; if you have, said Louis XI to his son, if you have the misfortune to be a king, remember that you owe yourself entirely to the happiness of your fellow-citizens. 3d Exception. This inversion is also made with great advantage whenever it gives elegance, energy, sweetness or harmony to speech. Ex. / Dichosos los padres que tienen huenos hijos! Happy the fathers who have good children ! / Feliz el reino donde viven los hombres en paz ! Happy the kingdom where men live in peace \ These phrases are much more energetic than if we said ; los padres que tienen buenos hijos son dichosos ; el reino donde los hombres viven en paz e$ feliz. Rule LHI. Every verb must be of the same number and person as its subject. Ex. Yo no s^ lo que digo, lo que hago, 8fc. I do not know what I say, what I do, &c. Tu hermano no estudia ; tus hennanos no estudian^ thy broth- er does not study ; thy brothers do not study. In the firist V.ERBS. 153 example, se, digo and hago are in the singular number and in the first person, because the pronoun j/o expressed before the first verb, and understood before the others is in the sin- gular and first person. In the second, estudia is in the third ])erson of the singular, because its subject hermano is of that person and number, ^una cosa inconstant? fn su proceder incorporar (una cosa) d, con, en otra increible d, para muchos incumbir (una cosa) d alg-uno incurrir en delitos indeciso en resolver indig^narse con, contra alguno indispon^r (a uno) con uro indijcir (a al^uno) d pecar inductivo de error indultar (a alg^uno) de la pena infatigable en el trabajo infecto de heregias inferior d otro inferior en alguna cosa inferir (una cosa) de, por otra inficionado de peste infiel d su amigo inflexible d la razon inflexible en su dictamen inflair en alo^una cosa inforraar (d alguno) de, sobre al- g-una cosa infi'ndir (animo) d, en alguno ingrato d los beneficios ing-rato con los amigos inhflbil para el empleo inhabilitar (a alguno) para alguna cosa inhibir (al juez) de, en el conoci- miento insensible d las injurias inseparable de la viriud iosertar (una cosa) en otra insinuar (una cosa) d alguno insinuarse con los poderosos inaccessible to pretenders obstinate in one's opinion unwearied with work irieraediable indefatigable in one's labours to fall again into a fault to incite any one to one's defence to incite any one against another to incline any one to virtue to include in the number incompatible with the command incomprehensible to men to be inconsequent / inconstant in one's proceedings to incorporate one thing with an- other incredible to many any thing to be incumbent on any one to incur crimes undecided in resolving to be angry with any one to indispose one with another to induce one to sin leading to error to pardon any one the punishment indefatigable in labour infected with heresies inferior to another inferior in anvthing to infer one thing from another infected with the plague unfaithful to one's friend inflexible to reason inflexible in one's opinion to have an influence over anything to inform any one of anything to encourage any one ungrateful for favours ungrateful to friends unfit for the emi)loyment to disable any one for anything to inhibit any judge from taking further cognizance insensible to injuries inseparable from virtue to ingraft one thing on another to insinuate anything to any one to insinuate oneself into the favour of the great PREPOSITIONS. 175 insipido al o^usto inslstir en, sobre alg^iina cosa iiispirar (alj-mia cosa) a algnno instruir (a algiino) de, en, sobre al- guna cosa interceder con alg^uno por otro interceder /7or otro, con alguno ioteresarse con alguno, por otro interesarse en alguna cosa internarse con alguno internarse en alguna cosa 6 liigar interpolar (unas cosasj con otras iuterponer (su autoridad) con al- guno intervenir en las cosas intervenir por alguno introducirse con los que mandan introdiicirse en, por alguna parte invadido de, por los contraries invernar en tal parte invertir (el caudal) en otro uso ingerir (un arbol) en otro ir de (Madrid) a, hdcia Cadiz ir contra alguno ir por el caraioo ir por pan ir tras alguno insipid to the taste to insist on anything to inspire anything to another to instruct any one in anything to intercede with any one for an- other to intercede for another with any- one to interest oneself with any one for another to interest oneself in anything to creep into another's favours to look into anything to mingle one thing with another to interpose one's authority with any one to intervene m things to intervene for any one to introduce oneself lo the com- manders to intrude oneself into any place invaded by the enemies to pass the winter in such a place to invest money into another use to ingraft one tree on another to go from Madrid to Cadiz to go against any body to go in the way to go for bread to go after any one jactarse de alguna cosa jugar a tal juego jugar (unos)con otros jugar (alguna cosa) con otra juntar (una cosa) g, con otra justificarse de algun cargo juzgar de alguna cosa to boast of anything to play at such a game to play one with another to move one thing with another to join one thing to another to clear oneself from any charge to judge ot anything ladear (una cosa) a tal parte ladearse (alguno) d otro partido lamentarse de la desgracia lauzar (algo) d, conira alguno largo de cuerpo largo de manos lastimarsp con, en una piedra lastimarse de alguno to turn anything on such a side to become a turncoat to lament the misfortune to throw something at any one tall in stature frui*ful, liberal to hurt oneself against a stone to take pity on any one 176 PREPOSITIONS. leer (los pensamientos) d alguno lejos de la tierra levantar (las maiios) al cielo levantar (alguna cosa) del suelo levantar (alguna cosa) en alto libertar (a alguno) de peligro librar (a alguno) dt riesgos lidiar con alguno ligar (una cosa) con otra ligero de pies limitar (las facultades) a alguno limitado de talentos lindar (una posesion) con otra llevar (algo) a alguna parte llevarse de alguna pasion luchar con alguno ludir (una cosa) con otra to read the thoughts of any one far from land to raise the hands to heaven to raise any thing up from the ground to raise any thing on high to deliver any one from danger to free any one from risk to dispute with any one to tie one thing with another lightfooted to limit any one's powers of slender talents / a possession to be adjoining to an- other to carry something to any place to be carried away by some passion to wrestle with any one to rub one thing against another M. malquistarse con alguno manar (agua) de una fuente manco de una mano mancomunarse con otros . raandar (alguna cosa) d alguno manift star (alguna cosa) d alguno mantener (conversacion) a alguno mantenerse de yerbas mantenerse en paz maquinar contra alguno maquinar en, sobre alguna cosa maravillarse de alguna cosa mas de cien ducados matarse a trabajar matarse por conseguir alguna cosa matizar con, de r olores media no de L:^erpo mediar con, por alguno mediar entre los contrarios Biedii se con sus fuerzas medir'se en las palabras med) ar en la hacienda mejorar de empleo mejorar(a alguno)en tercioy quinto menor de edad menos de cien ducados merecer d, de, con alguno mesin arse en las acciones meter (dinero) en el cotre to make oneself hated by any one water springing from a fountain maimed of one hand to unite oneself with others in the execution of anything to send anything to any one to discover anything to any one to maintain conversation with one to live upon herbs to live in peace to plot against any one to think liard about any thing to wonder at any thing more than a hundred ducats to kill oneself with labour t) tire oneself to d* ath for anything to shade with colours of a rni(lor el rainino pasar por entre arboles pasar por cobarde pasarse(algunacosa)rfelaineraoria pasarse (la fruta) de madura pasarse (alg-uno) de letras pasearse con otro pasearse por el campo pecar contra la ley pecar de ignorante pecar en alguna cosa pecar ^or demasia pedir (alguna cosa) a algimo pedii con justicia pedir contra alguno pedir de justicia pedir en justicia pedir por Dios pedir /;cr alguno pes^ar (una cosa) a otra pegar (una cosa) con otra pegar contra^ en la pared pelarse|?07' alguna cosa peligrar en alguna cosa pelotearse con alguno penar en la otra vida penar/?or alguna persona 6 cosa pender de alguna cosa penetrar hasta las entranas penetrado de dolor pensar en, sohre alguna cosa perder (algo) de vista perderse (alguno) de vista perderse en el camino perecer de hambre perecerse de risa perecerse por alguna cosa peregrinar por el mundo perfumar con incienso permanecer en alguna parte permitir (alguna cosa) a alguno permutar (una cosa) con^ por otra perseguido de enemigos perseverar en algun intento persuadir (alguna cosa) a alguno persuadirse d alguna cosa to divide in halves to divide by tens to set off from Spain to go to Madrid to go beyond Seville v to pass between mountains to pass by the road to pass between trees to pass for a coward to forget any thing fruit to begin to decay to be very learned to take a walk with another to walk in the country to transjcrress the law . to sin through ignorance to bf^ faulty in any thing to sin through excess to ask any thing of any one to ask with justice to bring an action against any one to claim in law to sue by law to beg for God to ask for any one to apply one thing to another to join one thing with another to fasten against the wall to be anxious for any thing to endanger in any thing to scuffle with any one to be punished in the other life to suffer for any person or thing to depend upon any thing to penetrate to the entrails penetrated with grief to think upon anything to lose sight of any thing to excel in an eminent degree to lose one's way to perish with hunger to die with laughing to die for anything to wander through the world to perfume with incense to remain in any place to permit any thing to any one to exchange one thing for another pursued by enemies to persevere in any design to persuade any one of anything to be persuaded of anything 180 PREPOSITIONS^ persuadirse de, por las razones de to be persuaded by another's rea- otro pertenecer (una cosa) a alguno pertrecbarse de lo necesario pesarle (a alguno) de lo que ha hecho pesado en la conversacion pescar con red piar/wr alguna cosa picar de, en todo picarse de alguna cosa pintiparado a alguno plagarse de granos sons any thing to belong to any one to be furnished with necessaries any one to repent of what he has done dull in conversatioD to fish with a net to long for anything to excel in every thing to pique oneself upon anytliing like to any one exactly to be plagued with pimples plantar (a alguno) en alguna parte to set any one in any place plantarse en Cadiz poblar de arboles poblar en buen parage poblarse de gente ponderar (una cosa) de grande poner (a uno) a oficio poner (alguna cosa) en alguna parte poner (a alguno) por corregidor ponerse a escribir porfiar con alguno portarse con decencia posar en alguna parte poseido de teraor postrado de la enfermedad postrarse d los pies de alguno to be settled in Cadiz to fill with trees to settle in a good situation to be peopled to exaggerate anything as great to put any one in business to put anything some where to appoint any one corregidor to set oneself to writing to be positive with any one to conduct oneself vith decency to lodge in any place possessed by fear prostrated by sickness to prostrate oneself at another's feet to be confined to one's bed to kneel down on the ground preceded by another to pique ones self upon courage to be precipitated from any place preferred to another preferred by any one postrarse en cama postrarse en tierra precedido de otro preciarse de valiente precipitarse de,por alguna parte preferido a otro preferido de alguno preguntar (alguna cosa) a alguno to ask any one any thing prendarse de alguno to be taken with any one prender (las plantas) en la tierra plants to take root in the earth preocuparse de alguna cosa to be prepossessed with anything prepararse a, para alguna cosa to piepare oneself for anything preponderar (una cosa) a otra to preponderate one thing over another prescindir de alguna cosa to cut off from any thing presentar (alguna cosa) a alguno to present anything to any one presentar (a uno) para una pre- to present any one for a prebend benda preservar (a alguno) de dano to preserve any one from injury presidir a otros to preside over others presidir en un tribunal to preside in a tribunal PREPOSITIONS. 181 t>residido de otro prestar (diiiero) a alguno prestar (la dieta)/>ara la salud prestar sobrc prenda presurair de docto prevalecer (la verdad) sobre la mentira prevenir (alguna cosa) a alguno prevenirse de lo necessario prevenirse para un viage primero de, entre todos pringarse en alguna cosa privar (a alguno) de lo suyo privar con alguno probar a saltar probar de todo proceder a la eleccion proceder con, sin acuerdo proceder contra alguno proceder (una cosa) de otra procesar (a uno) por delitos procurar por alguno proejar contra las olas profesar en religion prometer (alguna cosa) a alguno promover(a alguno) a algun cargo propasarse a, en alguna cosa proponer (alguna cosa) a alguno proponer (a alguno) en primer lugar proporcionar (a alguno) para al- guna cosa proporcionarse a las fuerzas proporcionarse para alguna cosa prolongar (el plazo) a alguno prorumpir en lagrimas proveer (la plaza) de viveres proveer (el empleo) en alguno provenir de otra cosa provocar d ira presided by another to lend money to any one the diet to contribute to the health to lend on security to set up for a man of learning truth to prevail over falsehood to advise another of any thing to provide oneself with necessaries to prepare oneself for a journey first among all to intermeddle in any thing to deprive any one of what be- longs to him to be intimate with any one to try to jump to taste of every thing to proceed to the election to proceed with or without circum- spection to proceed against any one one thing to proceed from another to proceed against a man for crimes to procure for any one to row against the waves to profess in religion to promise any thing to any one to promote any one to any office to overshoot one's mark in anything to propose any thing to any one to propose any one in the first place to fit any one for any thing to proportion oneself to one's strength to fit oneself for any thing to prolong the credit to any one to burst into tears to furnish the fortress with provi- visions to provide any one with employ- ment to proceed from something else to provoke to anger provocar (a alguno,)con malas pal- to provoke any one by scurrilous abras language proximo a morir pujar por alguna cosa purgarse de sospecha 16* at the point of death to strive for any thing to clear oneself from suspicion 182 rREPOSITiOxXS. Q. to lit for t!ie emploj'iuent to fit anything to any one which of the two ? to break any one's hones to break any one's heait to remain or reside in a place to remain standing to tarry at home to have to proceed farther to be bail for any one to be reputed a cow^ard any thing- falling to n»y share to stop short in a discourse to complain to any one to complain of any one to lay one's complaint before the judge to complain of one's neighbour to inflame oue with invective to be offended with any word to heat oneself for anything beloved by one's friends which of them ? to take anything from any one quitar (alguna cosa) de alguna to take anything from any place parte cuadrar con el encargo cuadrar (alguna cosa) a alguno cual de los dos ? quebrantar (los huesos)a alguno quebrar (el corazon) a alguno quedar de asiento quedar de pies quedar ewcasa quedar (camino) 2?or andar quedar por alguno quedar poi^ cobarde quedar (una cosa) por mia quedarse en el sermon quejarse d alguno quejarse de alguno querelarse a, ante el juez querellarse de su vecino quemar con malas razones quemarse de alguna palabra quemarse por alguna cosa querido de sus araigos quien de ellos ? quitar (alguna cosa) a. alguno quitarse de quimcras to free oneself from whims R. to be very hungry to long to eat to establish oneself in virtue to scrape from anything to importune any one to excel in virtue to converse with any one rabiar de hambre rabiar por comer radicarse en la virtud raer de alguna cosa rallar (las tripas) a cualquiera rayar con la virtud razonar con alguno rebalsarse (el agua) en alguna water to stagnate in any place parte rebatir (una caniidad) rfe otra rebajar (una cantidad) de otra recaer tn la enfermedad recalcarse en lodicho recatarse de alguno to deduct a sum to abate one sum from another to relapse into sickness to be film in what has been said to be cautious of any one recavar (alguna cosa) c?e, con al- to obtain anything from any one guno recetar(medicinas) 6/, ^ara alguno to prescribe medicines for any one recetar contra alguno to make a charge against any one recibir (alguna cosa) de alguno to receive'any thing from any one recibir a cuenta to receive on account 1 ecibir (a alguno) en casa to receive any oue at home PHEPOSITIO^JS. 185 recibirse de abogado recio de cuerpo reclinarse en, sobrt alguna ccsa recliiir (a aigiuio) en algmia parte lecobrarse de la <3nfeimedad recogerse a casa recoraendar (alguna cosa) a alguno recompensar (agiavios) con bene- ficios reconcentrarse (el odio) en el co- razon reconciliar (a uno) con otro reconvenir (a alguno) con, de, sobre alguna cosa recostarse en, sobre la silla recudir (a alguno) co7i el sueldo redoiidearse de deudas reducir (alguna cosa) a la mitad redundar en beiieficio referirse d al«una cosa refocilarse con alguna cosa refijg-iarse a, en sagiado reglarse a lo justo regodearse en, con alguna cosa reiv se a carcajadas reirse de alguno remirarse en alguna cosa reemplazar (a alguno) en su em- pieo rendirse a la razon renegar de alguna cosa repartir (alguna cosa) a, entre al- gunos representarse (alguna cosa) a la imaginacion resbalarse de las manos resentirse de alguna cosa residir de asiento en alguna parte residir en la corte resolverse a alguna cosa responder d la pregunta restar (una cantidad) de otra restituirse d su casa resultar (una casa) de otra retirarse d la soledad retirarse del mundo retraerse a alguna parte retraerse de alguna cosa retroceder a, hdcia tal parte reventar cZe risa reventar por hablar revestirse de autoridad revolcarse en los vicios to be admitted as a counsellor of a strong constitution to lean upon any thing to shut any one up in any place to recover oneself from sickiiess to retire home to recommend anything to any one to recompense wrongs with benefits to concentrate hatred in the heart to reconcile one with another to retort on any one with anything to recline on a seat to pay any one his wages to pay oflf one's debts to reduce anything to the half to conduce to the benefit to refer oneself to any thing to be refreshed with any thing to take refuge in some sacred place to conform to what is right to delight oneself in anything to laugh heartily to make a jest of any one to examine oneself in any thing to take the place of any one in his employment to yield to reason to apostatize from anything to share any thing among several to represent an\ thing to one's imagination to slip away from the hands to resent any thing to be settled in any place to reside at court to resolve upon any thing to answer the question to remain one sum from another to return to one's house one thing to result from another to retire into solitude to retire from the world to take refuge any where to escape from anything to recede towards such a place to burst with laughter to burst with a desire of speaking- to be invested with authority to wallow in vice iS4 PREPOSITIONS. revolver contray hdcia, sobre el enemigo robar (dinero) a alguno rodar (el carro) por tierra rodear (a alguno) por todas partes rodear (una plaza) con^de muralias rogar (alguna cosa) a alguno romper con alguno romper |;or alguna parte rozarse (una cosa) con otra rozarse en las palabras to return to the enemy to rob any one of money to overset a cart to encompass any one on all sides to surround a place with walls to beg any thing of any one to break off with any one to break in any place to rub one thing with another to stammer in one's speech saber a vino saber de trabajos sacar (una cosa) a la plaza sacar de alguna parte sacar en limpio sacrificar (alguna cosa) a Dios sacrificarse por alguno salir a alguna cosa salir con la pretension salir contra alguno salir de alguna parte salir 'por fiador to taste like wine to be acquainted with trouble to take any thing to the market to take any thinsr from any place to clear up all doubts, to copy fair to sacrifice any thing to God to sacrifice oneself for any one to co-operate in anything to obtain one's aim to go out against any one to go out from any place to appear as security saltar (una cosa) a la iraaginacion any thing to strike the imagination saltar de el suelo saltar de gozo saltar en tierra salvar (a alguno) del peligro sanar de la enfermedad satisfacer por las culpas satisfacerse de la duda to leap from the ground to leap with joy to leap on the ground, on shore to save any one from danger to recover from sickness to atone for one's faults to be satisfied for the doubt segregar(a alguno) de alguna parte to separate any one from any place segregar (una cosa) de otra seguirse (una cosa) de otra semejar, 6 semejarse (una cosa) d otra sentarse en la mesa sentarse a la silla sentenciar (a uno) a destierro sentirse de algo separar funa cosa) de otra ser (una cosa) a gusto de todos ser (una cosa) de, para algunos servir de mayordomo servir en palacio servirse de alguno sincerarse de alguna cosa sisar de la compra sitiado de enemigos to separate one thing from another one thing to follow from another to liken one thing to another, to resemble to sit down to table to sit down in the chair to condemn one to exile to be sensible of anything to separate one thing from another any thing to be to the taste of all any thing to be to or for some one to serve as a steward to be a servant in a palace to make use of any one to clear one's self from something, to lessen the purchase besieged by enemies PREPOSITIONS. 185 sitiar por hambre to lay siege to any one by means of hunger situarse en algfuna parte to station oneself in any place sobrellevar (los trabajos) con pa- lo undergo labours, troubles with ciencia patience sobrellevar (a alguno) en sus tra- to assist any one in his labours or bajos troubles sobrepujar (aalguno) enautorfdad to exceed any one in authority sobresalir en galas to surpass in dress sobresalir entre todos to excel among all sobresaltarse de alguna cosa to be started at any thing sojuzgado de enemigos - subdued by enemies someterse a alguno to submit to any one sonar (alguna cosa) d hueca any thing to sound hollow sonar (alguna cosa) hdciaidX parte any thing to sound towards such a side sordo a las voces deaf to the cries sordo de un oido deaf w ith one ear sorprender (a alguno) con alguna to surprise any oue with anything cosa sorprenderle en alguna cosa to surprise him in any thing sorprendido dt la bulla surprised by the noise sospechar (alguna cosa) dt alguno to suspect any one of anything sospechoso a alguno suspected by any one subdividir en partes to subdivide into parts subir a alguna parte to go up to any place subir de alguna parte to go up from any place subir sabre la mesa to get upon the table subrogar (una cosa) en lugar de to substitute one thing instead of otra another subsistir del auxilio ageno to subsist by others' aid subsistir en el dictamen to be firm in an opinion sustituir a. por alguno to substitute for any one sustituir (un poder) en alguno to -substitute a power to any one sustraerse de la obediencia to withdraw one's self from subor- dination suceder (a alguno) en el empleo to succeed any one in an employ- ment sufrir (los trabajos) con paciencia to suffer troubles w ith patience sugerir (alguna cosa) a alguno to suggest any thing to any one sugetarse a alguno 6 alguna cosa to subject oneself to any one, or any thing suraergir (alguna cosa) en el agua to plunge any thing in the water sumirse en alguna parte to sink in any place sumiso d la voluntad submissive to the will supeditado de los contrarios suppressed by the enemies superior « sus enemigos superior to one's enemies superior en luces of greater talents suplicar de la sentencia to petition against the sentence suplicar por alguno to entreat for any one suplir por alguno to supply for any one surgir (la nave) en el puertQ to ride at anchor in the port 186 PREPOSITIONS. siirtir de viveres suspense de oficio suspirar jt?or el mando sustentarse con yerbas sustentarse de esperanzas to supply with victuals debarred the exercise of one's em- ployment to aspire after command to feed upon herbs to sustain oneself with hopes T. tachar (a alguno) de ligero temblar de frio temido de muchos temeroso de la muerte temible a los contraries tempiarse en comer tenet (a uno) por otro tenerse en pie tefiir de azul tirar a, hdcia tal parte tirar jior tal parte tiritar de frio titubear en alguna cosa tocar (la herencia) a algun© tocar en alguna parte tocado de enfermedad -toinar con^ en las manos tomar (una cosa) de tal modo torcino de cueipo tornar a ale una parte tornar de aiguna parte trabajar en aiguna cosa trabrijar/?or aiguna cosa trabajar j9or otro trabar de alguno trabar (una cosa) con otra trabar en aiguna cosa trabarse de palabras traburarse en las palabras traer (aiguna cosa) a aiguna parte traer (aiguna cosa) c/e aiguna parte tra/icar en drogas transferir (aiguna cosa) a otro ti- empo transferirse a tal parte transBgurarse en otra cosa transformar (una cosa) en otra transitar ;?or aiguna parte transpirar joor todas partes transportar (aiguna cosa) a aigu- na parte transportar (aiguna cosa) de aigu- na parte to accuse any one of levity to tremble with cold feared by many fearful of death / dreadful to his enemies to be temperate in eating to take one for auoiher to keep oneself on foot to dye in blue to draw on such a side to drjjw towards such a side to shiver with cold to wavt^r in any thing the inheritance to fall to any one to touch one any where touched with disease to take with, or in the hands to take anything in such a manner deformed in body to turn to such a side to turn from such a side to work in any thing to contend for anything to work for another to seize any one tojoin one thing with another to fall on any thing to quarrel with any one to mistake one's words to draw anything to any place to draw anything from any place to deal in drugs to transfer anything to another time to transport oneself to such a place to transform oneself into another thing to transform one thing into another to pass by any place to transpire on all sides to transport anything to any place to transport anything from any place PREPOSITIONS. 187 traspasar(al^una cosa) a alg-uno traspasado de dolor trasplautar (de una parte) d oti tratar con alg-uno tratar dt alguna cosa tratar en Ian as travesar con alguno triunfar de los enemigos trocar (una cosa) por otra tropezar en alguna cosa ultimo de todos uncir (los bueyes) al carro uniformar (una cosa) con otra unir (una cosa) a, con otra unirse en comunidad unirse entre si uno de, enire muchos util a la patria util^a?'a tal cosa utilizarse en, con alguna cosa to transfer something lo a'nother transfixed with grief a to transplant from one place to another to treat with any one to treat of anytliing to deal in wool to behave improperly towards any one to triumph over the enemy to change one thing for another to stumble on any thing u. the last of all to yoke oxen to the cart to make one thing uniform with another to unite one thing with another to unite in a community to be united together one among many useful to the country useful for such a thing to make advantage of anything vacar al estudio to attend to study vaciarse de alguna cosa to be emptied from anything ▼aciarse por la boca to tell what ought to be kept secret vacilar en la eleccion to hesitate in one's choice vacilaren^relaesperanzayeltemorto vacillate between hope and fear vacio de entendimiento addle-headed vagar por el wundo to wander through the world valerse de alguno, de alguna cosa to avail oneself of any one, or any thing valuar (una cosa) en tal precio vanagloriarse de alguna cosa vecino al trono vecino de Antonio velar a los rauertos velar sobre alguna cosa venrerse a alguna cosa vencido de los contrarios venderse a alguno vengarse de otro venir a, de por alguna parte venir con alguno verse con alguno verse en altura to value anything at such a price to be puffed up with pride for any thing near the throne near Anthony to w atch the dead to watch over anything to conquer oneself in anything conquered by the enemy to sell oneself to any one to revenge oneself on another to come to, from, or by any place to come with another to meet any one to be in such a latitude, or high station 188 CONJUNCTIONS. vestir a la moda to dress in fashion vestirse de pane to be dressed in cloth vigilar sobre sus subditos to watch over one's subjects violentarse a, en alguna cosa to be violent in anything visible a, para todos visible to all vivir d su gusto to live to one's taste vivir con alguno to live with any one yivir de limosna to live by alms vivir por milagro to live by a miracle vivir sobre la haz de la tierra to live without care volar al cielo to fly to Heaven volar ^or el aire to fly in the air volver d, c/e, hdcia^ por tal parte to return to, froi^, towards, by such a place volver por la verdad to defend the truth votar en el pleito to vote in the trial votar por alguno to vote for any one zabullirse 6 zambullirse en el agua to plunge into the water zafarse de alguna persona 6 cosa to avoid any one or any thing zambucarse en alguna parte to hide oneself in any place zampuzarse en agua to dive into water zapateaise con alguno to make a noise with any one zozobrar en la tormenta to be sinking in the storm CHAPTER IX. OF CONJUNCTIONS. Conjunctions serve to join phrases, or parts of phrases together. They are indeclinable like the prepositions and adverbs. They are distinguished into copulative^ disjunctive^ restrictive^ adversative^ conditional^ causative and compar- ative. The copulative conjunctions serve to bring together seve- ral words or several members of a phrase under the same affirmation or negation. Those denoting affirmation are, 1st. F, ty and. Ex. El valor y el honor son las dos principales dotes que caracterizan al Mroe^ valour and hon- our are the two principal qualities that characterise a hero. El senor B... e^ un hombre cruel t injusto, Mr. B. is a cruel and unjust man. 2d. Tambienj also ; Ex. Ya que vm, lo quiere^ lo quiero tamhieny since you wish it, I also wish it. CONJUNCTIONS. 193 3d. Qucy that ; Ex. Ya si que vm, es amigo mioy I know that you are my friend. Rule LXIV. — And is translated in Spanish by ^, and not by Vj when the following word begins with an i ov y ; as, we shall go out at five o'clock, and go to the play, saldrtmos a las cincOj e irimos^ d la comedia. The conjunctions that denote a negation are ; m, nor ; tampoco, neither. Ex. Ni reir, ni llorar puedo, I can neith- er laugh, nor weep. Ya que no sales, tampoco ijo saldri^ since thou dost not go out, I shall not neither. The disjunctive conjunctions denote an alternative, or distinction ; as, 6,u; Ex. Juan 6 Francisco, John or Fran- cis ; entrar 6 salir, to go in or out ; uno u otro, one or tl^e other. Rule LXV. — Or is translated in Spanish by ii, if the fol- lowing word begins with an o. Ex. Siete ii ocho hombres, seven or eight men. The restrictive conjunctions restrict, in any manner whatever, an idea or a proposition ; as, sine, only, except. Ex. No tengo nada que decirle, sino que lo quiero, I have nothing to tell him, except that I wish it. The adversative conjunctions connect two propositions, denoting an opposition in the second as respects the first ; as, mas, pero, but ; no obstante, nevertheless, yet, however ; cuando, when ; aunque, Men que, though. Ex. Quisiera salir, mas nopuedo, I should wish to go out, but I cannot. El dinero hace a los hombres ricos, pero no dichosos, money makes men rich, but not happy. Habla la verdad, no ob- stante nadie le cree, he speaks the truth, yet nobody believed him. No haria una injusticia cuando le importara un trono, he would not commit an injustice, though it might be worth to him Ji throne. No es imprudente, bien que, or aunque parezca serlo, he is not imprudent, though he appears to be so. The conditional conjunctions connect two members of speech by a supposition, or by denoting a condition ; as, si, if; como, con tal que, provided. Ex. Si aspiras a ser docto, estudia con perseverancia, if thou desirest to be learned, study with perseverance. Sabrds estafdbula d las doce, como or con tal que la estudies, thou wilt know this fable at noon, provided thou study it. • The causative conjunctions serve to denote the cause of a 17 194 CONJUNCTIONS. thing, or the reason for which it has been done, as porque^ because ; pues^ pues que^ since. Ex. Dehe el homhre evitar la ociosidadj porque es la madre de todos los vicios. man must shun idleness, because it is the mother of all vices. Leert este librOy pues vm. me dice que es buenOy I shall read this book, since you tell me that it is good. The comparative conjunctions serve to denote a relation or parity between two objects, or two propositions, such as, C07W0, as; asz como, just as ; Ex. La belleza escomolajlor que se marchita el mismo dia que la vi6 nacer^ beauty is as the flower that withers the same day that saw it bloom. OP THE CONJUNCTIONS THAT GOVERN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. The conjunctions which govern in the subjunctive the verb that follows them, are, para que^ in order that ; ajin de que^ to the end that ; a no ser que, a menos que, unless ; antes que, before that ; caso que, en caso que, in case that ; aunque, though ; aun cuando, although ; bien que, though ; hasta grwe, till, until ; dado que, gr^i\t, or suppose that; con tal que, como quiera que, provided that ; por mas que, however, whatever ; siempre que, whenever ; Ex. Bien que, or aunque la ambicion sea un vicio, es no obstante la base de muchisimas virtudes, though ambition be a vice, it is never- theless the basis ofa great many virtues. Por mas sabios que sean, no conocen la causa de este efecto, however en- lightened they be, they do not know the cause of this effect. El maestro se af ana, para que or aJin de que adelanten sus discipidos, the master exerts himself to the end that his schol- ars may improve. N. B. As we frequently make use of the second future and of the second and third conditionals, see the rules 39? 40, 42, 43, 44, and Ab^page 76 and following. CHAPTER X. OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections serve to express an emotion, or an affection of the mind, or to awake attention. Ah ! ay! lie I 0! Ola I ta ! ckito ! ea ! sus ! tate ! The affections of the mind may be of grief, sadness, contempt, indignation, joy, or astonish- ment ; to express them we may indifferently make use of the INTERJECTIONS. 195 following interjectionsj ay I ah ! ! for, if we say, — /ay, que ijena ! oh, what pain ! /aA, que desgracia ! oh, what misfortune ! /o, desdichado de mi ! alas, unhappy me ! we may also say, — ;ay que gozo ! ha, what delight ! /a/t, que alegria I ha, what joy! lo^felices de nosotros ! ha, how happy we are ! O cielo ! oh heavens ! Ha ! he ! Ola ! and to ! serve to awaken attention. He ! is also used to show that we have not understood what has been said. Ola is sometimes an interjection of admiration, and to is hardly ever used except to call a dog : it is an abbreviation oitoma^ take. — Chito^ hush, serves to impose silence. £a, vamos, and suSy come, come on, are used to animate and excite courage.— Ta^e, guar da / take care ! serves to prevent one's doing or saying something. Viva I huzza ! Ola ! holla ! ho ho ! Otra vez ! encore ! vaya ! come ! Quedo f softly ! Voto a ! zounds ! ttvme equi ! here I am ! He aqui ! here is, here are ! NAMES OF COUNTRIES, ISLANDS, CAPES, AND SEAS. NOUDS. Africa, A'frica, Algiers, ArgeL America, AmMca. Anseatic (cities)^ Ansedticas^ (ciudades). Antilles(The),/^/i^z7Za5 (Las). Arabia, Arabia, Andalusia, Andalucia, Asia, Asia, Austria, Austria. Asturias, Asturias. The Azores, Las Azoras. The Atlantic, El Atldntico. The Baltic, El Bdltico. Barbary, Berheria (costa de). Botany Bay, Bahia Botdnica Bavaria, Baviera, Biscay, Vizcaya. Bohemia, Bohemia. Brazil, Brasil. Adjectives. African, Jifricano. Algerine, American, Argelino. Americano. Anseatic, Ansedtico. Arabian, Andalusian, Asiatic, Austrian, Asturian, A'rahe. Andaluz. Asidtico. Jiustriaco. Asturiano. Berberisk, Berberisco. Bavarian, Biscay an, Bohemian, Brazilian, Bdvaro. Vizcaino. Bohemo. Brasileno. 196 PROPER NAMES Brittany, Bretana. Briton, Breton. Burgundy, Borgona. Burgundian, Borgones British Channel (The), Man- cha (La). Canary Islands, Canarias (Islas.) Cape of Good Hope, Cabo de Buena Esperanza. Cape Horn, Cabo de Homos. Catalonia, Cataluna. Catalonian, Catalan. China, China. Chinese, Chino. Castile (Old and New), Ca^ tilla (la vieja y nueva). Castillian, Castellano. Cantabria, Cdntabro. Chili, Chile. Chilian, Chileno. Colojnbia, Colombia. Colombian, Colombiano, Corsica, Corcega. Corsican, Corso. Dauphiny, Delfinado. Dauphin, Delfino. Denmark, Dinamarca. Dane, Dinamarquesi Deux-Ponts, Dos Puentes. Egypt, Egipto. Egyptian, Egipcio. Estremadura , Estrameno. Europe, Europa. European, Europ6o. England, Inglaterra. English, Ingles. Fernandez massafuero, Pernanadez mas a Ifuera. Finland, Pinlanda. Finlander, Finlandes. Finisterre (Cape), Finistiert -a (Cabo.) Flanders, Plandes. Flemish, Flamenco. France, Prancia. French, Prances. Franche Comte, Franco Condado. Georgia, Jorgia. Georgian, Jorgiano. Galicia, Galicia. Galician, Gallego. Germany, Alemania. German, Aleman. Granada. Granadino. Greenland, Groenland. Greenlander. Groenlandes. Greece, Grecia. Greek, Griego. Holland, Holanda. Hollander or Dutch, Holandes Hungary, Hungria, Hungarian, Hungaro. Iceland, Islanda. Icelandic, Islandes. Ireland, Irlanda. Irish, Irlandes. Indies (East and West), Indias (Orientates y Occidentales.) Ionian (Islands), lonicas (Islas.) Italy, Italia. Italian, Italiano. Japan, Japon. Japanese, Japones. PROPER NAMES. 197 Leon, Lombardy, Lomhardia, Lombard, Levant, Levante, Levantine, Madeira, Madera, Mauritius, Mauri cio. Malta, Malta, MediterraneanjMec^/ferraneo Mexico, Megico, Mexican Morocco, Marruecos, Moorish, Murcia. Navarre, Navarra, Navarrese, Newfoundland, Tierra Nueva, Normandy, Normandia, Norway, Norvega. Norwegian, Naples, Ndpoles, Neapolitan, Netherlands, Paises bajos. Dutch, Pacific (Ocean,) Pacifico {Oceano,) Leones, Loj?ibardo. Levantino, Maltese, Maltes. Palatinate, Persia, Peru, Picardy, Piedmont, Poland, Portugal, Palatmado. Persia, Peru. Picardia. Piamonie, Polonia, Portugal, Palatine, Persian, Peruvian, Megicano, Moro. Murciano, Navarro. Norvegiano. JSapolitano, Holandes, Palatino. Persa, Peruano, Piedmontese, Piamontes. Pole, Polaco. j^„-_, ^„.. Portuguese, Portugues, Provinces (United,) Provincias (Unidas,) Provinces (of River la V\a.te,)Provincias[del rio de laPlata,) Argentine, Argentino. Prussian, Prusiano. Porto Rican, Puerto Riqueno. Rhodian, Rodiano, Ragusian, Prussia, Porto Rico, Rhodes, Ragusa, Red (Sea,) Russia Prusia, Puerto Rico, Rodas, Ragusa, ^ Rojoj Bermejo (mar,) , Rusia, Russian, St. Vincent (Cape,) San Vicente (Caho,) St. Domingo, Santo Domingo. Raguses. Sardinia, Savoy, Saxony, Scotland, Sicily, Sweden, 17* Cerdena. Savoya. Saxonia, Escocia. Sicilia. Suecia. Sardinian, Savoyard, Saxon, Scotch, Sicihan, Swede, Ruso. Sardo. Savoi/ardo. Saxon. Escoces. Siciliana. Sueco. 198 PROSPER NAMES. Switzerland, Suiza. Swiss, Suizo. Sound (The,) S mda (La.) Spain, Espana. Spanish, EspanoL Tartary, Tartaria, Tartar, Tdrtaro, Table Bay, Bahiade Tabla. Turkey, Turquia, Turk, Turco, United States, Estados Unidos» Valencia, Valencian, Valienciano^ Venezuela, Fenezuela, Venezuelian, Venezolano, Zealand, Celanda. Zealander, Celandes. NAMES OF CITIES, MOUNTAINS AND RIVERS. Aix-la-Chapelle, Aquisgrana . Coblentz, Coblenza. Alicant, Alicante. Constantino- Constantinopla. Alps (The,) Alpes (Los.) pie. Antwerp, Amberes. Copenhagen, Copenhague. Antioch, Antioquia. Corunna, Coruna. Andes (The,) Andes (Los.) Chimborazo, Chimborazo. Amazon(The y)Amazonas Dover, Duvre. (Las.) Dresden, Dresde. Appenines Apeninos {Los ,)Downs (The,) Dunas (Las.) (The,) DanubefThe,) Danubio, (El.) Basle, BasiI6a. Edinburgh, Edinburgo. Bayonne^ Bayona. Florence, Florencia. Berne, Berna. Genoa, G6nova. Bordeaux, Burdtos. Geneva, Ginebra^ Bilboa, Bilbao. Gibraltar Gibraltar (Es- Boulogne, Bolona. ( Straits of,) trecho de.) Breslaw, Breslao. Hague (The,) Haija (La.) Bruges, Brvjas. Hamburgh, Hamburgo. Brussels, Bruselas. Havana, Habana. Buenos Ayres , Buenos Aires. Leipzig, Lipsia. Cairo, Cairo (El) Liege, Lieja. Calais, Cales. Leghorn, Liorna. Cape Fran9ois, GwaWco (eh) Lille, Lila. Cape Horn, Cabo de Hoimos. London^ Londres. Cherbourg, Cherburgo. Lyons, Leon (de Francia.) Cologne, Golonia. Lisbon, Lisboa. PROPER NAMES. 195 MarseilleSj Mar sella. Roncesvaux, Roncesvalles. Mountain Sierra (More - Rome, Roma. (Brown) na,) Rhone (The,^ Rh6dano (El.) Mentz, Maguncia. Saragossa, Zaragoza. Meiise, Mosa. Stockholm, Stocolmo. Nile (The,) Nilo (El) Seville, Sevilla. New York, Nueva York. St. Andero, Santander. New Orleans NaevaOrleans . Seine (The,) Sena (La.) Petersburgh Petersburgo Scheld (The, ) Escaldo (El.) (St.) (San.) Trent, Trenta. Philadelphia, Filadelfia. Thames(The ,) Tamisa (La.) Pyrenees( The^) Pi intos (Los .^Venice, Venecia. Providence, Providencia. Vienna, Viena. Prague, Praga, Warsaw, Varsovia. CHRISTIAN NAMES, MOST USED. Albert, Alberto. Dominico, Domingo. Alexander, Alejandro. Dorothy, Dorot6a. Alexis, Alexo. Edward, Eduardo. Alphonso, Alphonso. Eugene, Eugenio. Ambrose, Ambrosio. Eusebius, Eiesebio. Andrew, Andres. Eustach, Eustaquio. Ann, Ana. Faustus, Fausto. Antony, Antonio. Ferdinand, Fernando. Athanasius, Atanasio. Florent, Florencio. Augustin, Agustin. Firmin, Fermin. Augustus, Augusto. Francis, Francisco. Bartholomew , Bartolomt. Fulgence, Fulgencio. Basil, Basilio. Gaetan, Cayetano. Benedict, Benito. George, Jorg^. Bernard, Bernardo. Gregory, Gregorio. Blaise, Bias. Grace, Gracia. Boniface, Bonifacio. Henry, Enrique. Camillus, Camilo. Hilarius, Hilario. Candid, Cdndido. Hyacinthus, Jacinto. Casimir, Casimiro. Ignatius, Ignacio. Catherine, Catalina. Innocentius, Inocencio. Charles, Carlos. Isidorus, Isidoro. Christopher, Cristoval. James, Jaime, Biego, Clement, Clements. Santiago. Dyonisius, Dionisio. Januarius, Genaro. 200 PHOPER NAMES. John, Juan. Paulin, Paulino. Jane, Juana. Philip, Felipe, Jerome, Geronimo, Peter, Pedro. Joachinij Joaqnina^ Pius, Pio. Joseph, Jos6, Raymond, Raimitndo. Josephine, Josefina, Re my. Remigio. Just, Justo, Roch, Roque. Lawrence, Lorenzo Richard, Ricardo. Lazarus, Ldzaro. Rose, Rosa. Leander, Leandro, Rupert, RupertOy Leonard, Leonardo. Robert, Roberto. Luke, Lucas, Saturnin, Saturnino. Lewis, Luis. Stephen, EstMan. Mark, Marcos. Sixtus, Sesto. Marcellus, Marcelo. St. Telmo, San Telmo Margaret, Margarita. Thaddeus, Tadio. Mary and Ma ' Maria. Theodore, Teodoro. ria, Theresa, Teresa. Matthew, Mat^o. Thomas, Tomas. Michael, Migtiel. Victoria, Victoria. Monique, MSnica. Victorianus, Victoriano Narcissus, Narciso. Vincent, Vicente. Nicasius, Nicasio. WilHam, Giiillermo. Patrick, Patricio. Walter, Gualteroc Paul, Pablo. END OP THE FIRST PART. A GRAMMAR OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE, WITH PRACTICAL EXERCISES. Efit iFtrst jpart CoQtainingf a List of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in writings ; A Treatise on Pronunciation and Alterations in Orthog-raphy, founded upon the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; Comparative Rules of the Spanish and English Lang-uages ; A general Scheme of the Termina- tions of Regular Verbs 5 An alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conju- g-ated in their order ; A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish 5 Lists of the Names of diflferent Countries, principal Cities and Christian Names. 2Cii0 Secotttr J^art Containing a Collection of Exercises interlined ; a Vocabulary with Familiar Phrases and Dialogues •, and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. BY M. JOSSE. Second American from the latest Paris Edition. SETISED, IMPROVES, AND ADAPTED TO THE ENGLISH LANGVACE, BY F. SALES, Instmcter of French and Spanish at Harvard University, Camhridge^ SECOND PART. BOSTON : MUNROE AND FRANCIS, 128 WASHINGTON-STREET, CORNER OF WATER-STREET. 1825. DISTRICT OF MASSACnUSBTTS, TO WIT : " District Clerks Office. BE it remembered, that on the twenty-seventh day of January, A. D. 1825,. and in the fortv-ninth year of tlie Independence of the United States of America, MUNROE AND FRANCIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietv>rs, in the words following-, to wit : " A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE, with Practical EXERCISES. The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in writing j A Treatise on pronunciaton and alterations in Orthography, founded upon the latest rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; Comparative rules of the Spanish and English Languages 5 A general scheme of the terminations of Regular Verbs ; An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conjugated in their order ; A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish ; Lists of the names of differ- ent Countries, principal Cities, and Christian Names. The Second Part containing a Collection of Exercises interlined 5 A Vocabulary, with familiar Phrases and Dia- logues 5 and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri- can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, improved, and adapted to the English Language, by F. SALES, Instructer of French and Spanish at Harvard University, Cambridge." In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein men- tioned :" and also to an act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, entitled an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned j and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etching, historical and other prints." JOHN W. DAVIS, Chrl- of tht District of Massachusetts. SPANISH EXERCISES, TO THE FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ESTABLISHED BY THE ACADEMY OF MADRID. References to the Rules ivhich are to serve for their translation ; notes explanatory of the idiomatic differences between the two languages y and of all the important difficulties. EXPLANATION of the SIGNS which are found in the Spanish Exercises. m. Masculine. f. Feminine. n. Neuter. p.. Plural. irr. Irregular. * The star denotes that the word, under which it is found, must not be translated. 1-2-3-4 &.C. The numbers indicate the order in which words must be pla- ced in Spanish. Two or three English words, having the same number, are expressed by the N. B. Having made known, in all the Exercises, the rules to which they re- late, we advise the scholar never to translate before he has read over carefully the rules and examples referred to. If he consults them with attention, we feel confident that he will easily overcome any difficulties the translating may present. Spemish under them between paren- theses. Two or more English words put within a parenthesis, thus, ( ) are ex- pressed by the Spanish placed under them. The gender of nouns is not laid down when the article definite is not required ; but is, however, put down, whenever there is an adjective or a pronoun agreeing with the noun, inde- pendently of any article. EXERCISE I. See Rules L mid IL and the gender of nouns , p. 27, 28 of the Grammar. The man, the woman, the child, the husband, homhre^m. muger^f. nifio, niy inarido^m, the wife and the maid. The book, the paper, esposa y criadaji. libra, m. papel^m, the pen, the ink and the penknife. The table^ pluma, f. tinta, f. cortaplmnas, m. mesa, f. the chair, the chamber, the door and the window, silla, f. cuarto, m. puerta, f. ventana^t 204 SPANISH EXERCISES. The The city, the house, ciudady f. country, campo^ m grass, hierba^ f. The city, the house, the palace and casa^ f. palaciOy m. the husbandman and the lahrador^ ni. y the hay, the straw and heno^m, paja^L The sheep, the fleece, the cow, the milk and the butter. ovejaj f. tusouj m. vaca^ f. leche^ f. manteca^ f. The heifer, the calf and the bull. The oak, the elm, the shop. tiendaj f. shepherd. pastor J m. the corn. trigOyia, toro^ m. encina^ f. olmo^ m. The chesnut, the apple and becerra^ f. ternero^ m. the poplar and the willow. alamo, m. sauce , m. castano,m, the pear-trees. The chesnut, the apple and the pear. peraly m. castana, f. manzana, f. per a, f. The cock, the hen, and the chicken. The horse, galloyvn. gallinaji, polio, m. caballoyin. the mare and the jack. The loaf, the meat, the fish, yegua^L asno,m. partem, carne^f. pescado^m. the wine, the cider and the beer. The chocolate, vino,m. cidra^L cerveza^L chocolate, m. the tea and coffee. The sugar, the salt, and the pepper. cafe, m. t6, m. France ; Francia,f, Andalusia. Andalucia the bird, the wing, the Eagle ave, f. ala, f. dguila, f. Africa, Asia, (see page 195.) azucar,m. saLf. pimienta,f, Germany, Russia, Navarre, Biscay and Alemania, f. Rusia,L Navarra,f, Vizcaya,L The master, (l) the mistress, the soul, f. «mo,m. ama,f. alma,f, the wing, the Eagle and the water, ala, f. dguila, f. agua^ f. EXERCISE II. See Hide IL page 27 ; Unles III. and IV. page 28 ; the two JV*. B. folloxvingf and Rules V. and VI. page 29. The kingdom of France, the king of England, the reino,m. rey,m. Inolaterra, (1) The following are nearly all the nouns that take ihe article el for lai. See 1st rule. SPANISH EXERCISES. 205 queen of Portugal. The province of Navarre. The reina^f, Portugal, provincia^L Navarra, bay of Biscay. I (shall go) to Italy. Thou (wilt come) to bahia^f, Yo irt Tit vendrds England. He (will return) to Spain. I (shall send) to El volverd Yo enviarS Catalonia. I am in the garden. He (will be) at home. (1) Cataluna. Yo estoy jardin,m. El estard We (shall be) at the cellar. Mr. de Campo, Madam Nosotros estartmos hodega^L Senor Senora Solis and Miss Rosas. The servant of the Count de Senorita criado^ m. Conde^ m. Norofia, and the chambermaid of the marchioness de Norona camarera^L marquesa^f, Montehermoso. Sir, the Countess is in the garden. Miss Condesa^L estd Frances Pedreras. The bishop of Saint Andero. Mr. Francisca obispo^ m. Francis Peredo, secretary of the consulate of the city of Francisco secretario consulado, m. Saint Andero. Mr. Velasco, knight of the royal order of cahallero real 6rden^ f. Charles Third, member of the supreme (2) council of Carlos Tercero, miembro supremo consejo,m. Castille and of the royal academy of history. The good, Castilla academia^i, historia,f, bueno^n. the useful and the agreeable. The sweet, the sour and util, n. agradqblcy n. dulce^ n. agrio^ n. the bitter. amargo^ n. EXERCISE III. See Rule VIILpage -SI, and the gender of nouns con- sidered in regard to their terminations. The men, the women, the children, the husbands, the wives and the servants. The books, the pens and the pen- (1) In this phrase and others similar, the word ca^a never takes an article. Consequently, we say; estar en casa ; ird casa) and not estar en la casa ; ir d la casa, (2) Adjectives generally follow substantives. See p. 38. 18 • 206 SPAlsriSH EXEUCISES. knives. The chambers, the tables, the chairs, the doors and the windows. The towns, the houses, the palaces and the shops. The fields, the husbandmen and the shepherds. The sheep and the cows. The heifers, the calves and the bulls. The oaks, the elms, the poplars and the willows. The chesnut trees, the apple trees and the pear trees. The cocks, the hens and the chickens. The horses, the mares and the asses. The roses and the gilliflowers. rosa^ f. / aleli^ m. The maravedis, the sous and the louis. The kingdoms maravediym. sueldo^m. luis^m, of France and Spain, the provinces of Normandy and Picardy.(l) Messrs. Peter and John Pineda. My ladies de Pedro Juan Isla. The young ladies Mary and Frances de Villatorre. Maria The sisters of the young ladies Floridablanca. The hermana^ f. brothers of the Count de Melendez Valdes. The poem hermano^m, of the Araucana, by Alphonso de Ercilla. The climates. Monso clima^xti. The dogmas of religion. The epigrams of Messrs. dogma^ m. religion y f. epigrama^ John de Iriarte and Joseph Iglesias. Truth is Jost verdadyf. es a celestial* manna.* An action worthy of praise. The ?/w(2) celeste mandyin. accion^f. digno alahanza, ambition of men. The observations. The humanity ambicionyf. observacionyf. humanidadyL and generosity of ^sensible souls'. The purity of the generosidadyf, sensible al?na,f. pureza^L heart. . Constancy in adversity. The amiability, corazon^m. constanciayf. en adversidadjf, amabilidadyi, the simplicity and the goodness of Mrs. Wilson. simplicidad, f. bondad^ f. (1) See page 195, and following. (2) Uno always drops the o, when it is followed by a masculine substantive. Una, feminine of uno never drops any letter. (See Rule XXV, page 48. SPANISH EXERCISES* 207 EXERCISE IV. See the formation of the feminine of noxms adjective^ their collocation^ and their agreement with the sub- stantive, page 38 and 39. The climate of Spain is (l) warm. The houses es caliente, casa^ f. of Paris are high. The English women are handsome. Paris son alto. Ingles mugeryi, hermoso Emulation is a passion worthy of a noble souL Virtue is emulacion, f. pasion, f. digno noble almaS, virtud^ f. amiable. Idleness is despicable. Bread is dear. Man amable, pereza^i, despreciable, pan.m. cava, is mortal. Prudence is a precious virtue. Madam Vial is mortal, prudencia^f, precioso a charming woman. Miss Peredo is sensible, charitable, agradable sensible caritativo pretty and well educated. Holland is a rich country. Undo bien criado, Holanda^i, es rico pals^vn. The sister of the corregidor is happy and his brother is corregidor^m, es feliz su unhappy. The cousin of Peter is slothful, and the niece infeliz, prinm^f, haragan sobrina^. of x\ndrew is idle. My Lord (2) the prince of Peace is Andres liolgazan. principe^m, Paz.f, a Biscayan, and my lady the duchess of Alraaviva is an * Viscaino, duquesa, f. * Andalusian. The wife of Mr. Charles Ponteverde is an Andaluz. esposa,L Don * Aragonese. The servant of the Spanish consul is an Aragones, criada,f, Espanol consul, m, English woman. The father, the Hi other and the Ingles padre, m. madre, f. children are sick. The brother and sister are idle. nino, m. estdn ser The ink, the pens and the paper are dear. The window and the door are shut. The house is high, large and well cerrado, es alto,grande bien (1) See Rule XLIX page 95, when we ought to translate the verb to be by ser, ajid when by estar. (?) 'See Rule V, page 29. 208 SPANISH EXERCISES. adorned. The garden and the parterre of the duke de adornado. huerto^ m. Jardiii, m. Alcudia are well cultivated. The country (1) house of son cultivado, the father of Miss Louisa Alameda^ is pretty but small. Luisa es Undo pero pequeno. EXERCISE V. See Rules IX. X. and XL page 35. The English drink beer, good wine, excellent tea, and beben cerveza^ bueno vino^m . excelente eat potatoes. I have (2) sugar, coffee, and cream. Bread, comen patata, Yo tengo aziicar^ cq/e, nata^ meat and water are things necessary to man. We have cosa necesario ienemos pens, paper and ink. Take bread and butter of Nicolas. pluma, papel, tinta. Toma manteca Nicolas. I will give^ you* some cherries that I have bought. dar6 te guinda, f. que he comprado. Tomorrow I (shall make) visits : I (shall go) to see some manana har^ visita irt a ver a friends. Mr. Augustin Vial has* lent^ me* some books. omigOyXn. Don Agustin ha prestado me libro^m. The father of Miss Puente has good friends and Senorita amigo^m, excellent protectors. The friend of Madam Torres escelente protector amiga^ f. gives wise and prudent advice to your sister. I have da sabio prudente consejo tu tengo white stockings, blue shoes, and a grey hat. bianco media^L azid zapato^m, pardo sombrero, m, (1) The word country is pals, and is rendered by cafnpana only >vhen we speak of the great extent of level, open country ; and when it relates to troops and armies j in the other cases it is rendered by campo. We say then a country house, wia casa de campo. The lields are rich, sonricos los campos. (2) The verb to have is rendered by iener whenever it denotes the possession of an object, and by liaber wben it is an auxiliary. See the rotes to the conjugation of'Uiese two rerbsy pages 82 and 86. SPANISH EXERCISES. 209 EXERCISE Yl. See Rules XII, XIII, XIV, XV, XVI and XVIL puges 39, 40, 41, 42. The brother of Charles Martinez de Irujo, Secretary . Carlos Secretario of the embassy to London has a pretty little country emhajada, f, en tiene house, and the son of his Excellency (l) my lord i\\Q jMarquis del Campo has a litde parrot and a pretty little papagayo, m. cage. This young gentleman is well educated. I have jaula^ f. criado^ tengo some litde birds and a pretty little squirrel. Mr. D. is an ugly little man and his wife is an ugly little woman. sii esposa Peter is more wise and more prudent than John ; but less sabio prudente Juan ingenious than he. Mr. de Casa Nueva is richer than his hdhil tl cousiU; but his cousin is not so proud as (2) he. The primo^ m. orgulloso city of London is more populous than that of Paris. Londres pohlado la The streets of London are wider than those of Madrid. calle, f. anclio las He is more lazy than his brother. I am more tranquil perezoso Estoy tranquilo here than in the garden. She is not so happy as her aqui sister. Madam Costillas is not so old as Madam Delpuente. viejo What a large woman ! what a large, ugly man ! The que (1) His excellency my lord cannot be translated literally in Spanish: translate as if it was //le inost excellent lord and sa.y el escele7iiisimo seilor — and add Don when the christian name of the person is ex- pressed. (2) See in the grammar , after Rule XIV, page 40, the note relative to the manner of translating as in the different degrees of comparison. 18* 210 SPANISH EXERCISES, Spanish soldier is not less brave than the Turk. The Biscayans and the Catalonians are brave and (1) intrepid. Fizcainos Catalan^ m. intr^pido You are as lively as he. He is as learned as his eldest' Tu eres vivo tl dodo mayor brother.' EXERCISE VII. Upon the preceding Rules. ^ Mary is as amiable as her sister. We are as poor as somos pobre they. They are as rich as thy father. I have as many ellas Ellos son tengo friends as thou. (2) She has as many admirers as tu, Ella adorador, m. formerly. Thy brother has as many books as I. Thy antes. brother has more children than thou. We have more pleasures than labour. They have more than ten diversion trahajo tienen diez guineas. (3) I have v/ritten more than ten letters (to-day.) guinea he escrito carta hoy My brother is more than twenty years old. I am not tener veinte ano * more than twelve years old. Thou hast less pride than doce * orgullo they. Thou ait not so(4) tall as J. Peter is not so old as ellos, alto viejo his friend. He does not eat less meat than bread. He * come drinks less water than wine. Red wine is less agreeable behe tinto agrad ihle to the taste than white. This little chamber is prettier gusto, m. bianco, TU. Este cuarto than mine. This small apple is better than the others. manzana, f. otro. (1) See Rule LXTV, page 193. (2) As many, before a substantive is rendered by the adjective lanto-a, os-as See Rule XVII, page 42. (3) See the N. B, of Rule XV, page 41. (4) See the collocation of the negation, page 159 v SPANISH EXERCISES. 211 We have not so much fruit in our garden this year as tenemos fruta,f. este ano last year. Mr. B. has not so much wit as the Countess de iiltimo ingenio, m. la Puebla. I have less money than the Marquis of D. ; dinero but I have as much honour and not less religion than he. honor ^m, religion el. The garden and parterre of the Marquis de Mondejar^ knight of the royal order of Charles Third, ai'e larger cahallero real drden^t Tei^cero son than ours, (l) The wine of Mr. V. is bad, but that of nuestro. ^^alo il Mrs. P. is worse. Peter studies as much as his brother^^ estudia and makes greater progress than he. Miss Sophia Mar- hace progreso Sofia tinez talks much more than her- sister Frances, but her habla mucho Francisca ^ster talks better than she. ella. EXERCISE VIII. Continuation of the degrees^ of Comparison. — See Rules XIV, XV, XVI, XVII, XVIII and XIX, and the JS^B. of Hide XVIII, pages 40, 41, 42, 43. The lazy sleep more and do not work as much as the duermen^ * trahajan diligent. I translate better English into French than diligente. traduzco el French into English. (2) The French dance better than el bailan the Spaniards. The Biscayans, the Andalusians, and the tdndaluz, m. Catalonians are excellent soldiers, and pass for the best, soldado pasan por (1) Seethe N. B. of Rule XIV, page 41. (2) In this phrase the adjectives English and French although they are used as subst.intives, take the masculine article which agrees with the word idioma which is understood. (See the remark follow- lag the declension of the noun neuter, page 34.) 212 SrANISH EXERCISES. the most courageous and the most faithful in the kingdom. valeroso leal de {1) The Spanish mountaineers are very strong and almost all montanes^ m. fuerte casi todo very tail. Lille, capital of French Flanders, is a very alto. Lila capital Flandes, f. sing, handsome city. The new house of the Spanish consul is nuevo consul very large and very well ornamented. The youngest adornado, menor sister of Mr. Henry Milbourne is very pretty and very Don Enrique amiable. John's cousin speaks very correctly and writes primo^m, hahla correctamente escribe very elegantly. Lying is the most abject of all vices. elegantemente, Mentira^f, bajo vicio,m. The marquis de la Roja is my best friend and your most mi vuestro cruel enemy. The Luxembourg was not the least pleas- cruel enemigo, Luxemhurgo ant of the walks in Paris. The wise man will' alw^ays act' paseOyin, * siempre ohrard very prudently. My brother studies the history of Eng- estudia historia^ f. land as often as he can. The dog is a very faithful (2) piiede, animal, and perhaps the most faithful of all animals. animal^ m. quizd Your sister is very amiable, and a very good woman (3) Vuestro The servant of my (brother-in-law) is very strong. criado^ m. cunado EXERCISE IX. See Rules XX, XXI, XXIL XXIII, XXIV, and the preceding, paee 44. The good employment of time is one of the things that empleoyia, iiempOym, (1) hi after the superlative is translated by de, del, de In, Szc. (2) The superlative absolute of Jiel is irregular, it i$ fidelisimo. (3) Seethe N.B,2d. of Rule XVII I, page 43. SPANISH EXERCISES. 213 contribute most (l) to the happiness of man. The coniribuyen dicna,f, amateurs say that Mr. de Ja Motte is one of those who aficionado yin, die en los que have laboured most for the academy of -Vlusic. Francis h^Ltrabnjado para academiaA. musica^L ^^^t most learned man in the city, and Philip the most ^^r instruido de (2) ignorant man in the kingdom. Temperance renders ignorante de Sohriedad, f. hace the most simple food very agreeable. The most innocent simple alimento^m, agradahle, inocente pleasures are always the most pure and the most constant. placer^ m. son siempre puro * constante. The daughter of the Count de Colomera is the hand- hija somest woman in INladrid. The most barbarous nations. de Madrid. harharo pueblo^. The most just commandmest. Charles is one of the most Justo 7nandamie?ito.m. Carlos es learned men in Paris. He is my best friend. Socrates was one of the most enlightened philosophers of his era instruido Jilu^ofo. m. su century. Peter. Paul and Antony are three good children, siglo. Pablo Antonio soji tres 7nucJmcho,m, but Antony is the best of all. J\Ir. B. is the most prudent man that I have seen. (3) The cousin of the Cai^inal visto Cardenal de Lorenzana is the most learned man that has appeared docto pared do at Rome. Miss Villegas is more amiable than I thought en Roma. _ de lo que creia (4.) The flatterer is always more dangerous than he adulator, m. peligroso deloque appears. Ingratitude will always be the vice the most ■parece, Ingratitnd, f. * sera unworthy of a well-bred and sensible man. The Count indi^no nacido sensible. (1) See Rule XXIII, pa?e 44. (2) See Rule XXL pa£:e^44. (3) See Rule XXII. pasfe 44. (4) See Rule XX. page 44. 214 SPANISH EXERCISES. de Fernan-Nunez is the man whom I esteem the most^ Nunez estimo * and Mrs. A. is the woman whom I respect the least. rcspeto^ The richer a man is, the more he desires to be so. The desea * serlo. ^^ lazier he (shall be,J the more ignorant will he be. mK^ perezoso sera ignorante * sera* ^|V shorter time is, the more precious it is. The more- breve precioso ^ scarce a thing is, the dearer it is. The more just and raro • justo beneficent a prince is, the more faithful are the subjects ; hentfico vasoUo^ m. and the more faithful the subject is, the more constant constante and secure is the happiness of the kingdom. seguro es die/la^ f. EXERCISE X. See the numeral adjectives j and Rule XXV^ as well as the jy.B. which relate to it^ from page 48 to 50. I have only one sister, four brothers, one uncle, five aunts tengo tioy m. tia and eight nieces. France was, before the revolution sobrina era^ antes de revolucion^f, (that is), before the new division decreed by the esto es niievo division^, decredato par national assembly divided in regard to religion, nacional asambUa^i, dividido en cuanto religion, f. into eighteen archbishoprics, and subdivided into one hun- en arzobispado subdividido * dred and twelve bishoprics. In regard to the civil obispado civil administration, it was divided into thirty-two governments adtninistracion^f,* era gobierno or provinces. In regard to justice it was divided into. four 6 provincia justiciar f. SPANISH EXERCISES. 21D i^Teat councils and thirteen parliaments. (There were) then consejo parlamento habia entonces in France thirty-nine academies and literary societies ; academia literario nfteen in the north, eight in the middle, and sixteen in the jiorte, m. centro^ ra. s^y|. The academies of Paris, which were the principal m^Ksdiajn. principal onW, were seven (in number^) (l) the French academy^ the academy of Inscriptions and Belles-Lettresj the academy incripcion, f. lei r as. f. of Sciences, the academy of Painting and Sculpture, the denciaj f pintura, f. escultura, f. academy of Architecture, the academy of Surgery, and the arquitectura. f. ciriigia academy of Writing. The French revolution commenced in escritura, f. principio one thousand seven hundred and eighty-nine. The king- dom of France was the most ancient of all the modern era antiguo mo demo States. It commenced in the year foui^ hundred and est ado J m. * twenty, and (there are reckoned in it ' sixty-seven kings : se Client an en el rei/, ra. the first wsis Pharamond, and the last Louis the Sixteenth. The large house next mine, is not new. Saint Ignatius, (2) vecino mio Ignacio. founder of the Jesuits was a Spaniard. fundador Jesuita.m, era * EXERCISE XI. Continuntion of the preceding rules and of the A*. B^ wTiicli relate to them. Louis the fourteenth was one of the greatest kings of fue France, and merited the epithet of Great. Petw the merecio epiteto, m. (1) Instead of expressing: in number, translate this phrase as if it was seven only ; and say^ era'/i siete. (-2) I capital is always written J in manuscripts. 210 SPANISH EXERCISES. first, czar or emperor of Russia, was a mathematician, czar emperador Rusia * matemdtico^ a philosopher, a great general, an excellent admiral, a * fiUsofo * * almirantey * profound politician, an historian, pilot^ architect ; insigne politico^ * historiadovj piloto, arquitectOy in a word, he was a rare genius, a wonderful g enj^s , en una paiabra ingenio^ m. portentoso genius, ri^ui Clovis first, fifth king of France, and the first chris cristiano king, began to reign towards the end orthe year four principid d reinar cerca del Jin^ hundred and eighty one : he reigned thirty years/ Of all the reigns of the kings of France, the longest has reiiiado^ m. largo been that of Louis fourteenth, the sixty fifth king : it lasted seventy two years. Charles fifth was dur6 contemporary of Francis first, kingof France,and the pope contemporaneo Francisco papa^m. Sixtus fifth was that of the great Henry fourth. George Sesto lo era . Jorge third, king of England,was crowned in* Westminster abbey* fu6 coronado ahadia, f the twenty-second of September one thousand seven hun- dred and sixty one. James second, banished to France, Santiago desterrado died the sixth of August one thousand seven hundred and one. muriS Agosto ^ I received on Monday last (1) a letter from my friend Mr. * lunes carta, f. Abel ; it was delayed fifteen days, see the date of it (2) : * astrasado de ved Paris, twenty-second of June one thousand eight hundred and Junio three. What o'clock is it ?(3) Sir, it is eleven, or three Que (1) The names of the week take the article, then we must say : el lunes ultimo J or pasado> (2) Of it must not be translated, or we must turn it by 5U, which corresponds to no iii English. (3) See the JV.jB.4th and 5th of Rule XXV. page 48. SPANISH EXERCISES. 217 quarters past eleven. (Give me) my watch, it is twelve cuarto * Dame (1) o'clock and you said it was but (2) eleven. Where wast tit decias Endondeestabas thou at ten o'clock ? I was at home. (3) Well, return Bien vuelve at one o'clock. Sir, it is one o'clock. I know it : go to Yo se^ lo* vete{A) ]Mr. Arco's and (tell him) that I expect him here at nine dile espero^ lo^ a qui d o'clock in the morning, or at four o'clock in the afternoon. de mafiana^i, de tarde. He (will tell) thee no doubt whether he can come in the dird^ te^ si?i jiuda si puede venir morning or in the evening. (5) EXERCISE XU. On the pronouns personal and possessive, and on the anxilianj verbs ser and estar, to be ; haber and TENER, to have. See in the Grammar the declension of these pronouns, page 51 and following, 57 and following ; the conjugation of the auxiliary verbs, page 82 and following ; the obervations on haber and tenei^ at the beginning of then- conjugation, and Rule XLIX relative to the difierent uses which must be made of se?' and estar^ to be; page 95. (1) Dame is the compound of the verb and pronoun : it is the same with vet e' and dile. Custom ha-, willed, that whenever the pronoun governed by the verb, is put after it, it should be joined to the verb. Instead then of writing, da me, di le, we write dame, dile, it happens even very frequently that two pronouns are joined to the same verb as in these phrases t send it to me, enviamelo ; I wish to tell it to you, quiero decirtelo. (2) Translate that it was but, as if it was, that it was only^ que tran solo. (3) See Rule III, page 28. (4) To Mr. Arco's, is, a la casa del Senor Arc9. .^ (5) Par la manana 6 par la tarde, 19 218 SPANISH EXERCISES. N. B. We place the objective pronouns after the exer- cises on the three regular conjugations^ persuaded that the scholar will find less difficulty in them after having familiar- ised himself with the auxiliaries and regular verbs. Infinitive. To have a new coat. To be tall, short, fat, lean. vestido, m. alto, pequeno, gordo^fiaco. Having good friends, good patronage (1). Haying beer^ out protecion, f. fuera of temper. To be sick or well (2). To have been humor. indisposed. To be occupied. To have genius. To be indispuesto. ocupado, ingenio. wise, prudent, amiable. Having had patience. Having been paciencia. Consul of the French republic. To have been a Senator. * * Senador. To be Corregidor of the City of Cadiz. To be in the Corregidor country. To have been all day at home. campo, ra. Indicative present, I have a book of geography and one of mathematics (3). geografia matematica, sing. I am very happy, and my brother is very unhappy. We have excellent wine and they have no beer. You were cerveza. diligent last year and now you are lazy. They have a large aliora garden (4) and many flowers ; they are very well cultivated. jardin, m. flor, f. cultivado. Thou hast more money than T, but I have more goods diner o pero rnercaderia than thou. Thou art more learned than thy brother, but thy brother is less proud than thou. (1) See Rule XI. page 35. (2) See Kule XLIX. page 95. (3) See Rule XXV. page 48. (4) See Rule XXV. part 3, page 48. SPANISH EXERCISES. 219 EXERCISE Xin. Imperfect I had*and I have still the works of the best Spanish » todavia ohra.S. -v authors. Thou hadst the grammar and dictionary of the autor. m. gramdtica^ f. diccionario, m, academy : thou wast well pleased. We had also the academia, f. contento. tamhien (poetical works) of the Count de Norona and Air. John Melen- poesia, t. Norona Don dez Valdesj the two best modern* Spanish' poets.' Preterite definite. Thou wast very well satisfied with the poem of the Count satisfecho de poema^ m. de Norona on death, and with the odes of Anacreon by sobre muerteS. de oda,f. Anacreon por Alelendez Valdes : they are truly excellent poetry^^Ve * verdaderamente had fine weather y^terday. Thy cousin had a rich hello " ayer, primo.m. present. My brothers and sisters were charhable : they presente.m. caritativo ; had compassion on the unfortunate. 31y mother (was in compasion de tener trouble; last week, she was very sad ; we pitied her. pesadumbre tener Idsiiina de Preterite indefinite. I have had much vexation, and I have been very sick. Thou hast had three masters. (1) and thou hast been well instructed. They have had (a great deal of money. They insfruido mucJio dinero. have been prodigal. My neighbour hdts been very sick. prodigo vecino (1) Master, used to signify a man who has people dependent upon him. a landlord or master of a house or an estate, must be translated by arno or dueiio ; but when it expresses the idea of a man who teaches some art or science, then it is rendered by maestro 220 SPANISH EXERCISES. Preterite anterior. When I had been fifteen days in the town of Bilboa. Bilbao* When we had had our passport. When the wine had been an pasaporte^ m. hour in the bottle. (As soon as) you had been a month botella^m. Luego que mes^m. at Paris. (As soon as) he had had his money. en Luego que ^ EXERCISE XIV. Pluperfect, I had had a reward for diligence, and thy brother had premio^xn, de diligencia had the first reward for memory. My master (1) had been de memoria, satisfied with me ; I had been diligent and attentive. Thy satisfecho de atento, brothers and thy sisters had been studious, they had had estudiosQ praises. We had been rash. Thou hadst had much bold- elogio, temerario, ness. They had been timid. We had had good motives. timido, motivo. Future absolute. Our cousins will have to-morrow pens and good paper, they will be occupied. My sister and I will be diligent. Wa shall have friends. The English will always be good siempre seamen. The French will perhaps never be as powerful as marinero quizd jamas poderoso they on the sea ; but they will* always be^more^ so* on land, por * mar ; mas lo por tierra. Thou wilt be taller than thy friend Francis, but thy f.icnd alto will be more ftesby than thou. gordo (1) See the note hi the pfeceding^ page. SPANISH EXERCISES. 221 Future anterior. I shall have had my books. Thou wilt have been happy. feliz. We shall have been more civil. The enemies will not civil, have been victorious ; they will not have had any success ; victorioso ; ^ suceso ; they will have been conquered. General B. will have been vencido, victorious. You will have had generals, commanders, in a victorioso. coniandante. word; courageous and intrepid chiefs, and you ^ill have intrepido gefe^ been yourselves valorous and invincible. invencible. EXERCISE XV. See Rule XXXIX. and XL. p. 76. Future conjunct tire simple aud future cojijuuctive compound. Tf 1 have money, they (will rob me of it.) [l) I am sure 7?ie lo rohardn :hat if I have patience, I shall have success. Thou wilt be paciencia^ rewarded if thou art attentive. If the war /^ long, many recornpensado gaerra^t. largo. towns will be destroyed. If the enemy has the imprudence arruinado. imprudencia^i, to put his threats in execution, he will be vanquished, if de poner amenaza egecucion^ vcncido, you are all, in the moment of attack, faithful to your monientOj m. ataqueAH. fiel prince, to your country, to the laws of honour. I {shall obtain^^ patria ^^y^i. honor yin. lograre the pardon of my fault, (as soon as) my uncle shall have ^^ perdon^m. culpa, luego que tio solicited^ it.* Bolicitar lo. (1) In this phrase and others similar, we put in the second future, oly the verb governed bv the conjunction. 19* 222 SPANISH EXERCISES* Firsts second^ and third conditionals present. See Rules XLI. XLIL XLIII. XLIV. and XLV. pa-^ ges 77 a7id 78. I should have better patronage than thy friend. You pj^oteccion would have more scholars if you were more learned. discipulo instruido. Their father would be happier if he was less avaricious. avaro. Man would be less unhappy if he was less ambitious. Thou ambicioso, wouldst not be sick if thou ivast more prudent. Who quien would have believed that the war loould have lasted ten creido durado years? It would be just that he should be severely * justo severamente punished. Your children would not be so ignorant if they castigado, igjwrante were more studious. Although we should have peace, 1 estndioso. Aunque paz, 'should not go) to England. I should be better (1) if I no iria was in the country. They would be more active if they activo loere younger. j6ven. EXERCISE XVI. On the firsts second^ and third conditionals present and past. See Rules XLI. XLIL XLIIL XLIV. and XL F. pages 77 and 78. The day would have been much finer, if the sun had not soly m, lieen so hot. The writings of Voltaire would have been ardiente, obra, f. (1) To be wtll or ill^ is translated as if it was to be good or bad, rstar bucnoj cstar malo ; and to be better j esiar mejor. SPANISH EXERCISES. 223 generally admired if they had contained a wiser and gentratmente admirado si contenido more religious philosophy. If the works of Rousseau were religioso filosofia^ f. ohra, f. more moral, they would be less dangerous, and would not peligroso^ have done (so much) harm. If your husband was less caasado tanto mah violent and less jealous, you would be happier. If men violento celosoy icere not so unjust, the number of the unfortunate would not injustOj numero be so great. The effects of the revolution would not have grande, been so cruel, if the depravity of manners had not been depravacion^i, costumbres^L so great in England, z/* licentiousness had not been (so much) Ucencia, f. tan countenanced, (/" irreligion had not been so general (1). If favorecidoj irreligion^ f. general. the Spanish language, if its beauties, its riches, icere more langua^ f. belleza, riqueza, known, the literature of this country would have more conocido, liferatura, f. pais, m. amateurs. If your brother was better informed than you aficionado, fut last year (2), it was your fault (3). The miser would ayaro,m. never be contented i^he had not in his coffers treasures to cofre tesoro para feed his insatiable cupidity. alimentar insaciable codicia. (i; See Rule XLV. p. 78. (2) See the N. B. 1st, following Rule LXV. page 79. (3j It, canDot be translated in this phrase ) therefore say, tra culpa vuestra. 224 SPANISH EXERCISES. EXERCISE XVIL Imperative,(i) Have, my friends (2), patience and perseverance. Let paciencia perseverancia. him have a good dictionary and a grammar better than yours. diccioiiario, m . gramdtica, f. Let them be less lazy. Let the virtuous man be rewarded, virtuoso recompensado , let the wicked man be punished. (3) Let us have prudence castigado, prudcncia and wisdom. Let your brother be more discreet, and let sabiduria, discreto them have more prudence. Have pity on the poor and Idstima de po6rc,m.pL unfortunate. Be good, charitable and beneficent. caritativo benefico. Subjunctive present. That I may have riches.(4) That I may be generous. That Que I may not be ambitious. Although we may not be avaricious. ambicioso, aunque (In order that) he may have servants, and that he may not para que be unhappy. In order that our enemies may not have any partizans in this country, and that we may be victorious. * partidario este Although our troops may have excellent officers. In order tropas^L ojicial. that we may all be friends of our king and of our country. patritty f . (1) See the note to the conjugation of the auxiliary verb haber. p. 82 of the grammar. (2) See Rule XXXI, p. 60. (3) In English, when the verb is in the third person of the impe- rative, and has a noun for its nominative, this noun always precedes it ; on the contrary in Spanish, it is always placed after the verb ; Ex. write ; sea el hombre virtuoso^ <^c. (4) See Conjunctions, page 194e SPANISH EXERCISES. 225 I Be not so negligent. (1) Be not a slanderer. Have no * maldiciente. I pride. Be not impious. \orgullo, impio. Imperfect, That I might have friends. Although the Count de Na- I ranja might not be prodigal. That their children might not ss)^ prodigo, be libertine. Before your father and your uncle had a disolufo antes que garden. Before thou wast at Madrid. That the kingdom of England might not be in danger. Before the traitors estar peligro, traidor^m. were arrested; before they were in prison. (2) cdrcel, f. EXERCISE XVm. Preterite, Although I have had the pleasure of . . . Before your father gusto f m. has had news from your mother. Before he has been ill treated. noticia^ maltraiado. I do not believe that the marchioness de Angosse has ever been creo que pretty, nor that her daughter has ever been ugly. Your sister feo is very gay, although she has been sick (so long.) Miss de alegre ianto tiempo, Costillas has been very amiable, before she Aoshad (so many) antes que admirers. The number of wise and virtuous men is very adorador, numero^ m. sahio vii^tuoso small, although they have always been esteemed. reducido^ estimado. Pluperfect, If I had had good wine, I should not have been so sick. x\lthough the war had been very long, the peace lasted but aunque largo paz^ L duro (1) See Rule XLVf. p. 80. (2) In prison must be translated as if it was in the prison. 226 SPANISH EXERCISES. one year. (1) Your children were not very good yesterday, ayer although they had been punished the day preceding. Your castigar dia^m., precedent e, nephew was very ignorant before he had been at the sobrmo^m, antes que en university. tmiversidady f. EXERCISE XIX. ON THE REGULAR VERBS. Indicative present, imperfect^ preterite definite^ preter- ite indefinite^ preterite anterior and pluperfect. I speak to men of my country. Thou answerest thy father. hahlar pais^m. responder a He (comes up) to (2) speak to his master. (3) We will subir speak of the revolution of Constantinople. We will answer the Marquis de las Rojas. You call my son and my daugh- llamar ter ; (4) but they refuse to come up. I fasted, last year, rehusar de ayunar every Friday. I drank nothing hut water, and thou fearedst todos los viernes. heher temer that I should be sick. (5) He allowed his children games permitir a j^ego of exercise and dexterity. The governor of the City of egercicio destreza, gohernadoVym, Cadiz supped yesterday with the Commissary of the Navy, (6) cenar Comisario, m. * We pretended that the Corregidor was sick ; but to-day I pretender hoy (1) But, taken in the sense of only, is translated into Spanish by solo or solamente, or by no placed before the verb and sino placed a^ter this same verb. See p. 155 of the grammar, what relates to it. (2) See on the prepositions the rules which relate to por and para, P'ige 160 and following of the grammar. (3) See exercise XIII, page 219, note 1. (4; See Rule LVI, pasre 154. (5) See Rule LIV, page 153. (6) The article the cannot be translated in this phrase: we say, tl comisario de manna^ de guerra, and not de la marinay de la guerra SPANISH EXERCISES. 227 am sure that he is well, (1) that he judged yesterday a seguro juzgar criminal and sentenced him to be whipped. I bought reo, m. condenar a azotar, comprar yesterday two dozen of pears, and we have eaten them docena pera^ comer already. John, why hast thou breakfasted so late ? Sir, 9/a porque almorzar tarde ? (it was) eight o'clock when I took my cup of chocolate. (2) eran tomar chocolate. Thou frightenedst me when thou knockedst at my door. (3) espantar cuando My father was very well satisfied with me when he had de spoken to my masters, and he rewarded me. We had dined, recompensar corner^ sung and danced when Miss Peredo arrived. We had cantav hailar llegar, promised to write to my aunt. Messrs. Isla and Valdes had prometer de escrihir tia. procured an excellent place for a son of Madam de Legarra. procurar empleo Madama EXERCISE XX. Rule XXXIX. and XL. page 76. Future ahsolutt, future anterior, future conjunctive simple, and future conjunctive compound. If the next winter is as cold as the last, the poor will invierno^ m. frio idtimo, suffer very much. We will remedy the evil if it is possible. padecer . remediar mal^m.^ posihle, Shalt thou not sell (4) thy wine this year ? He will shear vender esquilar (1) See exercise XV, page 222, note 1. (2) Cup, speaking of chocolate is translated by gicara and not by taza. (3) To knock ai the door is translated by llamar a la puerta and not'by^eg-ar d la puerta. (4) In interrogative phrases, when the nominative of the verb is one of the personal pronouns, the pronoun is suppressed in Spanish ; and in conversation the interrogation is caused to be understood by the inflexion of the voice. 228 SPANISH EXERCISES. his sheep (in the) beginning of the spring. Thy father oveja^iph al principioy primavera^f. has assured me that, if thou a)'t diligent and studiest with asegurar estudiar con attention, thou shah have the gold watch that he has prom- atencion, oro reloj^m. ised thee. The physician has advised me (not to) go out midico^m, aconsejar de no salir to-morrow, if the sun is as hot as it has been to-day. I shall mananaj sol^m, ardiente lo hoy speak to your sister, when she shall have received the visit recibir visita^L and the good advice of her aunt. We shall not omit, in this consejo, m. omitir critical circumstance, (anything) that prudence, duty and critico circunstanciayf, nada deloque ^ obligacion^f, honour shall prescribe (to us) for the safety of our country. honor^m, prescrihir nos para seguridadyf. They will write (to me) all that shall happen (to them) escribir me todo lo que acontecer les while I shall be absent. Thou wilt do, my child, all that mientras ausente, hards thy masters shall command thee ; thou (wilt be silent) when mandar callar they shall speak (1) and thou wilt answer when they shall question thee. If thou breakfastedst to-morrow with the interrogar Marquis de las Estrellas, thou wilt not forget, I hope, to olvidar, lo espi rar de speak of my law-suit. Tell Mr. Joseph Mor de Fuentes pleito^ m. Di a Don when thou shalt meet him, that I wish to write to his son, encontrar desear * escribir but I (don't know) where he lives. ignorar donde vivir, (1) See Rule XL. page 76. SPANISH EXERCISES. ^29 EXERCISE XXI. See Rules XLl XLII, XLIIl XLIV and XLV, and the cV. B. 1st. and 2d. pages 11, 78, 79, 80. Firsts second and third cGnditionals present and j^ast. If man occupied himself {l) a little more with his own ocitparse un poco de propio afiairs, and meddled ^ little less with those (of others), he negocioym. meterse(2) ageno (^3) would live happier. If men (gave themselves up) less to vivir entregarse their passions^ if they would (suffer themselves to be) pasion, dejarse persuaded more by the counsels of reason and of virtue, if persuadir mas consejo^va, razon^i. they respected as they ought, the sacred rights of respectar coma lo deber sagrado derecho.m. of innocence, in a word, if they respected themselves, the inocencia^L en una palabra respetarse a si mismos manners would not be so corrupted^ the victims of crime costumbreS. corromper victima^f. crimen^xn. would not be in so great a number, and the most cutting en * niimero agudo remorse would not torment their souls. (4) The archbishop of Toledo permitted yesterday the Countess de Almaviva Toledo and her children to take in his garden whatever they pleas- hijo detomar ed, (5) If 1 wrote the revolution of Algiers, \f I painted its pintar injustices, its cruelties and its horrors under the reign of injusticia, crueldcid horror en reinado (1) Rulf> XLII, p 77. (2) To mtctdle icUli is translated as if it was to put oneself in, con- sequeDily i/:it}i (host must be rendered by en las. (3) Others is rendereil in Spanish by ageno,-a,-os,-as, which, as an adjective, agrees with the substantive to which it relates. (See pro= nooQs indefinite, p 65. of the grammar.) (4) Rule XLli. p. 77. (5) Rule XLV. page 78, to please, gustar, 20 230 SPANISH EXERCISES. the cannibal Roland, I should use. colours as black antropSfago^m. Rolando usar(l) color negro as was his soul. 1 should esteem. Mr. B. if he loved more lo est? mar (2) his wife, if he treated her with more attention and kindness, tratar la con atencion bondad and if he loved himself (3) a little less. Who ivould ever si amarse a si mismo Qtiien have imagined^ before having seen it, that Cesar would pensar antes de haherlo visto Cesar have perished by the hand of Brutus. (4) It;, woidd be muerto de Bruto, * good and useful (5) that all governments should protect util gobierno^m, proteger the ayts and sciences. If I was rich, if I was powerful, arte^ f. ciencia. poderoso I would fly to the assistance of all those who implored my volar socorrOj m. los que implorar assistance. (6) He promised to lend me all the books asistencia. deprestarme (7) that he should buy. If the French were brave before the comprar, eran antes de revolution (8) they are not less so now. lo EXERCISE XXII. See Rule XLVII. XLVIIL page 81. Im^peraiive ; present, imperfect^ preterite and pluperfect of the subjunctive. My friends, the enemy threaten you ; show who you amenazar as ; mostrar (1) Usar takes the preposition de ; say then, de color es. (2) See Rule LVl, page 154. (3) In this same phrase himself being directly governed by the active verb to love, it must be preceded by the preposition a, say then se amara a si mismo. (See Rule LVI, page 154.) (4) See Rule XLIII, page 78. (5) Rule XLV, page 78, and observe that placing good and useful before the verb, the phrase is infinitely better in Spanish. (6) See Rule XLIV, page 78. (7) The verb to lend^ being in the infinitive, the pronoun me must be placed Sifier prestar and be joined to it ; prestarme is then a com- pound of the verb and the pronoun. (See Rule XXVI, page 55.) (8) See the N. B. 1st of the Rule XLV, page 79. SPANISH EXERCISES. 231 are: (take up) arms, fly to meet him, attack him with tomar arnia^ volar le atacar courage, fight with intrepidity, and the victory is yours,{l) valor ^ comhatir intrepidez, victoria^i. Let US prove to our neighbours, that, if they have valour, we probar vecino,m* have (at least) as much as they. Let them fear the a lo menos patriotism of a nation ready to shed even the last patriotismo^m. nacioriyf, pi^onto derramar hasta drop of its blood for its government and its liberty. God gota^L sangrepara gohierno lihertad, Dios grant that the war may not last long. Speak more softly, quiera durar muclio. ^^{jo, thou hast already interrupted me twice. Let us promise to ya interrumpir dosveces, prometerde study, and let us study with more attention, and our master estudiar maestro will be pleased. Eat some cherries, they are very good. contento. comer guinda^f. Open the door for my father, he has already knocked Abrir puerta, f. llamar twice. I hope the physician will cure our poor patient. I desear medico, m. curar enfermo^m. fear that my father and mother will not pardon my sister the perdonar fault that she has committed. I hoped that you would have culpa^f.que cometer. esperar permitted your son to come and dine with me, (2) They de venir a comer sang and danced, although I teas speaking to you. He cantar hailar aunque would have been offended (3) if we had revealed his secret. enfadarse (1) See Rule XXXI, pa^e 60. (2) The verbs to come, to go, to return, venir, ir, volver, followed by another verb, require in Spanish to be followed by the preposition a, which is placed immediately before the verb which it governs. See for the manner of translating with me, ivith thee, with oneself, the N. B. 2d, following the personal pronouns, pae:e 54 of the Grammar, (3) The verb to be offended being reflective is conjugated in Span- ish in the compound tenses with the verb haber and not'ser. (See Rule LXI. page 157 ) 232 SPANISH EXERCIi?ES. Let us never speak ill of (any body.) Let us always respect raal nadie siempre respetar the reputation of (every body.) My son continued to study, todoSy continuar although he had dismissed his master. I shall sup with despedir cenar appetite, although I have dined well. He is always in good apetito de humour, provided he drinks and eats well. himor^m, con tal que btber comer bien. OBSERVATIONS. In all the preceding exercises, we have made it our duty, in order to render the labour easier to the scholar, to follow all the rules in their order, to cite them even in almost all the phrases and to refer to them as often as possible, persuaded that there can be no better way of familiarising the scholar with the principles of a language, than by obliging him to have recourse to them, to stud} them and to reflect on them at the very monifnt he makes the application of them. Now that we have already been over the greatest part of these rules, we think it will not be useless to exercise oneself anew on the same rules by the translation of some exercises which will embrace them all. We shall not cite them, in order to render it necessary to consult with a more consider- ate and deeper attention the grammar and notes of the pre- ceding exercises. We shall pass afterwards to the other rules. EXERCISE XXIIL On the preceding Rules. A state is not flourishing but by the purity of its laws, estadoyin, no jloreciente sino pureza^f. ley^ the security of its commerce, the holiness of its religion, comercio, santidad, f and the respect and love which the sovereign inspires in respeto, m. amor soberano^m. inspirar a his subjects. The intimacy of two virtuous hearts is the vasallo. intimidad, f. corazon gordian knot which nobody can untie. The unhappy gordiano nudo^m.qite nadie infeliz SPANISH EXERCISES. 233 person is not wholly (to be pitied j) if virtue remains to enteramente de compadecersey quedar him in his misfortune. Romances are a poison for the infortunio. novela, f. venenojm.para heart, they corrupt it (by degrees,) and finish by cori^omper poco a poco acabar por destroying entirely all its sensibility. Maternal tenderness desti^uir del todo sensibilidad^t maternal is a debt that all mothers ought to pay to nature. Let deuda^L madre^i, deher * pagar naturaleza^L us regulate our gifts by prudence, and our desires by reglar don^m . conforme a wisdom. Esteem is durable only when it is founded on sabiduriayf. durable cuando fundar sobre virtue. A sensible heart receives soon or late, even in sensible recibir tarde 6 temprano aun this world its reward. To speak little, to observe much, to mundo,m, recompensa, * poco^ * observar muchoy * think maturely, and act prudently, are almost certain pensar maduramente, obrar prudent emente^ casi cierto proofs of innocency of soul, rectitude of mind and purity of pruebdyf, inocencia,f, alma^f, rectitud^i. ingenio^m, pureza^L manners. costumbreSy f. EXERCISE XXIV. On the vreceding Rules. M. de la Rochefoucault says with much reason that dice con razon.f. self-love is the greatest of all flatterers. Silence is the amor propio^ mayor adulador,m. sile?icio,m. safest part for him who mistrusts himself. Ihe world seguropartef, tl que desconfiar de rewards more frequently the appearances of merit than recompensar frecuentemente aparienciayi, meritOyXa, merit itself. Avarice is more opposed to economy than to mismo. opuesto economia^f, ' liberality. Envy is more irreconcileable than hatred. libpralidadyi. envidia^f, irreconciliable odioyxn. The soul is an emanation of the Divinity. The soul, emanacionyt divinidadS, 20* 234 SPANISH EXERCISES. thought and the faculty of speaking, says the Count de pensamiento^m. facultadjf, BuiTottj do not depend on the form, nor the organisation of dependerde forma^i. organizacion^f, the body, thei/ are gifts which the Creator has granted cuerpo^m, * don^m, conceder solely to man, and not to other animals. The clearest dnicamente otro animal^m, ciaro proof of this truth, is that although the ourang outang has prueha^i, aunque orang-utango the body, the limbs, the senses, the brain and the tongue miejnbro^m, sentido^m, lengua^L entirely similar to those of man, nevertheless he enteramente semejante los sin embargo speaks not, he thinks not. The empire of man over ani- piensa imperio sohre mals is a lawful empire that no revolution (l) can legitimo que ninguno jmede destroy ; it is the em[)ire of mind over matter, and it is not destruir * espiritUyf, materia^i, * only a right given by nature, and a power solamente derecho^m. dado por naturalcza^f. poder^m, founded on its unalterable laws, but a gift of God, by fuiidar iiialterahle ley^ sinotamhien Dios^ which man can at every moment perceive the excellence of elcval jjuede cada instante recoiiocer escelencia/. his being. (There are) many Jews in Asia and in Africa. ser Half Judio. m. The catholic religion reigned alone before the French revo- catolico dominar solo dates de lution, in Italy, in France, in Spain, in several States of Italia^ mucho estado Germany and in the greatest part of Poland. France is the maijor parte Folonia, most ancient of the kingdoms of Europe. Germany was antiouo reino^ m. Europa, formerly called Germania from these Teutonic words, ger an es Uamarse Germania teuionco voz^ f. and //^a;?, which signify man of courage, (warlike man.) que sigmjicar valor ^ guerrero (1) See Rule XXXVIII, page 66. SPANISH EXERCISES. 23 J EXERCISE XXY. On the preceding Rules. Mr. Benedict Jerome Feijoo of the order of Saint Ben- Don Benito Geronimo orden^m, San edictj and member of the council of his Majesty, was the miemhro^ consejo, m. magestad, first of all the Spanish writers who dared (l) to attack escritor^ m. atreverse atacar openly the prejudices of his nation. Mr. Thomas de abiertamenie preocupacionS. Don To7?ias Iriarte is a Spanish poet justly celebrated ; his translations of Virgil and Horace are excellent, and his literary fables Virgilio Horacio literario fdhula are productions of the most subtle genius and of the most prodnccion sutil i?igemo,m. delicate taste. The Spanish language is very rich ; it is esquisifo gusto ^m. langua^ f. * much more noble, much more majestic and much more mucho majestuoso expressive than the Italian language. The Don Quixote of espresivo Italiano Michael Cervantes is the best romance that has ever been Miguel 7ioveIa, f. written. All those who have read the poem of the Araucana xscrito, los que leido poema,m, ^fy Ercilla, make a pompous panegyrick of this work^ por hacen pomposo elogio^ m. obra, f. particularly of the speech of Colocolo so much extolled parti cularmente arenga^i. celeb r ado by Voltaire ; it (is found) in the second Canto. The more * hallaj^se Canto^m, foreigners cultivate the Spanish language, the more beautiful est7^a?igero,m.cultivar they find it. Lope de Vega is a very great poet, and without sin doubt the best that Spain has produced. Charles fourth, duda producir, Carlos (1) If we translate to dare by atreverse, a refiective verb, we must place the pronoun before the verb and say : se atrevio a. 236 SPANISH EXERCISES. Catholic king of Spain, (was born) at Naples, the twelfth CaiSlico nacer en Ndpoles, (1) of November of the year one thousand seven hundred Noviembre * and forty-eightj and began to reign the fourteenth of * 7/ principiar December of the year one thousand seven hundred and diciembre * * eighty-eight ; he was proclaimed king at Madrid the seven- y proclamar en teenth of February of the following year. ^ fehrero siguiente EXERCISE XXVI. On the preceding Rules and on Rules XXXI. XXXII, and XXXIII, page 60. At what hour did* my mother dine* yesterday ? At one comi6 o'clock. At what hour did she (take a collation ?) (2) At mcrendar six o'clock and she supped at nine. When dost thou expect, cenar esperar my friend, to receive news from thy son ? I desire very * recibir noticia desear much to know how he does ; he is a good child One of mucho^ saber como estar ^ mmhacho^m. my friends, who arrived (the day before yesterday) from llegar ante ayer Madrid, has assured me that he was very well last week, asegwar me que semana^L Here are very handsome houses. Yes, my friend, they are He aqui si truly very handsome : the first belongs to the Marquis de ciertamente Marques^ m. (1) The twelfth may be translated by en doce or by el dia doce. (2) We have said in the N. B. on the persons and numbers of the verbs, that the nominative personal pronouns arc almost always sup- pressed in Spanish : this rule must be observed, whether the phrase is interrogative or not. (See note, p. 82 of the grammar.) SPANISH EXERCISES. 2S7 Blanco, the second is mine, the third is my brother's, and the foivrth the Count de Isla's ; this large garden is also his, and tambien the other is mine. Let us (go into) mine, we will gather entrar en coger some flowers. Who would have thought that the weather alguno flor.f. Quien creer tiempo would have been so fine to-day? If thy brother had more patience, he would have more success in his undertakings. fortuna empresa. If (any one) asTcs for me, (take care) to answer that I preguntarpor cuidado de am not at home. If the Irish - - instead of attacking the Irlandes^m. en lugar de atacar city of Dublin by day, had attacked it by night, Ireland de diuy de noche, Irlanda.fy would have run great perils ; for, it appears that the correr peligro; pues parecer malcontents were well provided with arms and ammunition. malcontento^m, proveer de arma municion I speak of the insurrection of the end of July of the year insurreccion^t Jin,m, Julio one thousand eight hundred and three. EXERCISE XXVIII. Oil the preceding Rides. Study, be diligent and docile, and your masters will reward dScil you ; but, if you are lazy, they will punish you. I do not understand what the countess has said, although she has comprender lo que dicho, repeated it thrice. We should have invited thy friend to repetir lo conmdar dine with thee, if he had come{l) yesterday to the party. If venir tertuUa^ f. you consoled the afflicted, if you assisted the unfortunate, afligido^m. socorrer pobre,m, (1) The verb to come, venir being a neuter verb, is not conjugated in Spanish in the compound tenses with the auxiliary ser but with haber. (See Rule LXI, page 157.) ^^^ SPANISH EXERCISES. if you shared with them your superfluity, you would thus repartir entre superjlao^m. a»i acquire treasures of benedictions. M. Luis de la Plata tesoro bendicion Don pretends (to be) very poor, although he is the richest man in ser pobrcy de the city. I shall dine (to-morrow) with my friend the count man ana de Isla, (there will be) (a great many) people and after din- hahrd mucha gente despues de ner we shall play cards and we shall dance aljl night ; we jugar a los naipes hailar noche, f. shall sing also ; and I wish very much (1) that the Marquis tambien desear de Mondejar and the duchess de Almodovar would sing the duet of Zemire and Azor. Mr. Charles Tuerto bought a duo,m, house last week, and he sold it at ten o'clock in the semdua^i. vender la de morning. Where didst thou dine yesterday ? At thy maimnaj f. Donde en casa de brother's, and 1 shall dine to-morrow with the Duke de duque^ m. Alcudia, at his country house. Hast thou breakfasted ? yes, en almorazar si my friend 5 I breakfasted at eight o'clock, or half past eight. (2) 6 EXERCISE XXVIII. On the preceding Rides* The Swiss are very strong, very courageous and very fciithful men. A band of robbers attacked the Count de tropa^ f. lodron atacar Fernan Nunez and the Marchioness de Ariza, and obliged Nunez ohligar them to give all their money and their jewels. (3) I lost les a dar ^OT/a. perder (1) Mucho is indeclinable when joined to a verb, and is declined thus mucho-a-os-as when joiner' to a substantive. (2) Say, at eight and a half struck, a las oc/io y media dadas, (3) See Rule VII. page 30. SPANISH EXERCISES. 239 yesterday my little dog, hast thou found him ? No : if [ had hatlar lo found him, I should have sent him (to thee) immediately. enviar lo te inmediatamente , Hast thou seen the little country house that my mother has visto bought ? It is very pretty, we shall always have in the yard comprar * patio ^m, a large dog capable of terrifying the most daring robbers. perroyin. capaz de amedrenfar . osado A mother said one day to her children : practise virtue, decid hijo practicar detest vice, love study, be generous without prodigality, aborrecer sin prodigcdidad wise and religious without affectation, and you will be happy, religioso sin afectacion^ not only in this life, but also in the life (to come.) The solamente en mas tambien futuro, miser is a martyr of the devil or an anchorite who, avaro mdrtir demonio^va 6 anacorttayin. que by his abstinence and his continual inquietudes acquires abstinencia continuo ans^ustia^i. adquirir rights to hell ; his heart is always divided between the derecho injiernoy m. partir desire of preserving and that of accumulating. He is deseo, m. conservar tl amonionar tener hungry and eats not, he is thirsty and drinks not, he Jiambre comer tener sed beber (has need) of repose and takes none, he is 7iever free (1) necesitar * descanso no lo tomar libre from alarms. Before the revelation, the whole universe was sobresalto, antes de revelacion^f, universo^m, a temple of idols : each vice was a divinity. tem^plo, m, idolo cada vicio deidad, f. (1) See the observations, p. 159 of the grammar. 240 SPANISH EXERCISES. EXERCISE XXIX. ON PRONOUNS. See Rules XXVI. XXVII. XXVIIL XXIX. and XXX. pages 55 and 56. I will send thee to-morrow morning the books I prom- enviar manana por la manana ised thee ; if they please thee, I advise thee to buy them ; gustar aconsejar de comprar thou wilt find them at Messrs. Munroe & Francis's. Mr. hallar en la lihreria de Don Luis de Villa Real has assured us that Miss Sophia Hermo- asegurar Sofia sa is at Cadiz : write to her, and invite her to come and escribir convidar de venir a pass some time with us. I have received two letters for pasar alguno recibir para my brother. I will send (1) them to him at his country house without opening them. I will write to him myself abrir to-morrow, and I will enclose these two letters in mine. estas Let us defend ourselves, (2) my friends^ (3) let us defend defender ourselves with courage against the enemy who attacks us con corage contra que acometer and pretends to conquer us ; let us repulse him with vigour, pretender * veneer rechazar and let us force him to confess that our valour and our obfigar (4) confesar attachment to our country, and to the religion of our fathers, qficion^ f. (1) See Rule XXVII, p. 55. (2) See Rule XXX. page 56. (3) In these apostrophes : my frienff, my friends ^ my father, my mother, my brother, my sister, he. — the possessive pronoun may be suppressed, excepting v\ hen they are accompanied with a seniiment of joy or sorrow : in these cases the pronoun is expressed with ad- vantage, and is placed after the nouns ; and instead of the pronoun mi, we make use of mio without an article. (4) See the N. B. 4th which precedes the list of the irregular verbs^ p. 121 of the Grammar. SPANISH EXERCISES. 241 render us invincible. Thy brothers are very unjust and very hare invencihle. muy injusto ungrateful. A thousand times I have succoured them in ingrato, * vez socorrer their misfortunes, never has Madam Vial assisted them, infortHnirt, asistir nevertheless, they love her, they see her, and it appears that no obstante visitar * parecer they detest me, (l) detestar EXERCISE XXX. On the preceding Rules. Somebody advised Philip, the father of Alexander, Algimo aconsejar dF'^lipe * Jilejandro to banish from his dominions a man who had spoken ill of de eciiar estado que him ; I shall (take good care not) to do it, answered he, guardarse bien de hacer responder he would go every where and speak ill of me. When a ir(portodaspartesjd decir mal cuando Roman general triumphed, a herald said to him from romano general^m., triunfar^ heraldo^m. decir de time to time, remember that thou art mortal. Let us cuando en cuando ^ acuhdate mortal. alway submit with resignation to the decrees of siempre someterse resignacion decreto^ m. providence. Lend me thy book, I will return it to thee promdencia^i. Prestar volver to-morrow ; do not refuse it to me. (2) No, I cannot refuse manana rehusar puedo it to thee. Lend thy fan to thy sister, and present it to abanico presentar her politely. Thou knowest Mrs. D. T. S. ; the count and corttsmente conocer I were speaking (3) of her ; and we said that she is well decir (1) See the N. B. of Rule XXX. page 56^ (2) See Rule XLVI. page 80. (3) See Rule L. page 95. 21 242 SPANISH EXERCISES. informed J that she speaks several languages and that she is instruidoy miicho very amiable. All those who know her say (the same) Todos los que otro tanto of her. Where is Mr. de A. ? Do not speak to me of him, Donde I detest him. Here are pears and apples, eat some, they detestar He aqui pera manzana, algunoy are excellent. I shall buy some more to-morrow and I will comprar send jou some. EXERCISE XXXL On the preceding Rules. If they carry thy brother's servant to prison, he will not Si llevar criado,m, car eel ji. (come out) of it to-morrow. He is already there. I assure saldrd ya alii, asegurar you that I shall not go to see him there. The viscount de irt ver alia. vizconde Isla has bought a country house. I shall dine with him comprar to-morrow: he* will' speak' (to me)^ of it* : it is new, large, and well ornamented ; it is a palace. My son learned adornado * palacio^m. apj-ender last year all the fables of La Fontaine, but he has already 7/a forgotten the greatest part of them. Twelve robbers were olmdar mayor ladron stopped last month in the wood of V.... they were tried arrestar bosqiie^m. jnzgar (the day before yesterday) by the criminal tribunal, which anttayer por criminal tribunal ^m. que condemned six of them to be hanged. (How many) children ahorcar cuanto hijo has your sister ? she has two, one son and one daughter. Thy (pocket handkerchiefs) are very handsome, but I have panuelo,m. mas some that are at least as handsome and as good. que dlomenos SPANISH EXERCISES. 243 (Shall we go) to the garden to-day ? go there now if you Irtmos id aliora icish ; (as for me^) I shall not go; for, I come from it. querer yo * pues tl John, open my chest, thou wilt find in it ten louis, take ahrir annario^m. ha liar litis, m. tomar them, I give them to thee. (There were) yesterday fifty doxj hahia persons at the party at Madam ViaPs. en en casa de EXERCISE XXXII. On the pronouns demonstrative 9 relative^ interrogative and indefinite^ and on the preceding Rides. Whose garden is this ? (1) Whose houses are these ? Whose palace is this ? This garden is ?7ime,(2) these houses are the prime minister s^{S) and the palace is the king'>s. primer ?nimstro Who is there. (4) Some one knocks at the door ; John, llamar a open it. Give me this book and take that, I shall send to abrir dar tomar enviar them this cage and this bird. This man is (looking for) thee. jaula, f. pdjaro^ m. huscar He who was speaking to thee is one of my best friends, and she who is with him is the friend of thy sister. Has thy son paid too dear for his hat ? Yes, he paid twenty five pagar par somhrero^m., si pounds for it. The (young man) whose talents (5) we ad- por joven talentos, m. mire is hardly twenty five years old : he will be without te7ier ^ sin doubt one of the first painters in Europe. Of all vices, that duda pintorym.de vicioyin. which degrades man most is intemperance. Who* are^ degradar horrachera^ f. (1) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. (2) See Rule XXXH. page 60. (3) See Rule XXXU. page 60. (4) T/iere, is not translated in this phrase : (5) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. 244 SPANISH EXERCISES. you* speaking^ of?' of those of whom we were speaking two minutes ago, of those two gentlemen whose credulity ha J cahallero credulidad^L you condemned (so much). — Yes, yes, I condemned their condenar tanto credulity, and I shall endeavour to undecieve them on the procurar * desenganar sobre conduct of their sons. — Well; open their eyes on the conduct a, f^ scandalous conduct of these poor (young people) who, if escandaloso joven / their parents do not correct them, will run insensibly to padres castigar correr their ruin. ph'dida. EXERCISE XXXIIL Oti the Preceding Rules. Hast thou seen this parterre ? (Look at) these flowers : visto jardin^m, Mirar flor^i, this and that are in my opinion, the two handsomest. a parecery Here is a rose the colour (1) of which I admire. This is He aqui color ^ m. not less handsome ; it is fresher than that the brilliancy * fresco aquella brillo^m, of which you admire (so much.) If the Turkish fleet Turco flota^L attacks that of the English, it will find men to whose courage atacar Ingles^ * hallar valor^ia. and superiority, she may be obliged to yield. I advise thee, * podrd ohligar de ceder, aconsejar my friend, to study grammar, the rules of which are so de estudiar gramatica^. regla^ f. necessary. I shall speak to-morrow to those gentlemen, and necesario, shall tell them to present a petition to the prime minister dire de presentar suplica, f. (2) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. I SPANISH EXERCISES. 245 whose power equals almost that of the king. He who poder,m. igualar tl aqiiel was speaking to me yesterday, when my father came into entrar en my room, is much more learned than thou thinkest. (1) cuarto,m, instruido piensas What seekestthou? Whom* are MheseMadies^ looking* hvscnr mirar at?' What* are 5 they ^ talking^ about?* (Here are) two que acerca de He aqui pinks : lohich of the two (2) shall I give thee ? This pleases clavel^ m. dar gustar me more than that. And what sayestthou of these tulips ? dices tulipan^m. They are superb : I shall take some (of them.) Take, my magnifico tomar alguno * friend, as many as you wish (of them,) (3) I am very glad quieras * that they please thee. (4) gustar EXERCISE XXXTV. On the preceding pronouns. At zvhat hour shall we dine (5) ? At* half * after' two.* media y Shall we play after dinner ? Yes. — At what game ? jugar de spues de Si j^^go At chess. Somebody asking one day a (witty man) if he agtdrez^ m. preguntar ingenio was a nobleman, the latter answered : Noah had three sons, * noble r es ponder : No^ (1) See Rule XX page 44. (2) See after the declension of the interrogative pronouns,page 64 of the grammar, the manner of translating which in Spanish. (3) vds many as, instead of being translated by tanto a-os-as como is rendered much better in this phrase and others similar by cuanto-a-os-as. (4) / am very glad that must be translated as if it was / rejoice very much that ... me alegro mucho de que . . . and the following- verb roust be put in the piesent of the subjunctive. (5) See after pronouns interrogative (page 64 of the grammar) how we must translate what, kc, 21* 246 SPANISH EXERCISES. I do not know from ivJiich I have descended. Knowest s6 descender. Canocer thou art]/ of these gentlemen, an?/ of these ladies ? Have you cabaUerOy any of these works ? Replace all these portraits, each in ohra^L volved d poner ret rata, m en its place- (We must) give to each one what belongs to him. Itigar. Es menester lo que pertcnecer Alexander wished that the* beasts ^ ei?e«'and the walls of the Alejandi^o qinso animaljm. muralla^L cities should testify each in their way, their grief for the ciudadyf, a mode, por death of Hephestion. Each country has its customs. Efestion. pais (Let us put) every thing in its place. I doubt if any one pongamos dudar que alguno has ever known men better than La Bmyere. Has any one conocer algaien ever spoken more ingenuously than La Fontaine? His house (would suit) him better than any body. Do not unto others^ convendria a cualquiera. Hagais a what you would not that they should do (unto you.) q nereis hag an os {^Some people^ do not open their mouths but at the expense alguno abrir la bocays'mg.sino d * espensas of others. He icho has no education resembles a body educacioji semejarse d cuerpo^m, without a soul. sin * alma. EXERCISE XXXV. On the preceding Rules. The people always suffer from the wars which princes pueblo^m. sufrir^sing. principe^m. make against each other. They have killed each se hacen los unos a los otr^os. matarsc other. Many are deceived {V) in wishing to deceive others. en queriendo * (1) Instead of are deceivedj say ; see themselves deceived^ se ven enganados. SPANtSH EXERCISES. , [J Whatever you write (l) avoid useless repetitions. C ualquiera cosa que evitar iniitil rcpeticion. To whomsoever we speak, we ought to be polite. We ought quien qniera dehtr * cortes. never to speak ill of (any body) in their absence. In * nadie ausencia, d whatever he employs himself C) he always works with dedicarse trahajar taste. Those who do not occupy themselves in ani/ thing gusto, at up arse nada de Siood and useful, appear to me very despicable. Customs iitiL parecer desprcciiible.costumbreS are not the same in all countries. We ougbt not to associate pais\ m. ^ frecuentar with the impious, we ought ere/? to avoid them as public * "*" evitar publico pests. (No one) knows if he is worthy of love or hatred. (3) peste,f, nadie saber disno amor odio. yone of these ladies (will go) to the play. The treaties ird comedia. f. are null. The good man has^ (no where)' a more tranquil nulo, (eji ningunaparte) retreat, where he can be more at liberty than in his soul. retiro^mAonde puede en No reverse ^ought to) disturb true friendship. One is not contratiempo alterar uno always master of his passions. ^There are' defects that dueho pasion. Hay deftcto we conceal carefully. When we have had the misfortune ocultar cuidadosamente, desdichaA\ to otlend any body, we ought to laboiur to make him de ofender a a/o-uieu^ trabajar hacer forget the displeasure that we have caused hun. What do olvidar disgusto.m. causar ^ they say of the negotiations ? They affirm that peace is made. se dice negociacionyi. asegurar hecho* (1) See the pronouns indefinite, pages 64 and 6-5 of the grammar. {2) See the X. B. 4th relative to verbs ending in car and gar, which precedes the irregular verbs. Grammar pag"es 121 and 122. (3) See Rule XXXVIIl, page 66. 248 .- SPANISH EXEKCISES. OBSERVATIONS. The second person singular, as well as that of the plural, being very little used in good society, and as they cannot be made use of but in speaking to a friend or to a person over whom we have authority (see the observation on the pronoun of the second person^ after its declension^ page ^2^) it will be proper to begin in the following exercise to substitute the words vm. and vms. for the pronouns of the second persons, which is not difficult. When the pronoun t/ou is addressed to one person only, it is changed into your favour ^ vuestra merged, wliich is pro- nounced usTED and is written vm., and when it is addressed to more than one person, it is changed into your favours^ vuESTRAs MERCEDES, which is prououuced usTEDEs, and written vms. In the first case the verb is put in the third person singular, and in the second, in the third of the plural. Vm. and vms. are of both genders, that is to say, they are used equally in speaking to men and women. It is well to observe that the words vm. and vms, are not repeated in Spanish as often as you in English : we do not repeat them excepting when they are so distant that it would be difficult to know them as nominatives to the veib. Ex. You say that yoii know and that you love Miss Villigas, that is, your favour says that he knows and loves Miss Villegas ; VM. dice que conoce y ama a la Senorita Villegas. And if the prononn you is followed by this possessive pronoun yoiir^ it must be rendered by the pronouns of the third person his and their^ su or sus. Ex. You have sold all your gold and silv er plate, that is, your favour has sold all his gold and sil- ver plate ; vm. ha vendido toda su vagilla de oro y de plata. Your when not preceded by you is changed into these words of your favour^ which are preceded by the substantive to which your refers, and this substantive takes the masculine or feminine, singular or plural article, according to its gender and number. Ex. Your brother came to see me, su hermano DE VM. vino a verme^ that is, the brother of your favour y ^c. I have received yoar letters, he recihido la carta de vm. that is, I have received the letter of your favoi>r or worship. In addressing God and speaking to crowned heads, we make use of the second person plural in Spanish. Ex. O DioSy vos sois mi verdadero padre. Admjtuj, Gran Carlos y con benigno rostro^ con oidos propiciosj y corno SPANISH EXERCISES. 249 prenda de nuestro afecto^ de nuestra veneracioriy lealtad y rendimiento a la Magestad^ este escrito^ que con tanta mayor confianza dedicamos a vuestro nomhre^ cuanto conocemos que nada os es mas grato y decoroso^ nada parece mas real y mas digno de un Boihon que los pensamientos capaces de fomentar y ennoblecer las artes y la sabiduria, — Academ- ical discourse. In the first part of the exercises we have enabled the scholar to exercise himself on all the parts of speech, from the article, to the auxiliary verbs and the three regular conju- gations inclusively. We have introduced in it very few neu- ter, reflective and reciprocal verbs, because our intention has always been to begin this second part with exercises on the rules that belong to them. We have also avoided, as much as possible, introducing irregular verbs in the first part, in order to give the scholar time to study them. Their great number is enough to frighten one at the first glance ; but we are soon encouraged, if we reflect, 1st. that the four hundred and eighty-three or eighty-four irregular verbs are reduced, in a manner, to thirty -five, by which all the others are conjugated: 2d. that they are almost all regular in their irregularities. Indeed, if we examine one or two of these verbs, we shall find that a little reflection renders the difficul- ty very trifling. Jlcordar^ to remind, to resolve, is irregular ; the irregularity consists in changing the o into lie in the three persons singular and the third plural of the three present tenses, that is, of the present of the indicative, of the present of the imperative, and of the present of the subjunctive. All the other persons and all the other tenses are regular. The irregularity of the verb aborrecer to abhor, consists in placing a z before the c whenever the latter is to be followed by an o or an a ; the o and a are found only in the three present tenses as above stated ; there is then no irregularity but in these three tenses, and all the others are regular. Let the scholar study these verbs attentively and judiciously, and they will not present any serious difficulty. — In the following exercises, we shall make known the irregular verbs by these letters, zVr, whenever they are in a person subject to irregu- larity, and they will be found in their places in the Alphabet- ical List, beginning at page 122, which canijot be too often consulted by students. 250 SPANISH EXERCISES. EXERCISE XXXVL On the neuter^ reflective^ reciprocal (i^id impersonal verbs. See Rule LXL page 157. I have walked all day. My brother and sister have pasearseil^ amused themselves very much in the garden of the English divertirse ^ Consul. My uncle has assured me that you (were vexed) enfadarse yesterday with the prime minister. The "Germans have primer Jileman^ m. defended themselves well against the English. The French defender se had fought like desperadoes. Your mother will be pelear coma desesperado. haber (gone out) when we arrive. The dancing* master' of Mr. salir bade Luis Angelo had arrived when we entered. I should Luis llegar entrar. have repented very much having spoken to Messrs. nrrepentirse de de Callenuevaif they had been pronounced guilty. Rejoice, dcclorar culpable, alegrarse^ my children, your father is much better, (2) he is out of fuera danger. My nephew does not cease to torment and afflict sobrino, dejar de atormentarse liimself. It rained, hailed, lightened and thundered * Hover ^granizar^relampaguear tronar yesterday almost all day. (There were) yesterday more than casi diay m. sixt}^ persons at the party at the Countess de Torillo's^ and en en casa de to-morrow (there will be) at least two hundred at Madam a lo rnenos Madama Terranueva's. (1) The pronoun se which is found joined to the verb in the infini- tive, always denotes that It is reflective, or reciprocal. (2) See the N. B. of Rule XLIX. page. 95. SPANISH EXERCISES. 251 EXERCISE XXXVII. On the neuter^ reflectedf reciprocal, impersonal and irregular verbs. Messrs. Cojo and Giboso disputed last Monday (1) for dis put arse * about an hour. Your cousin told me yesterday that his cerca de primo decir ^irr. mother would not return from her country seat till volver dntes de next weekj although she had already arrived. T abhor prdximo aborrecer,irr. and my sister abhors like me false philosophy. I desire that como yo Jibsofia^ f. desear you would abhor it also. Can you. Sir, do me the sub. pres. Po der ^irr. hacer pleasure to lend me ten louis ? I cannot : if I could I favor, m, de prestar luis would do it willingly. - - The servant of Mr. Cafias ha cer, irr, de may buena gana. has been judged and declared innocent. What do you juzgar declurar think of what I have told you ? At what hour do you pensar,\rr, decir, irr. A"" wich that your children should - - bi^eakfast? I querer^wv. almorzar, irr. subj. pres. breakfast at seven o'clock, and I wish that they should break- fast, and that you should alP breakfast* at eight. Go, my ir, irr. children, go and study till breakfast is ready. I a hasta que almuerzo, m. este pronto. A;woz/; that it will not be so 6e/bre half an hour. (2) None s«6er,irr. * estar lo * can - recollect without horror the bloody* scenes* poder^xxx. acordarse sin horror de saiigriento escena,(, which the revolution of Morocco produced in the years one producir, irr. ^ (1) The days of the week take the article, say therefore; el lunes ultimo, or pasado. (2) Before is here translated by «n?e5 de....sdLy, antes de media hora ; an is suppressed,. 252 SPANISH EXERCISES. thousand five hundred and eighty-two and eighty-three. I say and I repeat it every day that our posterity will decir^m, repetir^ixv. nieto^pX.m. scarcely believe such atrocities. I bring yoUj gentlemen, a apinas creer atrocidad, traer^wY, book that you will read with pleasure ; I desire that you leer gusto ; demar would bring me also, or that you would send me that sub pres. tambien^ enriar H which you have promised me. I (go out) every day about pro meter salir^WY, hdria one o'clock : do me the favour to send it to me before that Jiacer^ixv, de hour. EXERCISE XXXVIII. Continuation of the ireceding Rides. The truly ^ christian^ man* blesses the hand of verdaderamente cristiano bendtcir^wv, God, even when it chastens him : let us follow his example^ aun cuando * castigar seguir^irregemplo^m, and let us bless, (in the midst) of our misfortunes the God of en medio infortunio goodness who has given us being and who preserves it to us. dar ser, m. conscrvar I fear this child will fall, (1) tell him to stop. (2) Your catr, irr. decir^hr detener server, father wishes that you should conduct, (l) your sister to querer, irr. conducir, irr, school by the same road that you conducted (l) her escuela^t por mismo cammoj m. yesterday. I say and I repeat every day that nothing is (3 ) repetir, irr. nada so rare, as a true friend. In summer, almost all Spaniards verano, casi sleep (after dinner ;) it is the heat which requires that dormir^irr, de pues de comer * exiglr (1) Pat caer in the subj. pres. and conducir l?i in the same tense., (2) Translate the phrase as ii it was, tell him that he stopjpres. sub. (3) See Rule XXXVIII. page 66. SPANISH EXERCISES. 253 they should do it. It lightens and thunders often hacer yirr, * tronar^vcv. frecueniemente in Spain ; it rains there very rarely in the southern * rara vez mediodia^m. provinces, and in the northern provinces the rain is almost provinciayf. norte^m, lluvia^i, continual from the month of October till the end of April. continuo desde mes^m, octubre hasta Jin^ra, abril. Where are'' you* going/ Margaret? I (am going) into the Adonde ir, irr. Margarita ? en garden, 1 shall gather some flowers, and I shall go and carry coger flor, f. a Uevar them to the Countess de Dupuy ; I should desire you desear would come with me, but I fear that your mother (1) does venir^ irr. not wish you to (go out). — I (am going) to ask her. — que vm, salir, irr.p.subj. preguntdrselo. Well, go and return quickly. My mother consents Bien, volver^nv, pronto. consentir^vcv. that (2) I should go with you, provided that (2) 1 bring her en que con tal que traer /irr. some flowers, and that (2) we do not (go out) before (2) I salir yirr. antes que knoio my leison in geography. saber y irr. lee ton de geogrufia. EXERCISE XXXIX. See Rules LI. LIT. LIII. and LIT. pages 151, 152, 153. I have just heard that the countess de Villegas has lost a acabo de oir son, it is the queen's surgeon who has killed him. The Mar- * reina^i, cinjrinoym, morir^in, chioness de Costillas is also dead, and she (is to be buried) se ha de enterrar (1) YO'ir mother^ is politely translated in Spanish, 5U 5eilorc^mac?re : your father, su sefior padre, &lc. (2) See conjunct, gov. the subj. p. 194. 22 254 SPANISH EXERCISES. the day after to-morrow at her country seat. I am very poor en casade campo, and thou art very rich. (1) I am not more indebted (2) to Philip my father, said often Alexander, than to Aristotle, Felipe decia Alejandro^ Aristdfeles, my preceptor : if I owe my life to one, I owe virtue to the preceptor : deber al other. Do you believe what (was told you) this morning ? creer le decian What? that Mr. Peredo is dead? [ believe and I know* muerio ' saber^irr, even* that he is very well. What is my son doing ? He is aun hacer ? writing. (3) — Where is he ? He is in his room. — And this escribir. donde morning what was he doing when you was with him ? He was studying geography. I thought that he was drawing. — geografia^ f. dibujar. No, sir, but he will do it while you are breakfasting. I fear mientras almorzar, temer that you deceive me. Let us go and write the letters of e/i^anar, sub. pres. iV,irr.a escribir which I spoke (to thee.) Sir, I hnve written them. (4) escribir (There are) some men who repeat (5) everywhere all that Jiaber ^impers. repetir,\rr.(por todas partes) lo qtie they hear. We will go and dine, when you please. (6) Let oir^ irr. a gustar, us go and walk first, we shall dine with more appetite. My a antes, apeiito. son has just arrived from the wharf, where he has been acaba de llegar 7/iMe//e,m. donde walking an hour and a half. Do not forget, Francis, that I * olvidary Francisco^ have ordered thee to return to-morrow. (7) mandar de volver manana, (1) See the exception to Rule XI. page 152. (2) Say : I do not owe more. . . . JYb deho mas. (3) See Rnl« L. page 95. (4) See Rule LIX. page 156. (5) Say ; que andan repitiendo, or que van repitiende, for^wko repeat. (6) See Rule XL. page 76. (7) See Rule LVIII. page 156. SPANISH EXERCISES. EXERCISE XL. On the preceding Rules and on Rules LVIL LVIIL LIX. LX. and LXL pages 156, 157. I have all the works of Mr. Thomas de Iriarte, I have ohra. f. Don Tom as read them, and they please me very much. I like also gustar Me gustan very much (1) the writings of Calderon and Lope de ohra, f. A'ega ; I bought them fifteen days ago. and I paid ver\' comprar ha, pagar dear for them. Spanish books were so scarce in Boston. por that the lovers of that language could hardly procure any. aficionado a poder encontrar I should wish to read the poem of la Araucana by Alonzo quererArr. Alonso de Ercilla; but I do not know if I shall (be able) saber, irr. poder^, to find it in this city. I do not believe that you can find * encontrar creer it at the bookstores ; but one of my friends, who has in his library ten or twelve thousand volumes of the best French. hihlioteca tomo Englishj Spanish, German and Italian works, has often ohraS, spoken to me of this poem: I will ask (him for it.) telling pedir se lo decirArr, him that you wish to read it ; and I am persuaded that, if desear * estar persuadido he has it, he will not refuse it to me. (How much) do you rehusar cuanto think I have paid for the two hundred bottles of Burgundy pagar por botella^f. wine that I have bought ? One hundred and twenty pounds * libra (1) The verb fo h'A'e, gustar: is used impersonally ; as. h gust la musica italiana^ he likes Italian music. .\os gusta el Espafiol, tv© like the Spanish 256 SPANISH EXERCISES. Sterling ? They did not cost me but one hundred pounds. esterlina ? costar they are not dear. The wine being so old and so good, I rajicio would willingly have paid a hundred and fifty pounds. de huena gana The letter which I have written to your mother to announce carta^ f. escrihir^\n\ para anunciar to her that Miss Sydney is dead, will be delivered to-morrow entregar to Mr. Montague, who (is going) to see her at her country ir^ irr. en house, and has offered to carry it to her. ofrecer de llevar EXERCISE XLI. On the Ailxerhs^ the Prepositions, and the preceding Rvles. See jiage 157 and the following observations on adverbs. N. B. In Spanish the adverbs are generally placed after the verb, and in compound tenses after the participle, except the negative and interrogative adverbs, which are placed before the verbs, and before the auxiliaries in compound tenses. The arts and sciences have never been more cultviated arte^L ser cultivar than they are now : but never also have they been more lo ahora : encouraged than they are. (There is) no country where proteger lo, hay the laws are more just and wise, and where justice is sean sou administered with less partiality than in France. The vir- administrar parcialidad tuous man is more estimable reduced even to the most redttcido aun extreme misery than the man without honour and without estremo miseria^L sin religion, living in the greatest opulence. It is not riches vivir mayor opidenciuy^' * No son SPANISH EXERCISES. 257 that command esteem, but honour and virtue. Indigence grangear estimacion^i. mas si indigtncinS, was neve"!' and never can be criminal, hut by being the criminal^ con ser effect of crime. There is nothing so common as the name efecto.m. crimen ^m. comun of friend ; nothing however so rare as true friendship. sin embargo amistad^ f. (It is said) that the Hon. Mr. W. speaks learnedly^ prudently se dice doctamente. and eloquently, (1) Professor H. writes and speaks correctly elocuentemente, and elegantly. Modesty, candour and virtue are, in a eleganteme?ite. candor, m. woman, preferable to beauty. (2) When we hear men say mejor hermosura, f. o/r, irr. decir to us every day : gentlemen, we are wholly yours ; we are cada " ^ de vm, entirely devoted to your service : let us believe that it is creer * almost always as if they said : we might (be useful) to you, cast decir: poder^n\ servir but (we will do nothing about it.) 710 lo haremos EXERCISE XLII. On the Conjunctions and preceding Rules. See Bules LXILLXIII.LXIV and LXV. pages 161, 162, 193. William second, king of England, was killed while matar estando hunting, with an arrow hy Walter, his favourite, in the en caza, de saetazo Gualtcro^ valido de year eleven hundred and one. The battle of Masura, in mil ciento batalla^ f. Masura, Egypt (was fought) in the year twelve hundred and fifty- darsey irr. mil dos cientos (1) See page 160 of the grammar, Sd observ. (2) Translate this phrase as if it was : modesty. 4"C, art better in a woman than beauty, 22* 258 SPANISH EXERCISES. Saint LouiSj king of France, after having fought with a despues de pelear heroic courage, was made prisoner by the army of the valorem. kacer/in\ egtrcito^m, Saracens commanded by Malec Sala. Having been Saraceno mandar ransomed, he resumed the conquest of the Holy^ Land ;' rescatavj volver a conquista^L Santo lieiTa^f, but the plague having introduced itself into his army, the peste^ f. introducirse greatest part of his troops perished with it, and iie perished mayor percer de (with it) himself. Punishments (ought to) be for the * castigo^m. deber wicked, the rewards for the good. I shall (be absent) 7nal0y m. recompensa^ f. ausentarse next week for some days, and on my return my son can a vnelta podrd depart ybr Madrid, or if he prefers it, delay his journey till salir preferir yirr. dejar viage para Spring. (1) (Every body) says that, for a (young man) of la todoSj^V decir, irr. jdven^xa, fourteen, your nephew is prodigiously learned. Your father afios^ sobrino instruido. is on the point (2) of (setting out) for the capital : he partir intends to speak to the minister for your brother and to tener dnimo de ministro^ ra. endeavour to obtain a place /or him. Mr. D. speaks Latin, procurar * lograr empleo, m. French, Spanish and English. (3) Charles and Ignatius, his IgnaciOy brothers, are also very learned. Do you know where Mr. tambien dodo, saber^wv, Francis Ordonez is now ? No, Sir ; I know that he is no ahora (1) See pages 160 and 161 of the grammar, the different modes of translating /or. (2) See the N B. 2d of Rule LXII. page 161. (3) See Rule LXIV. page 193. SPANISH EXERCISES. 239 longer a canon of the Cathedral of Saint Andero ; and I mas ^ canonigo catedraJd, believe that he is archbishop or bishop. (1) creer arzobispo obispo. EXERCISE XLUL On the Conjuncthns, the Interjections^ and the pre- ceaivg Rules, I shall not (go out) to day unless it ceases raining. AI- salir, irr. * dejar de Hover, though beauty is much (sought for) in women, yet it is very miiy deseado * often - - dangerous and productive of very great frecuentemente peligroso productivo evils. This war will be very long, unless the powers of the mah north coalesce. The Spanish Academy has established /or norte^m. ligarse, (2) establecer pronunciation clear and precise rules, that there might pronunciation,f. claro preciso regla^f. afiri que * not remain the least doubt on so essential a point. Woe quedar dada^. Ay to those who suffer themselves (to be dragged away) by the de dejarse arrastrar de torrent of passions! Alas ! I am ruined. (How unfortunate torrente^m. pasisn^i. estar perder, desdichado I am !) courage ! courage ! after the combat, victory. de mi ! espiritu ! comhate^m, victoriaS, Passing (last evening) in the street of Saint Charles, I heard Pa^sar ayer noche calle^f, Carlos, ozVjrr. repeated on all sides these cries : fire ! fire ! I hastened my repetir por parte grito,m. adelantar el steps, and on entering the neighbouring street, I met a pasoj alentraren vecino encontrar poor woman who melted into tears and did not cease to deshacerse en Idgrimas de repeat these words : My God, how unfortunate I am I Ah ! VQZ, f. (1) See Rule LXV. page 193. (2) See Grammar, page 121, M. B. 4. 260 SPANISH EXERCISES. my childj my poor child ! where art thou? the house of this woman was then almost reduced to ashes, and the child entonces cast reducir ceniza^ whom she lamented had been a victim to the flames, it was llorar * victima de llama^i, * tenei" only three years old. (Poor little one !) exclaimed I, what * Pobrecito f esclamar sorrow, what a misfortune for a mother ! I endeavoured to dolor^ * desdicha \ procurar * console her, I gave her some money ; but all was useless : consolar dar,irr, dinero^m. ^ she was inconsolable ; ah ! said she to me, thanking me, inconsolable ; decir dar gracias (God grant) you may never experience a similar Dios quiera que esperimentar * semejante misfortune. de^icha. EXERCISE XLIV. On the preceding Rules. Madam Luisa de Legarra arrived yesterday from Ma- drid, and brought me letters from some of my friends. I ^?'aer,irr. alguno shall go and walk, after dinner, and Mary will come with ir d venir^ivY, me. For whom is that ribbon ? for me or for thee ? it is for cinta, f. thee, I shall buy another for me, dost thou know Miss M.... ? conocer do I know her ! certainly : and I assure thee that I love her si ciertamente : asegnrar querer ^irr. and esteem her very much. And dost thou love me also ? (1) Yes, I love thee (very much) and shall never forget thee. muchisimo What did the Marquis de Rojas want? He asked me how querer ? preguntar you did, and then he (went away.) I received last week estavj despves zVse, irr. recihir a letter from Mr. John Roca ; it ended thus : and do me the Don * acabar hacer, \rr. (1) See the N.B. of Rule XXX. page 5d. SPANISH EXERCISES. 26 1 iavoLir to believe that I dim forever (l) your sincere friend. favor ^XQ.» de creer^ Scc, You know him, (as well as) his brother Augustus. como tamhien Augusto. Well, tell me if you have ever known men more worthy of the bien, decir,in\ jamas esteem and affection of those who associate with them. — estimacion.L afecto^m* frecuentar * Never ; and I assure you that I love them both with all my Nimca; asegurar a amhos heart. I say as much of them and I say it with pleasure. otro tanto The man who has passed his youth in amusing himself , (2) pa^sar juventud repents of it (sooner)^ or^ (later.)' My children spend ello lemprano tarde. emplear two or three hours every day in studying history. Playing a jugar and walking, you will not inform yourself. A man of instridrse genius (ought to) cultivate his talents to frender himself) ingenio deber taIento,m.para hacerse useful to society. I like reading and study, (S) I do not sociedad^L megusta like the company of Miss B., I fear she will come. que t*ewiV,pres.subj. EXERCISE XLV. . On the preceding Rules. My husband solicits the place of officer in the queen's soiicitar empleo.m. oficial regiment; but I fear that the king will refuse it to him. The regimiento.m, rekusar, sub pres. Governor promised us yesterday to come to-day to the prometer de party, but we fear that his occupations will prevent - - - tertulia,{, ocupacion impedirjwY.^wh.i^Yes, (1) See these words, pag-e 159 of the g^rammar. (2) See Rule LV. page 153, (3) See Rule LV. and the remark that follows it, page 153a 262 SPANISH EXERCISES. our having the pleasure to see him. (Is there) any news ? quetengamos gusto^m, de ver Hay noticia^ f. No; there is none, (1) (How many) persons are there below ? abajo ? (How many) ladies and (how many) gentlemen ? There caballero ? are ten ladies and nineteen gentlemen; and there were yesterday forty-two persons at the Marchioness de en casa de Torino's ; the assembly was very brilliant. (It is) a great brillante. es^ misfortune for a man not* to* have' friends. (2) Who desdicha^i, el has done that ? It is I. (2) Who has written this letter ? liacer^ irr. carta f. It is you, I believe. Read, my child, and read again (3) creer, Leer^ the maxims of La Rochefoucault, they are fine and suitable mdximaf. hermoso propio to give a very great knowledge of the human heart. I a dar conocimiento, m. cannot (go out) to-day, I have too bad a headache. (4) poder,irr. salir Sir, your father (has but just) gone out (5) he will return acabar de volver in two hours. The archbishop of Toledo was like to dentro de estar para die (6) (last evening) of an indigestion. (It is) only an hour morir a noche indigestion^ f. hay since the Marchioness de Costillas told me of it. I have que decir /irr. * written two lines to him to express to him (how much) esaibiryin. renglon . para espresar (1) See Rale XXXVIII. page QQ. (^) See page 155 of the grammar, 3d. observation, &,c. (3) See page 155 of the grammar, 2d. observation. (4) To translate these words, we must render them in this manner, iJu head pains me too much ; me duele demasiado la cabeza. These modes of speaking ; to have a pain in the eyes, in the teeth, ^c. are rendered in the same manner, as, me dolia un ojo, un diente, S/'C. (5) To have or to be but just, is, acabar de, governing the next verb in the present of the infinitive Ex.^cabo de salir , I have just gone out (6) See page 156; 4th. observation. SPANISH EXERCISES. 263 I am grieved by this accident. (1) I am very much grieved ?ne pesa * (by it) myself; I shall go and see him after dinner. Do me * a despues de, Hacer^vcr, then the favour to tell him that this evening we will go, paes favor ^m.de nocke,L seven or eight friends (of us) and keep him company. * a hacer (1) Say : bow much grieves me this accident ; and so, in all the tenses used as impersonal verbs ; as, le pesaba, he was grieved ; nos pesard, we shall be grieved ; me ha pesado, I have been grieved ; nos gusto J we liked ; les ha gv^tado, they have liked , ie habria gustado, thou wouldst have liked, kc. A VOCABULARY, Containing such words as most frequently occur in familiar conversation^ and ought therefore to be known by students. N. B. Jn nouns of the same gender and number as the preceding one, the space of the article to be applied is left blank. The parts of the human body. La punta de la tip of — Las partes del cuerpo nariz, the nose. humano. Las ventanas ? de la nariz, ^ nostrils. La cabeza, ^ * head. Los cafios de la nariz, gristle cor onilla/ crown of the of the nose. head. dientes, teeth. mollera, mould of the head. colmillos. eye-teeth. frente, forehead. Las muelas, grinders. Las sienes * temples. El nervio the optic La oreja ear. optico, nerve. ternilla, gristle. labio. lip. ceja, eye-brow. paladar, palate. cuenca del ojoj ) corner of El lagrimal, 5 the eye. La quijada, jaw. cerviz, hinder part of. bianco white of the neck. del ojo, the eye. nuca, nape of the neck. celebio, or cerebro, brain. garganta, throat. cogote, back of the neck. barriga, belly. hueco de hollow of mano, hand. la oreja, the tar. mufieca. wrist. timpano del drum of pal ma de palm of oido, the ear. la mano, the hand. Los pirpados, eye-lids. barba, chin. Las pestanas, eye-lashes. Las barbas, beard. La nifia del (jo, eye-ball. costillas. ribs. tela del o'pyjilm of the eye. ingles. groin. megilla, cheek. juntas de joints of boca, mouth. los dedos, fingers. encia, gum. Los dedos de los pieSy toes. lengua, tongue. El gaznate, gullet. nariz, nose. seno, bosom* VOCABULARY. 265 El pecho, estomago, pelo, vello, cuelloj brazOj codo, sobaco, espinazo, ombligo, La yema del dedo, El breast* stomach, hair, down, neck, arm, elbow, arm-pit, hack-bone, navel, hrawn of the finger, una, nail, rodilla, knee, pierna, leg, pantorrilla, ca/fq/^^e leg, espinillaj shin-bone, planta del pie^ sole of the foot, garganta del pie^ instep, piel, skin, pulgar, thumb, dado indice, forefinger, dedo del corazon middle finger, dedo aniilar, fourth finger, dedo menique, ) little or auricular, 3 finger. muslo, jarrete, tovillo, pie, talon, Las espaldas, Los horabros lados, 23 thigh, ham, ancle, foot. heel, hack, shoulder a. muscle. The interior parts of the hu- man body, — Partes interi- ores del cuerpo humano. El raurecillo 1 musculo, ^ nervio, nerve, tendon, tendon^ sinew. La grasa, or gordura, fat. membrana, membrane, vena, vein, artery, gristle, bone. El aneria, ternilla, hueso, menllo, ^ La medula, > marrow. El tuetano, j casco, la calavera, skull. Las espinillas, shin-bones. La espaldilla, shoidder-bone, canilla del brazo, arm-bone. El hueso sacro, or rump La rabadilla, El esqueleto, corazon, Los bofes, pulmones, livianos. El higado, bazo, Los rinones, sesos, El estomago. hone, skeleton, heart, lungs. liver, spleen, kidneys, brains, stomach. La boca del estomago, pit of the stomach, Los lomos, loins. Las tripas, guts, Los intestines, intestines, Lamadre,lamatriz,^ u,o»j&. El utero, 266 VOCABULARY. La vegiga, sangre, colera^ fleraa^ El quilo, La leche, saliva^ bladder. blood, clioler, phlegm. chyle, milk. spittle. The Jive senses. — Los sentidos. cmco La vista, El oido, olfatOj gusto, tacto, sight, hearing. smell. taste, feeling. Ages. — Edades. La ninez, childhood. infancia, infancy. puericia, boyishness. adolescencia, adolescence. juventudj youth. virilidad, manhood. senectud, ^ vejez, S old age. Qualities of the body. — Cali- dades del cuerpo. Defects in the humanjbody. — Defectos del cuerpo huraano. La fealdad, Las arrugas, pecas, laganas, La verruga, El lunar, La nube en el ojo. La salud, fuerza, debilidad, hermosura, fealdad, garbo, brio, El health. strength. weakness. beauty. ugliness. good presence. sprightUness. deformity. wrinkles. freckles. blear eyes. wart. mole. a pearl in the eye. tickling. cataract. blindness. Las cosquillas. La catarata, ceguedad, or ceguera, 3 magrura, leanness. El ciego, blind. tuerto, one-eyed. cojo, lame. La cojez, lameness^ El tartamudo, stammerer. La corcova, crookedness* El calvo, bald- romo, flat-nosed* estropeado, crippled* tullido, lame of the limbs* zurdo, left-handed* bizco, bisojo, squinting* manco, lame of one hand. mudo, sordo, dumb, deaf. men.-— vicios, buenas rico talle, fine stature. Virtues and vices, good and bad qualities of Virtu des y y malas calidades de los hombres. El recatado, cautious ^modest. diestro, dexterous. docil, docile. VOCABULARY. 267 El galan. gallant. El misericordioso , merciful. simple, harmless. paciente, patient. agudoj sharp. religioso, religious. vivo. sprightly. ambicioso. ambitious. SUtll, chocarrero. subtle, buffoon. avariento, } avaro, 5 covetous. necio, foolish. soberbio, proud. astuto, crafty. bipocrita. hypocrite. loco. mad. cobarde, coward. malicioso, malicious. holgazan, idle. teraeroso. fearful. altivo. haughty. espajitadizo, easy to be chismoso. tale-bearer. frightened. adulador. flatterer. valiente. brave. goloso. glutton. tonto, stupid. desleal. treacherous. fantastico, fantastical. desagradecidc , ungrate- embustero, deceitful. ful. grosero, clownish. inhumano. inhumane. revoltoso, mutinous. insolente. insolent. bien criado, well-bred. lujurioso, lewd. cortes, courteous. porfiado, positive. grave, grave. perezoso, slothful. justo, just. prodigo. prodigal. prudente, discreet. vano. vain. desvergonzado, impudent. mugeriego, given to fogoso, jiery. women. impertinente ^impertinent. atrevido, bold. importuno, ti oublesome. colerico, passionate. ligero, light. rabioso, outrageous. descuidado, careless. alegre. merry. temerario. rash. ufano. arrogant. afable, affable. indeciso. irresolute. amigable. friendly. celoso, jealous. bizarro, brave. adultero, adulterer. caritativo, charitable. rufian. ruffian. casto, chaste. matador. murderer. constante, constant. salteador, highwayman. devoto. devout. jurador, swearer. diligente, diligent. calumniador. slanderer. fiel, faithful. murniurador. censurer. generoso. generous. hechicero. sorcerer. humilde, humble. tramposo. cheat. :zob VOCABULARY. El incestuoso, incest?tous. El pan de cebada, barley/ ladron, thief bread. ratero; pickpocket. pan de avena, oaten bread. mentiroso, liar. pan de mijo, millet bread. perjuro, perjurer. pan de maiz, indian corn periido, perfidious. bread. profano. profane. pan de levadura, leavened rebelde. rebel. bread. sacrllego, sacriligeous. biscocho, biscuit. traidor, traitor. La migaja de pan, crumb of malvado, perfidious. ^ bread, masa, * dough, torta, cake or loaf. Of eating and drinking, — rosea, bread made like Del comer y beber. a roll. El bunuelo, fritter. La comida, dinner. La empanada, tart or pye. cena, supper. carne, meat. El almuerzo. breakfast. El cocido, boiled meat. La merienda, luncheon. asado, roasted meat. colacion, collation. estofado, stewed meat. El banquette, entertainment. La carne frita, fried meat. convidado, guest. carbonada, broiled meat. Gonvite, feast. pepitoria, giblets. La hambre, hunger. El picadillo, hash. sed, thirst. La cecina, hung meat. El borracho, drunkard. El pernil, el jamon, ham. buen bebedor, hard carnero, mutton. drinker. La vaca, beef buen apetito 1 goodap- El cordero, lamb. Las buenas ganas, ^ petite. La ternera, veal. El gloton, glutton. El |3uerco, pork. pan, bread. cabrito, kid. pan bianco, lohite bread. torhio, bacon. pan candial, the whitest La pierna de carnero, leg of bread. mutton. pan bazo, brown bread. El brazuelo de shoulder of mollete. hot loaf. carnero, mutton. pan fresco, new bread. lomo, loin. pan de todo trigo, wheaten pecho, breast. bread. Las manos de carnero, sheep^s pan decenteno, rr/ehread. trotters^ VOCABULARY. 269 La rueda de ternera, filht asadura, of veal, the pluck. salchicha, sausage. El salchichon big sausage. La raorcilla, blood pudding. longanizaj El pastel, caldo, long sausage, pasty, broth. La sopa, El potage, Las papas, piiches, El pisto, soup. pottage. ^ any sort \ 0/ pap, jelly-broths. La carne fiambre, cold meat, leche, rnilk, nata, cream. El suero, ichey. La raanteca, butter. El queso, cheese, queso fresco, new cheese. curds, rennet. El huevo empollado, egg with a chicken in it, Los huevos de pescado,^ the spawn of fsh. huevos megidos, yoiks oj eggs stewed with wine and sugar. huevos y torreznos, col- lops and eggs. huevos revueltos, butter- ed eggs. La tortilla de huevos. omelet. Los huevos de yolks of eggs^ fahriquera, in shells of sugar. huevos hilados, siceet e^gs spun out. El sazonamiento, seasoning. La salmuera, Las especias. requesoD, cuajo, La cuajada, El huevo. La yema de huevo, milk hardened with rennet, the egg. the yolk of an egg. clara de huevo, the white of an egg. El huevo blando, soft egg. huevo duro, hard egg. huevo fresco. new egg, huevo en cascara, egg in the shell. huevo cocido, boiled egg. huevo asado, roasted egg. huevo estrellado, fried eorg. huevo huero, addle egg. 23* La piniienta, El gengibre, Los clavillos, La canela, Duez moscada, flor de especia, mostaza, El agraz, vinagre, aceite. La sal. El azucar. Los escabeches. dulces, almibares, alraibar, contites, Las conservas, mermelada. bridle, spices, pepper, ginarer. cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, mace, mustard, verjuice, vinegar, oil. salt, sugar, pickles, sweetmeats, conserves, sugar boiled, comfits, conserves, marmalade. perada, pears preserved. 270 VOCABULARY. Las alcorcillaSj ^ aniseed pastillas, ^ sugar. La naranjadaj candied oranges. El turron, sweetmeat, Los barquillos 6 las suplica- ciones, sweet wafers, bunuelos, PHffs. La bebida, drink. El vinoj wine, vino puro, |??/re wine, vino vueltOj pricked wine, vino moscatelj muscatel! ivine, vino tinto, re^ z^^me. vino bianco, 2^?/iz*ife wine, vino aloque, pale wine, vino clarete, claret loine, vino dulce y 5?^ee^ aw^/ picante, s7iar/9 wine, vino anejo, oW z^^me. vino ligero, light wine, vinazo, strong loine, malvasia, malmsey, agua pioj mixture of must and water. La hez del vino, wine lees. El aguardiente, hrandy. La cerveza, beer, sidra, cidrr, aloja, mead^ methegUn, El chocolate, chocolate. te, J^ecz. La limonada, lemonade. mistela, anise brandy. scarlet. El pafio tinidido, shorn cloth La grana escarlata, raja, El sayal, La frisa, estamefia, estofa, tafetan. El cafe, coffee. Of Clothes, — De los vestidos. rash clothe sackcloth. frieze, serge, stiff: taffety. satin, velvet, damask, brocade. grogram, gauze, drugget, crape, camblet. El pano, pano fino cloth. , fne cloth. El raso, raso liso, tercio pelo, damasco, brocado, gorgoran. La gasa, Las lanillas, El cendal, camelote, La tela de oro, cloth of gold, shag, cotton, fustian, muslin, flax, linen, cambrick. holland. French linen, hemp, ticken, calico, felt, canvass, sailcloth, baize, wool, worsted, silk, buckram, ajeivel, a buckle, loops on coats. El tripe, algodon, fustan. La muselina, El lino, lienzo, cambray. La holanda, El ruan, canamo, terliz, calicut, fieltro, angeo, La lona, bay eta, lana. El estambre, La seda. El bocaci, Una joya. hebilla, Los alamares, VOCABULARY. 271 Un ojal, a biiiton-kole. I^a bordadura, embroidery Un botoD, Una franja, Un flueque. a button, a fringe, lace. Las puutasj > Los encageS; ^ Una cinta, a ribbon, Un listottj a broad ribbon, pasamano, gold or sil- ver lace, ribete, an edging, sombrero, a hat. La copa del sombrero, the crown of the hat, ala 6 falda del sombrero, the brim of the hat. El torzal 6 la trencilla, the hat'band. £1 plumage, feathers, Un bonete, a cap, gorro de noche, a night- cap, Una gorra, an old fash- ioned cap, caperuza, a sot^t of cap, montera, a hunting cap, camisa, a shirt, almilla, chupa, a waist- coat, Los calzoncillos, drawers, Un jubon, a doublet, Una manga, a sleeve, manga perdida, a hang- ing sleeve. Las faldillas de jubon, the skirts of a waistcoat, Los calzones, breeches, Una balona, a band, a neckcloth. Una agujeta, faltriquera, Un bolsillo, Las medias, ligas, Los zapatos, escarpines. Las chinelas, Un borcegui, Las botas, polainas, espuelas, Los punos. Las vueltas, Los vueltos, Un tahali, Unos tiros, Una espada, daga, capa, casaca, Un guante, cenidor, L^na peluca, Un peluquin, panuelo, a point, a pocket, a purse, stockings, garters^ shoes, socks, slippers, a buskin. boots, spatterdashes, sjna^s, ' cuffs or ruffles, a shoulder-belt, a icaist-belt, a siDord, a dagger, a cloak. a coat. a glove. a girdle, a round icig, a bag icig. a pocket hand- kerchief, Una ropa, 1 Un ropon, > a gown, Una bRta, j ropa de levantar, ct morning gown. Un pellico, ^ a shepherd^s Una zamarra, \ jerkin. For women, — Para mugeres. Un corbatin, cuello, coleto. a collar, a buff coat. Vn tocado, Una cofia, escofia, Un manto, a head dress, a cap, a veil 272 VOCABULARY. Una saya, ^ basquina, ^ Un guardapiesj Unas enaguaSj Un avantal, } devantalj ^ guardasolj quita sol, reloj, Unas tablillas, Un espejo, a Uiia bugeta, Un manguito, Una cotilla, camisa, mantilla^ bata, Un chapin, Unos zarcillosj a hIacJc goivn or petticoat, ') an upper 5 petticoat, an apron, a parasol, an umbrella, a watch, tables, looking-glass, a little box, a muff, stays, a shift, a mantle, a gown, a clog. Unos pendientes, La gargantilla, Unas manillas, \ Unos braceleteSj [ Unas sortijas, ^ Unos anillos, ^ Las pedrerias, Un abanico, pendants, necMace. bracelets. rings, 'precious stones. a fan. Las calcetas, thread stockings. El peinador, coi/ibing cloth. Los pafiales, Una faja, Los juguetesj Una cuna, swaddling clouts, a roller, play-things, a cradle. ama de leche. I^os diges, a wet nurse, toys. [The beasts, fowls, fishes, fruits, herbs, roots, Sfc, that are eatable, will be found under their respective names. — Los animales, aves, peces, frutas, yerbas, raices.&c. comes- tibles, se hallaran debajo de sas nombres respectivos.] Beasts, — Bestias. Un corderico, a lambkin. burro, 1 Una bestia mansa, a tame borrico, > an ass. beast. asno, } bestia feroz, a wild Una burra,borrica, a she ass. beast. Un puerco, > a hog. El ganado, cattle. marrano, ^ ganado mayor, large lecbon, a pig. cattle. javali, a wild boar. Un toro, a bull. Una haca, 1 haquilla, \ a pony^ a ternero 6 becerro, a calf. colt. Una ternera, a heifer. Un b'-falo, a buffalo. Un buey, an ox. Una yegua. a mare. carnero, a sheep. yegiiecilla, a young mare. Una oveja, a ewe. Un caballo. a horse. Un cordero, a lamb. camello, a camet VOCABULARY. 273 Un gato, a cat. garanon^ a stallion, caballo castrado, a geld- ing. caballo entero, a stone- horse > caballo corredoFj a race- horse. caballo de mano, a led horse. caballo de posta^ a post horse. . caballo de alquiler, a hack- ney horse. caballo rebelde, a restive horse. caballo desbocado, a hard- mouthed horse. caballo medroso, a start- ing horse. caballo tropezador, a stum- bling horse. caballo que sacude, a jolt- ing horse. caballo asmatico, a bro- ken winded horse. caballo indomito, a horse that cannot be tamed. caballo saltador, a leaping horse. caballo bayo, a bay horse. baj o castano, a chesnut bay. bayooscuro, abrownbay. bayo dorado, a bright bay. picazo, a pyed horse. rucio rodadoj a dapple grey. de color de ga- cream- muza, colour. alazan. a sorrel. Un alazan tostado, a dark sorrel. overOj a white and red spotted horse. rubican, a grey horse. Una cabra, a she goat. Un cabrito, a kid. cabron, a he goat. perro, a dog. perro de caza, a hound. perro de muestra, a set- ting dog, sabueso, a blood hound. podenco, ^ a setting perdiguero, ^ ^^^* perro callado, a hound that does not open well. perro bajo, a terrier. galgo, a greyhound. lebrel, a sort of fierce dogs^ resembling grey hounds y common in Ireland. perro ventor, a finder. perro de agua, a water- or lamedillo, dog. mastin, a mastij^, perro de a shepherd^ s pastor, dog. perro velador, a house dog. perrillo de falda, a lap- dog. alano 6 dogo, a bull-dog. barbudillo, a spaniel. perro raposero, or jateo, small setting dog for fox hunting. gozque, 1 little dog kept gosqiiejo, ^ in a house. conejo, a rahbit. Una hacanea, a pad. Un muleto, a young mule. 274 VOCABULARY. Uii mulo, a he-mule. Una mula, a she-mule, Un potrOj a colt. pollino, an ass^s colt. ciervo, a stag. venado, a deer. gamo, a fallow deer. cachorro de ciervo, a fawn. Las astas de ciervo, the horns of a deer. El rastro 6 las pisadas de ci- ervo, the track of a stag. Una comadreja, a weasel. Un tejon, a badger. Unagamuza, a wild goat. cabra montes, a roebuck. Un gato de algalia, a civet-cat. Una dama, a doe. ardilla, a squirrel. Un elefante, an elephant. Una fuina 6 gardona, a martin. Un mono, a monkey. glrnio, an ape. arminio 6 armino, an er mine. erizo, a hedge-hog. Una liebre, a hare. liebrecilla, a leveret. Un liron, a dormouse. Una rata, a rat. zorra 6 raposa, a fox. Un raton, a mouse. topo, a mole. Una hiena, a hyena. Un leopardoj a leopard. leon, a lion. Una leona, a lioness. Un leoncillo, a lion's whelp. lobo, a wolf. lobo cervalj a lynx. ©so, a bear. Un osillo, a bear's cub. Una pantera, a panther. Un rinoceronte, a rhinoceros. tigre, a tiger. j avail, puerco a wild montes, boar. Las navajas 6 los colmillosde j avail, the tusks of a wild boar. El navajal de j avail, the soil of a/wild boar. La jabalina, a wild sow. Creatures that creep on the earth. — Animales que se arrastran. Una serpiente, a serpent. serpiente alada, a flying serpent. Un dragon, a dragon. 4spid, an asp. Una CLilebra, a snake. Un cocodrillo, a crocodile. caiman, an alligator. Una largartija, ^ salamanquesa, > a lizard. Un lagarto, j Una vibora, a viper. Un viborezno, a young viper. Amphibious creatures. — Ani- males anfibios. Un bivaro or castor, a bea- ver or castor. Una nutria, or nutra, an otter. Un hipopotamo, a river- horse. Uj;ja tortuga, a tortoise. VOCABULARY. 275 Un galapagOj a land tortoise, Una foca, sea calf. Insects, — Sabandijas. Una arafia, a spider, arafiuela, a little spider, carcoma, a wood worm, a caterpillar, a handivorm, a toad, a beetle, a snail, an anty a pis- mire, a frog, a cricket, an insect that spoils vines. a louse, a nit. aflea, a bug, a locust. Una mariposa, a butterfly, vaquilla de dios, a lady- bird, Un zancudoj a gnat, enjambre, a swarm. oruga, Un arador, sapo, escarabajo, caracol, Una hormigaj rana, Un grilloj revoltonj piojo, Una liendre, pulga, chinche, langosta, Un escorpion, alacran, Una tarantula, polilla, mosca, abispa, 1 Un abispon, \ Una abeja, Un moscon, Una moscada, Un z^nganOj a scorpion, a tarantula, a moth, afly, a wasp, a bee, a great fly, a drone, Una mosca de berro, gadfly, cigarra, a grasshopper. tabano, a hornet, lucerna or luciernaga, a fire-fly. Birds, — Aves. an eagle. an eaglet. Una aguilaj Un aguilucho, buitre, a vulture. esmerejon, a merlin, gavilan, a sparroic-hawk. mochueloj a horn-owl, halcon, a falcon, torzueloj a male falcon. girifalte, alcotan, sacre, Una garza, garzota, Un milano, a gerfalcon, a tanner, a sacre, a lpero7i. a small heron, a kite. Cuervo, a crow or raven, Una corneja, a rook, calandria, a lark. Un aguzanieve, a wagtail. canario, gilguero, Un mirlo ^ Una merla, > mirla, j Un pinzon, ruisenor, verderon, papagayo, lore, Una cotorra, urraca, Un grajo, Una lechuza, a canary bird, a linnet. a blackbird. a chaffinch, a nightingale, a green-bird, > a parrot, a magpie, a daw, an owl. 276 VOCABULARY. Un murcielago^ a hat. Uii mochuelo, liorn-owl. Una comaya, a night-raven, Un grajo, a chough, Una ohoXdiC^ihxdiS^a goat Slicker, Un 4nade, a wild duck, Una cerceta, Un chorllto, Cuervo marino, a teal, a curlieu, a cormo- rant, a duck, a goose. patOj ganso, ^ dnsar J > ^nsaro, ) cernicaloj a kestril, Una fulga, a moor-hen, Un avion, a martin, Una ^fabiota, a gvll, Un somorgujon, a diver. Una chocha, ') a loood- gallinaciegaj ^ cock, Un tordo, a thrush. estornino, a starling, Una codorniz, a quail. Un capon, a capon. gallo, a cock. Una gallina, a hen. Un polio, a chicken. Una polla, a pullet. uL^pTva, \ ^ ^"^^'^y- Un francolin, a godicit. faisan, a pheasant. zorzal, a thrush. hortolano, an ortolan. gorrion, a sparrow. Una perdiz, a partridge. Una paloma, a dove. Un pichon, a pigeon. palomino, a young pigeon. Una tortola, a turtle dove. Un alcion, a king-Jisher. Una golondrina, a swallow. Un avestruz, an ostrich. Una cigiiena, a stork. Un cuclillo, a cuckoo. cisne, a swan. petirojo, a red-robin, Una grulla, a crane, pezpita, a wagtail, Un abuillo, ^a lapwing, Una oropendola, a witwall, Un vencejo, a martlett, abejaruco, a titmouse. Una abutarda, a bustard. Un tor do loco, an owsel. pelicano, a pelican. fenix, a phenix. chirlo, a woodpecker, pico verde, a green beak, frailillo, a plover, reyezuelo, a wren. mergo, a puffin. Parts of a Bird. — Partes de una Ave. El pico, Una pluma. La pkimaza, ala. Las penolas, ^ the beak. a feather, the doivn. wing. . ^ quills. plumas, ^ ^ El pie, the foot. La cola, the tail. El buche, the craw. Las gar r as, ') claws ^ or tal- unas, ^ ons. La rabadilla, the rump. pecb^iga. the breast, entrepechuga, the brawn. VOCABULARY. 277 Fishes. — Feces. Un alburnoj sabaloj Una anchova, angiiila, ballena, Un barbo, mero, luso, Una carpa, Un calamarejo, a bleak, a shad. an anchovy* an eel, a whale, a barbel a halibut. a pike, a carp, a calamary. talpaire^ a miller^s thumb, caballo marinoj a sea' horse. congno, delfin, dorado, El doradillo, Un lenguado, Una langosta, Un esturion, gobio, harenque, Una ostra, ? Un ostion, ^ Una lamprea, langostilla, Un lobo, Una sard a, marsopa, Elabadejo, La merluza, El bacallao, Una almeja, ortiga pez, perca, Un pulpo, Una raya, liza, Una sardina, Un salmon, 24 a conger, a dolphin. a gilt-back, the gold-Jish. a sole. a lobster, a sturgeon. a gudgeon, a lierring, an oyster, a lamprey, a prawn, a bass, a maokarel. a porpoise. poor jack, fresh cod. dried cod, a muscle. a stinging fish. a perch. a polypus. n thornback. a skate. a vilchard. Una trucba, trout, gibia, cuttle-fish. tenca, a tench, Un atun, a tunny fish, L^na tremielga, a cramp fish, Un rodaballo, a turbot. Parts of a fi.sh,-- -Partes de un pez. El hocico, the snout. Las agallas, alas, escamas, the gills, the fins, the scales. espinas, La concha. the bones, the shell. Los huevos de pez , the hard row. La leche, the soft row. Trees. — Airholes. Un albaricoque, an apricot- tree, almendro, an almond-tree. durazno, a nectarine-tree. guindo, a cherry-tree. cerezo, a heart cherry- tree. castano, a chesnut-tree. cidro, a citron-tree. membrillero. serval, Una palma, higuera, Un azufeifo, gran ado, limon. moral, nispero, a quince- tree, a service-tree. a palm-tree, a fig-tree, ajujub'tree, a pomegranate- tree, a lemon-tree, a mulbei^ry-tree. a medlar-tree. salmon. avellano. a hazeJ-nut4ree. 278 VOCABULARY. > a peach-tree. Un nogal, a walnut-tree. .J > an olive-tree. aceituno, 3 acebuche, a loild olive- tree. naranjo, an orange-tree. alberchigOj persigOj cirueloj a plum-tree. peral, a pear-tree. manzano, an apple-tree. 41amo negro, hlack pop- lar-tree. dlamo bianco, white pop- lar-tree. a cedar-tree, an alder-tree. cedro, sabucQ, Una encina, Un roble, El cornizo, cipres, ebano, arce, La haya, El fresno, acebo, tejo, laurel, an oak-tree. the cornil-tree. the cypress-tree. the ebony-tree. the maple-tree. the btech-tree. the ash'tree. the holm-tree. the yew-tree. the laurel-tree. alcornoque, the cork-tree. olmo, the elm-tree. pi no, the pine or fir-tree. Un plantano, a plane-tree. sauce, a iclllow-tree. Una teja, a linden-tree. Shrubs. — Matas, El agno casto, agnus castus. aliso, the lote tree. bilsanio, the balsam. boj, the box-tree. La madre selva, the honey- stickle. La zarzamora, the black' berry bush. hiniesta, broom. uva espina, gooseberry- bush. adelfa. yedra, ii^y. El brusco, butcher^s broom. La regaliz, liquorice. El alhocigo, the pistachio- tree. romero, ^ rosemary. rosal, rose-tree. La sabina, savin. El tamariz, tamarisk-tree. La alheiia, privet. vifia, vine. labrusca, wild vine. Una parr? a wall vine. El mirto, arrayan, myrtle. Una pan a de corinto, currant- tree. Fruits. — Frutas. Un albericoque, an apricot. Una almendra, an almond. Un madrono, a wild straw- berry. a nectarine. a cherry. a heart-cherry. a chesnut. a citron. Un niembrillo, a quince. Una serba, service-apple. Un datil, date. higo, a fig. Una breva, early fig. azufaifa, ajujub. granada, apomegranate. Un limon, a lemon. Una mora, a mulberry. niezpola, a medlar. avellana. a hazel-nut. durazno, Una guinda, cereza, castaiia, cidra, VOCABULARV. 279 Vns. nuez, a walnut, aceituna, an olive, naranja, • an orange, ciniela, a plum, cirnela pasa. a prune, ^ pera, a pear, bergaiuota, ahergamot. manzana, an apple, camuesa. a pippin. maiizana de San Juan. Sf, John^s apple. Un melon, a melon. Una bellota, an acorn. algarroba, a carob, alcaparra, a caper, zarzamora. a hlackherrij, Un tamarindo, a tardarind, pinonj a kernel of pine- trees, Una uva, a grape. cascara de nuez, &:c, a shell of a nut, ^'c. tela de granada. film of a pomegranate. Un pimpollo, a sucker^ or sprout of a vine. sarmiento, a twig of a vine. La yema de vina, the hud of a vine. Los zarcillos de la vid, the tendrils of a vine. L'n pampano, a vine branch. renuevo, a young shoot of a vine. racimo de uvas, a bunch of grapes, Una pepita de la uva, a grape- stone, Podar, to prune a vine. Cavar, to lay open the roots, Rodrigar, to prop a vine. L! rodrigon, the prop. Terciar la viaa, to dig a third time about a vine. Rozar, to weed. Vna raiz, a root. Las bebras de raiz, the fibres of a root. arraigar. to take root. El tronco. the trunk of a tree. L n renuevo. a spi'ig. La corteza del arbol, the bark. El zumo. the sap. moho, the moss. ramo, the branch. Una hoja, a leaf El hueso de fruta. the stone of fruit. Las moiidaduras de fi'uta, the parings of fruit. El pezon, tJie stalk. ingerir, to ingraft. ingerir de canuto, to inoc- ulate, Vn ingerto, a ^raft. La pepita, the seed of fruit. Corn and its parts, — Trigos y sus partes. El trigo, reheat. El candial. the best wheat. trigo rubion, red wheat. La escandia, bearded wheat. El lierren, 2nesim. La espelta, spelt. El centeno, rye. La cebada, barley, a vena, oats. El arroz, rice. mijo, millet. maiz, Indian corn. Las legumbres, puke. Un alverjon, a great vetch. Los garbanzos, Spanish peas» 280 VOCABULARY. Las judias Los guisantes, Una haba^ leiiteja, Un altramuz, Un frijol^ Las cicerchaSj La c^scara. El hollejo. kidnei/'beans. peas, a horse bean, a lentiL a lujpine. French bean, loild tares, the shell, the husk. RootSy plants, and herbs, — Raices, plantas; e yerbas. El agenjo, apio, eneldoj anls, La alegria, ivonmvood, celery, garlic k, dill. aniseed, sesame. Los armuelles, orach or gold- en flowers, L^na alcachofa, an artichoke, Un esp^rrago, asparagus. El abrotano, southernwood. La acelga, white beet, Un bledo, a blite. La borraja, borage. Las zanahorias, carrots. La voleza^ ') El periRjjio, ^ Un bongo, ? Una seta, ^ chirivia, chicoria, ^ endivia, > escarola, j col, berza, Un repollo, round head cab- bage. Una berza crespa, a savoy. Un broton, a sprout, Una coliflor, a cauliflower. calabaza, a pumpkin. Un pepino, a cucumber. chervil. a mushroo7n. a parsnip, succory, endive. a cabbage. Un culantro, coriander. culantrillo, capillaire. peregil marino, samphire. mQ.sinerzo, garden cresses. Una escalona, a scallion. espinaca, spindle. Un hinojo, fennel. hoblon, hops, Una lechuga murciana 6 cer- raja, a cabbage-lettuce, lechuga cresj^a, a curled lettuce. a turnip. a turnip field. an onion, sorrel. long sorrel. parsley. a leek. pwslain. rampions. rocket. rue. sage. Un nabo, nabal, Una cebolla, acetosa, ^ acedera, ^ romaza, El peregil, Un puerro, Una verdolaga, Unos ruiponces, Una roqueta, ruda, salvia, criadilla de tierra, a truflle. mejorana, siceet marjo- ram. Un agarico, agarick. Una agrimonia, agrimony. El acihar, juice from the aloes. La angelica, angelica. celidonia, celandine. betonica, betony. bistorta, snakewort. manzanilla, camomile. El culantrillo de pozo, 7naid- en hair. La centinodia, verbasca, ^ El gordolobo, 5 centinody. wolf blade, or great lung wort. VOCABULARY. 281 La amapola, poppi/. El dictarao, dittany. La coniza pulguera, fleabane. El eleboro, hellebore, tartago, spurge. La geociana, gentian. El camedrio de agua, ger- mander. La grama, dog's grass, yer ba puntera, house-leek. El belenoj hen bane, marubio, horehound. La matricariaj feverfew. Las malvas, mallows. La corona de rey, melilot. El torongil, mercurial. Las milhojasj Un ciento en rama, El corazoncillo. balm, mercury, > milfoil, St, John^s nardo, tabaco, o re Of an o, La hio worty or grass, spikenard, tobacco, zmld marjoram, fig-tree. parietaria, y 77., ^. 1 . , ' >. 'Delator 11, viariola, S cepa caballo, 1 ground una de asno^, ^ thistle, dormidera, P^PPV' rosa montesj peony. El platano, plantain, polipodioj polypody, T ^ ""n' r- bishopswort. La neguilla, ^ ^ verba cidrera, briony. El poleo, pennyroyal. La sanguinariaj bloodwort, sanicula, sanicle. El satirion, ragwort. La saxifraga, saxifrage. La escabiosa, scabivorf, escamonea, scammony, cebolla albarrana, ir?7d' sena, senna. yerba cana, groundseL Valeriana^ valerian, verbena, vervain. El lianten, grass plantain. anco, 6 siete en rama. sept- ' foil acanto, ^ La blanca urcina, > bearsfoot. yerba giganta, j El aconito, wolfsbane. Las ovas del mar, sea-weed. La cola de caballo, horse-tail. El espliesfo, } , , r 11 r- lavender. La alhucema, ^ El amor del bortelano, ? bur- Los lampazos; dock. Las rabacas, water-parsley. El tamarizsilvestre, tamarisk shrub. asarabacara, calaminto, La caiia, doiiadilla, El canamo, lino, La cicuta. El comino, asarabacca. cat-mint. a reed. muWsfern, hemp. fax, hemlock. cummin. La yerba de ciervo, fodder. El helecho, fern. La palomilla, fumitory Los amores secos, El trebol, ^ El yesgo, danewort, junco^ clover grass, dwarf elder. rush. 24# 282 VOCABULARY. La cerraja, mandragora, yerba moraj correhoelaj ortiga. El ruibarboj La velesa. El alazor, ~) soW'thistle, mandrake, nightshade. knot-grass, nettle, rhubarb, peppenvort, dit- tander. Colours, — Colores. Adjectives agree with Substantives, Morado, purple. Un color de aurora, aurora-- colour. saffron, azatrarij J^ -^ La jabonera, soap-wort, alfalfa, darnel^ or cockle. La albahaca, siveet basil, yerba buena, mint. El serpol, wild thyme, tomilloj thyme. Blanco, La rosa, white. Color de ladrillo, brick-colour. Azul, Azul cefeste, Azul turqui, Columbino, CetirOj Flowers, — Flores. El amaranto, velvet-flower. La anemone, anemone. El Jacinto, hyacinth. jazmin, jessamine. La jonquillaj jonquil, azucena, the lily, maya, the daisy. El narciso, daffodil, clavel, la clavellina, the pink, aleli, gilliflower. La espadafia, flag-flower, campanula, blue-bottle. Vellorita, the cowslip. El ranunculo, ranunculus. blue. light blue, dark blue, dove colour, lemon colour. Color gamuza, light yellow. Color de cereza, jilemot. Color encendido,^a/?jecoZo?^r Color de fuego, fire colour. Carmesi, crimson. Pardo, Ceniciento, grey, ash colour. Amarillo, Encarnado, ^ yellow. Colorado, > red. Rojo, ) Escarlata, Grana, scarlet. Leonado, Negro, Anaranjado, Aceitunado, tawny. black, orange colour. olive colour. Color de rosa, rose colour. Bermejon, reddish. Verde, green. El matiz de colores, the shade of colours. Color de mar, the rose. sea green. cien hojas, the hundred leaf rose, taravilla, marigold. El girasol, sun-flower, tulipan, the tulip. La violeta, the violet. Farts of a kingdom. — Partes de un reyno. Una provincia, a province. ciudad, a city, villa, a town, aldea, a village. Un capullo, a rose-bud, Un lugar, a small place, •VOCABULARY. 283 Parts of a city. — Partes de una ciudad. Una casa, tienda, iglesia, capilla, Un altar palacio, hospital, a house. a shop, a church a chapel, an altar, a palace, an hospital. La casa de la villa, or del a- yuntamientOj the town house. Un tribunal, a court of justice arsenal, an arsenal. Una academia, an academy. Un colegio, a college. Una calle, a street. Un callejon, an alley. Una calleja, callejuela, a lane. Un mercado, a market. Una carniceria, a slaughter- house. encrucijada, a cross way. lonja,bolsa, an exchange carcel, a prison. Los muros, las murallas, walls puertas, gates. fortificaciones, fortifica- tions. Una plaza, a square. ptazuela, a little square. Of the inhabitants of cities. De los moradores de una ciudad. Un nino, muchacho, Una muchacha, Un mozo, mocito, hombre. Un manco, lame of one hand. ciego, blind. sordo, deaf. zurdo, left-handed. magistrado, a magistrate. noble, ) J J , . . T > a nobleman. hidalgo, S cabaliero, knight^ or gen- tleman. tendero. a shopkeeper. mercader, a trader. comerciante, } a mer- negociante, ^ chant. El poblacho. vulgacho, La plebe, canalla, Un artesano, mecanico. Una muger, Un viejo, Una vieja, Un cojo, the populace, the mob. the rabble. a tradesman. a mechanic. jornalero, a journeyman. labrador, a farmer. Una labradora, a farmer^ s wife J or daughter. Un aldeano, a countryman. Una aldeana, a countrywoman Un picaro, esclavo, platero, librero, impresor, barbero. a league. a slave. a goldsmith. a bookseller. a printer. a barber. a child. a boy. a girl. a youth. a tnan. a woman. an old man. an old woman. lame of one leg. mercader de seda, a mer- cer. mercader de lienzo, a lin- en-draper. mercader de pano, a wool- len draper. sastre, a tailor. Una costurera, a seamstress, a mantua-maker. Un sombrerero, a hatter. calcetero, a hosier. zapatero, a shoemaker. 284 VOCABULARY. a midwife. Un remendon^ a cohler. herrero, a blacksmith, albeitar, a farrier. • cerrajero, a smith. Una lavandera, a laundress, comadre, partera, Un partero, a man-midwife, medicoj a jjhysician, embustero, a cheat, charlatan, a quack, eirujano, a surgeon, saca muelas, a dentist, silleroj carpintero, peon, albanil, pintor, panadero, carnicero, frutero, a saddler, a carpenter, a labourer, a bricklayer, a painter, a baker, abutcher, a fruiterer. Un ganapan, ^ esportillero, > aporter. mandadero, ) remendon de vestidos, a botcher, tatarabuelo, a grandfa- ther's grandfather. bisabuelo, great grand- father, a grandfather, a father. abuelo, padre, Una madre, Un hijo, Una hija, Un nieto, Una verdulera, an herb ivoman Un pastelero, a pastry cook, tabernero, a vintner, cervecero, a brewer. mesonero, an innkeeper. relogero, a watchmaker. pregonero, a crier. joyero, a jeweller. boticario, an apothecary. buhonero, a pedlar. vidriero, a glazier, carbonero, a collier, Jardinero, a gardener, letrado, a lawyer, procurador, a solicitor ^ an attorney, abogado, a counsellor at law, juez, a judge, earcelero, a jailer, verdugo, a hangman. cerero, a tvax-chandler. a mother, a son. a daughter, a grandson. bisnieto, a great grandson hermano, a brother. cuuado, a brother in law. pad astro, a stepfather. Una madrastra, a stepmother. Un suegro, a father in law. Una nuera, a daughter in law Un yerno, a son in law. prinio hermano, a cousin- german. tio, an uncle. sobrino, a nephew, prime segundo, a second cousin, a husband, a wife, a bridegroom, a bride. marido, Una muger, Un novio, Una novia, Un desposado, one betrothed. ahijado, padrino, Una madrina, Un compadre, 1 Una comadre, ^ Un companero, a godson. a godfather. a godmother, a father and mother inGod a partner. camarada, a companion, cofrade, a brother of the same pious society. VOCABULARY. 285 Un mellizo, a twin, Una cofradia, a guild, or so- ciety, tertulia, a society^ a dub. comunidadja community* Un huerfano, an orphan, soltero, a bachelor, heredero, an heir. ayo, a tutor. cur ad or, a guardian. Una viuda, a widow. Un herraano de leche, a fos- ter brother. hijo de lapiedra,esp6sito, 6 echadizo, a foundling. nino supuesto, a supposi- titious child, bastardo, a bastard. hijo natural, 6 de ganancia, a fiatural son. Una doncella, a maiden, muger casada, a mar- ried woman, pwri6?i, a lying-in woman ama de leche^a wet nurse. ama de Haves, a house- keeper. manceba, a concubine. Of a house, and all that be- longs to it. — De una casa, y todo lo perteneciente 4 ella. Una case, a house. Un solar, aground of a house. cimiento, a foundation. Una pared, a wall, Un tabique, a light wall. patio, a court, or yard. La fachada, the front. Un alto,andar,a story or floor. portal, a porch. Una ventana, a icindow. Un entresuelo, a low floor. zaquizami, or cielo, a del- ing ; also the place be- tween the ceiling and the roof of a house ; a cockloft. desvan, a garrets arteson, an arched ceiling. a vault. a stair case. a step, a roof tiles, bricks, slates, the door. > a passage, a court-yard, a back yard. a chamber. a room^ a chamber. Una boveda, escalera, Un escalon, tejado. Las tejas, Los ladrillos Las pizarras, La puerta, Un pasadizo, corral, trascorral, Una cimara, Un aposento, 7 Una pieza, Un cuarto, | Una estancia, ) antic^mara, an anficham- ber. trascuadra, a backroom. sala, a hall. Un corredor, a gallery. retrete, a closet. estudio, a study, armario, ') i j TT 1, ' S> a cupboard. Una alhacena, 5 ^ Un guarda ropa, a wardrobe. Una alcova, an alcove. Un balcon, mirador, a balcony Una azotea, the flat roof of a house, a terrace. Un caraaranchonj a cockloft. L^na torre, a tower. bodega, un sotano, a cel- lar.. 286 VOCABULARY. Una reposteria, a builef^^s room, despeasa^ a pantry, cocina, a kitchen, caballeriza, a stable, perreria, a dog kt nnel, Uii palomar^ a dove-house, gallinero, a hen roost, jardiD, a garden, parque, a park. La privada, necesaria, the prwy, coronilla del edificio, the top of the building. El ripio, rubbish, Una ripia, a shingle. El ala de tejado, the eaves of the roof La canal, the gutter. El umbral, the threshold. Los bastidores de la puerta, the frame of the door. El postigo, the side door, Los quicios 6 goznes, hinges, Una cerradura, a lock. Un candadoj a padlock. El pestilloj the bolt of a lock, Un cerrojo, a bolt, Una Have, a key, ventanilla, a little win- doic, aldaba, a latch. La tranca de una puerta, the bar of a door. Las guardas de la llavcj the wards of a lock. El cafiuto de una Have, the pipe of a key. La vidriera, the glass of a loindow. Las rejas de una ventana, the bars of a ivindoio. Una escalera de caracol, a winding stair case. Los rellanoSj 6 las mesetas de escalera, the landing- places of stairs. El descanso de una escalera, the resting place of stairs. Una grada,un escalon, a step. escalera secreta, back- stairs, ^ a beam, a girder^ or main beam, Una tabla, a board. Un crucero, a rafter. ladrillo, a brick. La pared maestra, the main wall. pared de en medio, the party wall. Una pared de cal y canto, a wall of lime and stone, Un tabique, a partition tvall. yiga, Un vigon, La cal, lime, or plaster. argamasa, mortar. encostradura de una pared, the plaster of a zoall. El yeso, fine white lime, jalbegue, white wash. Una mesa, a table, Un banco, a bench, Una silla, a chair. silla de brazos, a?i arm chair, Un taburete, a chair without back or arms to it. sitial, a stool. banquillo, a bench. Una caja, a box. area, un arcon, a chest, Un cajon, a case of drawers, tirador, a drawer. VOCABULARY. 287 Un escritorio, a scrutoire, Una Ccanaj a bed, Un Ifccho, a couch* Un^ arni'idura or un made- raj e de caraa, a bed-stead* El cielo de cama, the bed's teste?'. Las cortinas de cama, the bed- curtains. El roda pies. the fringe of a bed. Un tapete^ una alfombraj a carpet. Las sabauas, the sheets. El cobertor, counterpane. Las almohadaS; pillows. La tapiceria, tapestry. Una pintura, a picture. Un espejo, a loohing-glass. candelero, a candlestick. Las despabiladeras, snuffers. Vim arana, a branch of crys- tal to hold many candles. La yesca, tinder. L'na pajuela, a match. Un pedernal^ a flint. eslabon, the steel to strike fire icith. Una chimeneaj a chimney, Un respii'adero, 6 canon de rinal, a chamber-pot. chimenea, Los morillos, El fuelle, Las tenazaSj colchon, a mattress. Una colcha, a quilt or cov- erlet, Un catre, a cot. Una cama de viento, afield bed. La testera de cama, the bed's head. Las columnas de cama, the bed posts. Un gergon, a straw-bed, Una estera, a ?nat„ Un calentador de cama, a warming-pan. the flue of a chimney, the andirons, the bellows, the tons^s. Unapala orun badil, a shovel. Un guardaluego, a fender, biombo, askreen. urgador, atizador , a poker, Una olla, a porridge-pot, cobertera, a pot-lid. El asa, the ear of a pot, Un puchero, a pipkin, cu char on J a ladle, L'na caldera, a kettle, Un escalfador. ') a chaflng braserillo, ^ dish. Las trebedes, a trevet, L'n horuilloj a cooking-stove, homo, an oven, Una sarten, a frying pan. Un cazo. a sauce pan. Una cazuela, a littlepan, espumadera, a skimmer^ Las parrillas, a gridiron, Un coladero, a sieve. rallo, a grater, Una mechera, a larding pin, Un asador, a spit, L^na aceitera, alcuza, an oil- pot, vinagera, a cruet, Un almirez.mortero, a ?nortar, Una mano de mortero, a pes- tle, redoraa, a vial, Vn sumidero, a sink, cantaro^ a pitcher, bachi, a close-stool pari. Una albornia, a great earth- en pan. 288 VOCABULARY. Una herrada, ? a huchet or Un cubo, 3 pail. Una Cuba, a tub. La legia, colada, lye. Eljabon, soap. La levadura, leaven. Una rod ilia, a coarse cloth. Un estropajo, a disJiclout. La pala del horno, the peel of the oven. harina, El salvado, Una artesa, Los man teles, Una servilleta, Un aguainanil, meal, flour. bran. a tray. table clotlis. a napkin. a water-jug. Una almof ia, an earthen jug. toalla, Los platos, Un cuchillo, tenedor, salero, plato grande, a towel. the plates, a knife, afork, a salt-cellar. a dish. Una escudilla, a porringer, cuchara, a spoon. Un tajador, a chopping block, jarro, a mug. Una taza, a cup. salvilla, a salver. Un fiasco, a flask. Una botella, a bottle. Un vaso de vidrio, a tumbler. Una fuente, un gran plato, a basin. Un monda dientes, > a tooth escarba dientes, ^ pick, mayordomo, a steward. trinchante, a carver, secretario, a secretary. camarero, a chamberlain. dispensero, a purveyor. capellan,. a chaplain. limosneroj an almoner. Un page, a page. lacayo, afootman. cochero, a coachman, mozo de caballos, a groom. caballerizo, a gentleman of the horse. copero, a cup-bearer. maestre sala, a sewer. bodeguero, , repostero, ' a butler. halconero, cocinero, galopin, portero, El huesped, amo de casa, ' a falconer. a cook. a scullion. a porter* the host or landlord. Of country affairs. — De las cosas del campo. Una alqueria or quinta, a country house or farm house. Un quinteroj a farmer. ^y^^o, ' a cow-keeper. vaquero, ^ porquero, pastor, zurron, cayado, Una honda, Un hortelano, jardinero, cavador. a swine-herd. a shepherd. a scrip. a shepherd^s crook. a sling. a gardener, a digger, vifiadero, a vine dresser. arado, a plough. Una azada, ? ^ ^^^ 7 J J 1 ' >- a spade, Un azadon, ^ ^ labrador, a husbandman, Una esteva, ? a plough mancera, ^ handle. reja de arado, a plough share. El rastrillo, the harrow. VOCABULARY. 289 Un sembrador, a soicer. escardadorj a weeder, rozador, a weeding hook, segador, a reaper, Una guadafia, a sithe, Un trillo, a jlail, Una horca^ a fork, Un bieldo, a winnowing fan, pescador, a fisherman, Una red barredera,a drag-net, Una vara, eana para pescar, a fishing rod, Un sedal de caiia, a fishing' line. anzuelo, cazador, cebo, La liea, Una jaula, Un obrero, 1 jornalero, \ afish-hook, a huntsman, a bait, bird lime, a cage, a day'ia- bourer. asneroj a keeper of asses, paisano, a countryman, campoj afield, Una tierra entre dos surcos^ a ridge, Un surco, a furrow. El trigo en yerba, green corn. La tierra inculta, landuntilled, Un montCj > a mount^ a Una montafia, \ mountain, Un cXdo; \ « '^•«^'' ^'^^' cerro, a rising ground. valle, abisrao, Una zanja, laguna, Un pantano, Una Uanura, a valley, an abyss, a ditch, a lake, a marsh, a plain. pena, roca, Un pefiasco, 25 a rock, a great rock. Un despenadero, a precipice^ Una selva, a forest, Un bosque, a wood. Una esplanada, esplanade^ mata, a bush. zarza, a bramble, espina, a thorn. Un prado, a meadow, vergel, afiower garden. Una huerta, an orchard. Un jardin, a garden. Uua era en un jardin, a bed in a garden. glorieta, a bower. almaciga, a seed plot. bobeda de parras, a vine arbour. Un laberinto, a labyrinth, Una gruta, a grotto. cascada, a cascade. fuente, a fountain. Un chorro de agua, a water^ spout. El pilon de una fuente, the vase of a fountain. Una encanada, ) an aque- Un acueducto, ^ duct. La hortaliza, all sorts of herbage. Una planta, a plant. El camino real, the highway, Una senda, vereda, a path. pisada, un rastro, a track. cabalgadura, a saddle beast. Un carromato, a waggon, carro, a cart. Una rueda, a wheel. EI rayo de una rueda, the spoke of a 2vh eel. Las llantas, ) the felloes of cambas, 5 cl wheel. 290 VOCABULARY. El cubo de una rueda^ the nave of a wheel, egOy the axle-tree. La estaca, the pin of a wheel. Una calesa, litera^ Las andas, Un coche, ^ Una carroza, ^ Una cesta, rastra, narria, canasta, a chaise, a litter, the shafts. a coach. a basket. a sledge. a basket. espuerta, a dirt-basket. Un chirrion, a dung-cart. Una banasta, a great hamper. alforja, a wallet. bolsa, a purse. Un costal, saco. a sack. Unamaleta, a portmanteau. Un talego, a bag. Una valijaj a cloak bag. Un zurron^ abudget or pouch. Of the Churchy and things belonging to it. — De la Iglesia, y cosas pertene- cientes ^ ella. La nave, the El cimborio, La cupula, El pinaculo, com, La capilla, Un atril. La sacristia. El campanario, Una campana. El badajo, ') La lengiieta, 5 pila, El hisopo, , aisle of the church. the dome. the pinnacle. the choir. the chapel. a desk. the vestry. the belfry. a bell. the clapper of the bell. the font. the sprinkler. El confesionario, Una tribuna, El cimenterio, the confes-- sion-box. a tribune or gallery, the church- yard. osario, the charnel. Un altar, an altar. frontal, an antipendium, ornato, an ornament. El tabernaculo, > the tab.er^ sagrario, ^ nacle. Un palio, a canopy. El mantel del altar, the altar- cloth. Un misal, a mass-book. Una sotana, a cassock. sobrepelliz, a surplice. Uh roquete, a short surplice. bonete, a cap. Una mitra, a mitre. Un b^culo, a crosier. patriarca, a patriarch. arzobispo, an archbishop. obispo, a bishop. obispado, a bishoprick, Una diocesis, a diocese. Un coadjutor, coadjutor. sufraganeo, suffragan. sacerdote, a priest. El sacerdocio, priesthood, Un diacono, a deacon. subdiacono, a subdracon. acolito, one that serves the priest at the altar lector, clerigo, prelado, abad, Una abadesa, abadia, Un canonigo, dean, a reader. a clergyman^ a prelate. an abbot. an abbess. an abbey. a canon. a dean. VOCABULARY. 291 IJn prevoste, a provost, arcediano, anarchdeacon, chtintre, a precentor. maestro de coro, a mas^ ter of the choir. cantor, a singer. sacristan, a vestry keeper. prebendadoj a preben cura, Una parroquia, Un vicario, oficial, promotor^ Una encomienda^ dary. a parson. a parish. a vicar. an official. a promoter. a thing given in commendam El bautismo, baptism. La confirmacion^ confirma- tion. El matrimonio, matrimony. Comulgar, to receive the sacrament. Los ordenes sacros, holy or- ders. Una ceremonia, a ceremony. La rijbrica, the ruhinc. El ritual, the ritual. oficio divinOj divine ser- salterio, Un salmo, La antifona^ Unalecion, Un versete, sermon, La meditacion, oracion vocal, vice, the psalter. a psalm. antiphon. a lesson. a verse. a sermon. meditation. vocal prayer. mental oracion mental, prayer. to preach. to catechise. Enterrar, ^ Sepultar, ^ La escomunion, suspension, Un entredicho, La irregularidad Descomulgar, Una catedral, La conventual, Una parroquial. El advientOj La cuaresma, Las temporas, Una vigilia, Un ayuno, to bury. excommuni- cation, suspension, an interdict, ^irregularity, to excommu- nicate, a cathedral church, the church of a convent, a parish church, advent, lent, ember-weeks, an eve. . a fast. predicar, catequizar. Things relating to War. — Cosas pertenecientes a la guerra. La artilleria, artillery. Una pieza de artilleria, } a can- Un canon, J non. El tren de artilleria, the train of artillery. La boca de canon, the mouth of a cannon. El fogon, the touch-hole. La culata del canon, the breech of a gun. curena, ^ the carriage of Elafuste, ^ a gun. Cargar, to load. Apuntar, to level. Disparar, to fire, Un tiro de canon, a cannon- shot. 292 VOCABULARY. Desmontar un canon, to dis- mount a gun, Enclavar un canon, to spike a gun. Una culebrina, a culverin. Un falconete, a falconet, Un pedrero, a paterero, canon entero, a ivhole cannon. medio canon, ^a/fcawwo?z. petard o, a petard, Una bomba, a bomb. bombarda, a bomb-ketch. Un mortero, a mortar-piece. Una granada, a grenade. Un mosquete, a musket, Una carabina, a carabine. escopeta, a firelock. pistola, a pistol. balaj a bullet. La polvora, powder. Una mecha, a match, Un pedernal, a flint. Una flecha, an arrow, Un dardo, a dart. Una javalina, a boar-spear, honda, a sling, Un arco, a bow, Una hacha de armas, a battle- axe, lanza, a lance, alabarda, a halberd. partesana, a partisan. pica, apike. Un alfange, a scimetar. Una espada, a sivoj^d. El puno de la espada, the han- dle of a sword. porno de la— the pommel of. La guarnicion de \di-the hilt of hoja, the blade, Un puiial, a poniard, Una bayoneta, a bayonet. a helmet. Un yelmo, Una celada, daga, a dagger. Un niorrion, a morrion. La visera,fA6^ vizor of a helmet. El gorjal, la gola, the gorget. Un peto, a breast-plate. Una coraza, a cuirass. El espaldar, Un coselete, brazalete. the back-plate. a corslet. ^ armour for the arms. escarcelon, armour from the waist to the thighs, Unas hinojeras, armour for the knees. Un broquel, a buckler. escudo, a shield, Una adarga, a target. cota de malla, a coat of mail. Un general, • a general. teniente general, a lieu- tenant general. sargento mayor de batalla, a major general, maestro de campo, ) a col- coronel, ) onel, sargento mayor, a major. capitan, a captain, teniente, a lieutenant, corneta, a cornet, alferez, an ensign, sargento, a serjeant. cabo de escuadra, a cor- poral. cuadrillero, soldado, caudillo, tambor, pifano, Una trorapeta, Un atabal, a brigadier, a soldier, a chief a drum, ttfife, a trumpet, a kettle drum. VOCABULARY. 293 Un soldado de a caballo, a trooper, soldado de^ pie, > afoot infante, ^ soldier. granadero, a grenadier. dragon, a dragoon, piquero, a pike-man, mosquetero, a musqueteer, fusilero, afusileer. La infanteria, the infantry, caballeria, the cavalry. Los batidores, Las murallas, Los muros, Una almena, El parapeto, Un Castillo, fuerte, Una fortaleza. Un artillero, bombardero, a gunner, a bombard- ier, ingeniero, an engineer, minero, a miner, gastador, a pioneer, Una centinela, a centinel. La vanguardia, the vanguard. El cuerpo de batalla, the main body of the army. La retaguardia, the rear. El cuerpo de reserva, the corps de reserve. cuerpo de guardia, the corps de guard, ala, the icing of an army. Un batallon, a battalion, regiraiento, a regiment. Una companla de caballos, a troop of horse. companla de infanteria, a company of foot, hilera, a rank, fila, a file. Un escuadron, a squadron. mochilero, a soldier^s boy. bagage, a baggage. vivandero, a sutler. partido, a party. Los corredores, the forlorn hope, 25* discoverers. walls, a battlement, the parapet, a castle, a fort, a fortress. fortificacion, a fortifica- tion. torre, a tower. ciudadela, a citadel. Un bastion, a bastion, Una Cortina, a curtain. media luna,an half moon, tronera, loop hole. Un terraplen, a rampart. caballero, a cavalier. rebellin, a ravelin. La contra escarpa, counter scarp, a barrier, afausse braye, Un foso, a ditch. repecho, a breast-icork. Una garita, a centry-box. casamata, casemate. galeria, Una barrera, falsa braga, Un corredor, gallery. La estrada cubierta, the co- vert way. Un ceston, Una estaca, Un reducto, Una atalaya, a gabion. a palisade, a redoubt. a place to dis- cover, or the per- son who discovers, raanta, a mantlet or cover for men from the shot, fagina, a fascine, mina, a mine. 294 VOCABULARY. Una contra-mina^ a counter- mine, trinchera, a trench. El real, the camp. Las vitLiallas, provisions, municiones, ammunition, Un bisono, a recruit, pecoreroj a marauder, Una contra marcha, a coun- ter-march, escaramuza, a skirmish, batalla, a battle. Un sitio, a siege, cuartelj quarter. Una encamisada, a camisado. salida, Batir, Una brecha, escalada, Un asalto, La llamada, capitulacion, a sally, to hatter. a breach, an escalade, an assault, the chamade, the capitu- lation, guarnicionj the garrison, Tocar la caja, to beat the drum, Levantar gentCj, to raise men. Pagar el sueldo^ > to pay the el pre, ^ soldiers, Batir la estrada, to scour the country, Levantar el sitio, to raise the siege, Marchar a banderas desple- gadaSj to mach with fly- ing colours, Reforzar el egercito, to rein- force the army, Tocar a recoger, to sound a retreat, Entregar una plaza, to sur- render a place. Commercial terms. — Voces mercantiles. Un abarcador, a monopoliser. monopolista,ri?2 engrosser. Abonar, to credit. El acarreo, porte, carriage, acarreto (hilo,) pack- thread. aceptar una letra, to ac- cept a bill. Una accion, a share^ stock. La accionde empujar, 6 tirar, hallage. Un acreedorjCre^ifor; acree- dor hipotecarioj mortga- gee ; el que da la hipoteca^ mortgager ; acreedor im- portuno, a dun ; valista, 6 acreedor por vale, cred- itor for a note or bilL La aduana, custom-house. Un ajuste, bargain ; ajuste de cuentas, a settlement, a la buelta, carried over. dXmdiCeDi ^storehouse J ware- house^ magazine. Una almoneda, sale by auc- tion. Alquilar, to hire. Una ancla de la esperanza, a sheet anchor. A.' quien su poder hubiere, to his or their assigns.^ Una arbitracion, sentencia de jueces arbitros, umpirage. Las arraSj 6 la dote, earnest money, Un arrendador, a farmer that hires. El arrendamiento, hiring^ fanning, Arrendar, to farm • Un arribo, an arrival VOCABULARY. Un aseguradoFj an insurer* Asegurar, to insure, Un asiento, an entry. La averia^ average, averia y capa, primage and hat money, Un balance, saldo, a balance, banco, hank, banquero, hanker, Barato, ^ cheap, Los bienes propios, real or personal property, bienes habidos y por ha- ber, goods had and to he \ had, Un calabrote, a short cable, cambio, exchange^ change, Negociar una letra de cam- bio, to negociate a bill of exchange, Un capital, caudal, stocky cap- ital, Cargar el temporal, to in- crease a heavy storm, Caro, dear, Una carta, cuenta, a bill, carta, letter ; el porte de cartas, postage ; portador, penny 'post man ; paquete de cartas, packet of letters, Cerrar una carta, to make up a letter ; sellar una carta, to seal a letter ; un sobre escrito de carta, direction, \judL maleta para cartas, mail, \jn caudal, a stock, caudal destinado, a fund. La caja^ cash ; un cajero, cashier^ cash-keeper ; dine- ro en caja, cash on hand. El libro de caja, cash-book, Un certificado, certificate, Certificar, to certify. Un ciento, cent : dos 6 tres, &c.por ciento, two or three. &c per cent. El cobrador, receiver ; co- brar, to receive ; cobracloi de sisa, exciseman ;— de de- rechos de muelle, wharfin" La comision, commission, Un campanero, partner, Vndi compaiiia, partnership, compra, purchase ; un com^Y?(doY ^buyer J purchas- er ; comprador, 6 vende- dor de acciones, stock- jobber, Un corapromiso, compromise. La comunicacion, intercourse. El conocimiento, bill of lad- ing. La consignacion,cows?^wmf ??f . El consumo, consumption, Contado (dinero de contado) ready money. El contenido, contents, Un contrabandista, smuggler. contrabando, contraband, IJns, contrata de fletamento, a charter party of f -eight. contribucion, an assess- ment or tribute. copia, a copy. Un corredor, or corredor de oreja, broker ;— de carabios, exchange-broker. El correo, the post office. La correspondencia, corres" pondence, Un correspondiente, a corres- jjondent, Corriente, current. La costumbre, custo7n. El credito, credit. 296 VOCABULARY. . La cuenta, hill^ account ; su- mar una cuenta, to cast up an account ; pedir cuenta, to call to an account ; pa- gar a cuenta, to pay a part of an account, Los danos, damages. La data 6 fecha, date, dar, 6 dejar a fletOj to let out a vessel on freight, Debajo de cubierla, under deck. El derecho, duty^ custom ; derechos de entrada, duties of importation ; dros. de estraccion, of exportation; dros. de muelle, wharfage ; cobrador de los dros. del muelle, wharfinger, Los derechos de embarque, loharfage. La descarga, unlading. El descuento, discount ; de- volucion de dros. de entra- da, drawback. Un desembolsoj disbursement, Desempaquetar, unstoicing, Despachar, to sellj send^ dispatch ; despachar un correo, to send an express ; despachar mercaderias, to sell goods ; despacho de ad nana, clearance ^ cocket ; despacho, expedition, De todo nos hacemos cargo, ive have taken due notice of all. La deuda, debt. El deudor, debtor. El diezmo, tenths tithe ; diez- mero, tithe gatherer. El dinero, money ; dinero con- tado 6 de contado, ready money ; dinero Cercenado, 6 cortadoj clipped money ; dinero en caja, cash ; dine- ro prestado, money lent. Un domicilio, adomicil, Una dote, dowry, a woman^s portion, Unas arras, a pledge. Los dros. municipales, town^s fees. Un duplicado, / duplicate. dueno, owner. Unos efectos, effects. Un envoltorio, 6 una harpil- lera, wrapper. empefio, pawn,, pledge. Encima de la barra, over the bar. Un endosador, an endorser, encargado de, agent for, endoso, endorsement. En testiraonio de verdad, in testimonium veritatis. La entrada, entry; drDS.de en- trada, duty of importation. El equivalente, equivalent. escasos de despacho, hea- vy articles, Escribir, to ivrite ; la escritu- ra, hand'tvriting, bond, en- gagement ; escritura de ar- rendamiento, hase ; un es- critorio, counting-house, Estrenar, to hansel. La exigencia, exigency. estraccion, exportation, Un estracto, extract, abridge- ment, estractor, extractor. La estorsion, extortion. Un factor, factor, Una factura, factoria, invoice^ factory. VOCABULARY. 297 La falta, faulty vmnt^ ei^ror, falla de pagarhentOj non- payment. Un fardoj a bale, fardo pequefio a truss, Una feria, ' a fair, Un fiador, surety^ hail, fiador hipotecario, morU gager, fiel jTfiedida 6 peso, stand- ard measure^ or ivtight, Unas fijaderas para papeles, Jilesfor papers, Fletar, to freight a ship. El flete, freight, fie tad or, freighter ^ fondo, 6 caudal, 6 accion. fundsy share or stock, forcejo, struggle, ganador, gainer. La ganapcia, gain. El ganapan, porter, Los gastos, charges J expenses, generos, goods. Las guardas, custom-house of- ficers "^ guardas vijiadores, tides-men^ tide-waiters, Una gruesa 6 mucha mar, a heavy sea, Un guarda de navio, a tides- man, Una guia, a permit, hacienda ruin, trash of goods, harpillera, ? Unenvoltorio, 5 ""•«^^^''- Hilo acarreto, packthread. Una hipoteca, a mortgage, junta de sanidad, board of health. El importe ; importe liquido, proceeds y neat proceeds. Insolvente, insolvencia, in- solvent^ insolvency. El interes, ' interest, introductor de generos, importer of goods, inventario, inventory, juez, jitdge, juez arbitro, referee^ um- pire^ arbitrator, Los juros, fies^ interest. El lacre, sealing-wax, Una lancha, a lighter, lanchada, embarque en lancha, lighterage. Una letra de cambio, a bill of exchange^ a draft ; nego- ciar una letra de cambio, to ^ negociaie a bill of ex- change ; sacar, librar, 6 tirar una letra, to draw a bill ; aceptar una letra, to accept a bill ; protestar una ' letra, to protest a bill, Un legajo de cartas, a bundle of letters, Un libro de tienda, shop book; borradorcillo, small note- book for memorandums ; borrador, a day-book, dia- rio 6 jornal, a journal ; li- bro. mayor, a ledger ; libro de caja, cash-book ; copi- ador, 6 libro de copias de cartas, a letters-book ; libro de muestras,« pattern card. Lalicencia, license ^permit, losa vidriada, Dutch ware, maleta para cartas, mail* Un marchante, a customer, marinero, seaman* Las mercaderias, ? goods, mercancias, S wares. 298 VOCABULARY. Un mercader por mayor, a wholesale dealer, monopolista, monopolist, pnerto, a port or harbour, Un nmtlle, wharf ; derechos de mu'41e, wharfage ; su cobrador, its icharfinger, Un negociante de generos es- trangeros, importer of for- eign goods, Un negociante de acciones, a stock-jobber, Una oblea, a wafer. obligacionj a bond, obligaciones, contracts, Un ofrecedorj bidder ; mayor oferente, higher bidder. La orilla, the shore, Pagar 4 cuenta, to pay on account ; un pagamento, payment ; falta de pago, non-payment ; un pagare, a promissory note. Un paquete, parcel, paquete de cartas, a pack- et of letters. Para las costas de, for the cost of, Pedir cuenta, to call to an account. Las perdidas, losses. El peso bruto, gi^oss iveight, peso limpio de rey, neat weight, poco mas 6 menos, there- about, Una petaca, bundle, hamper, roll, poliza de seguros, policy of insurance, ponerlas cosasen orden, to set things in order. El portador, bearer^ porta- dor de cartas, penny-post^ man ; porte de cartas^ postage. Los portes, porterage. El precio, p?'2ce, r«^e; la su- bida de precio, enhance- ment, rise of price. El premio, premium, interest, Un prestamo, dinero prestado, a loanymoney lent. El primage, parte de fletes de navio, primage, Una promesa, a promise. protesta, a protest. Protestar una letra, to protest a bill or draft. Protestar una, dos y tres y las mas voces en derecho necesarias, to protest in the most effectual manner pos- sible against El provecho, profit. La puntualidad, punctuality, Un quebrado, a banh^upt, Una quiebra, a bankruptcy. Que se dira, which will be mentioned. La quinquilleria, hardware, Un quintal, a hundredweight, Una quitanza, a release. El recambio, re-exchange, recibo, receipt. Regatear, to cheapen. La remesa, the remittance. renta, riqueza. El riesgo. income, wealthi risk. Romper sobre la costa, to break on the shore. La ropa, clothes. ruin hacienda, trash of goods. VOCABULAHY. 299 Sacar las mercaderias, to un- stow, Saiio de quilla y costados, tight ^ stanch^ and strong. El seguro, insurance, Sellar una carta, to seal a letter, Ser de cuenta, to he on ac- count. La sisa, excise, Su cobrador, the exciseman Un sobre escrito, a direction, sobrestante de tierra, land- overseer. La sobreestada, demurrage, subasta,almonedaj sale by auction. Sumar una cuenta, to cast up an account. La subida de precio, en- hancement, suscripciottj subscription. El suscriptorj the subscriber, Surgir, to ride at anchor, Un talego de moneda, mon- ey-bag. La tara, the tare, tret, tasacionj the set rate, tasa, assize, Un tendero, a shop-keeper, libro de tienda, shop-book, Una tienda, a shop, Un tenedor de libros, a book- keeper. La toneleria, cooperage, Un tratante, a trader. negociante, a merchant, Tratar, to deal or trade, Un trato, 6 negocio, business or traffick. Un vendedor, seller. La venta, sale, Un valor, value, worth, Los vigiadores de rentas, inspectors, tides-men, Una cumplida, las restantes de ningun valor, one being fulfilled, the others to stand void, Un uso, usance. La usura, usury. Un usurero, a usurer. La gerga : especie de estera para enfundar generos, a mat. Navigation. — Navegacion. Un navio, una nave, 6 nao, a ship, de linea, a ship of the line, Un navio de guerra, a man of war, Un navio marcbante 6 una fragata, a merchant ship, Un navio ligero, a light vessel, Una galera, a galley, galeaza, a galeasse. Un galeon, a galleon, Una galeota, a galleot, fragata de guerra, a frig- ate. Un saique, Una carraca, Un fuste, Una pinaza. a saick. a carrack, afuste, a pinnace. barca de pasage, afer- ry-boat. Un tributo, trueque, Trocar, tribute, exchange, to barter. goleta, canoa, piragua, gondola, Un esquife, Una balandra, Un bergantin. a schooner. a canoe. a pirogue, a light boat, a skiff, a sloop, a brig. 300 VOCABULARY. UnalauchajUhbote, a launch. barqueta, ^ barquilia,> aboaU Un batel, ; bagel, barcoj buque, vessel. Una balsa, a raft^ afloat. La capitana/^Af? admiral ship. almiranta, the vice-admi- ral. armada, the royal fleet. ^otRy the fleet of merchant men. Una escuadra, a squadron. A^bordo, aboard. La popa, the poojjy stern. proa, the prow or head. Una tartana, a tartan. Un brulote, ajiieship. patache, a tender^ a pc- tach. Una faluca, falua, a felucca. barca, a coasting fish- ing vessel. La sentina, the well. El lastre, ballast. mastil, irbol, the mast. 4rbol m^yor, the main- mast. La gabia, the rovnd top. El trinquete, the fore-mast. La mesana, the mizen-mast. La carlinga del ^rbol, the step of the mast. verga, entena, the yard. El estribor, starboard. babor, larboard. Gobernar el navio, to steer. El barlovento, windward. sotavento, leeward. Remolcar, to tow. Escoltar, convoyar,fo convoy. Una vela, a sail. vela mayor, the main-sail. La vela de gabia, the top-sail. El juanete, the top-gallant sail. La vela'de mesana, the mizen- sail. vela de trinquete, the fore- sail. cevadera, the sprit sail. vela latina, lateen or shoul- der of mutton-sail. Un remo, ^ an oar. La pala de remoj the blade of an oar. Unpractico, a pilot. Las troneras, the port holes. empavesadas, the net- tings. Un gallardete, a pendant. Una banderola, a banner. bandera, the colours. La brujula, the compass^ punta de la proa, the stem. puente, cubierta, the d< ck. Las escotillas, the hatches. El timon, the helm. La quilla, the keel. Una ancla, 4ncora,aw anchor. amarra, mooring. maroma, a rope. Un cable, a cable. La sonda, the sounding lead. Un piloto, a mate. guardian, a boatswain. raarinero, a sailor. corsario, a privateer. armador, a ship owner. Una camara, a cabin. Un camarote, a birth. Una tormenta, a tempest. borrasca, a storm. bonanza, fair weather. calma;^ cahn. VOCABULARY. 301 El viento en popa, the ivind full astern, viento largo, fair wind. Coger el viento, to ply to icindward, Ir a la bolina, to tack upon a wind, Irse a fondo, a pique, to sink. The year anditsparts^^c. El ano y sus partes, &c. Un ano, Un mes Una semana, Un dia, Una noche. La maiiana, La tarde, Una hora, Un minuto, Un memento, La prinjavera. El verano, El otofio, El invierno, La salida del sol, the suii-ris- El ponerse del sol, La aurora. a year, a month, a week, a day, a night, the morning, the ei^ening, an hour, a minute, a moment, the spring, the summer, the autumn, the winter. the sun- setting, the dawn. El mediodia, noon. La media noche, midnight, Un cuarto de hora, a quarter of an hour, Una media hora, half an hour. Tres cuartos de hora, three quarters of a?i hour. Hoy, to-day, Ayer, yesterday. El dia antes de ayer, the day before yesterday, 26 El dia despues de mafiana, the day after to-morrow. The months^ — Los meses, — are mascidine. Enero, Febrero, Marzo, Abril, ]Mayo, Junio, Julio, Agosto, Setiembre, Octubre, Noviembre, Diciembre, January, February, March, April, May, June. July, August, September, October, 'November, December, The days of the week, — Los dias de la masculine, Lunes, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves, Viernes, Sabado, Domingo, semana, — are Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday. Saturday, Sunday, The holidays of the year, — Dias de fiesta del ano. El primer dia del Ano, New Yearns day. El dia de ^eyes ^Twelfth-day, La Cuaresma, Lent, Las Cuatro temperas, the Em- ber-weeks, El domingo de Ramos, Palm- sunday, Viernes Santo, Good Fri^ day 302 VOCABULARY. La pascua de resurreccion, Easter-day. pascua del Espiritu Santo, Whit'Sunday, EI dia de Difuntos, All'Souh- day. dia de todos los Santos, Ml'SaintS'day , La pascua de navidad, Christ* mas. vigilia, the Eve. east wind. Winds^ — Vientos, — are maS' culine. El norte, north wind. sud 6 sur, south wind. este, ') levante, ^ poniente, oeste^ west wind. nordeste, north-east wind. noroeste, north-west wind. vendaval, south-west wind, sudeste, south-east wind. sudoeste, south-west wind. Table of the current Money in Spain. — Tabla de las Mone^- das de Espana. La pieza mas pequena de moneda de Espana se llama Mara- vedi, del cual resulta la Tabla siguiente. Copper, or Billion. — Cobre^ 6 vellon, 2 maravedises hacen un ochavo. 2 ochavos un cuarto. 2 cuartos una mota, 6 dos cuartos. * 8| cuartos Silver. — Plata. un real, t lOI diez cuartos y medio y medio maravedi, octava parte de un Peso duro. I 17 cuartos §21 1 cuartos II 34 cuartos 2 reales. 2 1 reales. 4 reales 6 una peseta. ^42^ cuartos 5 reales 6 pese- ta columnaria. 85 cuartos 10 reales 6 me- dio duro. 170 cuartos 20 reales 6 un peso duro. Gold— Oro. 20 reales 40 reales 80 reales 160 reales 320 reales escudillo de oro. doble escudillo de oro. doblon de oro. media onza de orOjU 8 duros, una onza, 6 I6 pesos duros. * 5 Cents. f 6 Cents, t 10 Cents. § 12^ Cents. j| 20 Cent*, or a Pistareen. If 25 Cents, FAMILIAR PHRASES. 303 Military words of Command, — Palabras militares de Man- damiento. Formense, Atencion, Armas al hombro. fall in. attention, shoulder arms, Figen bayonetas, fix bayo- nets. Presenter! las armas, present arms. Aparejen, Fresenten, Fuego, Ceben, Carguen, Saquen baqueta. Ataquen, make ready, present, fire, prime, load, draw ram- rods, ram down cart- ridge. Cesen el fuego, cease firing. Marchen, march. Alto, halt. Linea d la izquierda, left into line. Conversion ^ la derecha, right wheel. Conversion ^ la izquierda, left wheel. Conversion atrds 4 la derecha, right backwards wheel. Conversion atras i la izquier- da, left backivards wheel. A la derecha frente, right face. A la izquierda frente, left face. FAMILIAR PHRASES. Sentencias Cortas y Familiares.- Phrases. 'Short and Familiar I. Acerca de pedir algo. Le suplico ; le ruego, deme vm. ; hagame el favor de darme Traigame Se lo agradezco Le doy las gracias Vaya 4 buscarme tal cosa Luego, en este instante Querido Senor, hagame vm. este gusto Concedame, senorajCste favor Se lo suplico Se lo pido encarecidamente T. About asking any thing. I beseech you .; pray^ give me ; do me the kindness to give me Bring me 1 thank you for it I give you thanks Go and fetch me such a thing Presently J this moment Dear Sir^ do me this pleaS' ure Dear Madam^ grant me this favour I beseech you for it I earnestly beg it of you 304 FAMILIAR PHRASES. II. Espresiones tiernas. Mi vida Mi queridoj 6 mi querida Mi alma Mi dueno. Mi queridito, mi queridita Mi corazoncito Lumbre de mis ojos Cielo mioj nifia de mi alma Hija de mi corazon A^ngel mio Estrella mia Bien mio III. Acerca de agradecer y eumplimentar^ y mostrar amstad. Viva usted muchos aiios Le devuelvo las mas vivas gracias Gustoso lo hare De todo mi corazon De muy buena gana Lo estimo Soy de vm. Soy sii servidor Su muy humilde servidor Vm. me favorece miicho Se toma vm. demasiado Ira- bajo No hallo ninguno en servirle Es vm. muy atento y muy cortes Que deseavm.? que me man- da vm. ? Ordeneme con toda libertad Sin cumplimiento II. Expressions of kindness. My life My dear My soul My love^ my lord or master My little darling My little heart Dear siceet hearty light of my eyes My most beloved,, my heav- en, pupil of my soul My dearest child, child of my heart My angel My star My blessing III. Of thanking and com- plimenting, and showing kindness. I thank you, may you live many years I return you the most heart- felt thanks I will do it cheerfully With all my heart Heartily, with a very good ivill I am obliged for it 1 am yours 1 am your servant Your very humble servant Yon are very obliging, you favour me much You take too much trouble Ifnd none in serving you You are very civil and kind What do you wish ? what do you command me ? Command me with full liber t if Without compliment FAMILIAH PHRASES. S05 Sin ceremonia Le amo de corazon E' yo correspondo 4 vm. co- mo debo Haga cuenta sobre mi Mandeme vm. Honreme con sus preceptos Tiene vm. algo que man- darme ? No tiene vm. sino hablar Disponga de su servidor Solo aguardo sus preceptos Demasiado honor me hace Degemonosde cumplimientos Entre amigos honrados, se escusan cumplimientos Al Sefior Don — le beso las manos Dele vm. muchas espresiones mias No faltare Pongame vm. 4 los pies de la Senora Muchas memorias a la Se- fiorita Pase vm. adelante, le voy a seguir Despues de vm., Caballero Se bien lo que le debo Vamos, Sefior, pase vm. Lo hare para obedecerle Para solo agradarle No soy amigo de tantas cere- monias No soy cumplimentero Es lo mejor Tiene vm. razon 26* Without ceremony I love you sincerely And 1 return it as I ought Rely or depend upon me Command me Honour me with your com- mands Have you any thing to com- mand me ? You have but to speak Dispose of your servant I only wait your commands You do me too much honour Let us forbear compliments Between honest friends ^ com- pliments are excused Present or give my respects to Mr. D — . or I kiss the hands of Mr. D — . Remember my love to him^give him many expressions of mine 1 7v ill not fail Pi^esent my respects to my la- dy^ or put me at the feet of Madam Remember me to Miss, or 7nany remembrances to Miss Go before, I am going to fol- low you After you, Sir I know well ivhat I owe you Come, Sir, pass on I will do it to obey you Only to please you I am not fond of so many ceremonies I am not ceremonious It is the best You are in the right 306 FAMILIAR PHRASIiS* IV. Acerca de afirmar^ ne^ gary consentiry Sfc, Es verdad Es esto verdad ? Demasiado verdad Para tratar verdad En efecto, es asi Quien lo duda? No hay duda Creo que es asi Creo que no Digo que si Digo que no Apuesto que si Va que no Por mi vida A^ fe de caballero A^ fe de hombre de bien Por mi honor Creame vm. Se lo puedo decir Se lo puedo afirmar Apostara algo Se burla vm. ? Habla vm. de veras ? Lo digo muy de veras Lo adivino vm. Lo acerto vm. Bien le creo Se le puede creer Eso no es imposible Pues, en hora buena Poco ^ poco No es verdad Aquello es falso Nada de eso hay Es incierto Es mentira Es una falsedad Me burlaba, chanceaba Lo decla de chanza Sea en hora buena IV. Of affirming, denying, consenting, &c. It is true Is this true ? Too true To tell the truth Really y it is so Who doubts it ? There is no doubt I believe it is so ^ I believe not I say it is I say it is not I lay it is I lay it is not Upon my life As I am a gentleman As I am an honest man Upon my honour Do believe me I can tell it to you I can affirm it to you I could bet something Do you jest ? Do you speak in earnest ? I say it quite in earnest You guessed at it You hit it I truly believe you One may believe you That is not impossible Well^ let it be so Softly y fair and softly It is not true That is false There is no such thing It is untrue It is a lie It is a falsehood I did jest ; I was joking I said it in jest Let it be so; well and good FAMILIAR PHRASES. 3or No me opongo a ello Estamos de acuerdo Dicho y hecho No lo quiero V. Acerca de consultary 6 considerar. Que se ha de hacer ? Que haremos ? Que me dice vmd. que haga ? Que remedio hay para eso ? Que partido hemos de tomar ? Hagamos esto 6 eso Hagamos una cosa Mejor sera que yo.... Aguarde vm un poco No seria mejor, si ?.... Degeme hacer Si estuviera en su lugar Es lo misrao Viene ^ salir ^ lo mismo I do not oppose it Wt are agreed^ in accord Said and done I will not have it^ I do not want it, I do not wish for it V. Of consulting^ or consid- ering. What is to he done'? What shall we do ? What do you tell me to do ? What remedy is therefor that! What course are ive to take ? Let us do this or that Let us do one thing It will be better that I.,., Wait a little Would it not he better, iff,,.. Let me do Were I in your place It is the same It comes to turn out to the same VI. Del comer y del heber. VI. Of eating and drinking. I have a good appetite I am hungry 1 am starving It seems to me that it is three days I have eaten nothing Eat something What do you like to eat ? 1 could eat a little of any- thing Give me something to eat I have eaten enough I am satisfied Will you eat still more ? I have no more appetite lam dry lam dying with thirst 1 am very thirsty Give me to drink Tengo buen apetito Tengo hambre Me muero de hambre Me parece que ha tres dias que nada he comido Coma vm. algo Que gusta vm. comer ? Comiera un poco de cualqui- era cosa Deme vm. algo de comer He comido bastante Estoy satisfecho Quiere vm. comer aun mas ? No tengo mas apetito Tengo sed Me muero de sed Tengo mucha sed Deme vmd. de beber 308 FAMILIAR PHRASES. Viva vm. muchos anos Gustoso beberia una copita de vino Beba vm^ pues He bebido bastante No puedo beber mas Mi sed est^ apagada VII. Del ir, venir^ moverse^ De donde viene vm. ? A^ donde va vm. ? Vengo de — Voy k — Sub a 5 bage Entre vm., saiga vm Pase vm adelante No se mueva, no se menee Estese ahi Acerquese de mi Retirese vm. Vayase Vaya un poco atr4s Venga vm. aca Aguarde vmd. un rato EsperemOj agu^rdeme No vaya tan de prisa Va vm. muy a prisa Quitese de delante de mi No me toque vm. Dege eso Porque ? Asi lo quiero Estoy bien aqui La puerta est4 cerrada Ahora estd abierta Abra vm. la puerta Abra vm. la ventana. Cierre la ventana Venga vm, por aqui Vaya vmd, por all4 Pase vmd. por aqui Pase por alia I thank yov^ may you live many years I could drink with pleasure a glass of wine Drink then i have drank enough I can drink no more My thirst is allayed VII. Of going, coming, stir- ring, &fc. Whence do you come ? Where do you go ? I come from — lam going to— Come up, come down Come in, go out Come forward Do not move, do not stir Slay there Come near to me Retire, ivithdraw Go away, begone Go back a little Come hither Wait a little Wait for me Do not go so fast You go very fast Get away from before me Do not touch me Leave that Why ? I wish it so I am well here Ihe door is shut Now it is open Open the door Open the window Shut the window Come this way Go that way Pass this way Pass that way FAMILIAR PHRASE?. 309 Que busca vm. ? Que perdio vm. ? YIIL Del hahlar^ clecir^ obrary ^c, Hable vm. alto Habla vm. muy bajo Con qnien habla vm. ? Me habla vm. ? Digale algo Habla vm. Espafiol ? Sabe vm. el castellano ? Algo lo entiendo y hablo Que dice vm. ? Que ha dicho vm. ? No digo nada No he dicho nada Calle vm. C a Home Ella no quiere callar No hace mas que hablar y charlar He oido decir, que — — Me lo ban dicho Lo dicen por ahl Todos lo dicen El Sefior 4, me lo dijo Madama no me lo ha dicho Se lo dijo a vm. ? Se lo dijo ella ? Cuando lo oyo vm. decir ? Hoy me lo han dicho Quien se lo dijo ? No lo puedo creer Que dice el ? Que dice ella ? Que le ha dicho ? No me dijo nada No me ha dicho noticia alguna El Senor B. me dijo nuevas No se lo diga vm. Se lo dire No se lo dire What do you loohfor? What did you lose ? Vni. Of speaking, saying , acting, &c. Speak loud You speak very loio With whom do you speak f Do you speak to me ? Tell him something Bo you speak Spanish ? Do you know the Cast Hi an ? I understand and speak it a What do you say ? [little. What have you said ? I say nothing I have said nothing Hold your tongue, he silent lam silent, 1 hold my tongue She will not hold her tongue She does nothing but prattle and tattle I have heard, that They have told me so They say so abroad Every one says so Mr, A. told it me The lady has not told it me Did he trll it to you ? Did she tell it you ? When did you hear it, say ? To-day, they have told it to mt Who told it to you ? I cannot believe it What does he say? What does she say ? What has he said to you? He said nothing to me He has not told me any news Mr, B. told me news Do not tell it to them I will tell it to him I loillnot tell it to her 319 FAMILIAR PHRASES. No le diga vm. palabra Se lo callare Callelo vm. bien Ha dicho vm. eso ? Noj no lo he dicho No lo dijo vm ? No lo han dicho? Que esta vm. haciendo ? Que ha hecho vm. ? No hago nada No he hecho nada Acabo vm. ? No acabo vm. ? Que esta haciendo el ? Que hace ella ? Que quiere vm. ? que manda vm, ? Que es lo que le hace falta } Que pide vm. ? Respondame Porque no me responde vm.? IX. Dc/ oir^ escuchar^ 8fc. Oiga vm., Don N. ' Oigo, senor Me oye vm. ? No le oigo No le puodo oir Hable mas alto Oiga, venga ac^ O^fgole Escuchole Eslese quieto No ha^a ruido Que ruido es este ? No nos podemos oir hablar Que zarabra arma vm. alia I Me quiebra la cabeza Me aturde vm. Es vm. Bduy molesto Say not a toord to Jiim I will keep it from him Keep it well to yourself Have you said that ? Noy I have not said it Did you not say so ? Have they not said so ? What are you doing? Wkat have you done ? I do nothing I have done nothing Hare you done ? did you fin- ish ? Have you not done? What is he doing ? What does she do ? What do you wish^ what do you command? What is it that you want ? What do you ask ? Answer me Why donHyou answer me ? IX. Of hearing, listening, &c. Hearken, Mr. N. I hear, Sir Do you hear me ? I do not hear you I cannot hear you Speak louder Hark ycy come hither I hear you I listen to you Be quiet, be still Do not make a noise What noise is this? We cannot hear one another speak What a thundering noise yoxi make there I You break my head You stun me You are very troublesome FAMILIAR PHRASES. SU X. Del entender y compren- der, Le entiende vm. bien ? Ha entendido vra. lo que ha dicho ? Entiende vm. lo que dice ? Me entiende vm. Le entiendo bien No le entiendo Entiende vm. el Espanol? No lo entiendo Lo entiendo un poco Lo entiende el Senor ? No lo entiende Me ha entendido vm. ? No le he entendido Ahora le entiendo Cuando no habla vm. tan de prisa El no pronuncia bien Parece tartaraudo Ne se le entiende lo que dice XI. Acerca de preguntar, Como dice vm. ? Que es esto ? que hay ? Que se dice ? Que quiere decir eso ? Que quieren ellos decir ? De que sirve aquello ? 4 que bueno ? Que le parece ? que tal ? A^ que viene aquello ? Digame vra., se puede saber? Se le puede preguntar ? Que me pregunta vm. ? Como, Senor ? Que se ha de hacer ? X. Of understanding and comprehending. Do you understand Mm well f Have you understood what he has said? Do you understand what he says ? Do you understand me ? I understand you well I do not understand you Do you understand Spanish? 1 do not understand it I understand it a little Does the gentleman under^ stand it ? He does not understand it Have you understood me? 1 have not understood you Now I understand you When you do not speak sofa%t He does not pronounce well He seems a stammerer One does not understand what he says XI. About asking a question. How do you say ? Whafs this ? what is there ? What do people say ? What means that? What do they mean ? What is the use of thatf whafs that good for ? TThat do you think of it f how do you like ^t "^ To what purpose hi > J ? Tell mCy may one knotv ? May one ask you f What do you ask of me? How^ Sir ? What is to be done ? 312 FAMILIAR PHRASES. Que desea vm. ? Que gusta vm. ? Lo que quisiere Suplicole me responda Porque no me responde? XII. Acerca de saber, Sabe vm eso ? No lo se No se nada de ello Ella bien lo sabia Acaso no lo sabia el ? Supuesto que lo supiese No sabra nada de ello Que ! no ha sabido nada de ello? No supo jamas de esto Antes de vm. lo sabia yo Es asi 6 no ? No que lo sepa yo XIII. Del conocer, olvidar^ y acordarse. Le conoce vm. ? La conoce vm. ? Les conoce vm. ? Las conozco No los conozco Nos conocemos No nos conocemos No le conoce vm. a el? Creo que le he conocido La he conocido Nos hern^ conocido Le cono , o de vista La con^2,co de nombre El me canocia muy bien Me conoce vm. ? He olvidado su nombre Me ha olvidado vm. ? What do you wish 9 What do you choose ? What you please Pray, do answer me Why donH you answer me ? XII. Of knowing or having a knowledge of things. Do you know that ? I do not know it I know nothing of it She knew it well Did he not perchance know Suppose he knew it [it ? He shall know nothing of it What ! has he known nothing of it? He never knew of this 1 knew it before you Is it so or not ? Not that I know of Xni. Of knowing or being acquainted with pers^.ns, forgetting and remember- ing. Do you know him ? Do you know her ? Do you know them ? I know them I do not know them We are acquainted We do not know one another Do you not know him ? I believe I haije known him I have known her We have known one another I know him by sight I know her by name He knew me very well Do you know me ? I have forgotten your name Have youforgotten me ? FAMILIAR PHRASES. 313 Le conoce ^ vm. ella ? Le conoce ^ vm. el Seiior ? Parece que no me conoce Bien me conoce el Senor ? Ya no me conoce Me olvido del todo Ya no me conoce ella Tengo el honor de ser cono- cido de el Se acuerda vm. de eso ? No se me acuerda, no me acu- erdo de ello Muy bien lo tengo presente H^gaselo acordar XIV. jDe la edad^ de la vida^ de la muerte^ 8fc. Que edad tiene vm. ? Que edad tiene su hermano ? Tengo veinte y cinco afios Tiene veinte y dos anos Tiene vm. mas aiios que yo Empieza 4 envejecer Que edad tendra vm. ? Estoy bueno, que es lo esen- cial Esta vm. casado ? Cuantas veces ha estado vm. casado ? Cuantas mugeres ha tenido vm, ? Tiene vm. aun padre y madre vivos ? Mi padre murio Mi madre ha muerto Dos anos ha que perdi £ mi padre Mi madre se ha vuelto & casar Cuantos hijos tiene vm.? Cuatro tengo Hijos 6 hijas, varones 6 hem- bras } 27 Does she know you ? Does the gentleman Icnowyou't It seems he does not know me The gentleman knows me well He knows me no more He quite forgot me She knows me no more I have the honour to be known to him Do you remember that ? I do not remember ity I do not recollect it I do remember it very well Remind him of it, XIV. Of age, life, death; &c. How old are you ? How old is your brother 9 I am five and twenty He is twenty-two years old You are older than I He begins to grow old How old may you be ? I am welly that is the chief thing Are you married? How many times have you been married? How many wives have you had ? Have you a father and moth- er still alive ? My father is dead My mother is dead I lost my father two years ago My mother has married again How many children have you? I have four Sons or daughters^ males or females? 314 FAMILIAR PHRASES. Tengo im hijo y tres hijas Cuantos hermanos tiene vm.? No tengo ninguno vivo Todos murieron Todos hemos de morir Cada hora es un paso h^cia el tumulo XV. De una aya y su Se- norita. Esta vm. aun en la cama? Duerme vm. ? Despierte ; que pesada es vm. Es vm. muy dormilona No est4 aun despierta ? Levdntese ligero Acaso es ya hora de levan- tarse ? Sin duda lo es Ahora dardn las nueve Est4 vm. levantada ? Esta su hermana levantada ? Vamos, despache vm. Porque no se da mas prisa ? Cuidado Se caerd vm. Por poco se cae Acerquese de la lumbre Abriguese bien Se resfriara vm. Ya estoy acatarrada Vistase luego Peinese Pongase las medias C^lcese los zapatos Tome esta camisa blanca Lavese las manos, la boca, y la cara Limpiese los dientes Sus peines estdn sucios I have one son and three daughters How 7nany brothers have you? I have none living They are all dead We must all die Every hour is a step towards the grave, XV. Of a Governess and her young ^lady. Are you in bed still ? Do you sleep ? Awake ; how heavy you are You are very sleepy Are you not awake yet ? Rise quickly Is it perchance already time to rise ? It is so undoubtedly Nine o^clock ivill presently strike Are you up ? Is your sister up ? Comcy make haste Why do you not make more haste ? Take care You will fall You came near falling Come near the fire Clothe yourself warm You will catch cold I have a cold already Dress yourself directly Comb your hair Put on your stockings Put on your shoes Take this clean chemise Wash your hands ^y our mouthy your face Clean your teeth Your combs are dirty FAMlLfAR PHRASES. 315 Acordonenie la cotilla Lace my stays Ayiideme vm Help me Porque no me asiste ? Why donH you help me ? Acabo vm. ya ? Have you already done ? Aim no Not yet Que pesada es vm. How tedious you are Diga siis oraciones Say your prayers Hable alto Speak loud Empiece Begin Vamos adelante Let us go on Acabe vmd. Make an end Adonde esta su libro de ora- Where is your prayer-book ? ciones ? Traiga su Biblia Bring your Bible Busquela presto Look for it quick Lea vm. un capitulo Read a chapter Adonde acabo vm. ayer ? Where did you leave of yes- Aqui me pare No tiene vm. bien su libro Lea poco a poco Deletree esa voz Vm. lee muy de prisa No lee vm. bien Lee muy despacio No^aprende vm. nada No observa nada No estudia vm. No aprovecha nada Es vm. muy perezosa Que murmura vm. all4 Vuelva 4 empezar No sabe vm. su lecion Esta es su lecion Deme otra lecion Porque me habla vm. Ingles? Hable vm siempre Espanol Quiere vm. almorzar ? Que gusta vm. para su almu- erzo ? Comerd vm. pan y manteca } terday ? I stopt here You do not hold your book well Read slowly Spell that word You read very fast You do not read well You read very slow You learn nothing You observe nothing You do not study You do not improve any You are very idle What do you mutter there ? Begin again You do not know your lesson This is your lesson Give me another lesson Why do you speak English to me ? Speak always Spanish Will you breakfast ? What will you have for your breakfast ? Will you eat bread andbutter? 316 FAMILIAR PHRASES. Diga vm. lo que quiere mas Acabe de almorzar Almorzo ym. ya? Tome su labor Muestreme su labor Eso no esta bueno Rehaga todo aquello Tiene una aguja buena ? Tiene vm. hilo ? Dege su labor Vaya a jugar un poco Vuelva & trabajar cuando ha- ya jugado Vaya a pasearse en el jardin No se caliente Vuelva presto Es bora de comer Sientese d la mesa Vamos, tome vmd. una silla Pongase la servilleta Adonde estan su cuchillo, su tenedor y su cuchara? Rece antes de empezar Coma vm sopa Gusta vm. carnero ? Quiere gordo 6 magro ? Le gusta la gordura ? Le gusta a vm. salsa ? Digame su gusto Coma, no come vm. fie aqui una ala de polio Coma vm. pan con su carne Ha bebido vm ? Pida de beber Es esta carne sabrosa ? Quieie vm. comer mas ? Ha comido vm. bastante ? Le gusta el queso ? De vm. las gracias Vaya 4 bailar Ha bailado vmd. ? Kgercitese bien Sai/ what you like best Finish your breakfast Have you breakfasted al- ready ? Take your woi^k Shoiv me your work That is not right Do all that over again Have you a good needle ? Have you any thread ? Leave your ivork Go and play a little Come again to icork ivhen you have played Go and walk in the garden Do not overheat yourself Come again quickly It is dinner-time Sit down to the table Come, take a chair Put on your napkin Where are your knife^ your fork and your spoon ? Say grace before you begin Eat some soup Will you have some mutton ? Will you have fat or lean^ Do you like fat ? Do you like sauce ? Tell me your taste Eaty you do not eat Here is the wing of a chicken Eat bread with your meat Have you drank ? Ask for drink Is this meat agreeable ? Will you eat more ? Have you eat enough ? Do you like cheese? Give thanks Go to dance Have you danced ? Exercise yourself well FAMILIAR PHRASES. 317 Vaya, dance vm. un minuete No danza vm. bien Tengase derecha Levante la cabeza Haga la cortesia Mireme vmd. Que esta vm. mirando ? Se fue su maestro ? Ha acabado vm. ya ? Vaya ahora k cantar Lleve su libro consigo Vuelva a trabajar cuando ha- ya acabado Ha cantado vm ? Tiene lecion nueva ? Cante vm. una arieta Cante vm. una cancion Canta vm. bonitamente Toque vm. el clave 6 piano Ahora la guitarra Su prima no vale nada Esta su guitarra templada ? Sabe vm. templarla ? Aun esta destemplada No tiene vm. bien su guitarra Vaya vm. a aprender el Es- panol Donde est4 su gramatica ? Busque su libro Que lecion tiene vm ? Que dialogo ha leido ? Repita su lecion No la sabe vm. Nada ha aprendido Lea delante de mi No pronuncia vm. bien Aprendio vm. su lecion de memoria ? No tiene vmd. memoria 27* Come^ dance a minuet You do not dance well Stand upright Hold up your head Make a curtesy Look at me What are you looking at ? Is your master gone ? Have you done already ? Go now and sing Carry your book with you Come again to work lohen you have done Have you sung? Have you a new lesson ? Sing an air Sing a song You sing prettily Play on the harpsichord or piano Now the guitar Your chantrel is good for nothing Is your guitar in tune ? Do you know how to tune it f It is still out of tune You do not hold your guitar well Go and learn Spanish Where is your grammar ? Look for your book What lesson have you ? What dialogue have you read? Repeat your lesson You do not know it You have learned nothing Read before me You do not pronounce well Have you learnt your lesson by heart ? You have no memory 318 FAMILIAR PHRASES. No torn a vm. trabajo Que quiere para merendar ? — para cenar ? Venga a cenar No se engolosine en la fruta Estara vm. mala La fruta no le sienta bien Es tiempo de acostarse Desnudese lue^ro Rece Levantese manana temprano XVI. Del pas6o. Hace muy bello tiempo Este dia claro y sereno convi- da al paseo No parece nube alguna Vamos d pasear Vamos d tomar el aire Quiere vm. dar una vuelta ? Gusta vm. venir conmigo ? Respondame, digame si, 6 no Vamos pues, me gusta Le acompaiiare Adonde iremos ? Vamos al Parque Vamos 4 los prados Iremos en coche ? Como le gustare Vamonos a pie Tiene vm. razon Eso es saludable Se gana apetito andando A^nimo, vamos, andemos Por donde iremos ? Por donde quisiere Por aqui 6 por alii Vamos por aqui A^ mano derecha, 4 la derecha A" mano izquierda, 4 la izqui- erda. You take no pains What ivillyou have for tun" cheon ? — for sapper ? Come to supper Do not eat too much fruit You will be sick Fruit does not suit you It is time to go to bed Undress yourself presently Say your prayer^ Rise early to-morrow. XVL Of walking. It is very fine weather This clear and serene day in- vites to walk There does not appear any cloud Let us go and walk Let us go and take the air Will you take a turn ? Do you wish to come with me ? Answer mc^ tell me yes^ or no Let us go then, I wish it I ivill accompany you Where shall lue go? Let us go to the Park Let us go to the meadoios Shall we go in a coach ? As you please Let US go on foot You are in the right That is healthy Walking gets one an appetite Cheer up, come, let us walk Which umy shall toe go ? Which way you please This umy or that Let us go this way On the right hand, to the right On the left handy to the left FAMILIAR PHRASE**. 319 Quiere vm. ir por agua? Adonde esta el barco ? Adonde estan los barqueros? Entre vm. en el barco Solo atravesaremos el rio El agua est4 muy mansa y apacible Empieza d moverse Adonde quiere vm. desem- barcar, abordar ? Estamos cerca de la orilla Para tu el barco Pasemos la vista sobre estos campos y prados Que verdura tan hermosa Estos prados est^n esmalta- dos con variedad de fiores Que prospecto tan hermoso ! Este lugar es muy ameno Los drboles echan flores Los resales empiezan ^ echar capullos Aun no estan abierlas estas rosas Crece el trigo Prometen mucho los panes Las espigas son muy largas Ya el trigo esta maduro Esta es una bella Uanura Estas sombras son muy apa- cibles Que todo tan hermoso Me parece que estoy en un paralso terrenal No oye vm. la dulce melodia de las aves ? El canto suave del ruisenor Aun no estamos en Mayo Anda vm. demasiado presto No le puedo seguir No puedo ir tan de prisa Will you go hy water ? IVhere is the boat ? Where are the boatmen ? Step into the boat We ivilljust cross the river The waJer is very smooth and calm It begins to move Where will you laiid^ hoard? We are near the shore Stop the boat Let us cast our sight upon these fields and meadows What a fine green These meadows are enamelled with a variety offiowei^s What a beautiful prospect ! This place is very pleasant The trees are blooming The rose-bushes begin to bud^ or throto out buds These roses are not blown yet The corn grows The cornfields are very prom- ising The ears are very long The wheat is already ripe This is a fine plain These shades are very pleas- ant Wliat a fine tout ensemble Methinks I am in an earthly paradise Do you not hear the sweet melody of birds? The sweet warbling of the nightingale ? We are not yet in May You walk too quick I cannot folloio you I cannot go so fast S20 FAMILIAR PHRASES. No me es posible alcanzarle Es vra» un pobre caminante Le suplico, ande un poco mas despacio Descansemos un rato No vale la pena Esta vm. cansado ? Estoy molido Acostemonos en la yerba Metemo que este humeda Como puede ser ? no ha Uo- vido Basta la humedad de la noche Ni aun quiero sentarme en el suelo Pasemos pues a esa selva Entremos en ese bosque Que sitio tan gustoso ! Que idoneo para estudiar ! He aqui tres paseos Que bien plantados est^n es- tos arboles ! Se inclinan unos h^cia otros Estos Arboles hacen bella sombra Que espesa esta esa arboleda! Los rayos del sol no la pueden penetrar He aqui hermosos huertos Hay mucha fruta Veo manzanas, peras, avella- nas, guindas Antes quisiera nueces 6 cas- tanas Estos albaricoques y persigos me hacen venir el agua a la boca Bien me comiera algunas de estas ciruelas It is not possible for me tt^ keep up with you You are a sorry zvalker Pray^ go a little slower Let us rest a little It is not worth the while Are you tired ? I am very much tired Let us lie down upon the grass 1 am afraid it is damp How can it be ? it has not rained The dampness of the night is sufficient Nor ivill 1 even sit upon the ground Let us walk then into that wood Let us go into that grove What a pleasant place ! How fit for study ! Here are three walks How well these trees are planted ! They bend towards each other These trees make a fine shade How thick that grove is ! The sun-beams cannot pierce through it Here are fine orchards There is a great deal of fruit I bee apples^ pearsy filberts^ cherries I had rather have walnuts or chesnuts These apricots and peaches make my mouth water I could really eat some of these plums FAMILIAR PHRASES. 321 Cuanta cuesta la libra de guindas ? Ocho cuartos Compremos algunas Me temo que nos mojemos Reparo que el tiempo empie- za a anublarse Volvaraonos Empieza a ser tarde Se pone el sol -No corra vm. Aguardeme un poco VamoSj vamos. si estu\iere cansadoj descansara cenan- do Y aua mejor en la cama XVII . Del tiempo. Que tiempo hace ? Hace buen tiempo ? Hace mal tiempo ? Hace calor ? Hace frio ? Luce el sol r Hace bello tiempo Hace mal tiempo £1 tiempo esta seco. hume- do, lluvioso, tempestuoso, ventoso Es tiempo inconstante y vari- able Hace gran calor. mucho frio El tiempo esta claroysereno Luce el sol Hace un tiempo oscmo El cielo esta cargado de cu- be? Las nubes son muy espesas Llueve ? Xo; creo que no Empieza a Hover Aun no llueve Presto llovera a cantaros If^kat costs a pound of cher- ries '? Five cents Let us bui/ some I am afraid ice shall be wet I observe the weather begins to grow cloudy Let us go back again It begins to be late The sun is settinsr Do not run Stay for me a little Come^ come, if you be weary, you will rest yourself at supper dnd yet better in bed. XVn. Of the weather. Hoic is the weather ? Is it f lie weather? Is it bad weather ? Is it hot ? Is it cold? Does the sun shine? It isfne weather It is b'ipanol entre cieuto que pronuncie bien el Irgles Los Ingleses se coinen la mi- tad de sus voces Dan un solo sonido ^ tres 6 cuatro letras Pero en Espanol cada letra tiene su sonido 29 What part of Spain are you from ? From Madrid, Toledo, Se- ville, Sfc. Of what city ? Of Cadiz How long have you been in England? It is more than a year Do you speak English ? I speak it a little But I understand it better than 1 speak The English language is very difficult for Spaniards The Spanish is not difficult for Englishmen 1 am persuaded of the con- trary I hardly believe it Experience shows it to us ev- ery day The pronunciation of the Spanish is a great deal more easy than that of the English They pronoujice all the letters as they write them I know several Englishmen who pronounce t/ie Spanish very well One can hardly find one Spaniardin a hundred who pronounces English well The English clip or eat up half their words They give a single sound to three or four letters But in Spanish each letter has its sound 338 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES?. De suerte que la dificultad no parece igual de ambos lados El Espanol tiene la ventaja Y aun la difficultad es menos para la gente moza Porque los jovenes son como cera blanda, en que se ina- prime facilmente todo Didl. VIII. Del hacer una visitapor la manana* Quien esti ahi ? Gente de paz, abra vmd. la puerta Adonde est^ tu amo ? Estd en la cama Duerme aun ? No, Sefior, esti dispierto Esti levantado ? Aun no ; quiere vm. entrar en su cuarto ? Aun en ia cama ? Me recogi i noche tan tarde, que no me he polido levan- tar mas temprano Que hizo vm. despues de ce- nar ? Como paso vm. la noche ? Jugamos & los naipes A' que juego ? Jugamos 4 los cientos Es un juego muy de moda Luego nos fuimos al baile Hasta que hora se estuvo vmd. alii ? Hasta media noche A' que hora se acosto vmd. ? A^ la una de la noche So that the difficulty does not appear equal on both sides The Spanish has the advan- tage And the difficulty is yet less for young people Because young people are like soft wax J on which one easily impresses any thing. Dial. VIII. Of making a morning visit. Who is there ? A friend^ open the door Where is your master ? He is in bed Does he sleep yet ? Noj Sir^ he is awake Is he up ? Not yet ; will you step into his chamber ? Still in bed? I retired so late last nighty that I could not get up earlier What did you do after sup- per? How did you spend the even* ing ? We played at cards At what game ? We played at piquet It is a game much in fashion Afterwards we ivent to the ball Till what o^clock were you there ? Till midnight What time did you go to bed? At one in the morning FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 339 Ne estrafio que vm. selevante tan tarde Que hora puede ser ? Que hora le parece que es ? Han dado las diez Levantese vm. presto Daremos una vuelta en el parque luego que este vmd. vestido I do not wonder you rise su late What o^clocJc may it be ? What o'clock do you think it is ? It has struck ten Rise quickly We will take a turn in the Park as soon as you are dressed. Diil. IX. Del almorzar. Dial IX. Of breakfasting. Quiere vm. almorzar ? Es tierapo de desayunarse ? Que gusta vm. para su almu- erzo ? Pan y manteca ? Molletes calientes ? Leche: tostadas? chocolate ? No ; todo eso es bueno para nifios Traiganos otra cosa Gustan vms. de jamon ? Si, traigalo, que cortaremos una tajada Ponga una servilleta en la me- sa, y denos platos, cuchillos y tenedores Lave los vasos De un asiento al Senor Tome vm. una silla y sientese Acerquese de la lumbre Estare bien aqui, no tengo frio Gustan vms. de huevos fres- cos? Han de ser pasados per agua 6 fritos ? Quite ese plato grande Coma vm. salchicha Probemos el vino Destape esa botella No tengo tirabuzon Will you breakfast ? Is it breakfast time ? What do you wish for your breakfast ? Bread and butter ? Hot loaves ? Milk? toasts? chocolate? No ; all that is fit for chiU dren Bring us something else Do you wish for ham ? Yes, bring it, we will cut a slice of it Lay a cloth upon the table, and give us plates, knives and forks Rinse the tumblers Give the gentleman a seat Take a chair and sit down Come near the fire I shall be well here, I am not cold Will you have new laid Must they be boiled or fried? Take that dish away ? Eat some sausage Let us taste the tcine Uncork that bottle I have no corkscrew 340 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Dome de beber Como lo halla vm. ? Que le parece 4 vm. ? Es bueno, no es malo De de beber al Senor Acabo de beber No come vm. Tanto he comido, que no tendre ganas a medio dia Se burla vm. ? nada casi ha comido Give me to drink How do you like it f What do you think of it ? It is good, it is not bad Give the gentleman drink I have just drank You do not eat I have eaten so much, that I shall have no appetite at noon / Do you Jest ? you have eaten scarcely any thing. D\k\ X. Antes de la comida. Dial, X. Before dinner. Es ya tiempo de comer ? Son cerca de las tres Es hora do comer Se atraso hoy la comida hasta las cuatro Quiere vm. hacer hoy peni- tencia con nosotros ? Si vm. quiere cenar bien^ venga a comer a mi casa Ponga la mesa, el mantel Traiga la comida Ponga los saleros y los platos en la mesa Lave, limpie los vasos Pongalos sobre el aparador Corte unos pedacitos de pan Ponga las sillas al rededor de la mesa con sus almohadillas Quien asiste a la mesa ? Han venido todos los convi- dados 6 huespedes ? Aun no, algunos faltan Donde estan los cuchillos, tenedores y cucharas ? Estan sobre el aparador Solo le he convidado para go- zar de su compariia Hara vm. penitencia Mande servir la cqmida Is it already dinner time ? It is near three o^ clock It is time to dine Dinner was put off to-day till four Will you make penance with us to-day ? If you wish to sup heartily, come and dine at my house Lay the table, the cloth Bring the dinner Put the salt'cr liars and plates upon the table Rinse or cleanse the tumblers Set them upon the side-board Cut a few slices of bread Set the chairs round the ta- ble ivith their cushions Who waits at the table ? Are all the invited persons or the guests come ? Not yet, some are wanting Where are the knives, forks, and spoons ? They are upon the sidv'^board I have invited you only to en- joy your company You will make penance Call for th^ dinner FAMILIAR DIALOGUE S4 ^41 Aun no esti pronta Ya esta. la comida on la moea Solo aguardan a vm., Senor Tocaron la campana Sientese vm. ^ la mesa Tome el primer asiento No permitire que este sentado alii Aqui se sentara vm. En verdad qne no lo hare Vamos, degemonos de cum- plimientos Para que tanta ceremonia ? Mas llaneza se ha de usar entre los amigos Vaya un poco mas atras, que tengamos lugar Bien cabemos todos Es monster que quepamos Tenemos mas huespedes de lo que pensabamos Faltan aqui dos cubiertos Muchacho, ve a buscar dos servilletas Dial. XI. Comiendo. he gusta ^ vm. la sopa a la Francesa? Si, como el caldo este bien hecho A mi, deme vm. de nuestra buena oUa Venga un poco de pan casero Tome vm. pan bianco Mas quiero este Este pan esta mohoso Pero este es muy sabroso Muchacho, danos pan tierno Raspa este pan Quiere vm. la corteza de en- cima 6 la debajo ? 29* It is not yet ready The dinner is already on the talrio ^ Sir, they only wait for you They rung the bell Sit down to the table Take thejirst place I will not suffer you to sit there You will sit here Indeed I shall not do it Come, let us forbear compli' ments Why so much ceremony ? More freedom should be used among friends Go a little farther back, that we may have room There is room for all We must all find place We have more company than ( we thought Two covers are wanted here Boy, go and fetch two nap* kins. Dial XI. At Dinner. Do you like French soup ? Yes, provided the broth is well made As for me, give me some of our good olla Bring a little household bread Take white bread I like this better This bread is mouldy But this is very sweet Boy, give us new bread Rasp this bread Do you wish the upper or under crust? 342 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Gusta vm. de este cocida ? Me servire a mi mismo Danos el plato grande Esta carne es muy sustanciosa Sij lo creo No come vra.j Senor Perdoneme vm., que como tanto como dos Que buenos principios ! Por ml, yo alabo este convite comiendo bien Pero aun no ha bebido vm. Muchacho, da de beber al Senor Echa de beber Llena la copa Sefiora, brindo por la salud de vm. Buen provecho haga 4 vmd. Senor, a la salud de sus ami- gos A' todos sus gustos A" sus inclinaciones Mucho favor me hace vm. Como halla vm. esta cerveza ? Es bastante buena Quiero probarla La hallo muy amarga Me quejare al cervecero Quite todo esto del medio Sirvan los segundos principios Es vm. buen bebedor y mal comedor No ve vm. que como y bebo bien Vamos, Senor, coma vm. de lo que gustare mas No lengo apetito Que le parece de esta lengua de buey, del picadillo, del guisado ? Will yon have some of ihi^ hailed meat ? If you please I loill help myself Give us the dish This meat is very juicy Yes^ I think so Sir, you do not eat Excuse me, I eat as much as two What a fine first course ! For my part, I commend this entertainment by eating ivell But you have not drank yet Boy, give the gentleman some drink Pour some drink Fill the glass Madam, I drink your health I thank you Sir, to the health of your friends To all your pleasures To your inclinations You are very kind How do you like this beer ? It is pretty good I laish to taste it I find it very bitter I will complain to the brewer Take away all these things Serve up the second course . You are a great drinker and a small eater Do you not see I eat and drink loell Come, Sir, eat of what you like most I have no appetite What do you say to this neafs tongue, to the min* ced meat, to the fricassee ? FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. S4S Quiere vm. que le sirva de estas perdices, de ese ca- pon, de los polios, 6 galU- netas ? Lo que 4 vm. le gustare Que quiere vmd. mas, un alon 6 una pierna ? Para mi es todo uno Coma vm. algunos rabanos para aguzar el apetito La hambre es la mejor salsa Ya he comido demasiado Denos mostaza A^ donde esta el raostacero ? Ya ve vm. que mesa tenemos No gastamos delicadeza Esto no se llama comer Tengo mucha sed Deme una copa de vino Vamos, Senor, por la salud del Presidente Vivan el Egercito y la Ar- mada Viva el Gobernador Le correspondere con mucho gusto Bebamos todos El vino es rauy esquisito Que le parece esta empanada de pichones? Esta muy buena y rauy bien sazonada Sabe vm. trinchar ? Trincho medianamente Le servire a vm. Conozco lo que le gusta Acertare con su gusto A todos sirve vm. y se olvida de si mismo Quite ese plato, venga el otro Shall I help you to a piece of these partridges^ of that capon, of the chickens or woodcocks ? What you please Which do you like best, a wing or a leg ? It is all one to me Eat some radishes to sharpen your appetite Hunger is the best sauce Ihave eaten too much already Give Its some mustard Wliere is the mustard-pot? You see now what table we keep We use no dainties This is not called eating I am vei^y thirsty Give me a glass of wine Come, Sir, to the health of the President Huzza for the Army and Navy Huzza for the Govemour 1 will pledge you with a great deal of pleasure Let us all drink The wine is very exquisite How do you like this pigeon pie ? It is very good and very well seasoned Can you carve ? 1 carve pretty well I will help you 1 know what you like 1 shall hit your taste You help every body andfo'r^ get yourself Take away that dish, bring the other 344 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Nos da vra. una comida de Rey, en lugar de un convite de amigo Pruebe de estos alcauciles Dame ese cuchillo Esta carne est a fria Recalientala en el brasero Hagame el favor de un poco de morcilla Esta carne esta cruda Corteme vmd. un poco de vaca Quiere vm. carnero, vaca 6 tern era ? Lo que gustare, Senor Asado 6 cocido ? Coma vm. zanahorias, nabos, chirivias y berza 6 col Tome vm. mostaza Le dare brazuelo 6 pierna de carnero ? Mas quiero un poco de lomo de ternera Vaya este plato al rededor de la mesa Ya ve vm.j Senor, como nos tratamos Este es el mejor plato de la mesa Aun no se le ha llegado Voy a probar de el Buen provecho haga a vmd. Le gusta d vmd. la leche co- cida ? Gusto mucho de cuajada, na- tilla y queso fresco Coma vra. de este manjar bianco Vaya un poco del estofado Las empanadas de carne nu- tren mas que las de man- zanas You give us a king^s feast ^ instead of a friendly en- tertainment Try these artichokes Give me that knife This meat is cold Warm it again on the cha- fing dish Favour me with a piece of pudding / This meat is raw Cut me a small 'piece of beef Will you have mutton^ beef or veal ? What you please, Sir Roasted or boiled meat ? Eat some carrots, turnips, parsnips and cabbage Take some mustard Shall I help you to some shoulder or leg of mutton? I prefer a piece of the loin of veal Let this dish go round the table Sir, you now see how we fare This is the best dish at table It has not yet been touched I am. going to taste it Much good may it do you Do you like boiled milk? 1 am very fond of curdsy cream and new cheese Eat of this blanc-manger Take some of the stewed fneat Meat pies nourish more than apple-pies FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 345 Que bellos postres ! La fruta corresponde 4 todo lo demas Ha recogido vm. las frutas mas esquisitas de la es- tacion Esta pasta 6 masa es muy li- gera y bien hecha La torta es muy buena Dame cerveza fuerte Da un plato limpio al Senor Siento no tengamos algo rae- jor He comido muy bien Creo que todos ban acabado Degemos la mesa Quita la mesa Demos gracias a Dios Vamos a dar un paseo en el jardin Vamos en hora buena Tengo muchq sueno Soy muy amigo de hacer la siesta Dial. XIL Para comprar lihros, Tiene vm. algimlibro nuevo ? Si, Senor; que especie de li- bros quiere vm. ? Le gustan a vm. libros de historia, de matematicas, de filosofiaj de teologia, de medicina, de derecho ? Noj Senor, busco libros de poesia Le puedo proveer de ellos en todas lenguas Pues tengo todos los poetas Griegos, Latinos, Espa- noles, Italianos, Franceses, e Ingleses What a fine dessert ! The fruit corresponds icith all the rest You have collected the most exquisite fruits of the sea- son This pastry is very light and well made The tart is very good Give rae some strong beer Give a clean plate to the gentleman I am sorry we have nothing better I have dined very icell I think every body has done Let us leave the table Remove the table Let us say grace Let 7is go and take a turn in the garden Let us go with all my heart 1 am very skepy I am very fond of talcing a nap after dinner. Dial Xn. To buy books. Have you any new book? Yes^ Sir; what sort of books do you wish ? Will you have books of his^ tory, mathematics J philos- ophy, divinity^ physic, or laiD ? No, Sir, lam looking for po^ etical works I can furnish you with them in all languages For I have all the Greeks Latin, Spanish, Italian, French, and English poets 346 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Muchos tengo yo de estos Que poetas necesita vra. pues comprar ? Virgilio en Latin, las coraedi- as de Calderon, y el Teatro de Feijoo en Espanol Tiene vmd. el Paraiso Per- dido de Milton, 6 las obras dramaticas de Shakspeare, en Ingles ? Tengo menester de la Gra- matica Italiana de Venero- ni, de los Egercicios de Bottarelli, y de las Come- dias de Goldoni Tiene vmd. la Gramatica Es- panola del Seiior Josse, y la de la Acaderaia ? Ti^ne vmd. la Historia de Inglaterra, de Francia, de Espanay de Italia? Todos esos libros tengo De que tamno son ? Los tengo en Folio, Cuarto, Octavo y Duodecimo H^garae vm el favor de en- senarmelos Los quiere vm. encuaderna- dos en badana, becerro, 6 cordoban ? Los quiere vm. dorados e in- titulados ? No hay necesidad de eso No los compro para adorno, sino para leerlos Esta em uadernadura no es buena No esta bien cosido este libro Ahi tiene vm. otro en su lugar Cuanto pide vm. por este li- bro? Le costard a vm. dos pesos Esto es demasiado I have many of them What poets do you want then to purchase ? Virgil in Latin, the plays of Calderon, and the Theatre ofFeijdo in Spanish Have you Milton^s Paradise Lost J or the plays of Shak- speare in English? I have need of VeneronVs Italian Grammar, Botta- rellPs Exercises, and Got- doni^s Comedies Have you the Spanish Gram^ mar of Mr. Josse, and that of the Academy? Have you the History of England, France, Spain and Italy ? I have all those books Of 20 hat size are they ? 1 have them in Folio, Quarto, Octavo and Duodecimo Do me the favour to show them to me Will you have them bound in sheep, calf, or morocco leather? Will you have them gilt on the back and lettered? There is no occasion for that 1 do not buy them for orna- ment, but to read them This binding is not good This book is not well sewed There is another in its stead How much do you ask for this book? It will cost you two dollars This is too much FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 347 Es el precio ultimo Le dare ^ vm. veinte reales Me sale 4 mas de lo que vmd. me ofrece por el Es muy caro Le aseguro 4 vm. que me cuesta peso y medio sin la encuadernadura No querr^t vm. que pierda en mis libros Muy al contrario, quiero que gane algo Es preciso pues que me de veinte y cuatro reales Ahi los tiene vm., no reparo en una cortedad No necesita vm. otros libros ? Por ahora no Pero he menester de papel plumas, tinta, lacre, y o- bleas No vendo nada de eso Pero lo hallara vm. todo en la tienda proxima que es de un papelero A' DioSj Senor Muy servidor de vm., cabal- lero Hagame vm. el favor de acor- darse de mi para otra vez Siempre esperimentar^ muy buen trato Lo espero Dial XIII. Del alquilar un alojamiento. Senor, quiere vm. hacerme un favor ? De muy buena gana, que me manda vm. ? Que venga vmd. conmigo, pa- ra alquilar un alojamiento It is the lowest price I will give you twenty rials It turns out to me more than you offer me for it It is very dear I assure you it costs me one dollar and a half without the binding You will not wish me to lose by my books Quite to the contrary , I wish you to gain something You must then give me four- and'twenty rials There you have them^ I do not mind a trifle Do you not want other books? Not at present But I have occasion for pa- per ^ pens, ink, sealing-wax^ and wafers I sell nothing of that But you willfnd it all at the next shop which is a Sta- tioner^s Farewell, Sir Sir, your most humble ser- vant Do me the favour to remem- ber me again You will alicays experience good treatment I hope so. Dial. XIII. Of hiring a lodging. Sir, will you do me a favour ? Very willingly, what do you command me ? That you would go with me to hire a lodging 348 PAMILIAK DIALOGUES. Le acompanare adonde qui- siere Vamos a la calle de Santiago Le voy siguiendo Aqui hay una cedula 4 esta puerta que dice cuartos de aiquilar Llame vm. 4 la puerta Quien es ? Gente de paz Con quien quiere vm. hablar ? Con el amo 6 ama de casa Aqui esta mi Senora Senora, tiene vm. cuartos de aiquilar ? Si, Senor, quiere vm. verlos ? Vine con esa intencion Cuantos aposentos necesita vm. ? Quiero uu comedor 6 sala, una alcobaj un gabinete pa- ra rai, y un desvanpara mi criado Han de ser sus cuartos alhaja- dos 6 no ? Han de ser alhajados Hagame el favor de esperar un rato en esta sala baja, mientras voy por las Haves Muy bien, Senora, aguardo Quiere vm. tomarse el traba- jo de subir ? Seguiremos 4 vm., Senora Esta es la vivienda del primer alto Ahi tiene vm. una cama muy buena y limpia Bien ve vm. que hay todo lo preciso en ui^ cuarto alha- jado I shall wait on you wherever you please Let us go into St, James^ street 1 follow you Here is a bill at this door which says rooms to let Knock at the door Who is there ? A friend, peaceable people Whom do you wish to speak with ? With the master or mistress of the house Here is my Lady Madam, ham you any rooms to let ? Yes, Sir, do you wish to see them ? I came on purpose How many apartments do you want ? I want a dining-room., a bed-- chamber, a closet for my- self, and a garret for my manservant Must your rooms be furnish* ed or not ? They must be furnished Be so kind as to wait a mo- ment in this lower parlour^ while I go for the keys Very well, Madam, Pll wait Willy 071 take the trouble to go vpf We will follow you. Madam This is the apartment on the first floor There you have a very good and clean bed You see that there is every thing necessary in a fur- nished room FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 349 Como mesa, espejo. sillas, al- fombras, alacenasj escapa- rates, &c. Pero adonde esta el gabinete ? Aqui esta, y es bastante capaz Me cuadra muy bien este alo- jamiento Mealegro mucho Cuanto pide vra. por semana ? Nunca alquilo mis cuartos sino por mes 6 por ano Bien, los tomare por mes ; cuanto es el precio de ellos ? Jamas tuve menos de diez guineas al mes por estos dos cuartos Son demnsiado caros Ha de considerar vm. que este es el mas hermoso bar- rio de la ciudad Y que esta vm. 4 un paso de la corte Para que vea vm. que no soy amigo de regatear, le dare ocho guineas por ellos Es demasiado poco, no sabe vm. la renta que pago por esta casa Nada me importa saberlo Pero en ima palabra, partire- mos la diforencia Yo le aseguro que pierdo Pero siento que vm. se vaya Y por el desvan de mi criado^ cuanto he de pagar por mes ? Me dara vm. dos guineas No dare mas de guinea y media 30 As table^ looking-glass ^chairs ^ carpetSy closets, p7'esses, ^c. But where is the closet ? Here it is, and is large enough These apartments suit me very well I am very glad of it How much do you ask a week ? I never let my apartments but hy the month or year Well, I shall take them hy the month ; what is the price of them ? 1 never had less than ten guineas a month for these two rooms They are too dear You ought to consider that this is the finest ward of the city And that you are within a step of the court That you may see that I do not like haggling, I will give you eight guineas for them It is too little, you do not know the rent I pay for this house It is no concern of mine to know it But in a word, we toill divide the difference I assure you that I lose But I (nn sorry to have you go away And for my man'^s garret, how much must I pay a month ? Yov will give me two guineas I shall give only one guinea and a half 350 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. No es bastante, pero lo hare por vm.5 sea asi No vale la pena de pararse en semejante cortedad Pero digame vm., no puedo yo comer aqui con vm.? Sij Senor, bien puede vm. Cuanto toma por semana de cada huesped ? A^ razon de ocho guineas al mes Y cuanto toma vm. por cuar- to y comida juntos ? Cinco libras por semana Pues, empezare manana Cuando gustare Buenas noches, Senora Buenas se las de Dios, Sefior Diil XIV. Del informarse de alguno, Quien es ese caballero ? Es un Ingles Le tuve por un Frances Se ha enganado vm. pues Sabe vm. donde vive ? Vive en el barrio de la corte Tiene casa ? No, Senor, vive en cuartos alhajados En casa de quien aloja? Vive en casa de fulano, en la calle de Que edad tiene ? Creo que tiene veinte y cinco anos No me parece tan viejo No puede ser mas mozo Es casado ? No, Senor, es soltero ]Est4n sus padres vivos ? It is not enough^ hut I will do it for you J let it be so It is not worth while to dwell on so small a matter But tell me, may I not hoard here ivith you ? Yes^Sir, you may How much do you take from each boarder a-week ? At the rate of eight guineas a month And how much do you take for hoard and lodging together ? Five pounds a-week Welly I shall begin to-morrom When you please Good nighty Madam Good nighty Sir, Dial. XIV. Of inquiring after one. Who is that gentleman ? He is an Englishman I took him for a Frenchman Then you have mistaken Do you know where he lives ? He lives in the ward of the court Does he keep house ? Noy Siry he lives in lodgings At whose house does he lodge ? He lodges at Mr. such a oncy in the street of How old is he ? I believe he is five and twenty years of age He does not appear to me so old He cannot be younger Is he married ? No, Siry he is a bachelor Are his parents living ? FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 351 Su madre aun vive, pero su padre murio dos anos ha Tiene herraanos y hermanas ? Dos hermanos y una hermana tiene Est4 su hermana casada ? Si, Sefior Con quien ? Con el Conde de Era pues partido rico Tuvo sesenta mil pesos de dote Es hermosa? No es fea Es bastante bonita Esta algo picada de viruelas Pero tiene mucho entendimi- ento Es muy ingeniosa Habla este caballero la lengua Espafiola ? Aunque es Ingles, habla tan bien Espafiol, que los Es- pafioles le creen Espanol Habla Italiano conao los Ita- lianos mismos Entre los Alemanes pasa por Aleman Como puede saber tantas len- guas diferentes ? Goza de una memoria feliz y ha viajado mucho Ha estado dos anos en Paris, seis meses en Madrid, ano y medio en Italia, y un afio en Alemania Ha visto todas las cortes de la Europa His mother is still alive ^ but his father died two years ago Has he any brothers and sis- ters ? He has two brothers and a sister Is his sister married ? Yes, Sir To whom ? To the Earl of She was then a rich match She had sixty thousand doh larsfor her portion Is she handsome ? She is not ugly She is pretty enough She is a little pitted with the small pox But she has a great deal of understanding She is very able^ very witty Does this gentleman speak the Spanish language ? Although he is an English- man, he speaks Spanish so well, that the Spaniards think him a Spaniard He speaks Italian like the Italians themselves He passes for a German among the Germans How can he know so many different languages ? He enjoys a happy memory and has travelled a great deal He has been two years at Paris, six months at Mad- rid, a year and a half in Italy, and a year in Ger- many He has seen all the courts of Europe 352 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Cuanto tiempo ha que le conoce vm. ? Al rededor de tres anos ha que tengo el honor de conocerle Donde hizo vm. conocimiento con el ? En Roma le conoci Es de bella estatura Ni demasiado alto, ni demasi- ado chico Se puede decir que es hombre garboso Siempre anda muy aseado y bien compuesto Se viste muy bien Es bien parecido, tiene buen aire Tiene bella presencia, y el aspecto noble Nada disgusta en sus modos Es cortes, afable, urbano con cualquiera Tiene mucho entendimiento, y es muy festivo en conver- sacion Danza bellamentej esgrime y monta mny bien Toca la flauta; el clave, la guitarra, el piano y otros muchos instrumontos En una palabra, es un cabal- lero cumplido y perfect© For el retrato que vm. hace de el, me da gana de cono- cerle Le procurare su conocimi- ento How long is it siiice yoii know him? It is about three years since I have the honour of being acquainted with him Where did you make ac- quaintance with him ? I got acquainted with him at Rome He is of a fine stature He is neither too tall, nor too short One may say he is an elegant man He is always very neat and very fine He dresses very well He is very genteely he has a good air He has a fine presence^ and a noble look "Nothing is disagreeable in his manners He is civily courteous, com- plaisant to every body He is very sensible, and is very sprightly in conver- sation He dances beautifully , fences and rides very loell He plays upon the flute ^ the harpsichord, the guitar, the piano and several other instruments In a word, he is an accom- plished and perfect gentle- man By the picture you make of him, you give me a desire to know him I will procure you his ac- quaintance FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 353 Se lo agradecere k vm. mu- cho CuaDdo quiere vm. que va- yamos a visitarle juntos? Cuando a vm. le gustare A^ que hora se puede verle en su casa ? A^ cualquiera hora puedo verle, pues es muy amigo mio Vamos pues a verle mafiana por la mafiana Sea en hora buena De todo mi corazon Cuando le conviniere A^ Dios, Caballero Servidor de vm. Soy muy suyo Tonga vm. buenas noches Muy buenas se las de Dios Did!. XV. Del partir. Sefior, vengo k despedirme de vm. Porque quiere vm. irse ? Se acerca la hora de comer No puede vm. comer con nosotros ? Se lo estimo mucho, no me es posible hoy Porque ? que negocios tiene vm. ? No tengo mucho que hacer, pero he de ir 4 comer a casa Ha convidado vm. ^ alguno a comer 4 su casa } No, pero he prometido ^ un caballero Ingles, que no sabe el Espafiol, de ir con el a comprar algunas me- nudencias A^ que hora le espera vm. ? 30* I shall he much obliged to you for it When win youhave us go and wait upon him together ? When you please At what o^clock may one see him at home ? I can see him at any time^for he is my intimate friend Let us go then and see him to-morrow morning I will ; well and good With all my heart When it suits you Farewell^ Sir Your servant I am truly yours I wish you a good night I wish you the same. Dial XV. Of departing. Sir^ I come to take leave of you Why will you go away ? Dinner ti?ne draws near CanH you dine with us ? I thank you for it, it is not in my power to-day Why ? what business have you ? I have not much to doj but I must go and dine at home Have you invited any body to dine at your house ? Noy hit I have promised an English gentleman^ who does not know Spanish, to go with him to buy some trifles At what hour do you expect him? 354 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, Le aguardo a las dos Esta vm. seguro de que venga? No lo se de cierto ; pero ha- biendoselo prometido, es preciso que este en casa Tiene vm* razon Ne le quiero pues detener Vaya vm. con Dios, seividor suyo Quede vm. con Dios Muchacho, abre la pueita al Senor Muy bien la abrire yo Pero no tiene vm. la Have Que ! echa vm. la Have a la puerta ? Asi lo acostumbramos Suplicole me ponga 4 los pies de mi Senora su her- mana No faltare a ello, Senor Cuando nos volveremos 4 ver? Manana, si Dios quiere Vendre a visitaile Hagame este favor Dial. XV L De noticias. Que se dice do bueno ? Que noticias tenemos ? No se ninguna Que se dice de nuevo ? Sabe vm. alguna novedad ? Que noticias corren ? No hay ninguna No he sabido nada de nuevo Ha leido vmd. los papeles ? He visto los Times, la Cro- nica, el Morning Fast Que se dice en la ciudad ? No se habia de nada I expect him at two o'clock Are you sure he will come 1- I do not knoiv it for certain ; but having promised it to him, it is necessary 1 should be at home You are in the right I will not detain you then Farewell, your servant Good bye Boy, open the door for the gentleman 1 will open it myself But you have not the key How ! do you lock your door ? So is our custom I beg you would present my respects to your sister Sir, 1 will not fail to do it When shall we see one another again ? To-morrow, if it please God I loill come to visit you Do me this favour. Dial XVI. Of news. What is said good ? What news have we ? I know none What do people say new ? Do you knoio any news ? What news are spread ? There is none 1 have heard nothing new Have you read the papers ? I have seen the Times, the Chronicle, the Morning Fost What do they say in the city ? They talk of nothing FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 355 He oido decir, he sabido que Esta es buena noticia No ha oido vm. hablar de la guerra ? No se dice nada de ella Se habla de un sitio Se dice que esta sitiada Se ha levantado el sitio Pero han vuelto a ponerle Ha habido algun combate naval ? Se decia, pero salio falso Al contrario, hablan de una batalla Esta novedad requiere confir- macion Quien se la coraunico ? De buena parte me viene El Senor N . . . . me la dijo Cree vm. que tengamos pa- ces ? Hay mucha apariencia Para conmigo, creo que no En que se funda vm. ? En que veo que los ^nimos de entrambas partes estan muy poco inclinados a la paz Sin embargo todos necesitan de la paz Sobre todo los comerciantes y mercaderes La guerra hace mucho dano al comercio Sin duda, la paz es mas ven- tajosa al comercio Que se dice en la corte ? Se habla de armar una flota de veinte navios de guerra Hablan de una espedicion I heard, I have knoicn that This is a good piece ofneics Have you not heard speak of the war ? Nothing is said of it They talk of a siege They say that is besieged They have raised the siege But they have laid it again Ha^ there been any sea- fight? They said so, but it proved false On the contrary, they talk of a battle This news requires confirma- tion Who communicated it to you? It comes to me from good aU" thority Mr, iV . . . . told it me Do you think we shall have a peace ? There is a great probability For my part, I believe not What grounds have you ? Because I see the minds of both parties are very little inclined to peace Every body wants peace^ however Especially merchants and traders War does a great detriment to trade Without question, peace is more advantageous to com- merce What do they say at court ? They talk of fitting out a fleet of twenty men of war They talk of an expedition 356 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Cuando se cree que la escua- dra saldra ? No se dice, no se sabe Adonde ira la Princesa ? Unos dicen a Windsor, otros a Kew Que dice la Gaceta? No la he leido Hablandole sinceramente, los designios de la corte son tan secretes que nadie puede saberlos Poco se me da de los nego- cios de estado No me meto jamas en arre- glar el estado Hablemos de noticias parti- culares Como esta el Senor D . . . . ? Cuando le ha visto vm. ? Ayer le vi Es verdad lo que dicen de el ? Que se dice de el ? Dicen que rino al juego Con quien ? Con un caballero Frances Han peleado ? Si, Senor, pelearon Esta herido ? Dicen que salio herido mor- talmente Lo siento, es hombre de bien Sobre que rifieron ? Lo ignoro enteramente Se dice que le desmintio No lo puedo creer Ni yo tampoco Sea lo que fuere, presto se sa- br^ En su casa lo preguntare When do they think thejleet will sail? It is not said, it is not known Where will the Princess go ? Some say to Windsor^ others to Kew What says the Gazette ? 1 have not read it To speak freely y the designs of the court are so secret , that nobody can know them I care little about state af fairs I never meddle with settling the nation Let us talk of private news How is Mr, D . . ..? When have you seen him ? I saw him yesterday Is what is said of him true ? What do they say of him ? They say that he quarrelled at the game With whom ? With a French gentleman Have they fought ? Yes J Sir, they fought Is he wounded? They say he came out mortal- ly wounded I am sorry for itj he is an honest man About what did they quarrel ? I am quite ignorant of it They say he gave him the lie I cannot believe it Nor I neither Be what it may, it will soon be known I will inquire about it at his house FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. '^bl Dial. XVII. Entre dos ami- gos. Que ! es vm. ? De donde viene^ que no me mira vmd. ? Cierto que no reparaba en vm. No le veia Pasa vm. cerca de mi, me toca con el codo, y no me ve ? Iba cavilando en algo Pensaba vm. quizas en su querida Oti'os negocios tengo en mi cabeza Que negocios ? Hallandome escaso de dine- ro, voy d ver 4 un sugeto que me debe E" iba pensando, sobre si le mandaria arrestar en caso de no pagarme Vive lejos de aqui ? -V cuatro pasos de aqui Esta vm. cierto de hallarle en casa ? Creo que le hall are a estas horas Se estara vm. mucho tiempo ? No un cuarto de hora Despache vm. pues, que le voy a esperar en este cafe Estare con vm. luego Ya de vuelta ? Como lo ve vm. Le hall^ vm, ? Si, Senor Le pago a vm. ? Dial XVir. Between two friends. What / is it you ? How comes it, that you do not look at me ? Indeed I did not take notice of you I did not see you You pass close by me, touch me with your elbow, and do not see me ? I was cogitating about some- thing Perhaps you icere thinking of your love I have other business in my head TV hat business ? Being in 2vant of money, I am going to see a person who owes me And I was thinking whether I should cause him to be arrested in case he does not pay me Does he live far from here ? Four steps from here Are you sure to find him at home? I believe I shall fi?id him at this time Shall you stay long ? Not a quarter of an hour Make haste then, 1 go and wait for you in this cafee- house I shall be zmth you presently Are you returned already ? Jls you see Did you fin d him ? Yes, Sir Did he pay you f 358 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Gracias & Dios Lo celebro mucho Pero si no le hubiera pagado, yo le hubiera prestado di- nero No le hubiera faltado dinero Mi bolsa estaba a su servicio Se lo estimo mucho Nos quedarnos aqui ? N05 vamos a beber una bo- tella, para pasar media hora juntos En hora buena, pero quiero pagarla yo Cuando se haya bebido ha- bl^aremos deeso Vamonos Le voy siguiendo Didl. XVIII. Del escribir una carta. No es hoy dia de correo ? Porque? Porque he de escribir una carta A' quien escribe vm. ? A^ mi hermano No est4 en la ciudad ? Noj Senor, est4 en el campo En que campo ? En las aguas de Tunbridge Cuanto tiempo hace ? Quince dias Deme vmd. una hoja de papel doradoj una pluma y tinta Entre vm. en mi gabinete, y hallara sob re la mesa reca- do de escribir No hay plumas Ahi estdn en el tintero Nada vales Thank God I am very glad of it But if he had not paid you^ 1 would have lent you money You should not have wanted] money My purse was at your service I am much obliged to you Shall we stay here ? Noy let us go and drink a bottle y to pass half an hour together With all my hearty but I will treat you We will talk of it when we ha^'e drank it Let us go away I am following you. Dial. XVIII. Of writing a letter. Is not this a post-day ? Why ? Because I have a letter to write Whom do you write to ? To my b? other Is he not in town ? Noy Sir, he is in the country In what part of the country ? He is at Tunbridge-wells How long since ? A fortnight Give me a sheet of gilt pa- per ^ a pen and ink Step in my closet^ and you will find upon the table what is necessary to write There are no pens There they are in the, ink- stand They are good for nothing FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 359 AUi hay otras No estan cortadas estas plu- mas Adonde esta su corta plumas? Sabe vm. cortar plumas ? Las corto a mi modo Esta no es mala Es bastantemente buena Mientras acabo esta carta, ha- game vmd. el favor de ha- cer un pliego de estos pa- peles Que sello quiere vm. que le ponga ? Sellela vm. con mis armas 6 con mi cifra Que lacre le he de poner ? Ponga vm. rojo 6 negro, no importa No bastaran obleas? Es lo mismo Ha puesto vm. la fecha ? Creo que si, pero no he fir- mado Que dia del mes tenemos ? El diez, el veinte, &c. Pliegue vm. esta carta Pongale el sobrescrito Cierrela vm. y sellela Adonde esti la arenilla ? En la salvadera Deseque su escritura con teleta Como envia vm. sus cartas ? Las remito por el harriero, 6 por el correo Mi criado las llevara al cor- reo, si vm. gustare confi- drselas Lleva las cartas del senor al correo, y no te se olvide el franquearlas No tengo dinero There are some others These pens are not inade Where is your pen-knife ? Can you make pens ? I make them after my fashion This is not had It is good enough While I finish this letter, be so kind as to make a pack- et of these papers What seal will yon have me put to it ? Seal it with my coat of arms or loith my cypher What imx shall I put to it ? Put either red or black, no matter Will not wafers suffice ? It is all one Have you put the date ? I believe I have, but I have not signed it What day of the month is this} The tenth, the twentieth, Sfc. Fold up this letter Put the superscription to it Close it and seal it Where is the sand? In the sand-box Dry your writing with hlot^ ting-paper How do you send your letters ? I send them by the carrier, or by the post My man shall carry them to the post, if you will trust thtm to him Carry the genthman^s letters to the post ofire, and do not forget to free them I have no money 360 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Ahl le tienes, ve presto y vuelve luego Estare de vuelta en menos de medio cuarto de hora Ha llegado el correo ? Ahora acaba de Uegar Hay cartas para mi ? Creo que si Porque no las has traido? Ann no se entregaban There is some^ go quick and come back immediateiy I will he back in less than half a quarter of an hour Has the mail come ? It is just arrived Are there letters for me ? I believe so Why did you not bring them ? They were not^ delivered yet. Di^l. XIX. Del trocar. Dial, XIX. Of exchanging. Quiere vm. trocar su reloj ? Con que ? Con mi espada 6 espadin En hora buena. pero cuanto me dara vm. de vueha ? Cuanto me pide vm. ? Me dara vm. doce pesos En cuanto aprecia vm. su reloj ? En treinta y seis pesos No vale tanto Es viejo Lo confiesoj pero anda bien No le volvere yo nada Mi espada vale tanto como su reloj Ciemmente se burla vm. No, Sewor Que espada es esta ? Acabo ie comprarla en la espaderia Es la gudrnicion de cobre dur-ido ? Bella pregunta no ve vm. que es de platH s;>bixdorada ? Es el pu'io de plata ? Sin duda que lo es Will you exchange your watch ? For what ? For my sword With all my heart, but how much will you give me in return ? How much do you ask me ? You will give me twelve dol- lars What do you value your ivntch at ? At thirty -six dollars It is not worth so much It is old I own it J but it goes ivell I loill return you nothing My sword is worth as much as your watch You joke surely No, Sir What sword it this ? I have just bought it at the stcord cutler^s Is the hilt of gilt copper ? A fine question ! do not you see it is silver gilt ? Is the hilt of silver ? Without doubt it is so FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 361 Cuanto 1<3 costo a vm. este espadin ? A^ como le sale ? JVIe cuesta treinta pesos Me ha de dar vm. pues seis pesos de vuelta No lo hare por cierto Bien, degese de ello Vea vm. si quiere trocar igual por igual.f^ Buena esta esta ! No es tan facil enganarrae como le parece Pues, vayasinnada de vuelta Hecho, en hora buena Dial. XX. De losjuegos en general; y -primer o de tl de los dados, Juega vm. algunas voces? ^\^ Senor, pero jamas juego sino para dlvertirme Mas, me parece, que el juego es una diversion muy peli- grosa '^i, cuando se juega mucho dinero Pero siempre juego poco di- nero Con que la perdida 6 ganan- cia es una €ortedad Juega vm. 4 los juegos de suerte, 6 de habilidad ? Que enti«nde vm. por juegos* de suerte ? Juegos de naipes, dados, &c. Y por los de habilidad ? El agedrez, las damas, los bolos, el truco, &c. Juega vm. mucho d los da- dos ? Muy rara vez Porque ? 31 How much did this sword cost you ? What does it come to you at ? It costs me thirty dollars You must give me six dollars to boot then I will not do it certainly Well, leave it See whether you wilt change even ? This is a good one ! It is not so easy to take me in as you think Well, exchange even Done, with all my heart. Dial XX. Of gaming, in general ; and first of that of dice. Do you play sometimes ? Yes, Sir, but I never play only to divert myself But, methinks, gaming is a vci J dangerous diversion Yes, when one plays deep, high, or for much money But I alio ays play for a small matter or little money And so the loss or gain is in- considerable Do you play at games of chance, or of skill? What do you mean by games of chance ? Games at cards, dice, 8fc. And by those of skill? Chess, draughts, bowls, bil- liards, ^c. Do you play a great deal at dice ? Very seldom Why ? 362 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, Porque hay muchos trampo- sos muy astutos Se corre mucho riesgo con esos rateros, pues parecen hombres de forma Tienen dados falsos Vaya, a que juego jugaremos? A^ el que vm. quisiere Jugaremos k los naipes? Como le gustare Juguemos al hombre, d los cientos Vayan los cientos Es un juego muy de moda Denos dos barajas y unos tantos Que jugaremos ^ cada juego ? Juguemos un peso para pasar el tiempo Jugamos partida doble ? Como quisiere Cuantos tantos me da.vm. ? Me pide vm. tantos yjuega tambien como yo Est^ cabal esta baraja ? No, le falta un naipe Quite vmd los naipes bajos Veamos quien da Soy mano Vm. da el naipe Barage vm. las cartas Todas las figuras estan juntas De vm los naipes A'' mi me falta una carta Vuelva vm. ^ dar Levante vm. Tiene vm. sus cartas ? Creo que est^n cabales Ha descartado vm. ? Cuantas toma vm. ? Because there are many dex- terous sharpers One runs a great danger with those cheats, because they appear like gentlemen They have loaded dice Welly what game shall we play at ? Which you please Shall we play at cards ? As you please ' Let us play at ombre, at piquet ^ Let us play at piquet It is a game much in fashion Give us two packs and some counters What shall we play each game ? Let us play a dollar to pass away time Do we play lurches ? As you please What odds do you give me ? You ask me odds and you play as well as I Is this pack whole ? No, a card is wanting to it Throw out the low cards Let us see who deals I have the hand You deal the cards Shuffle the cards All the court-cards are to- get her Deal away I want a card Deal again Cut, rise Have you your cards? I believe thpy are exact Have you discarded ? How many do you take in ? FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 363 Tomolas todas No, dejo una Tengo mal juego Ha de tener vm bello juego, pues yo nada tengo Mi juego me apura Diga vm su juego Cuanto de punto ? Cincuenta, sesenta, &c. Bueno, buen punto No sirven He descartado la partida Sesta mayor, quinta al Hey, 6 cuarta de caballo, tercera a la sota 6 de diez Otro tanto tengo, igual Tres ases, tres reyes, &c. son buenos ? No, tengo un catorce Tengo catorce de caballos Vaya jugando Juego copa, espada, oro, basto El as, el rey, el caballo, la sota, el diez, el nueve, el ocho, el siete Hago un pique, repique, ca- pote Gano los naipes Tengo siete bazas He perdido Ha ganado vm. Me debe vm. un peso Me lo debia vm. Estamos pues en paz Vaya otra partida En bora buena, con mucho gusto Dial. XXI. Del jugar al agtdrez. En que emplearemos la tar- de? I take them all Noy I leave one I have bad cards, a bad game You must have good cards, since I have nothing My cards puzzle me Call your game How much is your point ? Fifty, sixty, ^c. Good, it is a good point They are not good I have laid out the game Asixieme major, a quint to the king, or quart to the queen, a tierce to the knave or ten Ihave just as much, it is equal Are three aces, three kings, 8fc. good? No, 1 have fourteen I am fourteen by queens Play on I play a heart, spade, dia- mond, club The ace, the king, the queen, the knave, the ten, the nine, the eight, the seven I make a pique, repique, a capot I loin the cards I have seven tricks I have lost You have won You owe me a dollar You owed it to me We are then even, quits Let us play another game With all my heart, with great pleasure Dial. XXI. Of playing at chess. How shall we spend the after- noon ? 364. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Juguemos al agedrez JuguemoSj en hora biiena Pero juega vm. mejor que yo Es vm. mas fuerte que yo Nolo crea vm. Me ha ganado vm. siempre No jugare mas con vm., si no me diere alguna ventaja Es preciso que me de un alfil y la mano En verdad que no puedo, ju- ega vm. tan bien como yo Vea vm. si quiere jugar i la par Muy bien, lo hare una vez Cuanto jugaremos ? Siempre juego poco dinero Vaya medio peso cada juego Juego primero Tomo este peon Me alegro, pues voy a tomar este alfil y darle jaque Roque me llamo Nada gana vm. en eso, pues ci su roque 6 torre me llevo con mi caballo Pero como resguardara \~m. 6b su reina ? Dandole jaque y mate con ml aliil y mi roque He perdido el juego, ya no puedo mover el rey Me debe vm. pues medio peso Asi es Pero vm. me lo debia antes Bien, estamos en paz Denos vm. un tablero Juegue vm. primero Soplo este peon Haga darna este peon Let us play at chess Let us play, I am ivilling But you play better than I You are an over-match for me Do not think it You always have beat me I icill play no more with you, unless you give me some odds You must give me a bishop and the move , Indeed I cannot, you play as tvell as I do See if you have a mind to play even Well, Iivill do it for once What shall ice play for ? I ahvoys play for a small matter Let us play for half a dollar a game I have the move I take this pawn I am glad of it, fori am go- ing to take this bishop and check you I castle You get nothing by that ; for I take your rook or castle with my knight Bat how will you save your que en ? By checkmating you with my bishop and rook I have lost the game, I can no longer move the king You owe me half a dollar then It is so But you owed it me before Then, we are quits or even Give us a draughts-board I give you the move, play first I huff this man King that man FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 365 Cuantas damas tiene vm. ? Tengo dos Coma vm, este, que luego co- mere tres Pierdo el juego Dial XXII. Del jugar a la pelota, Vea vm. que bello dia hace Aprovechemonos de este dia tan hermoso Que haremos hoy ? El buen tiempo nos convida a jugar 6 4 pa sear En que juego hemes de en- tretenernos ? El de pelota es el mejor pa- ra el egercicio Pero es juego mas de invier- no que de verano Sudaremos menos, si jugamos con raquetas Vamos al juego de pelota Jugaremos con palas Hagaraos la partida Esta vm. commigo No importa como estaraos Este esta con nosotros Es vm. mejor jugador que yo Estese cada uno en su lugar Mantengase detras de mi, y cojala pelota Paso por encima de mi La cogi en el aire Rechace la pelota Es vm. mal companero No ha ganado vm. aun Aun puede vm. perder Tenemos la superioridad Perdio vm., ganamos Cuanto jugamos? 31* How many kings have you ? I have two Take this^ then I shall take three I lose the game. Dial XXII. Of playing at tennis. See what a fine day it is Let us improve this so fair a day What shall ive do to-day ? Thejine weather invites us to play or to walk What play shall we amuse ourselves at ? That of tennis is the best for exercise But it is a play fitter for ivinter than summer We shall perspire less, if we play with rackets Let us go to the tennis-court We will play with battledoors Let us make the match You are with me It is no matter who and who He is on our side You are a better player than 1 Let every one stand at his place Stand behind me^ and catch the ball It flew over me I caught it in the air Strike the ball back You are a bad second You have not beat yet You may lose yet We have the best of it You have lost^ we have won What did tee play for ? 266 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, Dos pesos Ha puesto vm. en el juego ? No, pero ahi esta mi dinero Es lo mismo Mariana jugaremos otra vez Cuando vind. quisiere Dial. XXI If. I)e las diver- siones del campoy particu- larmente de la caza y de la pesca, Senor, me alegro de ver a vm. ; adonde ha estado tan largo tiempo ? Adonde se mete vm.? Dos meses ha que estamos en una casa de campo Ha venido vm. a la ciudad para quedarse ? No, Senor, vuelvo matiana por la manana Como pasa vm. su tiempo en el campo ? Parte de el empleo enestudiar Pero cuales son sus diver- siones, despues de sus ne- gocios series ? Voy tal vez a cazar A^ que caza ? A^ voces a la caza del venado, 4 voces de la liebre Tiene vm. buenos perros ? Tenemos muchos perros de muestra Dos galgos, dos galgas, cua- tro jateos, y tres perdi- No caza vm. aves ? Caza vm. a voces con la es- copeta ? Si, JSefior, muy a menudo Sobre que tira vm. ? Two dollars Have you staked? Noy but there is my money It is all one To-morrow we will play again When you please. Dial XXni. Of country sports, especially of hunt- ing and fishing. Sir, I am overjoyed to see you ; where have you been so long a while ? Where do you keep yourself? We have been these two months at a country-house Are you come to town to stay ? Noy Sir, I go back to-morrow morning How do you pass your time in the country? I bestow a part of it on books But which are your diver- sions, after your serious busiriess ? I go sometimes a hunting What do you hunt ? We sometimes hunt a stag, sometimes a hare Have you good dogs? We have a large pack of hounds Two grey-hound dogs, two grey-hound bitches, four tenners, and three setting- dogs Do you not go a fowling ? Do you go a shooting some- times ? Yes, Sir, very often What do you shoot at ? FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 367 Sobre todo genero de caza, como perdices, faisanesj gallinetas, conejos, Szc. Tira vm. al vuelo la pieza 6 corriendo ? De ambas maneras Corao coge vm los conejos ? A' veces con redes, y a veces 4 escopetazos Y las codornices ? Soleraos tomarlas con una red y un perro perdiguero Es vm. amigo de pescar ? Muchisimo Pesca vm. a menudo con red ? Muy raras veces Mas quiero pescar con la cafia y anzuelo La pesca y la caza son diver- siones muy nobles El Rey mas rico y mas pobre de Europa no se divierte en otra cosa Un dia quiza pensaran sus ministros que sus vasallos estan anualmente dando 4 sus vecinos millones por pescado salado y bediondo Tienen no obstante muy bu- enos peces en sus costas Pero no toman el trabajo de curarlos Esto sucede por falta de ani- mar la pesca Y de otros muchos motives Coge vm. muchos peces en su estanque ? Que hace vm. cuando no caza 6 pesca ? Jugamos a la bola, al truco, 6 a los bolos Segun esto, no puede vm. es- tar cansado del campo.^ Ml manner of game, as part- ridges, pheasants, sand- pipers, rabbits, ^c. Do you shoot fiying or run- ning ? Both ways How do you catch rabbits ? Sometimes with nets, and sometimes with a gun And the quails ? We catch them most commonly with a net and a setting-dog Do you like fishing? Extremely Do you fish often with a net ? Very seldom I prefer fishing with a line and hook Fishing and hunting are very noble diversions The richest and poorest king of Europe has no other diversion One day perhaps their minis- ters will think of their sub- jects giving aioay yearly to their neighbours millions for stinking salt-fish They have notwithstanding very goodfish on their coast But they do not take the trou- ble to cure it This arises from not giving encouragement to fisheries And from many other causes Do you catch much fish in your pond ? What do you do when you neither hunt nor fish? We pifiy at bowls, at bil- liards, or nine-pins According to this, you cannot be tired with the country ? 368 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Asi le parece d vm. y es lo contrario Ya empiezo a desear la ciu- dad, y espero presto pa- sarme 4 ella Dial. XXIV. Del ir a la corned la. Se dice que hoy representan una pieza nueva Es comedia, tragedia, opera, 6 entremes? Es una tragedia Como la lltiman ? La Quien es su autor ? El Senor Es esta la primera represen- tacion ? No, Senor, ya se ha represen- tado tres veces Este es el dia del autor Como se recibio en las pri- meras representaciones Con universal aplauso El autor era ya celebre Y esta ultima tragedia ha au- mentado mucho su fama Iremos a verla ? De muy buena gana Yoy a mandar al cochero que apronte el coche Iremos a un aposento ? En hora buena, pero mas quisiera ir al patio Porque ? Porque podemos ver y oir mejor all^ que en los palcos Que tal le parece la sinfonia? Muy buena me parece Los corredores est^n ya llenos So it seems to you^ and it is otherwise I already begin to long for the city^ and I hope short- ly to proceed to it. Dm/. XXIV. Of going to the play. They say there is a new play acted to day / Is it a comedy J a tragedy^ an ojjera, or a farce ? It is a tragedy How do they name it The Who is its author? Mr. Is this the first representa- tion ? Noy Sir, it has been already acted three times This is the author\s night Ho7v was it received on the first representations ? With universal applause The author was already fa- mous And this last tragedy has much increased his fame Shall we go and see it ? With all my heart I am going to bid the coach- man to get the coach ready Shall we go to a box ? As you please^ but I had leather go to the pit WJiy ? Because we can see and hear better there than in the boxes How do you like the overture ? I think it is very fine The galleries are full already FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 369 Y como vni. lo ve, estamos muy apretados en el patio No cabeii las damas en los aposentos Nunca vi la casa tan llena Estas Senoras estan muy bien vestidas Ye vrn. aquella senora en el apcsento del Rey Jamas he visto rostro tan her- moso en mi vida Quien es ? La Duquesa de Y quien es la Senora joven que esta con ella? Su hermana, la Senora de Pero ya se levanta la cortina, escuchemos Tendremos antes el Prologo El segundo acto esta acabado Las escenas estan muy bellas Don es muy buen actor Este es el ultimo acto Acabose la pieza — como le gusta a vmd. ? MuchisimOj me parece esce- lente tragedia y muy bien representada Tuvo grande aplauso Abora tendremos el Epilogo Quien lo dice ? La Senora Lo dice con mucho animo Quiere vmd. qnedar para ver la Pantomima ? No, ya la he visto, y como es tarde, haremos mejor de irnos De todo mi corazon Iremos a la O^pera manaiia And as yon see, we are very much crowded in the pit The ladies cannot be contain- ed in the boxes I never saw the house so full These ladies are very well dressed Do you observe that lady in the King^s box 1 never have in my life seen so beautiful a face Who is she ? The Duchess of And who is that young lady who is with her ? Her sister, Lady But the curtain 7'ises cdready^ let ns attend We shcUl first have the Pro- logue The second act is over The scenes are very fne Mr. - — is a very good actor This is the last act The piece is over — how do you like it ? Very much ; I think it an excellent tragedy and very well performed It recieved great applause Now for the Epilogue Who speaks it ? Mrs. She speaks it ivith great spirit Will you stay to see the Pan- tomime ? No, I have seen it already^ and as it is late, we had better go away With all my heart We will go to the opera t^ morroiv. 370 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, Dial. XXV. Del vestirse. Dial. XXV. Of dressing oneself. Senor Maestro, trae vm. mi yestido entero? Si, Senor, aqui est^ Le estaba aguardando ; prue- bemelo Quiere vm. probar la casaca ? Veamos si esta bien hecha Creo que le gustar^ 4 vm. Me parece muy larga Ya no se llevan tan cortas como antes Se usan largas ahora Abotoneme vm. Me ajusta demasiado Es preciso que ajuste bien Este vestido le coge muy bien el talle No son las mangas demasiado largas y anchas ? No, Senor, van muy bien Se llevan ahora muy largas y anchas Los pantalones son demasia- do cortos Los calzones son muy estre- chos Es la moda Deme la chupa Le va muy bien este vestido Pero las medias no vienen con este pano Que le parece demi sombrero? Es un castor hermoso Que galon le pondra vm. ? Un galon de oro con una he- billa de diamantes Me compro vm. las ligas co- mo le dige? Si, Senor, ahi estan Master, do you bring my full suit of clothes? Yes, Sir, here it is I was icaiting for you ; try it on me Will you try the coat ? Let us see if it is well made I believe it will ptease you It seems to me very long They do not wear them now so short as formerly They wear them long now Button me It is too close It ought to be very close This suit fits your shape very well Are not the sleeves too long and too wide ? No, Sir^ they fit very well They wear them now very long and wide The pantaloons are too short The breeches are very strait It is the fashion Give me the waistcoat This suit becomes you very well But the stockings do not match this cloth What do you say to my hat ? It is a beautiful beaver What lace will you put to it ? A gold lace with a diamond buckle Did you buy me the garters as I told you ? Yes, Siry there they are FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 371 Son estas medias de seda de Paris 6 de Londres ? Son de Francia Cuanto las venden ? Tres pesos el par Es bastante barato, siendo tan finas Muchacho, ha venido el za- patero ? No, Senor, no ha venido Corre pues k su casa, y dile que me traiga mis zapatos Senor, aqui esta, le encontre en el camino Son estos mis zapatos ? Si, Sefior Pongamelos vm. Estan muy ajustados Me aprietan un poco Pongalos en la horma para ensancharlos Bastantemente se ensancha- ran llevandolos Esta piel da de si como un guante Siento muy bien que me las- timaran Mis callos lo padeceran Me duelen mucho los pies El empeine de este zapato no vnle nada El talon es demasiado bajo Las suelas no son bastante fu- ertes ni gruesas Hagame vm. otro par Es vm., Senor, muy dif icil de contentar Quiere vm probar otro par que trage por acaso ? En hora buena Creo que le iran bien Mi pie esta mas descansado Are these silk stockings from Paris or London ? They are from France How much do they sell them for ? Three dollars a pair It is cheap enough^ being so fine Boy J is the shoemaker come ? Noy Sir^ he is not come Run then to his house, and hid him bring me my shoes Sir, here he is, I met him on the way Are these my shoes f Yes, Sir Put them on me They are too tight They pinch me a little Put them on the last to widen them They will widen enough by wearing them This leather stretches like a glove If eel very sure that they will hurt me My corns will suffer for it My feet ache much The upper-leather of this shoe is good for nothing The heel is too low The soles are neither strong nor thick enough Make me another pair You are. Sir, very hard to please Will you try another pair which I brought by chance? lam willing I believe they ivillfit you My foot is more at ease 372 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Cuanto valen estos zapatos ? A^ como los vende vm. ? Dos pesos y medio Es demasiado caro Es precio hecho Es uii zapato bien hecho y bien cosldo Hagame otro par como este Tome mi medida Ahi tiene su diiiero Viva vm. muchos anos, ca- ballero Di41. XXVI. Del hahlar a un n^ozo de caballos. Almohaza mi caballo Estriega y limpiale bien con un manojo de paja Mi caballo esta sin herra- duras Le faltan dos herradurras Llevale 4 casa del herrador Mandalo herrar Llevalo despues al rio Le has dado de beber? Sij Senor Dale su pienso de cebada Paseale esta tarde Dale tambien salvado Ha comido su cebada ? E^chale paja ahora Ensilla mi caballo y tr^emelo Tomale por el freno No le hagas correr No le recalientes Esta can sad o ? Quitale el freno Ponle en la caballeriza What are these shoes worth .^ How much do you sell them at? Iwo dollars and a half It is too dear It is ajixedprice It is a shoe well made and well stitched Make me another pair like this Take iny measure There is your ntoney May you live many years. Sir 1 thank you, Sir. Dial. XXVI. Of speaking to a groom. Curry my horse Rub and clean him loell with a loisp of straw My horse is unshod; is with- out shoes He IV ants two shoes Take him to the farrier Get him shod Lead him afterwards to the river Have you watered him ? Yes, Sir Give him his allowance of barley Walk him this afternoon Give him also some bran Has he eaten his barley ? Give him now some straw Saddle my horse and bring him to me Take him by the bridle Do not make him run Do not overheat him Is he tired ? Unbridle him Put him in the stable. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 373 Diil. XXVII. De ir a un viage. Vengo a despedinne de vin. y a recibir sus ordenes Adonde va vin., Senor ? Voy a Madrid Cuando parte vm.? En este instante Va vm. a caballo 6 en coche ? A^ caballo Muchacho, traeme mi caballo Aqui esta, Senor Esta bien almohazado ? Muy bien, Seaor Cuantas les^uas hav de aqui a M 1? Diez leguas Son leguas largas ? No, Senor, son las mas cortas de Espana Le parece a vm, que poda- mos caminar tanto hoy ? Sin duda, no es tan tarda Daran presto las doce Tiene vm. bastante tiempo para llegar antes de po- nerse el sol Hay buen camino ? Muy hermoso Ningun pantano se encuentra Pero tiene vm. bosques que atravesar y rios que pasar Hay peligro en el camino re d r IS'o se h3bla de que bay a la- drones en los bosques ? No se dice nada de esto No hay que temer nada ni de dia ni de noche 32 Dial XXVII. Of going on a journey. I come to bid you farewell and take your co nmands Where are you goings Sir '? I am going to Madrid When do you set out ? Presently ; this minute Do you go on horseback or in a coach ? On horseback Boy, bring me my horse Here he is, Sir Is he well curried? Very well, ^Sir How many leagues is it from here to M ? Ten leagues Are they long leagues ? JSo, Sir, they are the shortest in Spain Do you think we can travel so far to day "? Without doubt ^ it is not so late Twelve o'clock will soon strike You have time enough to ar- rive before the sun sets Is there a good road? Very fine You meet with no quagmire But you have woods to go through and i^ivers to cross Is there any danger upon the highway? Do you hear whether there are any highioaymen in the woods ? There is no talk of it There in nothing to fear either by day or night 374 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Es un camino en que anda gente siempre Que camino he de tomar ? Cuando este vm. cerca de la primera aldea, tomara 4 mano derecha He de subir el monte ? Noj Senor, degelo vm. a la izquierda Es el enmino dificultoso en losbosques ? No, Sefior ; vaya vm. siempre derecho, no se puede estra- viar Adonde encontraremos el rio ? A' la salida del bosque Se puede vadear, es vade- able? No, Sefior, se pasa en un barco Vamos, caballeros, montemos A^ Dios, Senores Dios les de buen viage Les doy muchas gracias JVo quiere vm. echar un trago ? Como vmd. gustare Vaya, 4 su buen viage It is a road where you always meet with people Which ivay must I tales ? When you are near the first village^ you will take to the right Must I go up the hill? No, Sir, leave it to the left Is the way di^cult through the 2coods ? No, Sir ; go straight along, you cannot lose your way JVhere shall we come to the river ? As you come out of the wood Can one ford it, is it forda- hie? No, Sir, people ferry it over Come, gentlemen, let us mount Farewell, gentlemen I wish you a good journey I give you many thanks Will you not take the parting glass ? As you please Come, to your good journey. Di41. XXVIII. En una po- Dial XXVIII. In an Inn. Where is the best inn in the city ? At the sign of the White Horse In what part of the town is it? Near the principal church Can we lodge here ? Yes, Sir, we have fine cham- hers and good beds Let us alight, gentlemen Donde estd la mejor posada de la ciudad ? Al signo del Caballo Blanco En que parage de la villa est4 ? Cerca de la iglesia mayor Podremos alojarnos aqui ? Si, Senor, tenemos bellos cu- artos y buenas camas Apeemonos, Senores FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 375 Donde esta el mozo de cabal- los ? Aqui estoy, Sefior Toma nuestros caballos Llevalos a la caballeriza Cuidalos bien Veamos, ahora, que nos dar4 vm. de cenar ? Vean vms., Senores, lo que mas gustaren Denos media docena de pi- chones, dos perdices, seis codornices, un buen capon y una ensalada Tendre cuidado de todo ; no se inquieten vms. No quieren vms. otra cosa ? N05 basta con esto ; pero de- nos buen vino y fruta Les aseguro que les dare gusto Quieren vms. ir 4 ver sus aposentos ? Si, llame ^ su camarero Al umbra a estos Senores que suban Haganos cenar cuanto antes Antes que se hayan quitado las botas, estara la cena pronta A donde estan nuestros laca- yos ? Ahi suben con sus balijas Han traido nuestras pistolas ? Si, Sefior, aqui estan Quita mis botines y ve des- pues a cuidar de nuestros caballos IJama para cenar Where is the hostler. or groom '. Here 1 am, Sir Take our horses Lead them to the stable Take good care of them ISoWy let us see J ivhat ivill yon give us for supper ? See yourselves, gentlemen, what you have most a mind to Give us half a dozen pigeons, a brace of partridges, six quails, a good ca^on and a sallad I will take care of all ; do not trouble yourselves Will you have nothing else ? No, that is enough ; hit give us good ivine and fruit I shall please you, I warrant you Will you go and see your chambers ? Yes, call your chamberlain Light the gentlemen that they may go up stairs Give us our supper as soon as possible Before your boots are pulled off, supper will be got ready Where are our servants ? There they are going up with your portmanteaux Have they brought our pis- tols? Yes, Sir, here they are Pull off my boots and then go and take care of our horses Call foi^supper 376 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Senores, la cena estd pronta, est4 en la mesa Vamos, Senores, a cenar, para poder acostarnos tem- prano Sentemonos a la mesa Vm. no come nada ; que tiene ? No tengo ganas, estoy cansado Estoy molido Estare mejor en la cama que en la mesa Tome vmd. dnimo Si se siente malo vayase a acostar Mande calentar su cama Que no les impida de cenar, voy ^ descansar Ha menester vm. algo ? Nada quiero sino descansar Tengan vms. buenas noches Trae los postres^ y di 4 la patrona que venga ^ ha- blarnos Aqui viene Senores, les gusta a vms. la cena ? Si, Sefiora, pero ahora es menester satisfacer a vm. Cuanto hemos gastado ? Que hemos de pagar ? El escote no sube mucho Vea vm. cuanto le debemos por nosotros, nuestros cria- dos y caballos Por la cena, la cama y el al- muerzo Todo importa diez pesos Me parece que es demasiado Al contrario, es muy barato Gentlemen^ supper is ready » it is on the table Let us go to supper, gentle- men, that we may go to bed early Let us sit down at table You eat nothing ; lohat ails you? I have no appetite, lam tired I am bruised all Qver I shall be better in bed than at table Take courage If youjind yourself ill go to bed Get your bed icarmed That I may not hinder you from sapping J I am going to rest Do you want any thing ? I want nothing but rest I wish you a good night Bring ike dessert, and bid the landlady come and speak with us Here she is coming Gentlemen, are you pleased with your supper ? Yes, mistress, but now we must satisfy you How much have rve spent ? What have we to pay ? The reckoning is not high See how much we owe you for ourselves, our men and our horses For the supper, bed and breakfast All amounts to ten dollars I think it is too much On the contrary, it is rer^ cheap T\ FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 377 Maga vm. mismo la cuentaj y hallara que no les pido demasiado Pagareraosle mafiana por la mafiana despues del almu- erzo Como vms. quisieren Denos sabanas limpias Las sabanas que les envio son rauy buenas Buenas noches, Sefiora Buenas noches les de Dios a vms., caballeros ; servidora de vms. Necesitan vms. de algo ? Nad a nos hace falta Solo que se haga buen fuego Las noches son muy frias Es menester cuidarse en viage Didl. XXIX. Para hahlar con los empleados en la^ aduanas, Traen vms. algo contra las ordenes de su magestad, del soberano, 6 de la re- publica ? No, yo no tengo contrabando alguno Tengo solamente algunos efectos que pagan impues- tos, y voy 4 declararselos Cuanto debo pagar por esto ? Es menester darme sus Haves Helas aqui. Hagame vmd. la gracia de despacharme luego, porque tengo mucha prisa Se lo estimare mucho 32* Reckon yourself^ and you will find that I do not ask you too much We will pay you to-morrow morning after breakfast As you please Let us have clean sheets The sheets I send you are very good Good nighty landlady Good nighty gentlemen ; I am your servant Do you want any thing ? We are in want of nothing Only that a good fire be made The nights are very cold One must take care of one^s- self on a journey. Dial XXIX. To speak with the officers in the custom- houses. Do you bring any thing con- trary to the decrees of his majesty, of the sovereign^ or republic ? No, I have no contraband goods at all I have only some good^ that pay duty, and I am going to manifest them to you How much have I to pay for this ? You 7nust give me your keys Here they are. Be so kind as to expedite me directly, for I am in great haste I shall be much obliged to you for it 378 FAMILIAR DIALOGUESr Ahi tiene vmd. la Have del candado ; he aqui la Have de la cerradura Hagame vmd. la gracia de buscar con precaucion, porque hay muchas cosas que pueden quebrarse Ha acabado vmd. ? No emplomara vmd. ahora el haul y los cofres, para que no me los registren otra vez ? No podria vm., en lugar de registrarrae aqui en esta puerta, venir a hacerlo en la fonda, 6 en la casa adonde voy a posar ? Gracias, paselo vmd. bien. Dios guarde 4 vmd., S°^ Di41. XXX. Para una per- sona estraviada en una ciudad. No me haria vmd. el favor de decirmCj si estoy lejos del barrio de San Francisco, 6 de la calle de San Pablo ? Hay muy lejos de aqui a ? Busco la posada del Senor 6 de la Senora Por que lado debo ir ? Despuesj dare vuelta a la de- recha o a la izquierda ? Es aqui que vive el Senor ? Quisiera vm, darme su direc- cion ? Podria vmd. senalarme el camino que debo tomar, para ir a casa del Se- nor ? JViere is the key to the pad- lock ; here is the keij to the lock Do me the favour to search with care, for there is much brittle ivare therein Have you done ? IFill you not put a lead stamp now upon the trunk and chests, that ihey may not be searched again? Could not you, instead of searching me here at this gate, couie and do it at the inn, or house where I am going to lodge ? 1 thank you, farewell. Your servant, Sir, Dial. XXX. For a person who has lost bis way in a city. Would you not oblige me so far as to tell me, whether I am a great ivayfrom the Ward of St. Francis, or Street of St. Paul? Is it far from here to ? I am looking for the resi- dence of Mr. —, or Madam Which way must I go ? Shall I turn, afterwards, to the right or left ? Does Mr, — — live here ? Would you favour me with his address ? Could you point out to me the way 1 must take, in order to go to the house of Mr. ? FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Quiere vrnd. conducirme al- ia, le pagare bien ; le dare Pase vin. adelantPj yo le se- guire No vaya tan a prisa Couduzcame vm. por el ca- riiino fflcis corto Esta calle esta embarazada, tomemos otro camino Llame vra. ud coche de al- quiler Cochero, quereis Uevarme ? Moro en la calle de Dial. XXXI. Un miliiar vencedor estableciendose en una casa de los venci- dos, y hahlando a Jos due- nos de la casa. No tengais miedo, somos In- gleses, x\lemauesj Rusos, Franceses, &c. Nuestro caracter nacional puede sisegiiraros de uuestra gen- erosidad, y la obediencia que debemos a nuestro so- berano es un segundo fia- dor. Los vencidos que se someten no son para noso- tros sino amigos desdicha- dos Entregaos con seguridad a vuesti'as ocupaciones or- dinarias ; os prometemos seguridad, atenciones, so- siego, proteccion y ayuda, si necesitareis de ella Si mi gente os diere algun motivo de queja. recorred ^ mi con confianza, yo no V/ill i/ou lead me tliere, I will pay you handsomely ; i icill give you Go before. I will follow you Do not walk so fast Lead m^ the shortest way This street is obstnicted^ let us take another way Call for a hackney-coach Coachman, will you drive me ? I live in the street of . Dial, XXXI. A military man victorious, quartering in a house of the conquer- ed, and speaking to the masters of the house. Don't fenr^ ice are English" men, Germans^ Russians, Frenchmen, i{c. Our nor tional character may as^ sure you of our generosity^ and the obedience we owe to our sovereign is a dou- ble pledge, A subdued enemy is considered by us only as an unfortunate friend Give yourselves up icith secu- rity to your customary business, ice promise you safety, mildness, tranquil- lity, protection and assist- ance Af you should want any Ifniy people should give you any cause of complaint, come openly to me ^ I will not 580 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. sufrire que se pase algo que pueda daros disgusto No tengais raiedo, un soldado valeroso no es temible sino en el campo de batalla Camaradas, comportemonos como hombres de valor ; respetemos la desdicha y no ocasionemos aqui ni al- boroto ni desorden suffer any thing to happen that may he disagreeable to you Be not afraidy a brave sol- dier is dreadful only on the field of battle Comrades^ let us behave our- selves as bi^ave men ; let us respect the unhappy and cause here neither trouble nor disorder. ' FA'BULAS. N- B. In looking for words in the Dictionary, the student should bear in mind the observations made in pages 17, 18, 19 and 20, in regard to pronunciation and orthograph\\ Remember that the Spanish Academy considers ch^ II and i) as distinct characters from r, I and n^ and in its Dictionary you must look through all the words beginning with these simple characters, before you find those commencing with tb*: aforesaid compound. Fdbula Primera. Los Animates en consejo juntos para elegir un Rey, Habiendo muerto el leon, todas las aves y bestias se con- o^regaron a su cueva para condolerse con la reina viuda, que hacia resonar sus lamentos y gritos en los montes y bosques. Despues de los acostumbrados cumplimientos, procedieron todos a la eleccion de un rey, la corona del difunto monarca fue colocada en medio de la asamblea. Su apareute heredero eia demasiado joven y endeble para obtener la dignidad real, a la que tantos animales mas fuertes que el pusieron su deraanda. Degenme crecer un poco, dijo su alteza, y entonces esperi- mentareis que puedo llenar el trono, y con el tiempo, hacer felices 4 mis subditos. Entretanto estudiare las acciones heroicas de mi padre, con la esperanza de que algun dia, po- dre serle igual en gloria. Por mi parte, dijo el leopardo, insisto en mi derecho a la corona, por la mayor semejanza que tengo al ultimo rey entre todos los candidatos. Yo, por otro lado, grito el oso, sostendre que se me hizo injusticia, cuando su magestad .anterior se me prefirio : soy tan fuerte, intrepido, y sangriento, como era; y ademas, soy maestro de un arte que el jamas pudo adquirir, cual es, el trepar por los arboles. Yo apelo, dijo el elefante, al juicio de esta augusta asam- blea, si alguno de los presentes puede con algun colorido jac- 382 FABLES* tarse de ser tan alto, de tan noble presencia, tan robusto, 6 tan circunspecto como yo. Yo soy la mas noble, y la mas herniosa criatura entre todos vosotros, dijo el caballo. E/ yo soy la mas politica, dijo la zorra. E^ yo soy el mas veloz en correr, dijo el corzo. En donde encontrareis, dijo el mico, un rey mas agradable^ mas ingenioso, y mas divertido que yo ? Yo divertiria con- tiniiamente a mis vasallos, y soy ademas el mas semejante al hombre, que es el Seiior del Universo. ^ El papagayo interrumpiendole, hizo su arenga : supuesto que vm. se alaba de su semejanza al bomb re, me parece que puedo yo alabarme con mucha mas justicia Toda la seme- janza de vm consiste en su hocico feo y algunos gestos ridi- culos ; peroyo puedo hablar como un hombre, e imitar su len- guage, senal indicativa de su razon. y su mayor adorno. Guardad vuestra maldita garuUa, replico la mona : hablais, es cierto, pero no como hombre ; repetis sierapre una misma cosa sin entender una sola palabra de lo que decis. Toda la asamblea se rio de estos dos rivales imitadores del genero humano, y confirieron la corona al elefante, porque era fuerte y sabio ; y no solo era exento del barbaro natural de las bestias de rapina, sino tambien de la vanidad y amor propio de que muchos estan tocados, siempre pareciendoles 6 fingiendo ser lo que, en la realidad, no son. Fibula Segunda. EI Dragon y las Dos Zorras* Un dragon guardaba con ansia un tesoro innienso en una cueva profunda ; nunca doimla de dia ni de noche, para asegurarlo. Dos zorras aduladoras, artificiosas, y picaras de profesion, se introdugeron en su gracia con sus lisonjas fastidiosas. Ambas eran sus intimas araigas. Los que son mas corteses y oficiosos no son siempre los mas sinceros. Le rmdieron sus obsequies con la mayor su- mision : admiraron sus fantasias ociosas ; convinieron con el en sus ideas, y se burlaron de su credula tonteria Finalmente, quedose un dia dormido entre sus confidentes: le ahogaron, y tomaron posesion de su tesoro, FABLES. ' 383 Era preciso repartir el pillage ; un pwnto muy deli carlo, y no era faol Je ajustaise. porque dos villages no convienen sino en la egecucion de sus delitos. Una de ellas empczo a exliv)rtar en estos terminos : de que nos servir4 todo este dinero r \Jn gazapo nos seria un botin, 6 presa mvis agradable : no podenios hacer una coraida de estos doblones, son muy indigestos. Los hombres son muy loco>, en dejarse arrebatar de riqaezas tan imaginarias ISo seamos nosotras criaturas tan insensatas, conio ellos lo son. La otra pretendio que estas reflexiones ia habian hecho una impresion fuerte, y la aseguro que en lo venidero estaria contepta de continaar una vida filosofica, y como Bias llevar su tesoro todo consigo. Al parecer, ambas estaban dispuestas a abandonar su tesoro mal adquirido : pero ambas se quedaron a la mira, hasta que se despedazaron. Al espirar la una dijo a la otra, que estabatan mortalmente herida como ella: que querlas hacer con todo aquel oro ? Lo mismo que td te proponias hacer con el, replico la otra. Siendo informado un viajador de su pendencia, las dijo, que eran tontas. Asi lo es el mayor numero del genero hu- mano, replico una de las zorras. Tampoco a vosotros puede servir de coraida, y con todo, os asesinais unos a otros por el dinero. Nosotras, las zorras, hemes sido bastante sabias, 4 lo menos hasta aqui, para mirar al dinero como una cosa inutil. Lo que habeis introducido entre vosotros como una conveniencia, es vuestra desgracia. Dejais un bien sustancial, solamenle por seguir un bien fantastico. Fabula Tercera. Las Dos Zorras, Una noche entraron dos zorras furtivamente en un galli- nero : mataron el gallo, las gallinas, y los polios; despues de esta matanza, empezaron a devorar su presa. Una que era joven y sin reflexion, propuso comerlos todos de una vez ; la otra vieja y codiciosa queria ahorrar para otro dia. Hja, dijo la vieja, la esperiencia me hizo sabia ; en mi tiempo he visto mucho mundo. No consumamos a la vez 384 FABLES. prodigamente todo nuestro caudal : tuvimos buen suceso, y debemos cuidar de no mal gastarlo. Replico la joven, estoy resuelta a recrearme mientras lo tengo por delante, y saciar mi apetito por toda una semana ; por lo que toca a venir aqui mafiana, es cuento : eso es espo- nernos : manana vendri aqui el amo, y por vengar la rauerte de sus polios, nos dor4 con una tranca en la cabeza. Despues de esta replica, cada una de ellas obra como le parece maspropio. La joven come hasta que revienta^sin poder apenas arras- trarse 4 su cueva antes de morir. La vieja que le parecio mucho mas prudente gobernar su apetito, y ser frugal, fue el dia siguiente al gallinero, y la mato el labrador. Asicada edad tiene suvicio favorito : los jovenes son fo- gosos e insaciables en sus placeres ; y los viejos incorregi- bles en su avaricia. Fibula Cuarta. El Lobo y el Cordero, Habia un rebafio de ovejas, que paclan seguras de todo mal en un cercado ; todos los perros dormian, y sns amos tocaban la gaita rural con sus companeros bajo de un alamo frondoso. Un lobo hambriento vino al redil i registrarlos por las rendijas. Un cordero inesperto, y que nunca habia estado fuera, entro en conversacion con el. Y le dijo, que es lo que tu quieres aqui, lobo ? Un poco de esta yerba fresca, le respondio el lobo. Bien sabes que no hay cosa mas agradablp, que matar la h'lnibre en un prado verde esnialtado con flores, y apagar la sed en una fuenle transparente. Aqui encuentro copia de uno y otro, que pucde uno desear mas ? por mi parte, yo amo la filosof la que nos en^ena a contentarnos cou poco. Es vrrdad pues, replico el cordero, que tu te abstienes de la carne de las bestias, y que un poco de yerba te satisface ? Si es asi, vivamos como hermanos y pabteraos juntos. El cordero, luego, salto del redd al prado en donde el grave filosofo le despedazo, y de una vez le devoro. Desconfiate siempre de IriS lenguas lisongeras de lo& que se jactan de su propia virtud. Forma tu juicio segun sus acciones; y no segun sus palabras. EPrTOME DE LA HISTORIA DE ESPANA. (Sacado de la^ Cartas Marruecas de Don Jose' Cadalso, Carta III.) " La peninsula^ llamada Espafia, solo esti contigua al con- tinente de Europapor el lado de Francia de la que la separan los moDtes Pirineos. Es abundante en oro, plata, azogue, hierro, piedras, aguas mineralesj ganados de escelentes cali- dades, y pescas tan abundantes como deliciosas. Esta feliz situacionla hizo objeto de la codicia de los fenicios y otros pueblos, Los cartagineses, parte por dolo, y parte por fuer- za, se establecieron en ella ; y los romanos quisieron com- pletar su poder y gloria con la conquista de Espana ; pero encontraron una resistencia, que parecio tan estrana como terrible ^ los soberbios duenos de lo restante del mundo. Numancia, una sola ciudad, les costo catorce anos de sitio, la perdida de tres ejercitos, y el desdoro de los mas famosos Generales, hasta que reducidos los numantinos a la precision de capitular 6 morir, por la total ruina de la patria, corto nu- mero de vivos, y abundancia de cadaveres en las calles (sin contar los que habian servido de pasto 4 sus conciudadanos despues de concluidos todos sus viveres) incendiaron sus ca- sas, arroj^ron sus mugeresj ninos y ancianos en las llamas, y salieron a morir en el carapo raso con las armas en la mano. El grande Escipion fue testigo de la ruina de Numancia, pues no puede llamarse propiamente conquistador de laciudad : siendo de notar que Luculo, encargado de levantar un ejer- cito para aquella espedicion, no hallo en la juventud romana reclutas que llevar, hasta que el mismo Escipion se alisto para animarla. Si los romanos conocieron el valor de los espafioles como enemigos, tambien esperimentdron su virtud como aliados. Sagunto sufrio por ellos un sitio igual al de Numan- cia contra los cartagineses ; y desde entonces formaron los romanos de los espaiioles el alto concepto que se ve en sus autoresj oradores, historiadores, y poetas. Pero la fortuna de Roma, superior al valor humano, la hizo sefiora de Es- pana, como de lo restante del mundo, raenos algunos mon- ies de Cantabria, cuya total conquista no consta de la his- 33 386 EPITOME. toria, de modo que no pueda dudarse. Largas revoluciones inutiles de contarse en este parage trajeron del norte enjam- bres de naciones feroces, codiciosas y guerreras, que se es- tablecieron en Espana : pero con las delicias de este clima tan diferente del que habian dejado, cayeron en tal grade de afeminacion y flojedad, que a su tiempo fueron esclavos de otros conquistadores venidos del medio dia. Huyeron los godos espafioles hasta los montes de una provinciaj hoy Ua- inada Asturias: y apenas tuvieron tiempo de desechar el sus- to, llorar la perdida de sus casas y ruina de su reino, cuando salieron mandados por Pelayo, uno de los mayores hombres que la naturaleza ha producido. Desde aqui se abre un teatro de guerras que duraron cerca de ocho siglos. Varios reinos se levant^ron sobre la ruina de la Monarquia Goda Espanola, destruyendo el que querian edificar los moros en el mismo terreno, regado con mas san- gre espanola, romana, cartaginesa, goda y mora de cuanto se puede ponderar con horror de la pluma que lo escriba, y de los ojos que lo vean escrito. Pero la poblacion de esta pe- ninsula era tal, que despues de tan largas guerras y tan sangri- entas, aun se contaban veinte millones de habitantes en ella. Incorporaronse tantas provincias, y tan diferentes, en dos coronas, la de Castilla y la de Aragon ; y ambas en el ma- trimonio de Don Fernando y Dona Isabel, Principes que seran inmortales entre cuantos sepan lo que es gobierno. La re- forma de abusos, aumento de cieijcias, humillacion de los soberbios, amparo de la agricultura y otras operaciones seme- Vantes form^ron esta Monarquia : ayudoles la naturaleza con un nijmero increible de vasallos insignes en letras y armas ; y se pudieron haber lisongeado de dejar i sus sucesores un imperio mayor y mas duradero, que el de Roma antigua (contando las Americas nuevamentedescubiertas,) si hubieran logrado dejar su corona ^ un heredero varon. Negoles el cielo este gozo & trueque de tantos como les habia concedido ; y su cetro paso d la casa de Austria, la qual gasto los tesoros, talentos y sangre de los Espafioles en cosas agenas de Espana por las continuas guerras, que asi en Alemania, como en Italia tuvo que sostener Carlos I. de Espana 5 hasta que cansado de sus mismas prosperidades 6 tal vez conociendo con prudencia las vicisitudes de las cosas humanas, no quiso espo- nerse ^ sus reveses, y dejo el trono a su hijo Don Felipe II. Este Principe, acusado por la emulacion, por ambicioso } politico como su padre, pero menos afortunado, siguiendo los CHISTES. 387 proyectos de Carlos, no pudo hallar los mismos sucesos aim d costa de ejercitos, de armadas y de caudales. Murio de- jando a sii pueblo estenuado con las guerras, afeminado con el oro y plata de America, disminuido con la poblacion de un mimdo nuevo, disgustado con tantas desgracias, y deseoso de descanso. Paso el cetro por las raanos de tres Principes menos activospara manejar tan grande Monarquia, y en la muerte de Carlos II. no era Espana sino el esqueleto de un gigante/' CHISTES. Un hombre discreto preguntando a su hijo de donde venia, pues era tan tarde, le respondio : Padre, yo vengo de ver a uno de mis amigos. De tus amigos, le respondio el padre sorprehendido. Tu tienes pues tantos amigos ! Oh ! como has hecho siendo tan joven para alcanzar muchos ; pues que yo en mas de sesenta aiios no he podido encontrar uno. El Caballero Tomas Moro, famoso Canceller de Ingla- terra, puesto en prision por Enrique octavo, dejo crecer sus cabellos y barba, y viniendo un barbero para cortarlos y afei- tarlo ; amigo, le dijo ; el Key e yo pleiteamos sobre mi cabeza ; e yo no quiero hacer el raenor gasto en este pleito, sin saber antes quien de los dos ha de disponer de ella. Luis doce, Rey de Francia, cuando era sino Duque de Or- leans, habia padecido muchos pesares de dos personas que hablan sido favoritos en el reinado precedente. Uno de sus aliegados procuraba inspirarle que lesmostrase resentimiento. No, respondio su Magestad, que indigno es 4un Rey deFran- cia tomar parte en la venganza del Duque de Orleans. Conrado tercero,Emperador, despues de haber tornado Mu- nickj determine pasar los hombres a filo de la espada, permiti- endo solo 4 las mugeres salir de alii, pudiendo Uevar sobre el- las sus muebles mas preciosos. Estas mugeres aprovechando la ocasion tom^ron sobre sus hombros d sus maridos, asegu- rando eran sus mas preciosos muebles. Esto agrado tanto al Emperador, que no solo perdono a los habitantes, sino tam- bien 4 su Principe que habia destinado a la muerte. ^88 GHISTES. La Reina Isabela observando la bella gracia de un noble Espaiiol en un torneo, le pregunto un dia que le digese ab- solutamente el nombre de su Dama. El Espanol lo resistio algun tiempo. En fin cediendo 4 su curiosidad, prometio a su Magestad enviarle su retrato. El dia siguiente hizo pre- sentar a su Magestad un paquetillo, donde la Reina no ha- Uando sino un espejito, quedo sonrojada al punto. Los cortesanos del Rey Filipo le aconsejaban que se ven- gase de un hombre que haina hablado mal de el. A''ntes es nienester saber, si yo no le he dado razon, dijo Filipo: y habiendose averiguado que 1 1 tal hombre jamas habia recibido cosa alguna, le ejsvio ricos presentes. ^upo el Rey poco despues que el mismo lo llenaba de alabanzas. Mirad pues^ dijo a los cortesanos, que yo se mejor que vosotros apaci- guar una lengua mala. Continuando las disputas entre Francisco primero, Rey de Francia, y Enrique octavo, Yiey de Inglaterra ; resolvio este de enviar al primero un Embajador portador de pala- bras fieras y amenazas, para lo cual hizo elecion del Obispo Bonner en que tenia gran confianza. Este Obispo le dijo que ponla su vida en gran peligro, si daba tales recados d un Rey tan altivo como Francisco primero. No temas, le dijo el Rey, que si el Rey de Fr-ancia hiciese tal, yo haria caer rauchas cabezas de Franceses que estan aqui. Pase por ello, sefior ; pero cual de esas cabezas me vendria tan bien sobre los hombros como esta, poniendo el dedo k su sien. Cuando el Mariscal de la Ferte hizo su entrada en Metz. losjudios que alii erem tolerados se presentaron al cumplimi- ento con todo habitante ; y anunciandolos en la anticdmara : no quiero verlos, dijo: porque ellos liicieron morir k nuestro Sefior. Que no entren de ningun modo. Dijeronles pues que no podian ver a su Escelencia. A que repHcaron senti- dos, pues traian un presente de cuatro mil doblones. Lo que dicho inmediatamente a su Siscelencia; oh bien! diles que entren ; que estos pobres diablos seguramente no lo conocian cuando lo crucificdron. CORRESPONDENCIA MERCANTIL. COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. Cartas de Comercio, y Mode- los de una Factura, un Co- nocimientOj una Cuenta, Letras de €ambio, Cai^ta Promisoria y Carta de Crtdito^ Pi'opuesta para una Corres- pondencia. Mijico^ 1 de Enero de 1825. Muy Sefior raio, como esta es la primera vez que tengo el honor dedirijirme a vm., es- pero que me perdonar^ la li- bertad que me he tornado. El ventajoso caracter que mi buen amigo el Sefior Don N. me ha dado de su persona y casa de vm., me anima 4 pensar en una corresponden- cia mercantil que pueda ser ventajosa 4 vm. como a mi. Pero ante todas cosas^ ne- cesito me ifranquee vm. el fa- vor de darme una relacion de los pesos y medidas que co- munmente se usan en Ingla- terra, porque creo que se dife- rencian mucho de los de este pais. Yo estimare esta relacion como un favpr particular, y vm. puede confiar en mi sin- ceridad y prontitud que le servire en cuanto dependa de mis facultades. ' 33* Commercial Letters, and Models of an Invoice, Bill of Lading, an Ac- count, Bills of Exchange, Promissory Note and Let- ter of Credit. A Proposal for a Corres- pondence. Mexico, January, 1, 1825. Sir^ As this is the first time I have the honour of ad- dressing you^ you will^ I hope^ excuse the liberty I have now taken. The honourable character my worthy friend Mr, N has given me of your person and house, encourages me to think of a commercial correspon- dence which may be to our mutual advantage. But before this, I must beg the favour to give me an ac- count of the weights and measures which are com- monly used in England, as I believe they differ materi- ally from those in this coun- try. I shall esteem this as a par- ticular obligation, and you may rely upon my sin canity and readiness to serve you in whatever lies in my power. i90 COxMMERClAL CORRKSPONDENCE. Esperando que vm. me hon- re con su favorable respuesta, qiiedo rogando a Dios me guarde su vida muchos anos. B. L. IVL de vm. In the expectation of your honouring me ivith a favour- able answer^ I re?nain, Your obedient and humble bervajit. S^r. Don . Boston^ Febrero, 1825. Muy Senor mio; me es muy apreciable el favor que he recibido de vm. en la del 1^ del ult°5 en la que me manifiesta los deseos que tiene de entablar conmigo una cor- respondencia mercantil ; yo me tendre por dichoso si pue- do eorresponder a las espe- ranzas de vm., y a la idea li- songera que se ha servido tomar de mi casa y familia. Vm. no ignora, que noso- tros los comerciantes debemos vivir de nuestra profesion, y promo ver nuestros intereses en cuanto sea compatible con el honor y la equidad. Yo admiio la proposicion de vm., y en prueba de mi reconocimiento, remitire a vm., por el primer buque que saiga de este puerto para ese, varias partidas fabricadas en este pais, y al precio mas bajo que se pueden dar ; la nomi- ua de ellas, juntamente con los precios, iran insertas en las facturas. Espero seran del gusto de vm ,y que serviran de motivo para nuestro mayor conoci- mleoto y trato ; y este vm. Mr. . Boston, February, 1825, Sir, I am most a'greeably fa- voured by yours ofthefrst ulf", wherein you show a de- sire to commence a commer- cial correspondence with me ; I shall think myself happy if I can answer your expec- tations^ and the flattering idea you have been pleased to form of my house and family j You well know, that we merchants must live by our profession, and promote our interest as far as is consis- tent with lionour and equity, I accept your proposal, and as a proof of my acknowl- edgment, I will send you, by the first vessel that sails from this port to your place, sun- dry parcels manufactured here, and at the lowest price that can be afforded; the particulars thereof, together with the prices, will be insert" ed in the invoices. I hope they will prove to your satisfaction, and be the foundation of our farther acquaintance and dealing ; CORRESPONDENCIA IMEHC AM IL. 391 seguro de que cualquiera cosa que confie a mi cuidado, sera ejecutada y manejada con el mayor candor y fidelidad : y si estas raercaderias como las que puede vm. necesitar en adelante, al tiempo de enfar- delarlas 6 de cualquier otro modoj sufriesen alguna ave- rla, se hara la correspondiente rebajajdandome vm. el aviso. Incluyo a vm. muestras de otras producciones que pue- den tener despacho en ese roercado ; y en este caso, po- dre proveerle de todo cuauto necesite. Si vm. puede hacerme re- tornos comodos con sus vinos esquisitos, aguardiente, y fru- tos ; como tambien dos zur- rones de cochinilla, y 20 quintales de barrilla, se le dara a vm. su comision ; el con^e- taje, almacenasgo y todos los demas gastos de puerto se pagaran a parte. En consecuencia de las 6r- denes de vm., le envio un es- tado de las pesas y medidas de Inglaterra ; y ademas la diferencia de las monedas de Espana y las nuestras. To- cante a la subida, y baja de los cambios y fondos, se infor- mar4 vm. por nuestros papeles publicos, Quedo rogando ^ Dios me guarde su vida mu- chosafios. B.L. M.de vm. Su atento amigo. and assure yourself that what- ever you trust to my charge , shall be -performed and man- aged with the greatest can- dour and fidelity imagina- ble ; and if these goods or those you may want hereaf- ter^ should suffer any aver- age in the packing or other- wise, proper allowance will be made, upon notice. I herewith send you a sam- ple of other staple commodi- ties ichich may ansicer your market; in that case, you may be furnished icith every article you want. If you can conveniently make returns in some of your exquisite wines, brandy, and fruits ; as also two zeroons of cochineal, and of kelp* 20 quintals, you shall have your commission ; broker- age, storage and all oth- er port-charges will be paid apart. Pursuant to your orders, I send you a statement of the iceights and measures used in England ; as also the dif- f en nee of the value of coins between Spain and ours. Of the rise and fall of exchange and stocks, you may be in- formed by our public pa- pers, I remain your obedient humble servant, and respectful friend. ^ Kelp se llama tarabien barilla eu Inglei. 592 COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS* FACTURA. Factura de las Mercaderia^ embarcadas per el S^"*. Don Agustin S. para los Sefiores Crist dval B, t hijos de Cadiz, 4 bordo del Navio nombrado el CisnCj su Capitan Martin £)., destinado para dicho Cadiz, por orden y cuenta de los dichos Senores, siendo numeradas y marcadas como sigue, A saber : ) 2 Zurrones de Cochinilla - - - • 75 Quintales de Azafran - - - > 315 Cajas de iVzucar - - - - Suraa, $ Derechos y Gastos - - - Comision a 5 por ciento - Suma total, $ Salvo Yerro y Omision. Boston y Abril 9, de 1825. R. D. T. Un Conocimienfo, LondreSy FehrerOj 1825. Yo vecino de Maestro que soy del biien Navlo (que Dios salve) nom- brado N. N.j que al presente esta surto y anclado en el rio Tamesis, puerto de Londres, para con la biiena ventura seguir este presente viage al puerto de Cadiz ; conozco haber recibido, y tengo car- gado dentro del dicho mi Na- vio debajo de cubierta, de vos N. N., seis fardos de baqueta de Moscovia, siete dichos de pano Ingles, ocho de estofas, A Bill of Lading. London, February, 1825. Shipped hy the Grace of God in good order and well conditioned, by Mr. (or Mes- srs.) N. iV. in and upon the good ship called N. iV., where- of is master under God, for this present voyage, now riding at anchor in the river Thames at London, and by God's aid bound for Ca- diz : to wit ; six bales of Russia leather, seven ditto of English cloths, eight ditto oj stuffs, nine ditto of bays, ten ditto of says and serges, five DOCUMENTOS MERCANTILE: S. 393 INVOICE. Invoice of Merchandize shipped by Mr. Augustin S. for Messrs. Christopher B. & Sons of Cadiz, onboard the Ship named Swan^ her Master Martin D., bound to said Cadiz, per order and account of the said Gentlemen, being numbered and marked as follows, to wit : 1 2 Zeroons of Cochineal - - - ► 75 Quintals of Saffron - - - ( 315 Boxes of Sugar - - - - Amount, ^ Duties and Charges - - Commission at 5 per Cent. Totals $ Errors and Omissions excepted. Boston, 9th April, 1825. R. D, J\ nueve de bayetas, diez de anascotes y sargasj qiiinientas piezas de lienzo superfine de ia fabrica de Irlanda, setenta dichas de batistas, cincuenta tablas de manteles adamasca- dos y cincuenta docenas de servilletasj un cajon de hoja de lata, dos de laton 6 azofar, tres de acero, cuatro quintales de cobre, seis cajas de relojes de faltriquera y dijes, seis cajones de quinquilleria 6 bu- honeriaj siete de herramientas de corte, todo enjuto y bien acondicionado, numerados y marcados con la marca al margen. Con lo cual prome- hmidred pieces of superfine Irish linen, seventjj ditto of cambric, fifty diaper table cloths, and fifty dozen of napkins, one chest of tin, two ditto of latten or brass, three ditto of steel, four quintals of copper, six boxes of watches and trinkets, six chests of hardware, seven ditto of edge tools, all in good order and condition, marked and num- bered as in the margin ; and are to be delivered in the like good order and condition (the dangers of the seas only ex- cepted) in the aforesaid port unto Mr, IS. K or Messrs, 394 COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS* to, y me obligo, llevdndome Di: s en buen salvamento con el dicho mi Navio al espresa- do puertOj de acudir y entre- gar, por vos y en vuestro n ombre, dichos generos igual- mente enjutos, y bien acon- dicionados (salvo los peligros del mar) k Don N. N. 6 4 los Senores 6 4 quien alii por el fuere parte : pag^n- dome de flete ^ razon de cuarenta shelines esterlines por cada tonelada, con diez por ciento de capa y averia. Y en fe de que asi me obligo d cumplir, os doy tres conoci- mientos de un tenor, firmados de mi nombre, por mi 6 mi escribano; el uno cumplido, los otros no valgan. Fecha en Londres a primero de Febrero de 1825. Cadiz ^ Marzo, 1825. Muy Senor mio. He reci- bido la estimada de vm. del primero de Febrero con el conocimiento de diversas mer- caderias embarcadas abordo del Navio llamado el , todo lo cual ha sido debida- mente recibido en buena or- den y condicion : los generos son todos de mi satisfaccion, y espero que tendran pronto despacho. Inclusa va una letra de cambio contra los Senores , de esa ciu- dad, quemonta a uso* y medio, que vm. se serviri , or his or (their) as^ signs ^ he or (they) paying freight at the rate of forty shillings per ton, with the usu- al p?nmage and average* In witness tvhereof the said Commander or his clerk has signed three bills of lading y all of this tenor and date ; one of 2chich bfing fulfilled^ the other two to stand void» Dated in London, the 1st day of February, 1825. Cadiz, March, 1825. Sir, The favour of yours of the 1st February came safe to hand with the bill of lading of sundries shipped on board the ship called the , all of which are duly re- cieved in good order and condition: I have found the goods to 7ny mind, and I hope will suit our market. You will receive herewith a Bill of Exchange on Messrs. — — , of your city, to the amount of — , at one and a half usance, lohich be The uso is two months in Spain. DOCUMENTOS MERCANTILES. 395 cargar ^ mi cuenta ; el saldo pleased to place to my cred- que aun resta se remitira sin it ; the balance which re- dilacion a su tiempo. mains due shall be punctually Quedo rogando 4 Dios remitted in its time. guarde 4 vm. muchos aaos. I have the honour to be B. L. M. de vm. Respectfully , Su mayor servidor. Your humble servant. A' D . To Mr. . Del Comercio de Londres. Merchant in London. Cadiz, a los 5^". IV. F. Paris a 24 de Marzo de 1825. Muy S^«^ mios : confirmo a vms. mi ult^ de 8 del pas^^. ; despues recibo las muy favorecidas de vms. 29 del mismo 2 y 4 del cor^®. en que me incluyen una letra de . . . . francos a cargo del S^^. N. del la q®. les he dado credito. Tengo aun en mi poder la letra de cambio del S^r. B. de q^. procu- rare el pago. No habiendole hallado en su casa, le he hecho avisar p*. q^. me haga el pago de ella 4 su termino. Por lo q«. mira a la otra remesa de vms. contra los S^^^. A y comp., no la han aceptado aun, suplicandome que aguarde hasta el lunes que es el dia de correo de Espana : asi lo he hecho ; veremos el resultado, y en caso q®. no la paguen, se la devolvere a vms. con la protesta al correo prox*. Las cambiales 4 largos dias pierden aqui un 5. p. 100 al afio, y aun medio p. 100 al mes ; y asi lo ha entendido el S°^ A. en la negociacion de la letra que vms. han librado con- tra el ; si estuviera en mi mano, podria obtener un lucro de ella en el pag^o. de enero con medio p. 100 de beneficio, de- ducido la rebaja. Doy a vms. gracias por la orden que se han servido dar a su casa de Paris, p^. q®. pague por mi ... d los S'*^^ P.J les he abonado de conformidad en su cuenta. Remito d vms. aqui adjuntas 3 letras de cambio 4 60 dias de vista. Una a cargo del S<^»*. Don E. por, fr. 3,000 Otras dos sobre los S^^^ H. y comp. de 1000 cada una, 2,000 5,000 Perdida 4 1 p. 100, 50 Sirvause vms. hacerlas aceptar y abonarme de 4,950 por su importe, deducida la perdida. Interin quedo rogando 4 Dios guarde a vuestras Mercedes muchos afios como desea, Su mayor servidor. X. ,• O O o o o o >§ s- ^ .i2 cC ^ (U o ■•T3 i^ ^ 3 i^fS •S s es 4( p=:2 H 8g GS rH Q P^ Ph c u^ o c^ — 1 o o o GO o o 'a g ^N O O o o o ^ o o o vCd c^ T-H CO =^ ^ c« O j-i 03 d OJ fcuo s b3 5 H ^ o 0^ 13 ns s CO s cc o •5^ •s? OQ d 8 8 • rH rH ^ s C Oh "^ o ____ __^ Q q:) G^ ^O 00 rzj « 1-^. S>4 R o 2 O o It 00 at O o O Q O <3 H>^ O O O • «»» o o c o o TH G^ o E^ a ^ =€^ Q ^ NvT ?s c\ •h,^ ^ C^ J^ ■'-^^ fesftn -^ ^ ss ^2 .^ b-^ CO vi E^ o o <» (N T=i 12^ 1 &■ «o u4 G^? 1^ § 00 '^ eo ^ a. - ^ o o o 1 o o o o ^ ■^ GN} tH CO =^ =^ ^ • CO O •** 5: . . !^ »*«*^ > iT^'^ Esq 5s •«* E? OQO 2 2 00 H H T-^ c5 ^ 2 ^S' o o ^ t; tH »-I ■s J.' eS - ci ^ 1 •»c GSJ f^ f^ 1*0 00 •?» "4^ DOCUMENTGS MERCANTILES. 397 Letra de Cambio, La Primera. Londres, 1825. For .£400 esterlinas, _V dos usos a uso y me- dio, 6 a echo dias vista ■ se servira vm mandar pagar por esta mi primera de cambio a Don , 6 a su orden. cua- tro cientas libras esterlinas, valor recibido de D. N. X.^ que sentara vm. como por aviso. M. N. .V Don. . Comerciante en Cadiz. A Bill of Exchange. The First London, 1825. For <£400 sterling. At double usance (or at usance and a half, or at eight days sight) pay this my first bill of exchange to Mr. , or order, the sum of four hun- dred pounds sterlings value received of Mr, A; iV. and place it to account as per advice. M. iV= To Mr. . Merchant in Cadiz. Primera. Aviso de una Letra de Cam- bio. Londres 1 de Enero de 1825. Muy Senor mio. Hoy mis- mo he librado contra vm. una letra de cambio, a uso y medio, a favor de Don , 6 a su orden, por la cantidad de cua- trocientas libras esterlinas, que me hara vm. la fineza de honrar, y cargar a mi cuenta. Quedo rogando a Dios me guarde su vida mnchos anos. B. L. M. de vm. s. s. s. A' Don , DeLcomercio de Cadiz. Prima, Advice of a Bill of Ex- change. London January 1, 1825. Sir. I have this day draicn on you a bill of exchange^ at one and a half usance^ in favour of Mr. , or his order, for four hundred pounds sterling, which I besr you to honour, and place to my account. I have the honour to he, Sir, respectfully, your obedient servant. To Mr. - — , Merchant in Cadiz. La Segunda. The Second. Londres. 1825. London, 1825. For £400 esterlinas. For £400 steiling. A' dos usos se ser\ira vm. At double usance pay this pagar por esta mi segunda my second bill of Exchange 34 398 COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS. de cambio (no habiendolo hecho por la primera) ^ Don N. N. 6 a su orden cuatro ci- entas libras esterlinas^ &;c. EI Endoso. Paguese 4 Don N. N. 6 a su orden, valor en cuenta con, (6 valor recibido de) dicho. Cai'ta Promisoria. LondreSy 1 d& Eneroj 1825. A^ uso y medio contado desde la presente data, pro- meto pagar a Don , 6 ^ su orden, la canti(iad de , por valor recibido en dinero contado, 6 en ge- neros a mi satisfaccion. A. B. £ (Jirst not paid) to Mr. N, N. or order, the sum of four hundred pounds ster- ling j Sfc, The Endoj^sement, Fay to Mr. N. N. or his order, value in ac- count with, (or value received from) the said. Prommissory Note. London, January 1, 1825. ^t one and a half usance after date, I promise to pay to Mr. , or his order, the sum of- , for val- ue received in ready money, or in goods to my satisfac- tion, A.B. £ Carta de Crtdito. Londres, 1 de Enero de 1825. Muy Senor mio. Vmd. recibira esta de la mano del Sefior Don -, (que pasa a viajar por diversas partes de Europa) y me nara la firleza de provaerle de cartas de re- comendacion para las princi- pales ciudades de Espana ; su objeto es salir de aqui inmedi- ataraente para esa. Creo que tendra vmd. mucho gusto en tratarle por ser un caba- Uero igualmente distinguido por su merito personal y por su nacimiento ; por lo que, es- pero que vm. le franquee la Letter of Credit. London, January 1, 1825. Sir, You will receive this by the hands of Mr. , (who is upon his travels into divers parts of Europe) and I beg you will provide him icith recommendatory letters to the principal cities in Spain : his design is to set out from hence for your city immedi- ately, I think you will be pleased with his occjijamt- ance, as he is a gentleman equally distinguished for his personal merit and birth; be so kind, therefore, to give DOCEMENTOS MERCANTILES. 399 mas generosa recepcion, y du- rante su estada en esa ciudad le sirva con todo el acatami- ento que este en su poder. Al mismo tiempo me hara vm. el favor de franque- arle sobre doble recibo el dinero que necesite hasta la suma de que podra vm. reembolsar cargandolo a mi cuenta, enviandome uno de sus recibos. Espero que vm. me desempenara como amigo en este asunto ; y mientras, Quedo rogando a Dios me guarde su vida muchos anos. B. L. M. de vm. s. s. s. ^^ Don 5 Banquero de Cadiz. Mm the best reception^ and serve him as effectually as in your power during his abode in your city. You will also do me the favour to supply him on his double receipt with what money he may have oc- casion for, to the amount of 5/0?^ which you may reimburse yourself by charg- ing it to my account, and transmitting one of his re- ceipts to me. I hope you will attend to this my request as a friend^ arid in the mean time, I have the honour to be, Respectfully, Your obedient servant. To Mr. , Banker in Cadiz. Confinnncion de la anterior enviada por cl Correo. Londrcs, 1 de Enero, 1825. ^Iny Sefior mio. Con esta data he escrito 4 vm. otra que le entregara el Sefior , caballero Ingles, con cuya casa tengo la mayor in- timidad ; y deseando servirle per su cuenta he tomado con gusto esta ocasion que se me ofrece : Por tanto con ei ma- yor empeno suplico a vmd. le procure todas las diversiones e informes, de forma que se halle gustoso eii esa ciudad. Tambien se servira vm. de franquearle todo el dinero que piderej hasta la cantidad de Confirmation of the preced- ing sent by the Post. London, January 1, 1825. Sir, I wrote to you this day a letter which will be delivered to you by Mr. , an En- glish gentleman, with ivhose family I am very intimate : and desirous of serving him on his own account I have embraced ivith pleasure this opportunity lohich offers. I therefore most earnestly re- quest of you to procure him such diversions and informa- tion as may render his stay in your city agreeable. You will also please to supply him ivith all the money he may 400 CHOICE LETTERS. tomandolerecibodoble aslc to the amount of por lo que le entregue ; imo de los cuales me enviard, y lo cargard a mi cuenta. Inclu- sa va su firma para que vui. la conozca, y la honre como coresponde. Yomelisonjeo de que vm. tendra mucho gusto en lograr el coiiocinii- ento de un bellojoven cabal- lero, que ha recibido la mejor educacion. Qnedo regando a Dios rae guarde su vida muchos ano?. B. L. M. de vm. s. s. s. Sor. Don . Cadiz. taking of him a double re- ceipt for the same^ one of which you will send to me^ and you will charge it to my account. 1 have enclosed here- in his signature^ that you may know it, and conduct yourself accordingly, I flat- ter myself you toill be much pleased in enjoying the ac- quaintance of a sensible young gentleman J who has had an excellent education. I have the honour to be, Most respectfully y Your obedient servant. Mr. . Cadiz, Cartas crlticas de un Moro viajante en Espana^ For Don Jose^ Cadalso. CARTA 1. De Gazel a Ben-Beley. AUN no me hallo capaz de obedecer a las nucvas instan-^ cias que me haces sobre que te remita las observaciones que voy haciendo en la capital de esta vasta raonarqufa. Sabes tu cuantas cosas se necesitan para formar una verdadera idea del pais en que se viaja ? Bien es verdad, que habicndo hecho varies viages por'Europaj me hallo mas capaz, 6 poi mejor decir, con menos obstaculos que otros Africanos ; pero aun asi he ballad o tanta diferencia entre los Europeos. que no basta el conocimiento de uno de los paises de esta parte del mundo, para juzgar de otros estados de la misma. Los Europeos no parecen vecinos, aunque la esterioridad los haya uniformado en mesas, teatros, paseos, ejercito, y lujo : no obstante las leyes, vicios, virtudes, y gobierno soi, simiamente diversos, y por consiguiente las costumbres pro- pias de cada nacion. CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 401 Auii dentro de la Espanola hay variedad increible en el caracter de sus provincias. Un Andaluz en nada se parece a un Vizcaino ; un Catalan es totalmente distinto de un Gallego ; y lo mismo sucede entre un Valenciano y un Mon- tafies. Esta peninsula, dividida tantos siglos en diferentes reinos, ha tenido siempre variedad de trages, leyes, idiomas, y raonedas. Acabo de leer la Historia de Espana, y me pai-ece que de la relacion se puede inferirjloprimero ; que esta peninsula no ha gozado una paz que pueda Uamarse tal en cerca de dos mil anoSj y que por consiguiente es raaravilla, que aun ten- gan yerbas los campos, y aguas las fuentes. Lo segundo; -qne habiendo sido la religion motivo de tantas guerras coh- tra los descendientes de Tarif, no es mucho que sea objeto de todas sus acciones. Lo tercero ; que la continuacion de ^Bstar con las armas en la mano, les haya hecho mirar con desprecio el comercio e industria raecanica. Lo cuarto ; que de esto mismo nazca lo mucho que cada noble en Espana se envanece de su nobleza. Lo quinto ; que los muchos cau- dales adquiridos rapidamente en Indias, distraen a muchos de cultivar las artes mecanicas en la peninsula y de aumen- tar su poblacion. Las demas consecuencias morales de estos eventos pollti- cos las iras hotando en las cartas que te escribire sobre estos asuntos. CARTA IL Del mismo al mismo. El atraso de las ciencias en Esjjana en este siglo quieu puede dudar que precede de la faha de protection que ha- llan sus profesores ? Hay cocheros en Madrid, que ganaa trescientos pesos duros ; pero no hay quien no sepa que se ha de morir de hambre, como se entregue a las ciencias, es- ceptuadas las de pane lucren los varios viages que has hecho por Europa ; con el cual llegan 4 algunos centenares las obras Europeas de distintas naciones y tiempos que he leido. Gazel ! Gazel ! sin duda tendras por grande lo que voy k decirte ; y si publicas este mi dictamen, no liabra Europeo que no me llame barbaro Africano ; pero la amistad que te profeso, es muy grande, para dejar de corresponder con mis observaciones d las tuyas; mi sinceridad es tanta, que en nada puede mi lengua hacer traicion ^ mi pecho. En este supuesto digo, que de los li- bros que he referido, he hecho la siguiente separacion. He escogido cuatro de matematicas, en los que admiro la esten- sion y acierto que tiene el entendimiento humane cuando va bien dirigido : otros taiitos de jfilosofia escol^stica, en que me asombra la variedad de ocurrencias estraordinarias que tiene el hombre, cuando no precede sobre principles ciertos y evi- dentes ; uno de medicina, al que falta un tratade complete de los simples, cuye cenocimiento es diez mil veces mayor en A'frica : etro de anatomla, cuya lectura fue sin duda la que die motive al cuento del loco, que se figuraba tan quebradizo come el vidrio : dos de los que rcforman las costumbres, en las que advierto lo mucho que aun tienen que refermar; cuatro del cenocimiento de la naturaleza, ciencia que llaman iilosofia 5 en los que note lo mucho que igneraren nuestros abuelos, y lo mucho mastc^ue tendran que aprender nuestros CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 405 nietos. Algunos de poesia^ delicioso delirio del alma, que prueba la ferocidad en el hombre si la aborrece ; puerilidad, si la profesa toda la vida ; y suavidad, si la cultiva algun tiempo. Todas las demas obras de las ciencias hiimanas las he arro- jado 6 distribuidoj por parecerme inutiles estractos, conipen-. dios defectuosos, y copias imperfectas de lo ya dichoj y re- petido una y mil veces. CARTAS FAMILIARES. Del Padre Jose" Francisco de Isla, escritas a varios sugetos. CARTA L El Padre de Isla a su Jiermana. La Corufia 24 de Setiembre de 1755. Mi amada Maria Francisca : discurro que tus oraciones y ias de tu penitenciario me consiguieron un tiempo tan feliz hastauna legua antes de llegar a la Coruna, en que me llovio un poco, sin duda para que conociese lo mucho que debia ^ las devotas almas que me encomendaban 4 Dios ; y acaso sera efecto de lo mismo la descomposicion de vientre que me dura tres dias ha ; pues como no prosiga adelante, ser4 mas beneficio que indisposicion, aunque sirva de molestia mientras persevere. Tu salud me tiene con mas cuidado de el que manifiesto, siendo razon que yo oculte mi dolor a quien por no aumentarmele me dissimula lo que padece, porque asi lo pide la buena correspondencia. Nunca he pretendido saber mas de lo que me quisieren decir, ni que me quieran mas de lo que me quisieren querer ; con que siendo en este punto sumamente facil la conformidad, solo aspirare a mani- festar en todas ocasiones que ninguno te ama ni puede amarte mas que Tu amante Jiermano y padrino, Jose" FRANCISCO. 406 CHOICE LETTERS. CARTA II. Del mismo a su can ado. Villagarcia 2 de Enero de 1756. Amado hermano y amigo : no es de estranar que en cor- reo de pascuas (1) y en la misma vispera de ellas hubiesea tardado tanto en dar cartas. Si el mundo amaneciera un ano con juicio, en ningun tiempo se debiera tardar menos ; pero dejemosle correr su tren, pues no se puede remediar. No obstante yo he conseguido este ano no haber recibido hasta ahora mas que tres cartas de pascuas, y esas de gente novicia en mi correspondencia, 4 escepcion del Sefior Ta- ranco, a quien, por mas que he hecho, no he podido espeler del cuerpo este espiritu maligno, siendo las pascuas mas se- guras en su carta que en el calendario. Diviertete en leer esa necia satisfaccion que me da N . . . a la pieza que me jugo, suponiendo que yo habia de ir 4 Vil- lar de Frades a esperar el coche para dar las ordenes a los cocheros. Alia tiene una respuesta, cual la merece su bobe- ria, con el nuevo cargo de que su hijo pasase a vista de Vi- llagarcia sin entrar en ella ; y suponiendo que el por si no era capaz de hacerla, si no mediaran las instrucciones de su padrCj le pregunto que motivo le he dado para que le instru- yese tan mal ; el me ha dado malos ratos, pero no los llevar^ buenos con mis cartas, y estoy esperando las de padre e hijo para ver por donde parten. Este ultimo es natural que trueque el viage de Portugal por el de Paris, adonde dicen que ira el Conde de Aranda por embajador ordinario des- pues de haber evacuado ya su embajada estraordinaria, que parece se redujo precisamente a condolencia por la destruc- cion de Lisboa, y a socorrer a aquellos Principes con cau- dales y con generos. Recibi una carta atrasadisima de D. Miguel de Medina, en que me resume lo que le escribe Mascarerias, desde el cam* po delante de la quefut Lisboa^ a los diez y ocJio dias de su total destruccion. Dice que se salvo con toda su familia en- tre una espesa lluvia de piedras y de cascajo por especial proteccion de la santisima virgen, habiendo visto primero desplomarse toda su casa, y despues arder con todos los (1) Pdscua en Espanol significa todas las graiidcs fiestas, espe- cialmente las de Navidad. CARTAS ESC061DAJ5. 407 I'nuebles, alhajas y papeles. Estos ultimos y los libros son los que mas le duelen, no habiendose eximido mas que unos pocos que tenia en una quinta, y un cajon de ellos que le Ilego de Madrid, el dia despues de la fatali- dad. Solo pide 4 Medina mas y mas libros, especial- mente de arquitectura, porque el rey de Portugal trata de edificar una nueva corte de planta en parage distinto de la antigua, aunque este todavia no se ha determinado. A mi aun no me ha escrito, no obstante tener tres 6 cuatro cartas mias, pero ni lo estrano, ni me quejo. Llegaron los diez y ocho barriles de escabeches y de dulce^ buenos todos, a escepcion de uno de sardinas, quedebiade es- tar mal calafeteado, y se abrio en el camino. Repito gracias, y renuevo todo lo que te supliqne en la posta pasada. Dime, si has recibido ese cajoncillo de cigarros de la Ha- bana, porque cada dia me confirmo mas en la sospecha de alguna maniobra del mpsonero de Villar de Frades, en cuyo poder los puso el P. Manuel de Barachaguren, administrador de esta iglesia ; y el picaro del mesonero no hay forma de decir como se llamaba el maragato a quien dice se los en- trego, y que se obli^o a llevarlos. A^ntes de ayer vino de alia Pinilla, que esta encargado de esta averiguacion, y solo me trajo razon de que el maragato habia vuelto a pasar a Madrid, y que a su regreso a Santiago le haria cargo el me- sonero de dicho cajoncillo. Yo hubiera ya ido en persona a Villar de Frades a liquidar este embuste y a escarmentar al mesonero, si el tiempo lo hnbiera permitido ; pero a reserva de dos dias que por fuerza eran ocupados en la iglesia, todos los demas han sido intratables. Hubo carta de Roma de 17 de noviembre ; pero nada dice de congregacion ni del P. Idiaquez. Tampoco me ocurre m^s anadir, sino rogar a Dios te me guarde como ha menester, Tu amante hermano y ami^o. JOSE% CARTA III. Del mismo al mismo. Burgos 21 de Enero de 1757- Amado hermano y amigo : sail de Villagarcia el dia 15 : ea el se estanco dos veces la calesa sobre el hielo, y la segun- 408 CHOICE LETTERS. * pa vez estuvo encima de el desde las cuatro de la tarde hasta las once del dia siguiente, y nosotros dentro de ella por espa- cio de tres horas. Socorrieronnos caritativamente de un lu- gar vecino, enviandonos caballerlas para que subiesemos a elj y llegamos como puedes considerar. Alii tomamos otras dos raulas para que ayudasea a romper el hielo y nieve hasta Palencia : pero aun asi no quise entrar en la calesa, y fui a caballo hasta la misma ciudad. En ella me detuve dia y me- dio : tome otra calesa, mejoro el tiempo, y voy caminando. gracias a Dios, con felicidad, despues de haber padecido muchns tentaciones de volverme a mi colegio. No ten2:o tiempo de escribir a Maria Francisca^ ni a las deraas personas que me hacen merced, y sirva esta para to- das. Hoy llegue a Burgos entre mil trabajosy peligros. Pvlanana parto tomando de aqui otras dos mulas para pasar los montes de Oca, que son lo mas peligroso del camino. La salud bnena, a escepcion del pecho, que se me cerro el dia que estuve sobre el hielo. Af Dios. Tu hermano JOSE^ CARTA IV. Del mismo al mismo. Zaragoza 18 de Marzo de 1756. Amado hermano y amigo ; segun lo que me dices en la tuya de dos del corriente, contemplo ya a madre en la otra vida, y a padre muy cerca de ella : cumplase en todo la vo- luntad del Senor. Yo voy continuando con felicidad mi car- rera, teniendo ya andado mas de la mitad de ella. Me han pedido varios serraones para imprirairlos, pero no lo conse- guiran. La salud se ha resentido un poco, porque no soy de alabastre ; pero no me ha estorbado, gracias a Dios, cumplir con mi ministerio Un abrazo a Maria Francisca, y vive como necesita Tu amante hermano y amigo, JOSE^ FRANCISCO. CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 409 CARTA V. Del mismo al mismo. Zaragoza 22 de Marzo de 1757. Amado hermano y amigo : cuando esperaba la noticia de la muerte de nuestros dos enfermos, me hallo gustosamente sorprendido con la que me das de su recobro en la tuya de 9 del corriente. Bendito sea Dios por este nuevo beneficio. Solo si me da cuidado la salud de Maria Francisca, cuyos escesos de amor son incorregibles. Yo estoy raolido y me- dio reventado despues de veinte y ocho sermones, faltan- dome todavia diez y seis. El fruto es grande, y este es mi unico consuelo. A^ Dios, que te guarde como ha menester, Tu atnante hermano y amigo, JOSE^ FRANCISCO. CARTA VI. Del mismo a su hermana. Villagarcia 17 de Junio de 1757. Hija mia : tus cartas de primero y ocho del corriente que llegaron juntas, porque asi lo quieren los senores estafeteros. me dejan con la misma alternativa de afectos que tu esperi- mentas en tu salud. De buena gana partiria contigo mi ro- bustez, porque aunque no me sobra mucha, menos me basta- ria para mis tareas ordinarias y estraordinarias. Los banos casi fueron las primeras medicinas que se conocieron en el mundo. y por muchos siglos las unicas ; por eso tengo mucha fe con ellos. La dificfltad estu en atinar que especie de banos son los que se oponen k tal especie de enfermedades, y cuales achaques son los que no pueden resistir a tales ba- nos. En todo caminan a tientas los medicos ; mas por lo mismo puede ser que acierten, porque tal vez hace la casuali- dad lo que no puede hacer la eleccion y el discernimiento. Ya estamos en el mejor tiempo de tomarlos, que es el mes de junio y cercanias de S. Juan, especialmente si por all^ comi.- enzan a esplicarse los calores, que por aca todavia estan muy remisos. Mi parecer es que no pierdas dia, pues si surtiesen buen efecto, tendras iugar para recobrar las fuerzas que son 35 410 CHOICE LETTERS. menester para repetirlos por setiembre. Yo no abandonaria el uso de los polvos de Aix, habiendolos esperimentado tan propicios, sin estranar que hasta ahoia no hubiesen desarrai- gado la causa, porque cuando las raices son profundas, es menester no dejar el azadon de la mano hasta arrancarlas, y eso no se hace en un dia. No puedo negar que cuanto mas largas son tus cartas, mas me gustan ; pero tampoco me puede gustar fineza tuya que sea en detrimento de tu salud ; y asi mientras Dios no te la mejore, me contentare con una fe de vida, paramo cual basta ' tu firma, y me daras que sentir siempre que tuvieres que pade- cer por consolarme. Las memorias acostumbradas ; y A^ Dios hija. Tu amante hermano^ JOSE^ FRAxNCISCO. CABTA VII. Del mismo a la misma. Leon 4 de Mayo de 1759. Hija mia : hoy hace ocho dias que llegue a esta ciudad, habiendo gastado cuatro en el camino, porque me detuve dos en el monasterio de Vega con mi prima. La mitad del viage fue con gran calor, y la otra mitad con escesivo frio, el que ha continuado desde que llegue acompanado de agua, de vi- entos fuertes, y tambien de algo de nieve. Pague la patente en la primera noche con un fuerte dolor colico que me obligo a guardar cama todo el dia siguiente ; pero como rorapio por ambas vias, quede presto desahogado. Lo mismo sucedio al General de S. Benito, que se halla en esta ciudad ; solo que k este le acometio a la despedida, y a mi a la entra- da ; por cuya razon y por el mal tiempo suspendio el viage, que ya tenia echado k Espinareda. Visitome al dia siguiente de mi arribo : comi con su Reverendisima otro dia. Me ha visitado toda la ciudad, y como con el Intendente los dias que me dejan libres otros convites. He celebrado mucho ver la fabrica de tolas, aunque temo que se atrase por la de- sunion de los que principalmente la manejan. Luego que el tiempo lo permita, me restituire a mi celdita, cuya quietud se me hace mas apetecible, siempre que carezco de ella. Vive tanto como tu amante^ JOSE^ CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 411 CARTA VIII. Del mismo al S": D. G. R, Pontevedra 25 de Mayo de 1764. Muy Senor mio y mi diieno: tengo la fortuna deque V. S. me conozca muchos aiios ha. Si no se le ha borrado de la memoria mi caracter, tendra muy presente mi reahdad y mi entereza. La carne y sangre no me hacen fuerza. ni las pasiones humanas me ban cegado nunca la razon. Con- cederesela a mi mayor enemigo, siempre que la tenga ; ne- garesela. y se la negue alguna vez a mi mismo padre^ cuan- do concebi que no la tenia. Hermano mio es Don Jose Joaquin de Isla y Losada. Si en el injusto, voluntario y empermdo pleito criminal que le suscita-ron sus contrarios, no hubiera sido testigo ocular de su inocenciaj e yo hubiese de sentenciarle, el primer voto que tendria contra si seria el mio, y no seria el mas benigno. Sobradas esperiencias tiene el mismo de esta mi entereza en los varios sucesos de su vida. En los mas me tuvo contra si, pero en el presente no puedo desampararle, ni es razon que niegue a un hermano mio lo que en iguales circunstancias concederia a quien hubiese quitado violentamente la vida a mi padre y a mi mad re. Pasd.ron a mi vista todos los lances, porque me hallaba en Santiago en aquel turbado dia. No halle que condenar en este mozo, y lo que mas es, ni tampoco lo hallaron sus mismos contrarios. EUos formaron los primeros autos, y por estos mismos autos le absolvieron los Senores jueces del recta tribunal de que V. S. es digno miembro. Me aseguran que la segimda probanza nada aiiade a la primera, sino confirmar mas y mas el empefio de acabar de arruinar a ese mozo, para cubrir una inconsideracion con la perdida de un inocente. Alegan los contrarios su honor y el de una comunidad ver- daderamente muy respetable. Esta le tendra siempre muy resguardado, y nunca podra depender de la precipitacion de algunos particulares menos detenidos. Pero supongamos que dependa : y no se interesara tambien el honor del tribunal de V. S. en que sin nuevos, grandes y evidentes documentos no reforme lo que pronuncio con tanto examen y con tanta ma- durez? Mas nada de esto es del caso. El dictamen de que conviene que perezca un inocente, para que no perezcan muchos culpadosj ya sabemos todos la baja cuna que tuvo. 412 CHOICE LETTERS. Nunca le adoptaron por suyo los tribunales crlstianos. En ellos reina y reinara la maxima contraria : menos malo es absolver a muchos culpadosj que condenar a un inoceiite. Estalo sin duda mi hermano en el feo delito que le impu- tan. Todos los esfuerzos de sus contrarios, siendo tantos, tan poderosos y tan empefiadoSj no pudieron conseguir que dejase de conocerlo y de definirlo asi el rectlsimo tribunal. Grande es la fuerza de la inocencia, cuando no bastan a oprimirla las maquinas del poder. Mejor dire : siempre es muy debil el poder con los tribunales donde prreside la jus- ticia. Este es lioy todo mi consuelo y toda mi esperanza. Nada mas tengo que esponer a V. S. Pedirle que haga gra- cia a mi hermano, seria suponerle reo, pues en pleitos crimi- nales no cabe otra que moderar el rigor de las leyes. Supli- carle otra cosa^ seria agraviar su integridadj que tengo muy conocida. Con que en suma esta carta solo se reduce a dar testimonio de que mi profundo silencio no ha dependido de que tenga por culpado a Jose Joaquin, como alguno ha queri- do sonar ; sino precisamente de haber descansado y decansar en la justicia de la causa, y en la equidad de los jueces. Tampoco he querido malograr esta oportuna y casi necesaria ocasion de renovar a V. S. todo mi antiguo respeto. Nues- tro Senor guarde a V. S. muchos afios como puede y le suplico. B. L. M. de V. S. Su mas atento servidor y capellan^ JosE^ Francisco de ISLA CARTA IX. Del misnio a su hermana, Bclonia 8 de Junio de 1780. Amada hija, hermana y Sefiora mia : recibo tu estimadisi- ma carta de 2 del pasado, acompaiiada con la gaceta de Madrid ; su fecha 23 del mismo, con que me regala siempre nuestro amantisimo sobrino. Segun estas dos fechas tu carta se detuvo veinte y un dias en Madrid 6 en Parma, porque si hubieran caminado juntas la gaceta y ella, no pudiera la una ganar ^ la otra las enormes ventajas que la ganoen el camino. El que las recibe en Parma, no es capaz de detenerlas ni un solo momento, porque deseoslsimo de servirte 4 ti, y de com- placerme a mi, e mformado tambien de que ni d ti ni ^ mi CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 413 lios ha queclado otro consuelo igual a el de nuestra inocente conversacion, tampoco el tiene otro mayor que el de cooperai' 4 que lo logremos con toda la posible puntualidad y prudente ffecuencia. Resta pues, que dicha carta se hubiese quedado traspapelada en tu escritorio 6 en el buro de el que nos hace el singular favor de dirigirlas. Pareciome que debia adver- tirte esto para tu gobierno. He celebrado mucho que hayas abandonado la casa hu- meda, fria y sin ventilacion que habitabas, atribuyendo a ella con sobrada razon, ^ lo menos gran parte de lo que has pa- decido en el pasado invierno. Alegrareme infinito de que te trate mejor^ como lo espero, la calle de Atocha, junto a Lore- tOj donde te has pasado. Si no tengo trastornada la memo- ria, (como lo temo) pareceme que la calle de Atocha hace parte del cuartel del oriente de Madrid, reputado por el mas sano ; lo que si fuere asi. no contribuira poco 4 tu recobro. No me dices el numero de la casa, ni el cuarto que en ella ha- bitas, lo que dicen es necesario para guia de los sobrescritos. Al Sefior Conde de Aranda solamente le escribi desde Calvi sobre los manuscritos qne me habian embargado en Espafia, suplicandole que si despues de examinados no se hallase en ellos cosa que ofendiese a la religion ni al estado, se sirviese su Escelejicia disponer que aquellos inocentes hijos viniesen a hacer companla a su pobre y desterrado padre. Kespondiome aquel Senor que eso ya no estaba en su mano ; pero que estuviese sin cuidado, porque aquellos hijos qlfaban a cargo de quien haria que fuesen tratados como los trataria su mismo padre, sin permitir que ninguno se me- tiese con ellos. Esto fue en suma la respuesta. Correspondd cordialisimamente a la memoria que hacen de mi los amigos Ramirez y Casaus. Deseo con las mayores ansias que el primero triunfe cuanto antes, y no ceso de rogar a Dios por el recobro del segundo. Dias ha que esta concluida la version de Gil Bias ; pero ni mi cabeza ni mi pulso me ban permitido emprender todavia el prologo y dedicatoria. Los calores son escesivos, y con ellos se hace mayor cada dia mi dejamiento y mi suma debilidad. A^ Dios, hija mia : a Dios, y manda a este tu amante hermano, Padrino y servidor^ JOSE^ FRANCISCO, 35* 414 CHOICE LSTTEKSV CARTA X. Del mismo a un amigo suyo» Quien siendo poco mas rico que el Padre de Isla, pero habi- endo oido que este estaba niuy necesitadoj le escribioj ofre- ciendole partir con el lo poco que le quedaba. Querido amigo : que sobrehuraana fuerza ;es esta ! que alma ha jamas sido capaz de tan heroicas acciones ! Temes, te persuades que estoy necesitado^ y quieres partir conmigo lo poco que te queda ! Mereces que te erijan estatuas : y si fuera este el tiempo de la gentilidad, te adorarian como a Dios de la amistad. Yo no puedo esplicarte mi reconocimiento a la piedad que usas conmigo. Es cosa deplorable el verse en estado de necesitarla ; pero cuan dulce y consolante es en- •contrar almas tan tiernas y tan grandes como la tuya, que lo compadezcan ! Todos mis infortunios, todos mis males son nada en comparacion de la satisfaccion que me causa tu hu- manidad y afecto. Y quieres condenar mi gratitud al silen- cio ! ya se, amigo, si, ya se que tu corazon ejercita su bene- ficencia, no para recibir el lisongero tributo del reconocimi- ento, sino para satifacer su noble inclinacion. Pero, como quieres que deje de ser reconocido a tan singulares beneficios, como he recibido de tu generosa amistad ? Eso no puede ser, amigo : con que, permitiras que, obedeciendo a la vo:Wmperi- osa de mi corazon, te diga que mi gratitud sera indeleble, y que mi afecto para ti tendra un siempre por termino de su duracion, Enviame solo la mitad de lo que me ofreces, y sobrara para hacer de muy pobre muy rico a Tufino amigo ^ JOSE^ REFLEXlOxNES MORALES. MORAL REFLECTIONS. I Oh honibre, seas el que fueres noble 6 artesano ; rieo 6 pobre ; docto 6 ignorante ; eclesi^stico 6 secular ; religioso 6 militar ; soberano 6 subdito ; desciende dentro de ti mis- mo, y en un silencio profundo, y no interrumpido, reflexiona sobre los horrores de la nada, que precedieron a tu concep- cion ! I Como de la nada has pasado a ser ? corao en un instante has llegado a ser espiritu y cuerpo, esto es ; con- junto de dos sustancias, cuya union parece incompatible, y cuya accion es us prodigio continuado ? Ni tu padre, ni tu madre tuvieron conocimiento ni poder para coordinar tus musculos, para diluir ni liquidar tu sangre, ni para endurecer tus huesos. Una inteligencia suprema, superior a todas las potencias de la tierra, y superior k todas tus ideas, quiso, y comenzo tu existencia ; quiso, y creciste at estado en que te hallas. j Ay de mi ! ^ Y quien es esta in- teligencia ? j Ay ! Quien puede ser, sino el motor universal, el principle de todo lo que vegeta y respira, y el infinite ser, al que Uamamos Dios? Su mano omnipotente te bosquejaba, cuando tu no podias conocerle, y te conserva y mantiene en un siglo en el que se hace vanidad de ultrajarle. Pero si na eras ayer, y puede ser dejes de ser hoy ; ; possible es que se te pase el dia, que tan rapidamente se huye, sin peusar ei> este criador y conservador, sin darle gracias, y sin adorarle ? EL MARQUES CARACCIOLO. La verdad es la que rige los Cielos, alumbra la tierra, sus- tentala justicia, gobierna las Republicas, confirma lo que es claro, y aclara lo que es dudoso ; con ella todas las viitudes tienen su perfeccion. Ella es un homenage que nunca cae, un escudo que no se pasa, un tiempo que no se turba, una flota que no perece, una flor que no se marchita, una mar que no se altera, y un puerto en donde nadie peligra. La Verdad tiene en si tan gran fuerza, que sin ella la fortaleza es flaca, la prudencia es malicia, la temperancia es miseria, la justicia es sanguinolenta, la humildad es traidora, la pacien-> 4l6 MORAL REFLECTIONS. cia fingicla, la castidad vana, la riqueza perdida, y la piedad supeiflua. La verdad es im centro adonde todas las cosas reposan, el iiorte por donde el mundo se rige, el antidoto con que todos se curan : es la sombra adonde todos descansan, el terrero adonde todos tiran, pero el bianco adonde pocos aciertan. don pedro de Medina. El temor de la justicia divina es el principio que hizo na- cer en la imaginacion de varios libertinos las horribles ideas filosoficas, ya de negar a Dios la existencia, y/a de despojar de su inmortalidad al alma. Toda la desdicha de estos mi- serables viene de que, lejos de contemplar al Omnipotente como a un padre carinoso^ solo se figuran en el un juez severo ; y para sacudir de si el temor, que esta calidad les inspira, forcejan a persuadirse, 6 con la primera de estas dos quime- ras, que no hay Dios que los castigue ; 6 con la segunda, que solo pueden temer de el un castigo leve, y de corta dura- cion, como lo es cualquiera pena temporal. ^ Pero que lo- gran con esto ? Puntualmeiite lo que el reo, que huyendo de la justicia, se arroja por un despenadcro, y por evitar un su- plicio contingente, abraza una muerte indubitable. Por el precipico mayor de todos, que es el de la impiedad, procu- ran huir de la justicia divina. Y aun los que niegan a Dios la existencia, no tanto aspiran a huir de la justicia divina, como que la justicia divina huya de ellos, pretendiendo que el soberano juez se desaparezca de aquel augusto trono, en que los ha de sentenciar. feijoo. El avaro ya se sabe que es un martir del demonio, 6 un anacoreta, que con su abstinencia y su retiro hace meritos para ir al infierno. El corazon, partido entre los dos deseos de conservar y adquirir, padece una continua fiebrOj mezcla- da con un mortal frio ; pues, se abrasa con la ansia de conse- guir lo ageno, y tiembla con el susto de perder lo propio. Tiene hambre^y no come ; tiene sed, y no bebe : tiene necesi- dad, y no reposa : jamas se ve libre de sobresaltos. Ningun raton se mueve en el silencio de la noche, que con el ruido no le de especie de ser un ladron que le escala. Ningun viento sopla que en su imaginacion no amenace naufragio al navio que tiene puesto en comercio : Ninguna guerra se sus- cita, que no considere ya a los enemigos talando sus tierras : REFLEXIONES MORALES. 41? cualquier rencilla de particulares, dentro de su idea viene ii parar en popular turaulto, que lleva a saco el caudal. No hay uubecilla que no imagine tempestuosa para sus vinas y mieses : no hay intemperie, que no amague corrupcion a lo que tieue recogido en las trojes. feijoo. El Ambicioso es un esclavo de todo el minido : del princi- pe. porque conceda el empleo : del valido, porque interceda": de los demas, porque no estorben. Tiene el alma y el cuerpo en continuo movimientO; porque es menester no per- der instante. A todos teme. porque ninguuo hay que con una acusacion no pueda desvanecer toda su solicitud. : O cuanto force] a con su semblante porque muestre agrado a los mismos a quienes prolesa mortal odio ! j Cuanto trabajo le cuesta reprimir todas aquellas inclinaciones viciosas que pue- den diticultar sus medras ! De la pasion dorainante son victi- rnas todas las demas pasiones ; y el vicio de la anibicion. co- mo tirano dueiio, sobre atormentarle por si mismo, le prohibe Todos aq-iellos gustos a que le lleva el deseo. Ve al que va a la ccmedia, al que logra el paseo honesto. al que asiste al banquete, al que goza el sarao. todo lo ve. y lo envidia : pero los apetitos estan en el, annque furiosos. aprisionados como los vientos en la carcel de Eolo. feijoo. Cuanto mas abulta "el cuer-po de un hombre, tanto mas tiene donde le hiera el enemigo : y cuanto mas es la amplitud de la fortuna, tanto mas hay donde hiera la adversidad. Son las ricas torres elevadas, y las pobres chozas humildes ; y el rayo mas veces descarga en la torre su furia, que en k cho- za. Uno de los mayores males que hay en lo temporal, sino el mayor de todos, es la salud qiiebrada ; como el mayor bien la salud robusta. Y no tiene duda que, en igualdad de temperaraento, mucho mas sano es el pobre que el rico : por- que este con los escescs se estraga la salud, y aquel se la con- serva con su sobriedad. Que bella digresion hace Lucano en el libro quinto de la guerra civil, sobre la felicidad del pobre Barquero Amintas, cuando pinta a Cesar en el silencio de la noche pulsando la puerta de su choza. para que le conduzca prontamente a la 418 MORAL REFLECTIONS. Calabria. Todo ei mundo esta conmovido y temblando coo los movimientos de la guerra civil ; y dentro de la misraa Grecia, que es el teatro de la guerra, vecino a los mismos ejercitos, duerme, sin temor alguno, un pobre barquero sobre enjutas ovas. Despiertanle los golpes que da a su puerta el generoso Caudillo, sin introducir en su pecho el menor susto : pues, aunque no ignora que esta toda la campana cubierta de tropas, sabe tambien que no hay en su choza cosa que pueda brindar los militares insultos, j O vida del pobre, esclama el poeta, que tienes la felicidad de eslar exenta de las violen- cias ! j O pobreza, beneficio grande de los Dioses, aunque no reconocida de los homhres ! Que muros 6 que templos gozaran el privilegio que tienen Amintas y su choza de no temblar a los golpes de la robusta mauo de Cesar ! FEIJOO. La modestia es la prenda mas amable de una doncella, aun en cotejo de la hermosura. Esta, no hay duda, halaga y solicita mucho mas la pasion del hombre, pero aquella se grangea su mayor estimacion y aprecio, La pasion nace de los atractivos que la hacen amar aquello que la provoca : mas el aprecio y estimacion que infunde el decoro de la modestia, proceden del respeto que adora en la esterior compostura de un rostro la belleza interior del alma, a quien aquella retrata. Aquella misma es tambien seguro indicio de la dulzura de genio, y de la suavidad del caracter, a quien sirve de alma, de la cual espora su mayor satisfaccion y dicha en el casa- miento el hombre que pretende poseerla. La hermosura es don accidental de la naturaleza, que entre pocos la reparte ; pero la hermosura interior del alma la da la virtud sola, a cualquiera que desea conseguirla. PEDRO DE MONTENGON. En todas aquellas cosas, que esencialmente componen la felicidad temporal, conviene a saber ; Vida, Salud, Honra y Hacienda, es muy mejorado el virtuoso, respecto de el que no lo es. La Honra nadie ignora que es parto legitimo de la Virtud. Por eso los Romanos ediiicaron unidos los templos de estas dos dichas, que veneraban como deidades, de modo que solo por el templo de la Virtud se podia entrar al templo REFLEXIONES MORALES. 419 del Honor. Los niismos que huyen de la practica dela Vir- tudj la miran con estimacion y reverencia. La Salud y larga vida es mas natural y posible en el hombre virtuoso, por la templanza con que vive, al paso que el vicioso con sus esce- sos se estraga la salud, y se acorta la vida. La Hacienda tiene una gran maestra de economla en la Virtud, siendo cierto que se conserva evitando toda superiluidad. La suavidad y dulzura que al alma ocasiona la buena con- ciencia, coloca en muy eminente grado lafortuna de los jus- tos sobre la de los pecadores. Es esta una felicidad de poco bulto, pero de mucha monta ; una piedra preciosa, que en breves dimensiones encierra grandes quilates. Es la concien- cia espejo del alma, y sucede al justo y al pecador, cuando se miran en este espejo, lo que a la hermosa y a la fea al verse en el cristal : aquella se complace, porque ve perfec- ciones ; esta se entristece, porque no registra sino lunares. FEIJOO. I O MUERTE, cuan amarga es tu memoria ! Cuan presta tu venida ! Cuan secretos tus caminos ! Cuan dudosa tu bora ! Cuan universal tu senorio ! Los poderosos no te pueden huir ; los sabios no te saben evitar ; los fuertes contigo pierden las fuerzas ; para contigo ninguno hay rico ; pues, ninguno puede coraprar la vida, ni aun por tesoros. Todo lo andas, todo lo cercas, y en todo lugar te hallas. TA paces las yer- bas ; bebes los yientos ; corrompes los aires ; mudas los si- glos ; truecas el mundo, y no dejas de sorber la mar. Todas las cosastlenen sus crecientes y menguantes ; mas tu, siempre permaneces en un mismo ser. Eres un martillo que siempre hiere ; espada que nunca se embota ; lazo en que todos caen ; carcel en que todos entran ; mar donde todos peli- gran ; pena que todos padecen ; y tributo que todos pagan. — I O muerte cruel ! ^ Como no tienes lastima de venir al me- jor tierapo e impedirlos negocios encaminados a bien ? Ro- bas en una bora, en un minuto, lo pue se gano en muchos anos ; cortas la sucesion de los linages ; dejas los Reinos sin herederos ; hinches el mundo de orfandades ; cortas el hilo de los estudios ; haces malogrados los buenos ingenios ; juntas el fin con el principio, sin dar lugar a los juedios. — I O muerte, muerte ! O implacable enemiga del genero hu- mano ! ^j Porque tuviste entrada en el mundo ?. . . LUIS DE GRACIAN, REFRANES DE LA LENGUA ESPANOLA CON SUS ESPLICACIONES. Quien mucho abarca poco aprieta. Que esplica, que quien emprende 6 toma 4 su cargo muchas cosas a un tienipo, ordinariamente no cumple con ninguna. Ahajanse los estados^ y dlzanse los establos. Que advierte la poca constancia de la fortuna. Quien mal anda^ mal acaba. Que se dice de el que ni tiene orden ni cuidado en sus negocios, que ordinariamente se le sigue desgracia. Si el corazon fiiera de acero^ no le venciera el dinero. Que da a entender la dificultad que hay en resistir las tenta- ciones de la codicia. Quien el aceite mesura, las manos se unta. Que da ^ en- tender que los que manejan dependencias 6 intereses agenoSj suelen aprovecharse de ellos mas de lo justo. Quien no adoba^ 6 quita gotera^ tiene que hacer casa entera. La muger del ciego, para quien se afeita ! Que vitupera el demasiado adorno de lasraugeres, con el fin de "kgradar ^ otros que a sus maridos. fj/ buen pagadovj amo es de lo ageno. Que denota que el que paga bien y exactamente lo que debe, tiene mucho credito. Agaa ni enferma, ni embeoda^ ni adeiida. Que recomien- da los buenos efectos del agua, por contraposicion 4 los del vino. Quien en un mes quiere ser rico, al medio le ahorcnn. Que amonesta a los que por medios ilicitos quieren hacerse ricos en poco tiempo. Por el alabado d(jt al conocidoj y vime arrepentido. Dime con quien and as ^ y te dirt quien eres. Que advierte lo mucho que influyen ^ las costumbres las buenas 6 malas companias. ^ TREATISE ON SPANISH VERSIFICATION. Spanish versification is the art of making Spanish Verses according to certain rules. These rules regard, 1st. the structure of the verses ; 2d. the mixture of the verses with one another. ARTICLE I. Of the structure of verses. SECTION I. ij Of the different kinds of verses. The Spanish verses are measured by the number of sylla- bles. Variety in the number of syllables produces different kinds of verses. 1st. The verses of eleven syllables or endecasilabo^ hen- decasyllabe. Saiga mi trabajada voz y rompa El son confuso y misero lamento Con eficacia y fuerza, que interrompa El celeste y terrestre raovimiento : La fama con sonora y clara trompa, Dando mas furia ^ mi cansado aliento, Derrame en todo el orbe de la tierra Las armasj el furor y nueva guerra. Alonso de Ercilla. 2d. The verse often syllables or c?ecasfZa6o,decasy liable. Los que andais empoUando obras de otros Sacad, pues, i volar vuestra cria. Ya diri cada autor : esta es mia ; Y veremos que os queda 4 vosotros. T. DE Yriarte. 3d. The verse of nine syllables. Si querer entender de todo Es ridicula presuncion, Servir solo para una cosa Suele ser falta no menor. T. de Yriartje. 36 422 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 4th. The verse of eight syllables or de redondilla mayor (large roundelay.) Al infierno el Tracio Orfeo Su muger bajo a buscar, Que no pudo a peor lugar Llevarle tan mal deseo. Canto, y al mayor tormento Puso suspension y espanto, Mas que lo dulce del canto. La novedad del intento. El Dios adusto ofendido, Con un estrano rigor, La pena que hallo mayor Fue volverle ^ ser marido. Y aunque su muger le dio Por pena de su pecado ; Por premio de lo cantado, Perderla facilito. F. de Quevedo. 5th. The verse of seven syllables. I Quien es aquel que baja Por aquella colina, La botella en la mano, En el rostro la risa ; De p^mpanos e yedra La cabeza cenida ; Cercado de zagales, Rodeado de ninfas ; Que al son de los panderos Dan voces de alegrla, Celebran sus hazauas, ^ Aplauden su venida ? Sin duda sera Baco, El padre de las vinas ; Pues no, que es el poeta, Autor de esta letrilla, J. Cadalso*^ 6th. The verse of six syllables or de redondilla menor (small roundelay.) De amores me muero^ Mi madre acudid, ^^ VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 42S Si no Uegais pronto Vereisme morir. Catorce anos tengo, Ayer los cumpli. Que fue el primer dia Del florido abril ; Y chicos y chicas Me suelen decir : ; Por que no te casan, Mariquilla? di. De amores me muero, etc. J. Cadalsct. 7tli. The verse oijlve syllables. Poderoso caballero Es don DinerOy Nunca vi almas ingratas A su gusto y aficion, Que a las caras de un doblon, Hacen sus caras baratas ; Y pues las hace bravatas Desde una bolsa de cuero, Poderoso caballero Es don Dinero. F. de Quevedo. 8th. The verse of four syllables. I Quien los jueces con pasion, Sin ser ungiiento, hace humanos, Pues untandoles las manos ' Les ablanda el corazon ; Quien gasta su opilacion Con oro y no con acero ? El dinero. Quien procura que se aleje Del suelo la gloria vana ; Quien siendo toda cristiana Tiene la cara de herege ; Quien hace que al hombre aqueje El desprecio y la tristeza? Lapobreza, F. de Quevedo. 424 SPAmSH VERSIFICATION. 9th. The verse of three syllables* Dineros son calidad, Verdad : Mas ama, quien mas suspira^ Mentira L. de Gongora» 10th. The verse of two syllables. Ingrata, hermosa Antandra^ En cuyas centellas / Bellas^ El alma es sa^amandra. Que respira encendida, Dulce ardor, blando incendio, ardiente vida. 11th. The verse of fourteen syllables, which is nothing more than the union of two verses of seven syllables. Yo lei, no se donde, que en la lengua herbolaria, Saludando a un tomillo la yerba parietaria. Con socarroneria le dijo de esta suerte : Dios te guarde, Tomillo : lastima me da verte ; Que aunque mas oloroso que todas estas plantas, Apenas medio palmo del suelo te levantas. T. DE Yriarte. 12th. The verse of thirteen and tioelve syllables, a la francesa (after the French fashion.) En cierta catedral una campana habia Que solo se tocaba algun solemne dia. Con el mas recio son, con pausado compas Cuatro golpes 6 tres solia dar no mas. Por esto, y ser mayor de la ordinaria marca, Celebrada fue siempre en toda la comarca. T. DE Yriarte. 13th. The verse of ticelve syllables or de arte mayor (of gr**at art,) which is only the union of two verses of six syl- lables. I No heraos de reirnos siempre que chochea Con ancianas frases un novel autor ? Lo que es afectado juzga que es primor ; ^^ VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 425 Habla puro a costa de la claridad, Y no halla voz baja para nuestra edad, Si fue noble en tiempo del Cid campeador. T. DE Yriarte. The verses of fourteen^ ten and 7iine syllables, are not fre- quently used. Those a la francesa and de arte mayor, which were often used in the early times of Spanish poetry, are but seldom used at present. The verses of ei^ht^ six^ jive., four ^ three and two syllables are known under the general denomination of versos de re- dondilla (roundelay verses,) and the verses of eleven andseye?i syllables under that of versos italianos (Italian verses.) The Spaniards call versos enteros (entire verses; the verses oi eleven, eight and six syllabtes, and versos de pie quebrado (verses of broken measure) or simply versos quehrados (broken verses) the verses oi seven, Jive, four, three and two syllables. SECTION II. Of the Accent, o In every Spanish word there is a long syllable, that is. upon which more stress is laid than upon the others. This sylla- ble is said to bear the accent, and though this accent is not always marked, it is, however, not the less sensible for it. The word accent is then synonymous with long. We call aguda (acute) the syllable that bears the accent. All the syllables which precede or follow the long S3dlable are brief. The monosyllables are naturally long, but they are brief when they are placed next to another word, or when they piecede a word with which they have an immediate relation. The accent generally falls upon the antepenultima, penul- tima or last syllable of words, but most commonly upon the penultima. The words which have the accent upon the antepenultima syllable are called esdrujulos (gliding) and those which have it upon the last syllable agudos (acute.) The Spaniards call versos llanos (plain verses) the verses terminated with a word which has the accent upon the pe- nultima syllable ; versos esdrujulos (gliding verses) the verses 36* 426 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. terminated with a word esdriijulo^ and versos ctgudoc (acute verses) the verses terminated with a word agudo. In the verses llanos the number of syllables is equal to that determined by the kind to which they belong ; thus a verse llano of eleven syllables has eleven syllables, a verse llano of eight syllables has eight syllables, &c. &c. 123 4567 89 10 11 Sal|ga|mijtralba|ja|da|voz|y|r6m|pa... 12345678 , La|no|ve|dad|del|in|tenlto... 12 3 4 5 6 7 El|pa|dre|de|las|vi|nas... The verses esdriijulos have one syllable more than the kind to which they belong indicates ; thus a verse esdrvjnlo of eleven syllables has twelve^ a verse Qsdrujolo of eight syllables has nine, &c. &c. 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Un|ga|to|pe|dan|ti|si|mo|re|t6|ri|co... 123 456789 •o A|to|dos|los|a|ca | de|mi|cos... The verses agndos have a syllable less than the kind to which they belong indicates ; thus a verse agvdo of eleven syllables has only ten, and a verse agudo of eight syllables has only seven, &c. &c. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Con|un|es|tra|rio|ri|g6r^ 12 3 4 5 Ve|reis|me|mo|rir... The verses which are formed of the union of two smaller verses may have more or less syllables, according as these verses are either llanos or agndos ; thus a verse of ar^e wa- ?/ory which is formed of the union of two verses of six sylla- bles, will have twelve syllables if these two verses are llanos ; it will have onl}^ eleven if one is agudo and the other llano, and it will have only ten if both are agudos, 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Dijcho|sosjvos|c|tros — a|quien|los|cui|dd|dos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Del|mun|do|no|tur|ban— -el|dullce|re|p6|so... VERSfFICACION ESPAliOLA. 427 12345 6 7 89 10 11 El|ros|tro|cu|bier|to — con|tris|te|pe|sar 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lu 11 De|no|ta|la|pe|na — del|gra|ve|do|16r... 12 345 6789 10 No|quie|rolvi|vir — vi|cla|con|do|16r... The verses llanos are those of general use in Spanish po- etry. The verses agudos are only used mixed with the verses llanos and solely in light poetry, for they are avoided in elevated poetry. The verses tsdrujulos are seldom used alone, they are most often mingled with verses llanos^ and this mixture is not common. • The Spanish verses, of whatsoever kind they may be, be- ing most always llanos^ it may be said that they require an accent upon the penultimate syllable. Independently of this final accent, the hendecasyllable verses, or of eleven syllables, require also an accent upon theii fourth or sixth syllable. As to the number of accents which may also enter into the hendecasyllable verses, and the place which they should oc- cupy, it is impossible to determine it by fixed rules, nothing but the harmony of the verse can serve as a guide. Be it su^ ficient to observe 1st. that, the more accents are introduced in a verse, the more its harmony is slow and sustained ; 2d. that there may be introduced in a hendecasyllable verse, be- sides the final accent and that of the 4th. or 5th. syllable which are indispensable, one, two and even three accents ; 3rd. that they are placed nearly at an equal distance from each other and not unfrequently upon the syllables which are paired. Di|ch6|so|quien Ce|le|bra|ias|ha Y el|vi|gor|y el en|ver|so|ge|ne|r6|so za|nas|injmor|ta|les, es|fuerlzo|va|le|r6lso. In the verses which are not Eendecasyllable, the final ac-^ cent is the only one indispensable | one or many other ac- cents may be in truth introduced in them, as the measure permits or harmony requires, but the place which they should occupy is not fixed, and the ear alone should be consulted. The verses of arte mayor require, besides the final accent^ an accent upon the second and upon the eighth syllable. 428 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. SECTION III. Of the elision. When a word ends in a verse with a vowel and the follow- ing word begins with a vowel or an h, there is an elision of the final vowel, that is, it is not counted as any thing. 0|bel|la in|gra|ta a|quien|e]|al|rna «|do|ra! If there should be a monosyllable consisting of a single vo\vel between two words, one of which ends and the other begins with a vowel, the three syllables shall be blended so as to make only one syllable. En|vi|dia a rv|que|llos|pra|doe|la /«er|mo|su|ra..» Fal|tan|Jo a £s|pa|ria|su|ma|yor|te|so|ro... The initial y being a consonant cannot occasion an elisioUj it is not so with the final y and the conjunction y. Di|cho|s |//o|qup|vi|n6? a|tan|buen|puer|to... De|lan|te|'h es|ta|pe|ria|tos|ca|//|du|ra... The elision may be omitted, 1st when the first word con- sists of a single vowel or is terminated with an accented vow- el, 2d. when the second word begins with an A, 3d. when there is a natural pause or the conjunction y stands between the two words. Dijcho|so|-?om|bre|que|vi|ves... 0|-7l|ma|rJe.-|ven|tujra|da !... Un|per|r.'>|y i/n|bor|ri|colca|mi|na|ban, Sir|vien|do a z/n|mis|mo|due|no. SECTION IV. Of the vowels which for^m or do not form diphthongs. When several vowels are in succession in the same word, sometimes they form a single syllable and at others two. The vowels A A, AE, AT, when the accent bears upon tlie I, and AO, form two syllables ; AI when the accent does not bear upon the I, AU and AY form but one. Ex. Sa-avedra^ a-ereoy distra4do^ cstais, hay^ aurora* VfiRSIFlCACION ESPAnOLA. 429 The vowels EA, EE, and EG form two syllables, but when EA and EG are final and the accent bears upon the prece- ding syllable, they form but one; EI, EU and EY form but one syllable. Ex. Oce-uno^ pose-er^ trofe-o^ linea^ eterea^ Tnomentdneo, deidad, deuda, rey. The vowels I A, IE, IG, lU form but one syllable, but when the accent bears upon the I, they form two. Ex. Glo- ria^ siempre^ contrarioj triunfo^ alegri-a, tenii-a. The vowels GA,GE,GI,when the accent bears upon the 1, and GG, form two syllables ; GI when the accent does not bear upon the I, GU and GY form but one. Ex. Bo ato^ po-eta, O'ido, bo-otes^ estoy. In Mroe GE forms but one syllable. The vowels UA, UE, UI, UG, UY, UIE, UEY, form but one syllable ; but when the accent bears upon the U, they form two. Ex. Igual^ fi^^gOj guirnalda, monstruo^ muy^ quien, quietud, buey, gahzu-a. The preceding rules are general, and liable to few excep- tions ; nevertheless the poets do not always strictly confine themselves to them, and sometimes unite vowels to form but one syllable which ought to form two, while at others they separate vowels in order to form two syllables which ought not to form but one. In this manner we find poeta forming two syllables instead of three, real forming one syllable in- stead of two, didlogo forming four syllables instead of three j triunfo forming three syllables instead of two, &c. &c. Of Rhyme. The Spaniards have two kinds of rhymes, the rhyme conso- nant and the rhyme assonant. The rhyme consonant (consonancia) is the perfect agree- ment of two sounds which terminate two verses. The rhyme consonant always begins at the vowel upon which the accent bears ; thus in the verses esdrujulos it will begin at the vowel of the antepenultima, in the verses llanos at the vowel of the penultima and in the verses agudos at the vowel of the last syllable. The rhyme consonant being only made for the ear, regard should be had to the pronunciation rather than the orthography of the final syllables ; thus kijo will rhyme well with Jixo. (now Jijo^) iniquo with chicop &c. 430 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. The rhyme assonant (asonancia) consists in the resem- blance of the vowels found in the final syllables of two words the consonants of which are different. The rhyme assonant always begins in the same manner as the rhyme consonant at the vowel upon which the accent bears; thus /2^6r«, cubiertay mesa^ avmtnta^ ptna^ lUva^ tr^gua^ which have the accent upon the penuUimate syllable, may rhyme by assonance^ and the same will happen with caracdl, doUr^ corazdn, dids^ v6z,amd,.nacidy which have the accent upon the last syllable, which shows 1st, that no regard fe had for the rhyme assonant but to the resemblance of the vowelsj and that in diphthongs, nothing is regarded but the last vowel ; 2d. that the consonants must be diflerent, and that when there are two consonants in succesion, it is suffi- cient that one of the two should not be found in the other word. In the words esdnijulos^ one may be content for the rhyme assonant with the resemblance of the vowels of the antepe- nultima and of the last syllable of the two words, thus, ord- culo and tdrtago will form a good rhyme assonant^ though the vowel of the penultima of the one be not similar to that of the penultima of the other. The use of the rhyme consonant is much more common than that of the rhyme assonant^ therefore whenever in speaking of rhyme the kind shall not be designated, the rhyme consonant will be the one meant. Rhyme is not indispensable in the Spanish verses as it is in the French, and the Spaniards have verses not rhymed or blank verses which are called versos sueltos (free verses) in which it is necessary carefully to avoid the least final con- sonance, SECTION VI. Of the ENJAMBEMENT, or running of one verse into another to complete the sense. In Spanish the enjamhement of verses is permitted even in elevated poetry, that is, that the sense may remain in sus- pense at the end of a verse, and end only at the beginning of the following verse ; which happens principally whenever the beginning of a verse is the regimen or necessary depen- dance of what is found at the end of the preceding verse^ VERSIPICACION ESPAfiOLA. 431 Volved las armas y dnimo furioso A los pechos de aquellos que os han puesto En dura sujecion, con afrentoso Partido a todo el mundo manifiesto. Alonso de Ercilla. Even sometimes the Spanish poets transport the syllable mente of an adverb to the following verse, or make an elision of the final vowel of the word that terminates the verse with the vowel of the word which begins the other verse, but these enjambefnens, which can only take place between an entire verse and a broken one, are so uncommon, that they should be considered as poetical hcenses. Y mientras miserable — Mente se est^n los otros abrasando Con sed insaciable Del peligroso mando, Tendido yo a la sombra este cantando. Fray Luis de Leox. SECTION VII. Of poetical licenses, and what should be avoided in verses. Though the language of Spanish poetry be not different from that of prose, and the same expressions be commonly used in it, nevertheless it is permitted to make in the construc- tion of the phrase certain transpositions which prose would not admit of, and which contribute in a high degree to the harmony and nobleness of verses. It is always necessary to make these transpositions with intelligence and taste, so as they may not occasion any harshness or obscurity. Harmony also requires us generally to avoid in all kinds of verses, words too long and of a difficult pronunciation, or which may have too great a conformity of sound with words already used ; those having the guttural letters should be em- ployed sparingly ; the too frequent meeting of vowels, and that of rough or hissing consonants, such as the s or 7*, &c. should not often recur. In short, no use should be made in poetry, particularly in high poetry, of low and prosaic words ; but taste and discern- ment, supported by deliberate reading, will teach, better than all the rules that can be given, the choice of words that should be made ; for, often, an able poet uses happily a word which seemed proscribed from poetry. 432 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. Article ii. Of the mixture of verses with one another. The mixture of verses, either as to measure or rhyme being generally arbitrary in Spanish poetry, it evidentl}^ mus be extremely various ; we shall therefore limit ourselves to make known the combinations used by the best poets, anc give examples of those which particularly deserve to be known SECTION I. / Of successive rhymes. Parejas or pareados are called the verses of which the rhymes are successive, that is, the 1st of which rhymes with the 2d, the 3d with the 4th, and so on, taking care to vary the rhyme every two verses. The successive rhymes are used in the verses imitated from the French, which are called for this reason versos a lafran- cesa ; and in order to supply the want of masculine and fem- inine rhymes, the verses llanos are caused alternately to be followed by two verses agiidos^ as may be seen in the exam- ple which we have before cited when speaking of this kind of verse, which is now seldom used. Entire pieces of verses r/e redondilla^ and even of Itahan verses may be composed in successive rhyme, by intermixing arbitrarily with hendecasyllables small verses of seven sylla- bles which rhyme with the following hendecasyllable ; but these compositions are rare, unless it be to set them to music, and the successive rhymes are but seldom used except for proverbs, distichs and epitaphs. SECTION II. Of rhymes crossed and intermixed. The Spaniards dve the ^enerick name of coplas to all kinds of assemble jjes or combinations of verses, but this de- nomination is particularly appropriate to what we call stanzas. The Span'sh stavzas are not strictly bound to any pause, and may run into one another ; however, when they consist of more than four verses, one or more pauses are introduced, according as harmony requires it ; and generally the e^ijnmbemmi or running of one stanza into another is carefully avoided. VERSIPICACIOK ESPANOLA. 433 Of stanzas of three verses or Tercets, The tercets are stanzas commonly composed of three verses either hendecasyllables or of redondiUa may or ^ the arrangement of which may take place in several manners. 1st. The first verse may be free, suelto, and the 2d. rhyme with the 3d. 2d. The first verse may rhyme with the 3d. and the 2d. be free. These two kinds of mixtures are used in the villancicos, 3d. Sometimes the 1st verse rhymes with the 2d. and the 3d. is free. 4th. Finally in the pieces of verses composed of tercetos. the 1st. and 3d. verses rhyme together, the 1st. verse of the second terceto rhymes with the 2d. verse of the preceding tercet, and so on to the last terceto which consists of four verses to complete the rhyme. Should there be but one or two successive tercetos of Ital- ian verses, there might be admitted among the hendecasylla- bles a small verse, verso quebrado of seven syllables, which would be the 1st. or 2d. The Satyres, epistles and elegies are composed in hendec- asyllable tercetos ; they are also sometimes used in descrip- tive poems, eclogues and idyls. Hendecasyllahle Tercetos. En aquel prado alii nos reclinamos, Y del Cefiro fresco recogiendo El agradable espirtu (l) respiramos. Las flores d los ojos ofreciendo Diversidad estrana de pintura, Diversamente asi estaban oliendo ; Y en medio aquesta fuente clara y pura, Que como de cristal resplandecia Mostrando abiertamente su hondura, El arena que de oro parecia De blancas pedrezuelas variada, Por do raanaba el agua se buUia. (1) Espirtu for espiritu, (poet, lie.) S7 434 SPANISH VERSIFICATIOK. En derrededor ni sola una pisada De fiera, 6 de pastor, 6 de ganado A' la sazon estaba senalada. Despues que con el agua resfriado Hubimos el calor y juntamente La sed de todo punto mitigado : Ella, que con cuidado diligente A^ conocer mi mal tenia el intento, Y 4 escudrinar el animo doliente : Con nuevo ruego y firme juramento Me conjuro, y rogo que le coniase La causa de mi grave pensamiento.... Garctlaso de la Vega, E'gloga^ 2* 2. Of stanzas of four verses^ or quatrains. The quatrains are stanzas of four verses, the 1st of which rhymes with the 4th. and the 2d. with the 3d., or the 1st of which rhymes with the 3d. and the 2d with the 4th. The verses that enter in the composition of quatrains are commonly verses of redondilla mayor ^ verses of redondilla menor or hendecasyllables. The quatrains in verses of redondilla are called cuartillas or cuartetas and those in hendecasyllable verses cuartetes. In the quatrains in verses oi redondilla menor^ the 1st. and 3d. verses may be free (sueltos.) Though all kinds of stanzas may be composed in verses of redondilla menor ^ nevertheless they are seldom used except in the quatrains^ and it is for this reason that sometimes the name of redondilla menor is given to the quatrains composed with this kind of verse. Cuartillas de redondilla mayor. Deseais, senor Sarmiento, ^ Saber en estos mis anos Sujetos k tantos danos, Como me porto y sustento. Yo OS lo dire en brevedad, Porque la historia es bien breve^ Y el daros gusto se os debe Con toda puntualidad. VERSIFICACION ESPAflOLA. 435 Salido el sol por oriente De rayos acompanado. Me dan un huevo pasado Por aguaj blando y caliente, Con dos tragos del (l) que suelo Llamar yo nectar divino, Y a quien otros llaman vino, Porque nos vino del cielo. Cuando el lumiuoso vase Toca en la meridional, Distando por un igual Del oriente y del ocaso ; Me dan asada y cocida De una gruesa y gentil ave, Con tres veces del suave Licor que alegra la vida. Despues que cayendo viene A^ dar en el mar Hesperio, Desamparando el imperio Que en este h orizonte tiene ; Me suelen dar 4 comer Tostadas en vino mulso, Que el enflaquecido pulso Restituyen 4 su ser. Luego me cierran la puerta, Yo me entrego al dulce sueno ; Dormido soy de otro dueno, No se de mi nueva cierta. Hasta que habiendo sol nuevo, Me cuentan como he dormido, Y asi de nuevo les pido, Que me den nectar y huevo. Ser vieja la casa es esto, Veo que se va cayendo, Voyle puntales poniendo, Porque no caiga tan presto. (1) Del for de «/, (poet He.) 436 SPAmSH VERSIFICATION, Mas todo es vano artificio. Presto me dicen mis males. Que han de faltar los puntales, Y allanarse el edificio. BalTASAR de ALCAZARr 3. Of the stanzas of Jive verses. The stanzas of five verses, called coplas redondillas or quintillasy are commonly composed in verses of redondilla mayor^ they also might however be composed in hendeca- syllable verses. In these stanzas, the verses are intermixed in all manners, provided they should all be upon two rhymes, and that there may never be more than two successively i]pon the saa\e rhyme. 4. Of stanzas of six verses^ or sixains. The stanzas of six verses, called redondillas de seis versos are commonly composed in verses of redondilla mayor ; they might also be composed in hendecasyllable verses. In these stanzas, the verses are intermixed in all manners, provided they should all be upon two rhymes, and that there may never be more than two successively upon the same rhyme* 5. Of the stanzas of seven verses. The stanzas of seven verses, redondillas de siete versos^ are little used ; they are composed of verses of rfdondilla mayor, the 1st. of which rhymes with the 4th. and the 5th.; the 2d. with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th. Stanzas of seven liendecasyllable verses might also be composed. 6. Of the stanzas of eight verses, or octaves. The stanzas of eight verses are commonly composed in hendecasyllable verses, or in verses of redondilla mayor, the rhymes of which are intermixed in different manners. Tst. The 1st. verse may rhyme with the 4th. 5th. and 8th.; the 2d with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th. 2d. The first verse may rhyme with the 3d., the 2d. with the 4th. 6th. and 8th., the 5th. with the 7th, 3d. The rhymes may be crossed. 4th. Finally the rhymes of the six first verses may be crossed, and the two last rhyme tos^ether, which commonly happens in the stanzas of eight hendecasyllable verses. VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA* 437 We call octavas the stanzas of eight hendecasyllable verses, and redondillas de ocho versos the stanzas of eight verses of redondilla. The octaves serve principally in epic and didactic poems, they are also used in descriptive poems, eclogues and idyls. Octavas. I Porque con tanta safia procuramos Ir nuestra sangre y fuerzas apocando, Y envueltos en civiles armas damos Fuerza y derecho al enemigo bando ? £ Porque con tal furor despedazamos Esta union invencible, condenando Nuestra causa aprobada y armas justas Justificando en todo las injustas ? I Que rabia 6 que furor desatinado Habeis contra vosotros concebido. Que asi quereis que el Araucano estado Venga a ser por sus manos destruido, Y en su virtud y fuerzas ahogado Quede con nombre infame* sometido A las estranas leyes y gobierno Y en dura servidumbre e yugo etemo ? Volved sobre vosotros, que sin tiento Correis a toda prisa 4 despenaros, Refrenad esa furia y movimiento Que es la que puede en esto mas danaros : I Sufris al enemigo en vuestro asiento Que quiere como a brutos conquistaros, Y no podeis sufrir aqui impacientes Los consejos y avisos convenientes ?... Alonso de Ercilla. The copla de arte mayor ^ thus called because it was com- posed in verses of twelve syllables or of ar^e mayor ^ was a stanza of eight verses, the 1st. of which commonly rhymed with the 4th. 5th. and 8th., the 2d. with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th, This stanza is no more used at present. Parejasy tercetos, cuartetes, &c. might be made in verses of arte mayor as also in hendecasyllable. 37^ 438 SPANISH VERSIFICATION", 7. Of stanzas of nine verses. The stanzas of nine verses bear the name in Spanish of redondillas mistas^ because they are composed of the reunion of a stanza of four verses and of a stanza of five verses of redondilla mayor. Stanzas of nine verses might also be composed of a stanza of four verses and of a stanza of five hendecasyllable verses. 8. Of the stanzas of ten verses^ or dizains. The d6cimas are stanzas of ten verses, commonly of redondilla mayor ^ the 1st. of which rhymes with the 4th. and 5th.; the 2d. with the 3d., the 6th. with the 7th. and 10th., and the 8th. with the 9th. The dtcima may also be composed of the union of two stanzas of five verses quintillas^ in each of which the mixture of the rhymes may be uniform, but it is better that it should be different. This kind of dtcima is called copla reaL Copla reaL Aqui la envidia y mentira Me tuvieron encerrado. j Dichoso el humilde estada Del sabio que se retira De aqueste mundo malvado^ Y con pobre mesa y casa En el campo deleitoso Con solo Dios se compasa^ Y a solas su vida pasa, Ni enviado, ni envidioso ! Fray Luis de Leon. Remark. The stanzas of more than ten verses are not composed of entire verses only, but of entire verses, versos enterosj mixed with broken verses, versos quebrados. SECTION lllc Of the mixture of entire with broken verses. Commonly the hendecasyllable verses are mixed with the verses of seven syihibles, those of eight syllables whh those of tV>ur, .and those of six syllables with those of thre'e. Some- VERSIFICACION ESPAfiOLA. . 439 times also entire verses of different measure are mixed with broken rerses of different measure. There is nothing determined however in such cases, as to the number of verses of each kind that may be mixed togeth- er. The verses thus mixed sometimes form stanzas, and at others do not form any. When they form stanzas of less than ten verses, the mixture of rhymes is the same as in the stanzas composed only of entire verses. But when they form stanzas of more than ten verses, and when they are not disposed in stanzas, the mixture of rhymes is absolutely arbi- trary ; even unrhymed verses may be admitted among the verses rhymed. It is however proper to remark, 1st. that in mixed verses, whether they form stanzas or not, the corres- ponding rhymes must never be too distant from one another ; 2d. that in the stanzas in mixed verses as in the stanzas in en- tire verses, the mixture adopted for the rhymes in the 1st. stanza must generally be followed in all the other stanzas of the same piece, and that it is the same with the mixture of the verses of different measure ; 3d. that the stanzas in mixed verses do not contain commonly more than twenty verses. The following examples will give an idea of the great va- riety of the mixture of the entire and kroken verses, which is commonly used in odes, light poetry and pieces destined to be set to music. Iba cogiendo flores Y guardando en la falda Mi ninfa para hacer una guirnalda ; Mas primero las toca A los rosados labios de su boca, Y les da de su aliento los olores. Y estaba (por su bien) entre una rosa Una abeja escondida, Su dulce humor hurtando ; Y como en la hermosa Flor de los labios se hallo, atrevida La pico, saco miel, fuese volando. L. Martin. Profecia del Tajo, Folgaba (l^i el rey Rodrigo Con la hermosa Caba en la ribera (1) Folgaba ior Ho l^aba, (obsolete.) 440 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. De Tajo sin testigo ; El pecho saco fuera El rio, y le hablo de esta manera : En mal punto te goces Injusto forzador, que ya el sonido Oyo (1) ya, y las voces, Las armas y el branndo De Marte, de furor y ardor ceiiido. j Ay ! esa tu alegria / j Que llantos acarrea ! y esa hermosa Que vio el sol el mal dia A^ Espana ! Ay ! cuan llorosa, Y al cetro de los Godos cuan costosa ! LlamaSj dolores, guerras, Muertes, asolamientos, fieros males Entre tus brazos cierras, Trabajos inmortales A^ ti y a tus vasallos naturales, A" los que en Constantina Rompen el fertil suelo, 4 los que bafia El Ebro, a la vecina Sansuena, 4 Lusitana, A^ toda la espaciosa y triste Espana. Ya dende (2) Cadiz llama El injuriado conde a la venganza Atento y no a la fama La birbara pujanza En quien para tu dafio hay tardanza. Oye, que al cielo toca Con temeroso son la trompa fiera, Que en A^frica convoca El Moro ^ la bandera, Que al aire desplegada va ligera. La lanza ya blandea El A^rabe cruel, e hiere el viento Llamando ^ la pelea, i numerable cuento De escuadras juntas veo en un momento; •- 111 1 ^ — ■ — — ——————« (1) Oyo for OigOy (obsolete.) (2) Dende for dcsde^ (idem.) f VERSIFICACION ESPAHOLA. 441 Cubre la gente el suelo, Debajo de las velas desparece (l) La mar, la voz a) cielo Confusa y varia crece. El polvo roba el dia, y le oscurece. j Ay ! que ya presurosas Suben las largas naves, j Ay ! que tienden Los brazos vigorosos A^ los remos, y encienden Las mares espumosas por do hienden. El Eolo derecho Hinche la vela en popa, y larga entrada Por el Herculeo estrecho Con la punta acerada El gran padre Neptuno da ^ la armada. J Ay triste ! i Y aun te tiene El mal dulcc regazo ? ^ Ni llamado Al mal que sobreviene No acorres ? ^ ocupado No ves ya el puerto 4 Hercules sagrado ? Acude, corre, vuela Traspasa el alta sierra, ocupa el llano, No perdones la espuela. No des paz 4 la mano, Menea fulminando el hierro insano. J Ay cuanto de fatiga. Ay cuanto de dolor estapresente A' el que viste loriga, Al infante valiente, A^ hombres y caballos juntamente ! Y tu, Betis divino, De sangre agena y tuya amancillado, Daras al mar vecino, j Cuanto yelmo quebrado ! j Cuanto cuerpo de nobles destrozado ! (1) Desparece for desaparecCj (poet, lie.) 442 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. El furibundo Marte Cinco luces las haces desordena Igual a cada parte ; La sesta j Ay ! te condena, O cara patria, ^ birbara cadena. Fray Luis de Leon, Oda. Fonsecaj ya las boras Del invierno aterido, Aunque tarde, se fueron ' Y su vez agradable permitieron Al Cefiro florido. Ya el verano Nos descubre su frente, De rosas y de purpura cenido : Remite el aire el desabrido ceiio, Y el sol libra sus rayos De las nubes oscuras ; Y con luces mas vivas y mas puras, Regalando las nieves, Al blando pie de los parados rios Las prisiones de yelo alegre quita, Y su antiguo correr les solicita... F. de Rioja* i Cuan presto se va el placer, Como despues de acordado. Da dolor ; Como ^ nuestro parecer Cualquiera tiempo pasado, Fue mejor ! Jorge Manrique. section IV. Of blank verses. We have just seen that blank verses, sueltoSy that is, which are not subject to rhyme, are mixed with the rhymed verses; they are likewise mixed, with the assonant verses, as will be seen hereafter ; but they may also be used alone without mixture of any other kind of verse. Concision in thought, force of expression, and above all elegance and harmony in versification resulting from the sym- metrical disposition of long and brief syllables ; this is, what constitutes the beauty of blank verses and gives them a great VERSIPICACION ESPAnOLA. 443 analogy with the Greek and Latin verses : thus the Spaniards without rigorously observing, however, the rhythm of the an- cients, have imitated it in blank verses with considerable success. The hendecasyllable is the verse most used in works in blank verse ; it is called heroic^ not because it is used in preference in the heroic poem and other works of a serious kind ; for, these are composed commonly in octaves or ter- cetos of rhymed verses, but because it imitates best the har- mony of the gieat Greek and Latin verses, and seems there- fore more proper to be used in the translations of the master works of antiquity. In mixing hendecasyllables with broken verses of different measures, almost all the lyrick combinations of the ancients. may be imitated. In the following ode, the cuartptos of which are composed of three hendecasyllable verses and a broken verse of five syllables, the harmony of the sapphick strophe may be easily discovered, which is one of the most beautiful of these combinations. Al Cifiro. Dulce vecino de la verde selva, Huesped eterno del abril florido^ Vital aliento de la madre Venus, Cefiro blando, Si de mis insias el amor supiste, Tu, que las quejas de mi voz Uevaste, Oye, no temas, y a mi ninfa dile, Dile que muero. Filis un tierapo mi dolor sabia, Filis un tiempo mi dolor Uoraba, -Quisome un tiempo ; m£LS ahora temo, Temo sus iras. Asl lor Dioses con amor paterno, Asi los cielos con amor benigno Nieguen al tiempo que feliz volares, Nieve 4 la tierra. Jamas el peso de la nube parda, Cuando amanece en la elevada cumbre, Toque tus hombros, ni su mal granizo Hiera tus alas. Esteban de Villegas. 444 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. SECTION V. Of works in verse. The principal works in verse are ; epic poems, didactic and descriptive ; theatrical pieces, odes, epistles, elegies, ec- logues, idyls and fables. As these different kinds of works are common to the Spanish literature and that of other na- tions, we shall not consider them. It is true that the Span- iards deviating sometimes in their composition, and particu- larly in that of theatrical pieces, from the precepts dictated by good taste, would seem to require some details ; but these details are foreign to a treatise on versification and would exceed its limits. It will be sufficient to remark that the Spanish theatrical pieces are sometimes in prose, and at others in rhymed or unrhymed verses, and that all kinds of stanzas, sonnets, romances, &c. are introduced in the plays ; in short, that all the other works in verse are generally composed of stanzas. As to the kind of stanzas which is proper for every class of works, we have indicated it as far as possible when speaking of the different kinds of stanzas ; the choice of them however being often left to the fancy of the poets, it is the works of those who have excelled in each class that ought to be taken as models. We shall only treat here of the small works in verse which are in some manner peculiar to the Spanish language, or which at least are subject in that language to some particular rules, and we shall pass over those, such as the sonnets in echos, salades, labyrinths, cubic poems, &c. the whole merit of which consisted in a ridiculous difficulty, and which good taste has proscribed long ago. 1. Sonetos. The sonnet, soneto^ occupies yet in Spanish poetry the rank which it formerly occupied in French poetry. The Spaniards have several kinds of sonnets which are ; the simple sonnet, the double sonnet, the crossed sonnet, the sonnet with a tail, and the continued sonnet. The simple sonnet, soneto simple^ is composed of fourteen hendecasyllable verses, the first eight of which named pies are divided in two quatrainSy and the last six form two ter- cets which are called vueltas. The two quatrains are made upon the same rhymes, and in each of them the first verse rhymes with the fourth, and the two intermediary one's VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 445 together. The verses of the two tercets rhyme together upon two or three rhymes, which must not resemble those used in the two quatrains. The double sonnet, soncto doblado, is subject to the same rules as the simple sonnet ; the only difference there is betu een the two consists in this, that, in the double sonnet, broken verses of seven syllables are interposed among hendecasylla- bles, namely ; one or several in each quatrain and one alone in each tercet. Every one of these broken verses having the same rhyme as the entire verse which precedes it, this rhyme is double, and is the reason why this sonnet is named a double sonnet. The crossed sonnet, soneto terciado, is thus called, because the rhymes of the two quatrains are crossed ; in other re- spects it is like the simple sonnet. The sonnet with a tail, soneto con cola, differs from the simple sonnet because there is interposed after the second and fourth verses of each quatrain, and after each tercet, a broken verse called cola. The broken verses thus interposed are of four or five syllables ; those of the quatrains rhyme with each other, and their rhyme must be different from the rhymes of the quatrains ; those of the tercets rhyme also with each oth- er and their rhymes must be different from the rhymes of thq quatrains and tercets The continued sonnet, soneto continuo, is similar as to the quatrains to the simple sonnet or to the crossed sonnet, but the rhymes of the tercets are crossed and the same as those of the quatrains. The simple sonnet is more used than the others, we shall give two of them, the French imitations of which are well known. Un soneto me manda hacer Violante, Que en mi vida me he visto en tal aprieto, Catorce versos dicen que es soneto, Burla burlando van los tres delante. Yo pense que no hallara consonante, Y estoy 4 la mitad de otro cuarteto, Mas si me veo en el primer terceto No hay cosa en los cuartetos que me espante. Por el primer terceto voy entrando, Y aun parece que entre con pie derecho, Pues fin con este verso le voy dando. 38 446 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. Ya estoy en el segundo, y aim sospecho Que estoy los trece versos acabando : Contad si son catorce^ y esta hecho. Lope de Vega. Soberbias torres, altos edificios, Que ya cubristes (l) siete escelsos montes; Y ahora en descubiertos horizontes Apenas de haber sido dais indicios : Griegos liceos, celebres hospicios De Plutarcos, Platones, Xenofontes, Teatro que lidio Rinocerontes, Olimpiasj lustres^ bafios, sacrificios ; ji Que fuerzas deshicieron peregrinas La mayor pompa de la gloria humana, Imperios, triunfos, armas y doctrinas ? j O gran consuelo 4 mi esperanza vana. Que el tiempo que os volvio breves ruinas, No es mucho que acabase mi sotana ! Lope pe Vega. 2. Silvcts, The Spaniards give tbe name ofsilva to a piece of hende- casyllable verses mixed at pleasure with broken verses of se- ven syllables, in which no order is observed for the distribu- tion of the rhymes, and in which some blank verses may even be introduced. There are also silvasin verses of seven syllables. The silva is a composition after the manner of the ode, which is proper for all sorts of subjects. A la Riqaeza, I O mal seguro bien ! j O cuidadosa Riqueza, y como d sombra de alegria. Y de sosiego enganas ! El que vela en tu alcance, y se desvia Del pobre estado, y la quietud dichosa, Ocio y seguridad pretende en vano. Pues tras el luengo (2) errar de agua y montafias, Cuando el metal precioso coja a mano, No ha do ver sin cuidado abrir el dia. (1) Cubristes for cuhrisieis (poet, lie.) (2) Luengo for largo, (poet, lie.) VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 447 No sin causa los dioses te escondieron En las entrafias de la tierra dura : I Mas que hallo diflcil y encubierto La sedienta codicia ? Turbo la paz segura. Con que en la antigua selva florecieron El abeto y el pino, Y trajolos al puerto Y por campos de mar les dio camitio. Abriose el mar, y abriose Altamente la tierra, Y salistes del centro al aire claro, Hija de la avaricia, A^ hacer 4 los hombres cruda guerra. Saliste tu, y perdiose La piedad que no habita en pecho avaro. J A cu^ntos arm 6 el oro de crueza ! j Y 4 cuintos ha dejado En el ultimo trance ! j o dura suerte I Pierde su flor la virginal pureza Por ti y vese manchado Con adulterio el lecho no esperado. Al menos animoso Para que te posea. Das riqueza, ardimiento licencioso, Ninguno hay que se vea Por ti tan abastado y poderoso, Que carezca de miedo. I Que cosa habr4 de males tan cercada, Pues ora pretendida, ora alcanzada, Y aun estando en deseos, Pena ocultan tus ciegos devaneos? Pero cansome en vano, decir puedo. Que si sombras de bien en ti se vieran^ Los inmortales Dioses te tuvieran. F. de Rioja. 3. Romances. They call romance a piece of verse destined to be set to music, composed of a series of quatrains, the 1st. and 3d. verses of which are blank, whilst the 2d> and 4tL rhyme by 8 assonance. Assonance is the greatest difficulty of romances, i 448 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. because it must be the same in all the quatrains. Romances are commonly in verses of redondilln mayor or menor^ and sometimes in hendecasyllable verses, for which reason they are then called romances keroicos, They are also in verses of seven syllables, and one of the verses of each quatrain may be hendecasyllable, this is commonly the fourth ; one or two broken verses of any kind, particularly of five or four syllables may likewise be mixed with the verses of redondilla ; in short, romances may be composed in quatrains of verses esdrvjulos and even of arte mayor^ pure or mixed ; in a word, nothing is more varied than the versification of roman- ces, but it is necessary that the mixture adopted in the first quatrain be followed in all the others. The romances com- monly have no burden^ there are however some romances in which the last or the two last verses of the first quatrain are repeated after the second, and so on after each quatrain, or every other quatrain. The burden sometimes begins only in the middle of the romance and does not always continue till the end, neith^T is it necessary that it should be composed of the last or of the two last verses of the 1st. quatrain, it may be formed of one or two verses which are added. The romance is the favourite kind of poetry of the Span- iards, it is really their national lyrick poetry, it equally ac- commodates itself to the accents of joy and to those of sorrow. They sing in them alternately the exploits of warriors, love, adventures, &c. They call Jacara a romance sang upon a popular air bearing that name. De las Africanas playas Alejado de sus huertas, Mira el forzado hortelano De Espafia las altas tierras. Mira las golosas cabras En las peladas laderas, Que apenas se determina Si son cabras 6 son penas : Tiende laenvidiosa vista Por las abundosas vegas Y comarcanas cabanas. Que casi a la par humean. Miraba por Gibraltar Las heladas rocas yertas Azotadas de las ondas^ ^' ^ VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 449 Y arrancadas de la arena. Mira el estrecho cubierto, Y las hervientes arenas. Que le parece que braman, Y por mil partes resuenan. O sagrado roar, le dice, Haz con mis suspiros treguas ; Perdona si ellos 6 el viento Son causa de tu tormenta. Pasame en esotra playa ; Que si en ella me presentas, Te ofrecere unjblanco toro El mejor de mis dehesas. No quiero que mis deseos Vajan a tierras agenas ; Da vida a un nuevo Leandro, Que en tus raanos se encomienda. Esto diciendo el forzado, En las blandas ondas se echa Con los brazos k remar, Hiende, rompe,rasga y huella. Mas alia ^ la media noche, Cuando los miembros le aquejan, Temeroso de su dano Hablo asi a las ondas : Queridas y amadas ondas ; Pues determinais que muera, Dejadme salir amigas, Que yo os pagare esta deuda. Fuele el viento favorable, Oyo fortuna sus quejas, Y al nacer el rubio sol, Hizo pie sobre la arena. Dio gracias al mar piadosoj Al viento, norte y estrellas, Y con ceremonia humilde Beso y adoro la tierra. The verses of seven syllables disposed in cuartetos of blank and assonant verses as in the romances^ and which for this reason are often called versos de romance are those gen- erally used in anacreontic odes. 38* 450 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. ^ No con mi blanda lira Seran en ayes tristes Lloradas las fortunas De reyes infelices ; Ni el grito del soldado Feroz en crudas lides, O el trueno con que arroja La bala el bronce horrible. Yo tiemblo, y me estremezco; ^ Que el numen no perraite A el (l) labio temeroso Canciones tan subliijies. Muchacho soy. y quiero Decir mas apacibles Querellas, y gozarme Con danzas y convites. En ellos eoronado De rosas y alelies ; Entre risas y versos Menudeo los brindis. En coros las muchachas Se juntan por oirme, Y al punto mis cantares Con nuevo ardor repiten ; Pues Baco y el de Venus Me dieron, que felice Celebre en dulces himnos Sus glorias y festines. J. Melendez Valdes*, Quiero cantar de Cadmo, Quiero cantar de Atridas, ! Mas ay ! que de amor solo Solo canta mi lira. Renuevo el instrumento. Las cuerdas mudo a prisa^ Pero si yo de Alcides, Ella de amor suspira. Pues, heroes valientes, Quedaos desde este dia ; Porque ya de amor solo, Solo canta mi lira. E. DE ViLLEGAs, Imitacion de Anacreonte. (1) Ji ef for al, (poet, lie.) T VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 451 Vuelve, mi duke lira, Vuelve a tu estilo humilde Y deja a los Homeros, Cantar a los Aqiiiles. Canta tu la cabana Con tonos pastoriles. Y los epicos metros A Virgilio no eavidies. No esperes en la corte Gozar dias felices, Y vuelvete a la aldea, Que tu presencia pide. Ya te aguardan zagales Que con flores se visten Y adornan sus cabezas Y cuellos juveniles. Ya te esperan pastores Que deseosos viven De escuchar tus canciones Que con gusto repiten. Y para que sus voces A los ecos admiren, Y repitan tus versos Los melodiosos cisnes ; Vuelve ; mi dulce lira, Vuelve, a tu tono humilde ; Y deja a los Homeros Cantar a los Aquiles. J. Cadaljd. 4. Endeehas. The endeehas are elegies or funeral songs in praise of the dead, they are a kind of romance commonly in verses of sev- en syllables. The endeehas^ in which the last verse of each quatrain is a hendecasy liable, are called endeehas reales ; there are also rhymed endeclias, 5. Seguidillas, The seguidilla is composed of a series of quatrains in crossed verses of seven and five syllables. The seguidilla has a great resemblance with the romance; the only differ- ence existing, is that the couplets of the seguidilla being com- monly detached, the assonance may change at every couplet. 452 SPANISH VERSIFICATION* There is a kihd of seguidilla called chamherga^ from the name of the air upon which it is sung, each quatrain of which is followed by six verses alternately of three and seven syllables, rhyming by assonance two by two, that is, every verse of three syllables rhymes with the verse of seven which immediately follows it. 6. Letrillas* The letrilla is a kind of lyric poetry of a simple and graceful style. It is commonly composed of a series of quatrains in verses of six or eight syllables. The letrilla has a great resemblance with the romance ; but it is shorter. The 1st. and the 3d. verse of each quatrain are blank or rhymed, the 2d. and the 4th. are assonants ; all the verses may nevertheless be also rhymed. It is requisite, as in romances^ that the assonance be the same in all the quatrains. There are some letrillas which have a burden^ others have none, sometimes the burden forms a part of the quatrain, sometimes it is added. No alma primavera Bella y apacible O el dulce Favonio Que ^mbares respire ; No rosada Aurora Tras la noche triste, Ni el pincel que en flores Bello se matice; No nube que Febo Su pabellon pinte, O alamo que abrace Dos emulas vides ; No fuente que perlas A cien canos fie, Ni lirio entre rosas, Clavel en jazmines ; Al romper el dia Son tan apacibles Como el pastorcillo Que en mi pecho vive. Yglesias. ¥ VERSIFICACION ESPAflOLA. 453 De este modo ponderaba Ud inocente pastor A la ninfa a quien amaba La eficacia de su amor. iVes cuantas floras al prado La primavera presto? Plies raira. duefio adorado, Mas veces te quiero yo. ; Ves cuanta arena dorada Tajo en sus aguas llevo ? Pues raira, Filis amada, Mas veces te quiero } o. ; Ves al salir de la aurora Cuanta avecilla canto r Pues mira, hermosa pastora^ Mas veces te quiero yo. ; Ves la nieve derretida Cuanto arro}njielo formo ? Pues mira, bien de mi vida, Mas veces te quiero yo. ; Ves cuanta abeja industriosa De esa colmena salio ? Pues mira, ingrata y hermosa, Mas veces te quiero yo, ; Ves cuantas gi'acias la mano De las deidades te dio ! Pues mira, duefio tirano, Mas veces te quiero yo. J. Cadalso. The lira is a small piece of hendecasyllable verses mixed with broken verses, composed to be sung with the accompa- niment of a guitar or lyre. The liras are composed of five or six verses. In the Urafi of five verses, the four first are broken verses of seven syllables and the fifth is a hendeca- svllable ; the 1st. verse rhymes witli the 3d., the 2d. 4th. and 5th. rhyme together. In the liras of six verses, the odd verses are broken verses of seven syllables and the others are hendeo ^syllables ; the rhymes of the four first verses are crossed, and the two last verses rhyme together. There are 454 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. also liras of six verses the 1st. 2d. 4th. and 5th. of which are broken verses of seven syllables, the 3d. a broken verse of two syllables and the 6th a hendecasyllablcj then the 1st. verse rhymes with the 4th., the !2d. with the 3d. and the 5th. with the 6th. 8. Canciones. The cancion is a kind of lyric poetry, which is composed of several estanzas or estancias, in hendecasyllable verses mixed with broken verses of seven syllables. The cancion has not commonly more than fiom ten to twelve stanzas, and is often terminated by a shorter stanza called remate or represa. The mixture of rhymes as well ps that of entire and broken verses is arbitrary, it varies even sometimes from /)ne stanza to the other, but in general the mixture adopted in the 1st. stanza is followed in all the others. The mixture of the verses and rhymes is not the same in the remate as in the other stanzas, it is likewise arbitrary. O libertad preciosa, No comparada al oro, Ni al bien mayor de la espaciosa tierra, Mas rica y mas gozosa Que el precioso tesoro Que el mar del Sur entre su ndcar cierra. Con armas, sangre y guerra. Con las vidas y famas, Conquistado en el mundo, ^ Paz dulce, amor profundo, Que el mal apartas y ^ tu bieii nos llamas, En ti solo se anida Oro, tesoro, paz, bien, gloria y vida. Cuando de las humanas ^ Tinieblas vi del cielo La luz, principio de mis dulces dias, Aquellas tres hermanas, Que nuestro humano velo Tejiendo llevan por inciertas vias, Las duras penas mias Trocdron en la gloria, Que en libertad poseo Con siempre igual deseo ; Donde verd por mi dichosa historia, / T VERSIFICACION ESPAHOLA. 455 Quien mas leyere en ella, Que es dulce libertad lo menos deila.(l) Yo piles J sen or, exento De esta niontafia y prado, Gozo la gloria y libertad que tengo ; Soberbio pensamiento Jamas ha derribado La vida humilde y pobre que entretengo ; Cuando ^ las manos vengo Con el muchacho ciego, Haciendo rostro embisto, Venzo, triunfo y resisto La flecha, el arco, la ponzona, el fuegOj Y con libre aldedrlo Lloro el ageno mal, y espanto el mio. Cuando la aurora bafia ^on helado rocio, De aljofar celestial el monte y prado, Salgo de mi cabana Riberas deste (2) rio A dar el nuevo pasto a mi ganado : Y cuando el sol dorado Muestra sus fuerzas graves, Al suefio el pecho inclino Debajo un sauce 6 pino, Oyendo el son de las parleras aves, O ya gozando el aura, Donde el perdido aliento se restaura. Cuando la noche oscura Con su estrellado manto El claro dia en su tiniebla encierra, Y suena en la espesura El tenebroso canto De los nocturnos hijos de la tierra. Al pie de aquesta sierra Con rusticas palabras Mi ganadillo cuento, Y el corazon contento Del gobierno de ovejas y de cabras. La temerosa cuenta Del cuidadoso rey me representa. I 11 (1) Delia for de ella, (poet, lie.) fj' (2) Deste for de este, (poet. He.) 456 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. Aqui la verde pera Con la manzana hermosa De gualda y roja sangre matizada, Y de color de cera. La cermena olorosa Tengo, y la endrina de cole morada : Aqui de la enramada Parra que el olmo enlaza Melosas ubas cojo, Y en cantidad recojo, / Al tiempo que las ram as desenlaza El caluroso estio, ]Membrillos que coronan este rio. No me da descontento El habito costoso Que de lascivo el pecho noble infama : Es mi dulce sustento Del campo generoso Estas silvestres frutas que derrama : Mi regalada cama De blandas pieles y hojas, Que dlgun rey la envidiara, Y de ti, fuente clara. Que bullendo el arena y agua arrojas, Estos cristales puros, Sustentos pobres, pero bien seguros. Estese el cortesano . Procurando a su gusto La blanda cama y el mejor sustento, Bese la ingrata mano Del poderoso injusto, Formando torres de esperanza al viento ; Viva y muera sediento Por el honroso oficio, Y goce yo del suelo Al aire, al sol, al hielo Ocupado en mi rustico ejercicio, Que mas vale pobreza En paz, que en guerra misera riqueza. Ni temo al poderoso, Ni al rico lisongeo, Ni soy camaleon del que gobierna ; Ni me tiene envidioso VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 457 La ambicion y deseo De agena gloria, ni de fama eterna : Carne sabrosa y tierna, Vino aromatizado. Pan bianco de aquel dia, En prado, en fuente fria, Halla un pastor con h^mbre fatigado, Que el grande y el pequefio Somos iguales lo que dura el suefio. Lope de VegAi 9. Balata. The ballad, balaia, is a sraall piece of verse which is now but little in use, its name comes from this, that it was origin- ally sung while dancing. The ballad is composed in pure hendecasyllable verses, or mixed with broken verses of seven syllables, and it is divided in four parts, the 1st. of which is called represa (repetition,) because it is wholly or partly re- peated at the end of the ballad ; the 2d, primera mudanza (1st. change,) the 3d. segunda mudanza (2d. change) be- cause the tone of the represa is changed in it, and the 4th. vuelta (return,) because they return to the 1st. tone. The represa and vuelta are commonly composed of three or four verses, and each mudanza almost always has one verse less. C Tras su manada Elisio lamentando Represa, } Mil veces este verso repetia ^ J Ay ! quien se viera cual se vio algun dia I l.a Mu' 3 Vime yo tan sefior de mi fortuna, danza. ^ Tan libre de dolor, tan prosperado, 2,a Mu- k Que no temi jamas mudanza alguna danza, (_ De aquel primero y venturoso estado : C Ya toda mi ventura se ha trocado ; Vuelta, < No soy ni ya sere quien ser solia : ^ j Ay ! quien se viera cual se vio algun dia ! 10. Villancicos, The villancico (country lay) has a great relation to the ballad, and is likewise made for singing. It begins with a cabeza^ which is repeated as the burden of the ballad. The cabeza, is a kind of introduction containing a sentence of two, three or four verses. It is followed by a stanza of six verses 39 458 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. called pi^5, which is its comment. The two first piis form the 1st. mudanza^ the two following the 2d. muclanza^ and the two last the vuelta, after which the last or the two last of the cabeza are repeated. The villancicos are composed in ver- ses of pure redondilla mayor or menor^ or mixed with broken verses. The two following villancicos will serve as exam- ples for the mixture of the verses and rhymes. Gaheza. l.a Mudanza 2.a Mudanza. Vuelta, Hepeticion. En lo prosper© y adverse Lo que solo satisface, / Es pensar que Dios lo hace. 5 Q"^ ^^^ suba 6 baje el mundo, ' ^ O que me ponga fortuna ^ Sobre el cuerno de la luna, ^ O me hunda hasta el profundo : 5 La razon en que me fundo \ Para que todo lo abrace, Es saber que Dios lo hace. Cabeza Cuando el corazon se abrasa. Echa luego Por las ventanas de casa Vivo fuego. No se puede reprimir El amor Aunque mas quiera encubrir Su fervor, Que como es nifio y ciego, Da sin tasa Por las ventanas de casa Vivo fuego. Suspires y insias estranas Van saliendo, Cuando se estan las entrafias Derritiendo, Que el alma hecha una brasa Envia luego Por las ventanas de casa Vivo fuego. A TABLE OF CONTENTS. Common Spanish Abbreviations - - 9 Introduction ----- 13 CHAPTER I. OF PRONUNCIATION AND ORTHOGRAPHY. Oficords considered as Sounds - - 14 Of the proiumciaiion of VoweU - - 15 Of Dipththongs - - - - iQ Of Triphthongs - - - - ib. Of the pronunciation of Consonants - - 17 Observations upon Orthography - - 19 Syllahical Table - - - - 20 Of the Accent - - - . - 21 Of Punctuation - - - - 24 CHAPTER II. OF WORDS. Of words considered as signs of our thoughts - 24 CHAPTER IlL OF THE ARTICLE. Of the Article " - - - 25 Declension of the Articles " - - 26 Of the use of the Articles - - - 27 CHAPTER IV. OF NOUNS. Of Nouns - - - ^ . 20 Of the Substantive " " - - ib Of Genders - - . . . oq Of Numbers " " - - - ib Of the formation of the plural of Nouns - 31 Declension of Nouns " - - - ib. Declension of a neuter Noun - - - 33 Of proper Nouns " - - - 34 460 ' CONTENTS. Declension of the *irticle un, una, a ov an - 35 General observations upon the genders - - ^6 Of the gender of Nouns considered in their terminations 37 Substantives of both genders - - - ib. Of Nouns Adjective - - - - 38 Formation of the feminine of Nouns Adjective - ib. Collocation arid agreement of the Adjective tvith the Sub- stantive ----- ib. Of Nouns diminutive and augmentative - - 39 Degrees of comparison in Adjectives - ^ - 40 Of comparatives in relation to Adjectives - ib. Comparative of superiority - - - 41 Of comparatives in relation to Substantives j Verbs and Adverbs ----- ib. Comparative of inferiority - - - ib. Comparative of equality - - . 42 Of Superlatives - - - - 43 Observations upon the Comparatives and Superlatives 44 Of numeral Adjectives and Substantives of number 45 Adjectives which^ joined to a Substantive ^ lose one or more letters - - - - - 48 CHAPTER V. OF PRONOUNS. Declension of personal Pronouns - - 51 Pronoun reflective - - - - 54 Table of Pronouns as regimen or objective - 54 Construction of Pronouns as regimen or objective 55 Of Pronouns possessive - - - 56 Declension of Pronouns possessive - . 57 Declension of Pronouns possessive relative - 59 Of Pronouns demonstrative - - - 61 Of Pronouns relative - - - - 62 Of Pronouns interrogative - * - 64 Of Pronouns indefinite - - - ib. Observations upon the indefinite Pronouns - &'o CHAPTER VI. OF VERBS. Of Conjugations ^ - - - 68 Of Modes - . . . - ib. Of Tenses - - - - ^? CONTENTS. 461 Of the Tenses of the Infinitive - - - 70 Verbs which have two Farticiples past - - 71 Of the Tenses of the Indicative - - 73 Of the Future Tenses - . - - 75 Rules for using the Future Conjunctive - 7^ Of the Conditional - - - - 77 Rules for using the Conditional Tenses - - ib. Use of the hnperatice - - - - 80 Use of the Subjunctive - - - - ib. Rules for using the Tenses of the Subjunctive mode ib. Of the Persons and Numbers of Verbs - - 81 Conjugations - - - - - 82 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Haber - ib. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Vei^b Tener - 86 Conjugation (f the Auxiliary Verbs Ser a??cfEstar 91 Rules for usitig Ser and Estar - - - 95 •/3 general Scheme of the termination of Regular Verbs 96 Paradigms of the three Conjugations 97 First Conjugation in Ar - - - ib. Second Conjugation in Er - - - 101 Third Conjugation in Ir - - - 105 Paradigm of Passive Verbs - - - 110 Paradigm of Neuter Verbs - - - 114 Paradigm of Refective and Reciprocal Verbs - 117 Paradigm of Impersonal Verbs - - - 119 List and Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs arranged in alphabetical order - - - 121 Important observations - - - - ib. Agreement of verbs loith their Subject - - 151 Of the Regimen of Verbs - - - 153 Of the Verb as a RegimeJi - - - ib. Of the Noun Substantive as P^egimen of the Verb 154 Of Pronouns as Regimen of Verbs - - ib. Observations upon Verbs - - - 155 Of the agreement of the Participle past with the Sub- ject arid wzih its Regimen - - - 156 CHAPTER VII. OF ADVERBS. Of Adverbs - - - - . 1 57 Observations upon jamasj nunca, no, maSj menos. inuj 159 39* 462 CONTENTS. CHAPTER VIIL OF PREPOSITIONS. Of Prepositions - - - - 160 Observations upon para a7id por - - ib. V repositions which govern the Genitive - 162 Prepositions which govern the Dative - - ib. Table of Prepositions published bi/ the Royal Acadernij 163 CHAPTER IX. OP CONJUNCTIONS. Of Conjunctions - - - . 188 Of the Conjunctions that govern the Subjunctive 194 CHAPTER X. OF INTERJECTIONS. Of Interjections - - - - 194 Names of Countries, Islands, Capes and Seas - 195 Names of Cities^ Mountains and Rivers - 198 Christian Names most used in S2Jain - - 199 SPANISH EXERCISES. Upon the rules of the Grammar and their application^ with remarks and observations. Exercise I. Upon the Articles - - 203 „ H. ilpon the Articles - - 204 J, III. Upon the gender and nuwher of Nouns 205 ,, IV. Upon the coUocatio7i of Adjectives and their agreement with the Substantives - 207 Exercise V. Upon the partitive Article - 208 5j VI. Upon Diminutive and Augmentative Nouns and Degrees of Comparison - - 209 Exercise VII. Upon the preceding Rides - 210 5, VIII. Continuation of the degrees of Com- parison - - - - - 211 Exercise IX. Upon observations on the Compara- tives and Superlatives - - - 212 Exercise X. Upon the Numeral Adjectives - 214 CONTEXTS. 465 Exercise XI. Continitation of the same subject 215 J, XII. Upon the Pronouns personal and pos- sessivej and on the Auxiliary Verbs ser and estar, to he; Imber and tenei J to have ; In-finitive and Indica- tive present - - - - - 21. r Exercise XTII. Upon the Imperfect and Preterites 219 „ XIV. Upon the Pluperfect and Futures of the Indicative - - - - 220 Exercise XV. Upon the Futures Conjunctive and Conditionals simple - - - - 221 Exercise XVI. Upon the Conditionals past - 222 „ XVII. Upon the Imperative ; Subjunctive Present and Imperfect . - - 224 Exercise XVIII. Upon the Preterite and Pluperfect 225 „ XIX. Upon the Regular Verbs - 226 jj XX. Upon the same subject - 227 ,, XXI. Upon the same subject - 229 ^, XXII. Upon the same subject - 230 ,, XXIII. Upon the preceding Rules - 232 „ XXIV. Upon the preceding Rules - 233 „ XXV. Upon the preceding Rules - 235 55 XXVI. Upon the preceding Rules - 236 55 XXVJI. Upon the preceding Pufles ' 237 55 XXVIII. Up)on the preceding Rules 238 55 XXIX. Upon Pronouns - - 240 55 XXX. Upon the preceding Rules - 241 y, XXXI. Upoji the preceding Rules - 242 y, XXXTI. Upon the Pronouns Demonstrative, Relative, Intei^ogative and Indefinite - 243 Exercise XXXIII. Upo7i the preceding Rules 244 5, XXXIV. Upon the preceding Pronouns 245 55 XXXV. Upon the preceding Rules 246 Observations upon the use of\m.j vms.5 usted5 ustedes, ijou, 8fc. - ' ' - ' 248 Exercise XXXVI. Upon the Neuter, Reflective, Re- ciprocal and Impersonal Verbs - - 250 Exercise XXXVII. Upon the preceding, and the Ir- regular Verbs - - - - 251 Exercise XXXVIII. Upon the preceding Rules 252 55 XXXIX. Upon the agreement of Verbs with their subject, ^c, - - - 253 Exercise XL. Upon the agreement of the Participle past icith the subject, ^"c, - - - 255 464 CONTENTS. Exercise XLI. Upon the Adverbs and Prepositions 256 j^ XLII. Upon the Conjunctions - 257 ,, XLIII. Upon the preceding a7idInteijections 259 „ XLIV. Upon the preceding Rules - 260 „ XLV. U2^on the preceding Rules - 261 VOCABULARY. The parts of the human body The interior parts of the human body The five senses Ages Qualities of the body Defects in the human body Virtues and viceSy good and bad qualities of men Of eating and drinking Of clothes Of idem for women Beasts Creatures that creep on the earth Amphibious creatures Insects Birds Farts of a bird Fishes Farts of a fish Trees Shrubs Fruits Corn and its parts Roots, plants and herbs Flowers Colours Farts of a kingdom Fai'ts of a city VOCABULARIO. Las partes del cuerpo bu- rn ano ^ 264 Partes interiores del cuerpo humano 265 Los cinco sentidos 266 Edades ib. Calidades del cuerpo ib. Defectos del cuerpo hu- mano ib. Virtudes y vicios, buenas y malas calidades de los hombres ib. Del comer y beber 268 De los vestidos 270 De idem para mugeres 271 Bestias 272 Animales que se arrastran 274 Animales anfibios ib. Sabandijas 275 Aves ib. Partes de una Ave 276 Peces 277 Partes de un pez ib. A^rboles ib. Matas 278 Frutas ib. Trigos y sus partes 279 Raices, plantas e yerbas 280 Flores ^82 Colores ib. Partes de un reino ib. Partes de una ciudad 283 CONTENTS. 465 Of the inhabitants of cities Of a house and all things belonging to it Of country affairs Of the church and things belonging to it Things relating to war De los moradores de una ciudad 283 De una casa y todo lo per- teneciente a ella 285 De las eosas del campo 288 De la Iglesia y cosas per- tenecientes a ella 290 Cosas pertenecientes a la guerra 291 Commercial terms and Voces mercantiles y frases 294 phrases Vessels and navigation y navega- Tlie year and its part s, 8fc. The months The days of the tceek The holidays of the year Winds Table of the current money in Spain Embarcaciones cion El ano y sus partes, (^'C. Los meses Los dias de la semana Dias de fiesta del ano Vientos Tabla de las monedas Espana de 299 301 ib. ib. ib. 302 ib. FAMILIAR PHRASES. FRASES, FAMILLVRES. I. Acerca de pedir algo II. Espresiones tiernas III. Acerra de agradecer, cumplimentar y mostrar amistad IV. Acerca de afirmar^ ne- gar, consentir^ ^c, V. Acerca de consuliar 6 considerar VI. Del comer y del beber VII. Del iry venir^ mo- verse^ S(c, VIII. Del hablar^ decir, obrar, ^x. IX. Dd oir^ escuchar, ^'c. X. Del entender y com- prender XI. Acerca de preguntar About asking any tbing 303 Expressions of kindness 304 Of thanking, compliment- ing and showing kind- ness ib. Of affirming, denying, con- senting, &c. 306 Of consulting or consid- ering 307 Of eating and drinking ib. Of going, coming, mov- ing, &;c. 308 Of speaking, saying, act- ing. &c. ^ 309 Of hearing, listening, &:c. 310 Of understanding and com- prehendinsf 311 About asking a question ib* 466 CONTENTS. XII. Acerca de saber LIII. Del cone y acordarse XIII. Del conocer^ olvidar XIV. De la edad, de la vida, de la mnerte^ 8{c. XV. De una aya y su Se- nor it a XVI. Del paseo XVII. Deltiempo XVIII. Delahora XIX. De las esiaciones del ano XX. De la ida a la escuela XXI. En la escuela Of knowing or having a knowledge of things Of knowing or being ac- quainted with persons^ forgetting and remem- bering Of age, life, death, &€. 312 ib. 313 Of a governess and her young lady Of walking Of the weather Of the time of day Of the seasons of the year 324 314 318 321 323 Of going to school 326 In the school ib. Para hahlar Ingles FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. Didlogo I. Acerca de saludar t in- formalise de la salud de alguno II. Acerca del hahlar Es- panol III IV. Del hacer una por la manana V. Del almorzar VI. A'ntes de la comida VII. Comiendo VIII. Para comprar libros IX. Del aquilar un aloja- miento X. Del informarse de al- guno XI. Del pariir XII. De noticias XIII. Entre dos amigos XIV. Del escribir mm carta DIA LOGOS FAMILIARES. Of saluting and inquiring after any one's health 328 Of speaking Spanish 331 To speak English 336 visiia Of making a morning visit 3^3^ Of breakfasting 339 Before dinner 340 At dinner 341 To buy books 345 Of hiring a lodging 347 Of inquiring after one 350 Of departing 353 Of news 354 Between two friends 357 Of writing a letter 358 CONTENTS. 46r Didlogo XV. Del trocar XVI. De los juegos en ge- neral; y primero de el de los dados XVII. Deljugar al agt- drez XVIII. Deljugar a la pe- lota XIX. De las diversiones del campo^ particular- mente de la caza y de la pesca XX. Del ir a la comedia XXI. Del vestirse XXII. Del hablar a un mozo de cahallos XXIII. De ir d un viage XXIV. En una posada XXV. Para hablar con los empleados en unaAduana XXVI. Para una persona estraviada en una ciudad XXVII. Un militar vence- dor^ Sfc. Of exchanging 360 Of gaming in general ; and first of that of dice 36l . Of playing at chess 363 Of playing at tennis 365 Of country sports, especial- ly of hunting and fishing S66 Of going to the play 568 Of dressing oneself 370 Of speaking to a groom or hostler 372 Of going a journey 373 In an inn 374 To speak with the officers in a Custom-house 377 For a person who has lost his way in a city 37B A victorious military man, &c. 379 Fdbidas 381 Epitome de la historia de Espana - - 385 Chistes - - - - - 387 Correspondencia Mercantil - - - 389 Docnmentos Mercantiles - - - 392 Cartas criticaSy por Cadalso - - - 400 Cartas Familiares, por Tsla . - - 405 Rejlexiones Morales, por Feijoo, Montengon, &c. 415 Refranes Espanoles - - - - 420 Versificacwn Espanola - - - 421 468 ERRATA* ERRATA. Page, Ltne» Errors. Corrections. 6Q 13 adplicacion, aplicacion. 67 6 amaddodj amado. 97 6 irds, irias. 125 30 anduviere, anduviere^ irr. 136 27 pret. def. irguio, irguio, irr. 137 9 yerren, yerran. 160 8,9 Itganiementej elegantemente 163 37 pesado, pasado. 204 note las, la. 207 8 pason, digniOj pasion, digpdO;. 214 21 decredato, decretado. 215 note 2. J. Y. 217 9 it* te« 254 note 1. xr. LI. 338 24 polido. podido. 341 last line la debajoj la de debajo. 346 23 tamnoj tamano. 384 7 dordf dara. 400 13 Qnedo, Quedo. 415 9 us, un. 419 33 pue, que. 441 17 dulcc. dulce. FINIS. Deacidified using the Bookkeeper procesi Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 PreservationTechnologiei A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATlOt 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 003 213 089 6